Nec lt280 380 SM

MODEL LT380/LT280
LT380G/LT280G
LT380J/LT280J (Japanese model)
LT380+/LT375+/LT280+ (Chinese model)
Portable Projector
SERVICE MANUAL
PART No.3N9911123
Better Service
Better Reputation
Better Profit
Copyright
1. Contens
2. Safety precautions
3. Users manual
4. Troubleshooting
5. Method of adjustments
6. Serviceman mode
7. Cleaning
8.Circuit description
9.Method of disassembly
10. Disassembly
11.Assembly diagram
12. Packaging
13. Replacement part list
14. Connection diagrams
15. Block diagrams
16. Schematic diagrams
Back cover
SAFETY CAUTION:
Before servicing this chassis, it is important that the service
technician read and follow the Safety Precautions and Product
Safety Notice in this Service Manual.
WARNING:
SHOCK HAZARD - Use an isolation transformer when servicing.
(1) Copyright (C) 2006, NEC Viewtechnology, Ltd.

All Rights Reserved
This document contains confidential information.
Unauthorized copying, duplication, distribution, or
republication is strictly prohibited.
(2) The contents of this manual are subject to change
without prior notice.
CONTENTS
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ..................................................................................................................................2-1
USERS MANUAL ..............................................................................................................................................1
Quick Start Guide
Important Information
Network Setup Guide
TROUBLESHOOTING .......................................................................................................................................4-1
Operation Checks .........................................................................................................................................4-1
POWER block ............................................................................................................................................... 4-2
I/O block sync block, and ADC block ............................................................................................................ 4-4
LCD driver block ...........................................................................................................................................4-9
Error log ........................................................................................................................................................4-10
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS .......................................................................................................................... 5-1
PC control software .......................................................................................................................................5-1
Adjustment of the optical axis ....................................................................................................................... 5-25
Adjustment of the polarizing plate .................................................................................................................5-33
SERVICEMAN MODE .......................................................................................................................................6-1
CLEANING ........................................................................................................................................................7-1
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION ................................................................................................................................... 8-1
I/O terminals ..................................................................................................................................................8-1
Input signals ..................................................................................................................................................8-2
Circuit operation ............................................................................................................................................8-3
METHOD OF DISASSEMBLY ...........................................................................................................................9-1
DISASSEMBLY .................................................................................................................................................10-1
Main body .....................................................................................................................................................10-1
Engine sassy .................................................................................................................................................10-2
ASSEMBLY .....................................................................................................................................................11-1
PACKAGING ...................................................................................................................................................12-1
REPLACMENT PART LIST .............................................................................................................................13-1
LT380 ..........................................................................................................................................................13-1
LT280 ..........................................................................................................................................................13-5
CONNECTION DIAGRAMS ............................................................................................................................14-1
BLOCK DIAGRAMS ........................................................................................................................................15-1
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS ...............................................................................................................................16-1
1-1
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
CAUTION:
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE

COVER. NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING
TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
This symbol warns the user that uninsulated voltage within the unit may
have sufficient magnitude to cause electric shock. Therefore, it is dangerous
to make any kind of contact with any part inside of this unit.
This symbol alerts the user that important literature concerning the
operation and maintenance of this unit has been included.
Therefore, it should be read carefully in order to avoid any problems.
ATTENTION
RISQUE D'ELECTROCUTION
NE PAS OUVRIR
MISE EN GARDE:
AFIN DE REDUIRE LES RISQUES D' ELECTROCUTION, NE PAS

DEPOSER LE COUVERCLE, IL N'Y A AUCUNE PIECE
UTILISABLE A L'INTERIEUR DE CET APPAREIL. NE CONFIER
LES TRAVAUX D'ENTRETIEN QU'A UN PERSONNEL QUALIFIE.
Ce symbole a pour but de prvenir I' utilisateur de la prsence d'
une tension dangereuse, non isole se trouvant l' intrieur de l'
appareil. Elle est d' une intensit suffisante pour constituer un risque
d' lectrocution. Eviter le contact avec les pices l' intrieur de
cet appareil.
Ce symbole a pour but de prvenir l' utilisateur de la prsence d'
importantes instructions concernant l' entretien et le fonctionnement
de cet appareil. Par consquent, elles doivent tre lues
attentivement afin d' viter des problmes.
WARNING
HEATSINK MAY BE ENERGIZED.
TEST BEFORE TOUCHING.
Heat sink located on the power board, is electrified.
mark is putted on the primary heat sink.
Pay attention to this area.
2-1
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
5. LAMP
Be very careful of the lamp because it generates high
heat while it is used at high voltage. When replacing
the bulb, make sure it is cool enough.
During servicing carefully observe the following.

1. OBSERVE ALL PRECAUTIONS
Items and locations that require special care during servicing, such as the cabinet, chassis, and parts are labelled
with individual safety instructions. Carefully comply with
these instructions and all precautions in the instruction
manual.
6. LENS
Do not look into the lens during projection. This important
to avoid damage to the eyes.
7. SERVICING
At the time of repair or inspection services, use an earth
band (wrist band), without fail.
2. BE CAREFUL OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

The chassis carries an AC voltage. If you touch the
chassis while it is still alive, you will get a severe shock.
If you think the chassis is alive, use an isolating
transformer or gloves, or pull out the plug before
replacing any parts.
8. RUN A COMPLETE SAFETY CHECK AT THE

COMPLETION OF SERVICING
After completion of servicing, confirm that all screws,
parts, and wiring, removed or disconnected for servicing,
have been returned to their original positions. Also
examine if the serviced sections and peripheral areas
have suffered from any deterioration as a result of
servicing. In addition, check insulation between external
metallic parts and blades of wall-outlet plugs. This
examination is indispensable in confirming complete
establishment of safety.
3. USE SPECIFIED PARTS

The components have been chosen for minimum
flammability and for specific levels of resistance value
and withstand voltage. Replacement parts must match
these original specifications. Parts whose specifications
are particularly vital to safe use and maintenance of the
set are marked on the circuit diagrams and parts list.
Substitution of these parts can be dangerous for you
and the customer, so use only specified parts.
(Insulation check)
Pull out a plug from a wall outlet to disconnect the
connection cable. Then turn on the POWER switch.
Use a 500V megger (Note 2) and confirm that the
insulation resistance is 1M or more between each
terminal of the plug and exposed external metal (Note
1). If the measured value is below the specified level,
then it is necessary to inspect and fix the set.
4. REMOUNT ALL PARTS AND RECONNECT ALL

WIRES AS ORIGINALLY INSTALLED
For safety, insulating tape and tubes are used
throughout, but some lift-off parts on the printed wiring
board require special attention.
All wires are positioned away from high-temperature and
high-voltage parts, and, if removed for servicing, they
must be retuned precisely to their original positions.
(Note 1)
Exposed external metal....RGB input terminals, control
terminals, etc.
(Note 2)
If a 500V megger is not available for an unavoidable
reason, then use a circuit tester or the like for inspection.
2-2
Portable Projector
LT380/LT280
Users Manual
NEC Viewtechnology, Ltd. 2005

First edition October 2005
IBM is a trademark or registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.

Macintosh, Mac OS X and PowerBook are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other
countries.
Windows, Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows XP or Windows 2000 are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation.
Other product and company names mentioned in this user's manual may be the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders.
NOTES
(1) The contents of this guide may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission.
(2) The contents of this guide are subject to change without notice.
(3) Great care has been taken in the preparation of this manual; however, should you notice any questionable points,
errors or omissions, please contact us.
(4) Notwithstanding article (3), NEC will not be responsible for any claims on loss of profit or other matters deemed to
result from using the Projector.
Safety Cautions
Precautions
Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC LT380/LT280 projector and keep the manual handy for future
reference. Your serial number is located on the bottom of your projector. Record it here:
CAUTION
To turn off main power, be sure to remove the plug from power outlet.
The power outlet socket should be installed as near to the equipment as possible, and should be easily
accessible.
CAUTION
TO PREVENT SHOCK, DO NOT OPEN THE CABINET.
THERE ARE HIGH-VOLTAGE COMPONENTS INSIDE.
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
This symbol warns the user that uninsulated voltage within the unit may be sufficient to cause electrical
shock. Therefore, it is dangerous to make any kind of contact with any part inside of the unit.
This symbol alerts the user that important information concerning the operation and maintenance of this
unit has been provided.
The information should be read carefully to avoid problems.
;;
;
;
;
;;;;
WARNING: TO PREVENT FIRE OR SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
DO NOT USE THIS UNITS PLUG WITH AN EXTENSION CORD OR IN AN OUTLET UNLESS ALL THE PRONGS
CAN BE FULLY INSERTED.
DOC Compliance Notice (for Canada only)
This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.
Acoustic Noise Information Ordinance-3. GSGV (for Germany only):

The sound pressure level is less than 70 dB (A) according to ISO 3744 or ISO 7779.
This label is on the side of the remote control.
This mark is on the top of the remote control.
CAUTION
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result
in hazardous radiation exposure.
CAUTION
Do not look into the laser pointer while it is on and do not point the laser beam at a person. Serious injury
could result.
CAUTION
Avoid displaying stationary images for a prolonged period of time.
Doing so can result in these images being temporarily sustained on the surface of the LCD panel.
If this should happen, continue to use your projector. The static background from previous images will
disappear.
WARNING TO CALIFORNIA RESIDENTS:

Handling the cables supplied with this product, will expose you to lead, a chemical known to the State of California
to cause birth defects or other reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling.
Disposing of your used product
EU-wide legislation as implemented in each Member State requires that used electrical and electronic
products carrying the mark (left) must be disposed of separately from normal household waste. This
includes projectors and their electrical accessories or lamps. When you dispose of such products, please
follow the guidance of your local authority and/or ask the shop where you purchased the product.
After collecting the used products, they are reused and recycled in a proper way. This effort will help us
reduce the wastes as well as the negative impact such as mercury contained in a lamp to the human
health and the environment at the minimum level.
The mark on the electrical and electronic products only applies to the current European Union Member
States.
ii
RF Interference (for USA only)
WARNING
The Federal Communications Commission does not allow any modifications or changes to the unit EXCEPT those
specified by NEC Solutions (America), Inc. in this manual. Failure to comply with this government regulation could
void your right to operate this equipment. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable
protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular
installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by
turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the
following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio / TV technician for help.
For UK only: In UK, a BS approved power cable with moulded plug has a Black (five Amps) fuse installed for use with
this equipment. If a power cable is not supplied with this equipment please contact your supplier.
Important Safeguards
These safety instructions are to ensure the long life of your projector and to prevent fire and shock. Please read them
carefully and heed all warnings.
Installation
Do not place the projector in the following conditions:
- on an unstable cart, stand, or table.
- near water, baths or damp rooms.
- in direct sunlight, near heaters or heat radiating appliances.
- in a dusty, smoky or steamy environment.
- on a sheet of paper or cloth, rugs or carpets.
If you wish to have the projector installed on the ceiling:
- Do not attempt to install the projector yourself.
- The projector must be installed by qualified technicians in order to ensure proper operation and reduce the
risk of bodily injury.
- In addition, the ceiling must be strong enough to support the projector and the installation must be in accordance with any local building codes.
- Please consult your dealer for more information.
Place the projector in a horizontal position

The tilt angle of the projector should not exceed 10 degrees, nor should the projector be installed in any way other than
the desktop and ceiling mount, otherwise lamp life could decrease dramatically.
10
iii
Fire and Shock Precautions
Ensure that there is sufficient ventilation and that vents are unobstructed to prevent the build-up of heat inside your
projector. Allow at least 4 inches (10cm) of space between your projector and a wall.
Do not try to touch the ventilation outlet on the left front (when seen from the front) as it can become heated while
the projector is turned on.
Prevent foreign objects such as paper clips and bits of paper from falling into your projector. Do not attempt to
retrieve any objects that might fall into your projector. Do not insert any metal objects such as a wire or screwdriver
into your project. If something should fall into your projector, disconnect it immediately and have the object removed
by a qualified service personnel.
Do not place any objects on top of the projector.
Do not touch the power plug during a thunderstorm. Doing so can cause electrical shock or fire.
The projector is designed to operate on a power supply of 100-240V AC 50/60 Hz. Ensure that your power supply
fits this requirement before attempting to use your projector.
Do not look into the lens while the projector is on. Serious damage to your eyes could result.
Keep any items such as magnifying glass out of the light path of the projector. The light being projected from the lens
is extensive, therefore any kind of abnormal objects that can redirect light coming out of the lens, can cause unpredictable outcome such as fire or injury to the eyes.
Do not cover the lens with the black lens cap or equivalent while the projector is on. Doing so can lead to melting of
the cap and possibly burning your hands due to the heat emitted from the light output.
Do not place any objects, which are easily affected by heat, in front of the projector lens or a projector exhaust vent.
Doing so could lead to the object melting or getting your hands burned from the heat that is emitted from the light
output and exhaust.
Handle the power cable carefully. A damaged or frayed power cable can cause electric shock or fire.
- Do not use any power cables than the supplied one.
- Do not bend or tug the power cable excessively.
- Do not place the power cable under the projector, or any heavy object.
- Do not cover the power cable with other soft materials such as rugs.
- Do not heat the power cable
- Do not handle the power plug with wet hands.
Turn off the projector, unplug the power cable and have the object removed by a qualified NEC service personnel
under the following conditions:
- When the power cable or plug is damaged or frayed.
- If liquid has been spilled into the projector, or if it has been exposed to rain or water.
- If the projector does not operate normally when you follow the instructions described in this user's manual.
- If the projector has been dropped or the cabinet has been damaged.
- If the projector exhibits a distinct change in performance, indicating a need for service.
- If the projector is not to be used for an extended period of time.
Disconnect the power cable and any other cables before carrying the projector
Turn off the projector and unplug the power cable before cleaning the cabinet or replacing the lamp.
When using a LAN cable:
For safety, do not connect to the connector for peripheral device wiring that might have excessive voltage.
CAUTION
Do no use the tilt-foot for purposes other than originally intended. Misuses such as using the tilt foot to carry or
hang (from the wall or ceiling) the projector can cause damage to the projector.
Do not send the projector in the soft case by parcel delivery service or cargo shipment. The projector inside
the soft case could be damaged.
Select [High] in Fan mode if you continue to use the projector for consecutive days. (From the menu, select
[Setup - Options] [Fan Mode] [High].)
Do not unplug the power cable from the wall outlet under any one of the following circumstances.
Doing so can cause damage to the projector:
- While the projector's lamp lights.
- While the cooling fans are running. The cooling fans continue to work for 30 seconds after the projector is
turned off.
- While the PC CARD Access Indicator lights. Doing so can damage your PC memory card.
iv
Remote Control Precautions
Handle the remote control carefully.
If the remote control gets wet, wipe it dry immediately.
Avoid excessive heat and humidity.
Do not heat, take apart, or throw batteries into fire.
If you will not be using the remote control for a long time, remove the batteries.
Ensure that you have the batteries' polarity (+/) aligned correctly.
Do not use new and old batteries together, or use different types of batteries together.
Dispose of used batteries according to your local regulations.
Lamp Replacement
To replace the lamp, follow all instructions provided on page 104.
Be sure to replace the lamp when the message [The lamp has reached the end of its usable life. Please
replace the lamp.] appears. If you continue to use the lamp after the lamp has reached the end of its usable
life, the lamp bulb may shatter, and pieces of glass may be scattered in the lamp case. Do not touch them as the
pieces of glass may cause injury.
If this happens, contact your dealer for lamp replacement.
A Lamp Characteristic
The projector has a high-pressure mercury lamp as a light source.
A lamp has a characteristic that its brightness gradually decreases with age. Also repeatedly turning the lamp on
and off will increase the possibility of its lower brightness.
CAUTION:
When removing the lamp from a ceiling-mounted projector, make sure that no one is under the projector. Glass
fragments could fall if the lamp has been burned out.
Table of Contents
Important Information .......................................................................................... i
1. Introduction ......................................................................................................... 1
What's in the Box? ........................................................................................................ 1
Introduction to the Projector ......................................................................................... 2
Congratulations on Your Purchase of the Projector ................................................ 2
Features youll enjoy ............................................................................................... 2
About this user's manual ......................................................................................... 3
Part Names of the Projector ......................................................................................... 4
Front/Top ................................................................................................................. 4
Carrying the Projector ............................................................................................. 4
Rear ........................................................................................................................ 5
Bottom..................................................................................................................... 5
Top Features ........................................................................................................... 6
Terminal Panel Features ......................................................................................... 7
Part Names of the Remote Control .............................................................................. 8
Battery Installation .................................................................................................. 9
Operating Range for Wireless Remote Control ...................................................... 9
Remote Control Precautions ................................................................................... 9
2. Installation and Connections .................................................................. 10

Setting Up the Screen and the Projector .................................................................... 10
Selecting a Location .............................................................................................. 10
Throw Distance and Screen Size .......................................................................... 11
Making Connections ................................................................................................... 13
Connecting Your PC or Macintosh Computer ....................................................... 13
To connect SCART output (RGB) ......................................................................... 15
Connecting an External Monitor ............................................................................ 16
Connecting Your DVD Player with Component Output ......................................... 17
Connecting Your VCR or Laser Disc Player .......................................................... 18
Connecting to a Network ....................................................................................... 19
Inserting and Removing a PC Card ...................................................................... 21
PC Card Type ....................................................................................................... 22
Connecting the Supplied Power Cable ................................................................. 23
3. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation) ............................................. 24

Turning on the Projector ............................................................................................. 24
Note on Startup screen (Menu Language Select screen) ..................................... 25
Selecting a Source ..................................................................................................... 26
Selecting the computer or video source................................................................ 26
Adjusting the Picture Size and Position ...................................................................... 27
Adjust the Tilt Foot ................................................................................................ 27
Zoom ..................................................................................................................... 28
Focus .................................................................................................................... 28
vi
Table of Contents
Correcting Keystone Distortion ................................................................................... 29
Auto Keystone Correction ..................................................................................... 29
Manual Keystone Correction ................................................................................. 29
Optimizing an RGB Image Automatically .................................................................... 31
Adjusting the Image Using Auto Adjust ................................................................. 31
Adjusting Volume Up & Down ..................................................................................... 31
Using the Laser Pointer .............................................................................................. 32
Setting the function switch .................................................................................... 32
Turning off the Projector ............................................................................................. 33
After Use ..................................................................................................................... 33
4. Convenient Features .................................................................................... 34

Turning Off the Image and Sound .............................................................................. 34
Freezing a Picture ...................................................................................................... 34
Enlarging and Moving a Picture .................................................................................. 34
Changing Lamp Mode ................................................................................................ 34
Getting Integrated Help .............................................................................................. 35
Using a USB Mouse ................................................................................................... 35
Using Remote Mouse Receiver .................................................................................. 36
Correcting Horizontal and Vertical Keystone Distortion (Cornerstone) ....................... 38
Making Freehand Drawings on a Projected Image (ChalkBoard) .............................. 41
Preventing Unauthorized Use of the Projector ........................................................... 42
Using a USB Memory Device ..................................................................................... 47
Operation Using an HTTP Browser ............................................................................ 48
Using the Projector to Operate a Computer Connected on a Network
(Desktop Control Utility 1.0) .................................................................................. 51
5. Using the Viewer ............................................................................................ 56

Making the Most out of the Viewer Function .............................................................. 56
Operating the Viewer Function from the Projector (playback) .................................... 57
Projecting slides (Viewer) ..................................................................................... 57
Viewer Window Elements ..................................................................................... 58
Setting Option for Viewer ...................................................................................... 59
Exiting Viewer ....................................................................................................... 60
Viewing Digital Images .......................................................................................... 60
Changing Background Logo ....................................................................................... 61
6. Using On-Screen Menu ............................................................................... 62

Using the Menus ......................................................................................................... 62
Menu tree ................................................................................................................... 63
Menu Elements ........................................................................................................... 65
Menu Descriptions & Functions [Source] ................................................................... 66
Computer 1 and 2 ................................................................................................. 66
Computer 3 (LT380 only) ...................................................................................... 66
Component ........................................................................................................... 66
vii
Table of Contents
Video ..................................................................................................................... 66
S-Video ................................................................................................................. 66
Viewer ................................................................................................................... 66
LAN ....................................................................................................................... 66
[Entry List] ............................................................................................................. 67
Menu Descriptions & Functions [Adjust] ..................................................................... 69
[Picture] ................................................................................................................. 69
[Image Options] ..................................................................................................... 72
[Video] ................................................................................................................... 75
[Sound] .................................................................................................................. 76
Menu Descriptions & Functions [Setup] ..................................................................... 77
[Basic] ................................................................................................................... 77
[Menu] ................................................................................................................... 79
[Security] ............................................................................................................... 79
[Installation] ........................................................................................................... 84
[Options] ................................................................................................................ 94
[Tools] .................................................................................................................... 96
Menu Descriptions & Functions [Information] ............................................................. 97
[Usage Time] ......................................................................................................... 97
[Source Page1] ..................................................................................................... 98
[Source Page2] ..................................................................................................... 98
[LAN Built-in] ......................................................................................................... 99
[LAN PC Card] ...................................................................................................... 99
[LAN Wireless] .................................................................................................... 100
[Version] .............................................................................................................. 100
Menu Descriptions & Functions [Reset] ................................................................... 101
Returning to Factory Default ............................................................................... 101
7. Maintenance ................................................................................................... 102

Cleaning or Replacing the Filter ............................................................................... 102
Cleaning the Cabinet and the Lens .......................................................................... 103
Replacing the Lamp .................................................................................................. 104
8. Appendix ............................................................................................................ 107

Troubleshooting ........................................................................................................ 107
Specifications ........................................................................................................... 110
Cabinet Dimensions ................................................................................................. 112
Pin Assignments of D-Sub COMPUTER 1/2 Input Connector .................................. 114
Compatible Input Signal List ..................................................................................... 115
PC Control Codes and Cable Connection ................................................................ 116
Using Software Keyboard ......................................................................................... 117
Troubleshooting Check List ...................................................................................... 118
TravelCare Guide ..................................................................................................... 120
viii
1. Introduction
What's in the Box?
PO
BY
CT
LE
SE
3D
RE
RM
FO
TO
AU
JU
AD
ST
CE
UR
SO
ND
TA
/S
ON
PC
RD
CA
P
M
LA US
AT
ST WER
Make sure your box contains everything listed. If any pieces are missing, contact your dealer.
Please save the original box and packing materials if you ever need to ship your Projector.
Projector
Soft case
(24BS7561)
Lens cap
(24F41091)
ER
W
PO FF
O
VID
EO
M
CO
TE
2
ER
W
PO ON
EO
NT
NE
PO
M
CO
ID
PU
S-V
VIE
ER
LA
S
EL
EC
T
L-CL
ASPE
VOLU
CT
MA
PICT
PIC
-MUT
UR
GN
LASE
ICK
MO
USE
FREE
ZE
LAMP
ME
MO
DE
IFY
UP
AUTO
R-CL
ICK
ADJ.
PAGE
E
3D
E
HELP
DOWN
REFO
RM
Remote control
(7N900691)
Batteries (AA x 2)
Remote mouse receiver

(7N900721)
Power cable
(7N080220) US
(7N080007) EU
VGA signal cable

(7N520054)
CD-ROM
Users manual and User Supportware 3
Security sticker
For North America only

Registration card
Limited warranty
PC card lock (24F41391)

Screw x 1 (24V00281)
For Europe only

Guarantee policy
1. Introduction
Introduction to the Projector

This section introduces you to the LT380/LT280 projector and describes key features and controls.
Congratulations on Your Purchase of the Projector

The LT380/LT280 is a sophisticated XGA projector that produces an enhanced display. With the LT380/LT280 you will
be able to project images up to 300 (measured diagonally). Enjoy crisp and sharp large screen display from your PC,
workstation or Macintosh computer, DVD player, VCR, satellite hookup, HDTV source, ) and images from your digital
camera PC Card, compact flash memory or USB storage device. The LT380/LT280 provides for enhanced security
options to help deter projector theft and provides for full projector control through the PC control port (mini D-Sub 9
Pin) and LAN support. With input and output flexibility, long lamp life and a full function remote, the LT380/LT280 lets
you enjoy larger than life viewing from a compact and easy to setup and use projector.
Features youll enjoy :
Quick start & quick cool down

15 seconds after turning on the power, the projector is ready to display PC or video images.
Powering down; The fans stop 30 seconds after turning off the power from the remote control or cabinet control
panel. The projector can be put away immediately after the projector is powered down.
Automatic vertical keystone correction for fast and easy application setup.
3D Reform enhanced image technology for increased projector placement versatility that provides for horizontal, vertical and diagonal keystone correction.
Built-in Wall Color Correction presets provide for adaptive color correction when projecting onto non-white screen
material (or a wall).
USB memory or PC card interfaces provide for computer-free presentations.
Enhanced smart security settings for password protection, cabinet control panel lock, menu lock and PC card
protection key to help prevent unauthorized access, adjustments and theft deterrence.
High resolution display - up to UXGA compatible, XGA native resolution.
Variable audio out control of external amplified speakers via the projector remote.
Extensive user adjustable picture and color management settings.
Display 16:9 or 4:3 aspect ratio sources and fill the screen.
HDTV (1080i, 720p) and SDTV (480p/576p, 480i/576i) compatibility.
Digital photo viewer to display larger than life images from your digital cameras PC card, compact flash card or
USB storage device.
Integrated RJ-45 connector for wired networking capability.
Wireless networking capable.

Present from anywhere in the room when using as a wireless LAN projector, no physical signal cable connection
to a PC is required.
* The NEC optional wireless LAN card is required (NWL-100* See page 86).
Supplied User Supportware 3 CD-ROM containing five software utilities allowing you to make the most of your
NEC projector.
The supplied wireless remote control and remote mouse receiver allows you to operate your PC mouse from
across the room. The remote mouse receiver supports most PCs with USB interface.
Easy set up, use and operation.
Eco-mode lamp technology for increased lamp life, reduced energy consumption and overall total cost of ownership savings.
Built-in laser pointer on the supplied remote control allows you to draw your audience's attention in a presentation.
1. Introduction
Free downloadable Software Geometric Correction Tool 3.0.

Corrects the geometry of an image projected onto a cylindrical, spherical or corner screen via serial connection.
For additional information visit:
US : http://www.necvisualsystems.com
Europe : http://www.neceurope.com/
Global : http://www.nec-pj.com/
About this user's manual

The fastest way to get started is to take your time and do everything right the first time. Take a few minutes now to
review the user's manual. This may save you time later on. At the beginning of each section of the manual you'll find an
overview. If the section doesn't apply, you can skip it.
1. Introduction
Part Names of the Projector

Front/Top
Zoom Lever
( page 28)
PO
D
R
CA
P
M S
LA U
AT
ST WER
BY
D
N
/S
TA
PC
Ventilation (inlet)
T
EC
EL
S
3D
EF
AU
TO
AD
JU
ST
SO
CE
Focus Ring
( page 28)
Controls
( page 6)
Remote Sensor
( page 9)
Filter
Adjustable Tilt Foot
( page 27)
Built-in Security Slot (

Ventilation (inlet)
Carrying Handle
Adjustable Tilt Foot Lever

( page 27)
Lens
Lens Cap
)*

( page 27)
This security slot supports the MicroSaver Security System. MicroSaver is a registered trademark of Kensington
Microware Inc. The logo is trademarked and owned by Kensington Microware Inc.
Carrying the Projector

Always carry your projector by the handle.
Ensure that the power cable and any other cables connecting to video sources are disconnected before moving the
projector.
When moving the projector or when it is not in use, cover the lens with the lens cap.
NOTE: To stand the projector on its end, do so by holding the cabinet, not by holding the carrying handle.
Doing so can cause damage to the carrying handle.
1. Introduction
Rear
PC Card Eject Button
PC Card Slot
SELE
CT
3D
RE
FO
RM
AU
TO
AD
JU
ST
SO
UR
CE
D
N
TA
/S
N
O
BY
PO
Monaural Speaker (1W)
PC
CA
US
RD
CO
MP
ON
EN
T IN
Y
S-V
IDE
O IN
LA
VID Cb/Pb
EO
IN
PC
LAM CARD
P
S
TU
AU
DIO
Cr/
Pr
L/M AUDIO
ON
O
IN
IN
CO
MP
UT
ER
CO
MP
UT
ER
Threaded screw hole for

PC card lock
STA
WE
AU
DIO
3 IN
Ventilation (outlet)
Heated air is exhausted from
here.
1 IN
OU
T
MO
NIT
OR
OU
T
CO
MP
UT
ER
PC
CO
NT
2 IN
RO
Terminal Panel
( page 7)
Remote Sensor
( page 9)
Main Power Switch

When you plug the supplied power cable into an active
wall outlet and turn on the Main Power switch, the
POWER indicator turns orange and the projector is in
standby mode.
( page 24)
AC Input
Connect the supplied power cable's two-pin plug here, and
plug the other end into an active wall outlet.
( page 23)
Bottom
Lamp cover
( page 104)

( page 27)

( page 27)

( page 27)
1. Introduction
Top Features
10
1 45
SELECT
PC CARD
LAMP
STATUS
3D REFORM
11
AUTO ADJUST
12
ON/STAND BY
POWER
32
7. AUTO ADJUST Button ( page 31)
1. POWER Button (ON / STAND BY) ( page 24, 33)
NOTE: To turn on the projector, press and hold this button

for a minimum of two seconds. To turn off the projector,
press this button twice.
2. POWER Indicator (
SOURCE
8. 3D REFORM Button ( page 29, 38)

9. MENU Button
10. SELECT (+) () / Volume Buttons
) ( page 24, 33, 107)
3. STATUS Indicator ( page 107)
11. ENTER Button
4. LAMP Indicator ( page 104, 107)
12. EXIT Button
5. PC CARD Access Indicator ( page 22)

6. SOURCE Button
1. Introduction
Terminal Panel Features
15
14
13
USB
12
3 (LT380 only)
LAN
COMPUTER 3 IN
PC CARD
COMPONENT IN
S-VIDEO IN
Cb/Pb
COMPUTER 1 IN
AUDIO OUT
MONITOR OUT
COMPUTER 2 IN
Cr/Pr
VIDEO IN
AUDIO IN
L/MONO
AUDIO IN
10
PC CONTROL
11
The actual appearance of the terminal panel may differ slightly from that shown in the drawing, but this does not affect
the projector's performance.
1. COMPUTER 1 IN/Component Connector (Mini DSub 15 Pin) ( page 13, 15, 16)
11. PC CONTROL Port (Mini D-Sub 9 Pin) ( page 116,

117)
2. COMPUTER 2 IN/Component Connector (Mini DSub 15 Pin) ( page 13, 16)
Use this port to connect your PC or control system to

control your projector via a serial cable. This enables
you to control the projector using serial communication protocol. A commercially available RS232C cross
cable is required to use this port. You can also control
the projector by using PC Control Utility 3.0 contained
on the supplied User Supportware 3 CD-ROM. To do
so you must first have PC Control Utility 3.0 installed
on your PC. If you are writing your own program, typical PC control codes are on page 116.
3. COMPUTER 3 IN Connector (DVI-D 24 Pin) (HDCP

compatible) ( page 14) (Not available on LT280)
4. AUDIO IN (Stereo Mini Jack) ( page 13, 14, 16)
5. MONITOR OUT Connector (Mini D-Sub 15 Pin) (
page 16)
6. AUDIO OUT (Stereo Mini Jack) ( page 16)
12. LAN Port (RJ-45) ( page 19, 48)
7. COMPONENT IN (Y, Cb/Pb, Cr/Pr) Connectors

(RCA) ( page 17)
13. USB Port (Type A) ( page 35, 47)

14. PC CARD Eject Button ( page 22)
8. S-VIDEO IN Connector (Mini DIN 4 Pin) ( page

18)
15. PC CARD Slot ( page 21)
9. VIDEO IN Connector (RCA) ( page 18)

10. AUDIO L/MONO, R (RCA) ( page 17, 18)
1. Introduction
Part Names of the Remote Control

S
EL
EC
4. LED
Flashes when any button is pressed.
LAN
5. POWER ON Button ( page 24)

NOTE: To turn on the projector, press and hold the POWER
ON button for a minimum of two seconds.
VIE
WE
R
NT
ONE
S-V
IDE
O
COM
P
VID
EO
PO
W
ON ER
COM
PUT
ER
PO
W
OFF ER
6. POWER OFF Button ( page 33)

NOTE: To turn off the projector, press the POWER OFF button twice.
2
1. Infrared Transmitter
7. COMPUTER 1 Button ( page 26)
2. Laser Pointer

(Not available on LT280)
CAUTION:
* Do not look into the laser pointer while it is on.
* Do not point the laser beam at a person.
10. VIDEO Button ( page 26)

11. S-VIDEO Button ( page 26)
3. Remote jack
(Not available on this model)
12. COMPONENT Button ( page 26)

13.VIEWER Button ( page 26)
14. LAN Button ( page 26)
7
6
10
11
12
15
16
17
POWER
OFF
POWER
ON
COMPUTER
1
VIDEO
VIEWER
LAN
COMPONENT
S-VIDEO
ME N U
16. SELECT Button

17. ENTER Button
18. EXIT Button
19. LASER Button ( page 32)
20. MOUSE R-CLICK Button ( page 37)
21. MOUSE L-CLICK Button ( page 37)
SELECT
EN
TE
EX
L-CLICK
IT
MOUSE
ASPECT LAMP MODE AUTO ADJ.

VOLUME
22. FREEZE Button ( page 34)
18
23. ASPECT Button ( page 74)
19
24. VOLUME +/ Buttons ( page 31)
20
28
29
25. PICTURE Button ( page 69, 71)
30
28. LAMP MODE Button ( page 34)
R-CLICK
FREEZE
MAGNIFY
PAGE
26. PIC-MUTE Button ( page 34)

27. MAGNIFY +/ Buttons ( page 34)
UP
24
DOWN
25
26
15. MENU Button
LASER
21
22
23
4
5
8
13
14
PICTURE
PIC-MUTE
29. AUTO ADJ. Button ( page 31)
3D REFORM
HELP
31
32
30. PAGE UP/DOWN Buttons ( page 37)

31. 3D REFORM Button ( page 29, 38)
32. HELP Button ( page 35)
27
1. Introduction
Battery Installation
1 Press the catch and remove
2 Install new ones (AA). Ensure
3 Slip the cover back over the bat-
that you have the batteries' polarity (+/) aligned correctly.
teries until it snaps into place.

NOTE: Do not mix different types of
batteries or new and old batteries.
the battery cover.
2
1
1
Operating Range for Wireless Remote Control

Remote sensor on projector cabinet
7m/22 feet
7m/22 feet
30
30
Remote control
30
30
The infrared signal operates by line-of-sight up to a distance of about 22 feet/7 m and within a 60-degree angle of
the remote sensor on the projector cabinet.
The projector will not respond if there are objects between the remote control and the sensor, or if strong light falls
on the sensor.
Weak batteries will also prevent the remote control from properly operating the projector.

2. Installation and Connections

This section describes how to set up your projector and how to connect PCs, video and audio sources.
Your projector is simple to set up and use.
But before you get started, you must first:
z Set up a screen and the projector.
SELE
x Connect your computer or video equipment to the projector. See pages 13 22.
CT
Y
Cb/Pb
AC
c Connect the supplied power cable. See

page 23.
IN
3
NOTE: Ensure that the power cable and any other
cables are disconnected before moving the projector. When moving the projector or when it is
not in use, cover the lens with the lens cap.
To the wall outlet.
Setting Up the Screen and the Projector

The further your projector is from the screen or wall, the larger the image. The minimum size the image can be is
approximately 21 inches (0.5 m) measured diagonally when the projector is roughly 28 inches (0.7 m) from the wall or
screen. The largest the image can be is 300 inches (7.6 m) when the projector is about 390 inches (10 m) from the wall
or screen. Use the drawing below as a guide.
Selecting a Location
Screen size (Unit: cm/inch)
609.6 (W) X 457.2 (H) / 240 (W) X 180 (H)
30
0"
Screen size
487.7 (W) X 365.8 (H) / 192 (W) X 144 (H)
24
0"
406.4 (W) X 304.8 (H) / 160 (W) X 120 (H)
20
0"
365.8 (W) X 274.3 (H) / 144 (W) X 108 (H)
18
0"
304.8 (W) X 228.6 (H) / 120 (W) X 90 (H)
15
0"
243.8 (W) X 182.9 (H) / 96 (W) X 72 (H)
12
203.2 (W) X 152.4 (H) / 80 (W) X 60 (H)

162.6 (W) X 122.0 (H) / 64 (W) X 48 (H)
"
60
93
.7
"
1.
0
31 .8/
.5
1.
51 3/
.2
9/
7
2. 4.
6/ 8
10
3. 2.
3/ 4
12
9
4. .9
0/
15
5. 7.5
0/
19
6
6. .9
0/
23
6. 6.2
6/
25
D
is
9.
ta
8
nc
8.
e
0/
31
5.
/3
0
25 "
"
10
.0
81.3 (W) X 61.0 (H) / 32 (W) X 24 (H)
Lens center
0"
80
121.9 (W) X 91.4 (H) / 48 (W) X 36 (H)
51.0 (W) X 38.1 (H) / 20 (W) X 15 (H)
0"
10
Unit: m/inch
TIP:
The screen sizes above are intermediate values between tele (minimum display area) and wide (maximum display area). Image size
can be adjusted with the zoom adjustment up to a maximum of 10%.
To avoid premature lamp failure, do not tilt the front of the projector up or down by more than 10 from level.
10

Throw Distance and Screen Size
The following shows the proper relative positions of the projector and screen. Refer to the table to determine the
position of installation.
Screen center
2.54/64.5mm
Projector bottom
B
D
Lens center
Screen bottom
Distance Chart
B=
C=
D=
=
Vertical distance between lens center and screen center

Throw distance
Vertical distance between lens center and screen bottom (top of screen for ceiling application)
Throw angle
NOTE: Distances may vary +/-5%.
LT380
Diagonal
inch
21
25
30
40
60
72
80
84
90
100
120
150
180
200
210
240
270
300
Screen Size
Width
inch
17
20
24
32
48
58
64
67
72
80
96
120
144
160
168
192
216
240
B
Height
inch
13
15
18
24
36
43
48
50
54
60
72
90
108
120
126
144
162
180
inch
5
5
6
9
13
16
17
18
19
22
26
32
39
43
45
52
58
65
C
Wide Tele
inch
28
27 33
33 41
45 55
69 84
83 102
93 113
98 119
105 128
117 142
141 171
176 214
212 257
236 286
248 301
284 344
320 387
356 431
D
inch
-2
-2
-3
-3
-5
-6
-7
-7
-8
-8
-10
-13
-15
-17
-18
-20
-23
-25
Wide Tele
degree
9.2
11.2 9.2
11.1 9.0
10.8 8.9
10.6 8.7
10.5 8.7
10.5 8.7
10.5 8.7
10.5 8.6
10.4 8.6
10.4 8.6
10.4 8.6
10.4 8.6
10.3 8.6
10.3 8.6
10.3 8.6
10.3 8.5
10.3 8.5
Screen Size
Diagonal
Width
mm
inch
mm
427
533
21
508
635
25
762
610
30
1016
813
40
1524
60
1219
1463
1829
72
1626
2032
80
2134
1707
84
2286
1829
90
2540
2032
100
3048
120
2438
3048
3810
150
3658
4572
180
5080
4064
200
5334
4267
210
6096
4877
240
6858
5486
270
6096
7620
300
Height
mm
320
381
457
610
914
1097
1219
1280
1372
1524
1829
2286
2743
3048
3200
3658
4115
4572
Wide Tele
degree
10.0
12.1 10.0
11.9 9.8
11.8 9.8
11.7 9.6
11.6 9.6
11.6 9.6
11.6 9.6
11.6 9.6
11.6 9.6
11.5 9.6
11.5 9.5
11.5 9.5
11.5 9.5
11.5 9.5
11.5 9.5
11.5 9.5
11.5 9.5
Screen Size
Diagonal
Width
mm
inch
mm
427
533
21
635
508
25
762
610
30
1016
813
40
1524
60
1219
1463
1829
72
1626
2032
80
2134
1707
84
2286
1829
90
2540
2032
100
3048
120
2438
3048
3810
150
3658
4572
180
5080
4064
200
5334
4267
210
6096
4877
240
6858
5486
270
6096
7620
300
Height
mm
320
381
457
610
914
1097
1219
1280
1372
1524
1829
2286
2743
3048
3200
3658
4115
4572
B
mm
115
137
164
219
329
394
438
460
493
548
657
821
986
1095
1150
1314
1479
1643
C
Wide Tele
mm
710
690 850
840 1040
1150 1400
1750 2140
2120 2580
2360 2870
2480 3020
2660 3240
2970 3600
3570 4340
4480 5440
5390 6540
6000 7270
6300 7640
7210 8740
8120 9840
9030 10940
D
mm
-45
-54
-64
-86
-129
-154
-171
-180
-193
-214
-257
-322
-386
-429
-450
-514
-579
-643
Wide Tele
degree
9.2
11.2 9.2
11.1 9.0
10.8 8.9
10.6 8.7
10.5 8.7
10.5 8.7
10.5 8.7
10.5 8.6
10.4 8.6
10.4 8.6
10.4 8.6
10.4 8.6
10.3 8.6
10.3 8.6
10.3 8.6
10.3 8.5
10.3 8.5
LT280
Diagonal
inch
21
25
30
40
60
72
80
84
90
100
120
150
180
200
210
240
270
300
Screen Size
Width
inch
17
20
24
32
48
58
64
67
72
80
96
120
144
160
168
192
216
240
B
Height
inch
13
15
18
24
36
43
48
50
54
60
72
90
108
120
126
144
162
180
inch
5
6
7
10
14
17
19
20
21
24
29
36
43
48
50
57
64
72
C
Wide Tele
inch

28
28
34
34
41
46
56
69
84
83 102
93 113
98 119
105 127
117 141
141 170
176 213
211 256
235 285
247 299
283 342
318 385
354 428
D
inch
-1
-2
-2
-2
-4
-4
-5
-5
-6
-6
-7
-9
-11
-12
-13
-15
-17
-18
11
B
mm
127
152
182
243
364
437
485
509
546
606
728
909
1091
1213
1273
1455
1637
1819
C
Wide Tele
mm
720
710 860
860 1050
1160 1410
1760 2140
2120 2580
2360 2870
2480 3010
2660 3230
2960 3590
3570 4320
4470 5410
5370 6510
5970 7230
6270 7600
7180 8690
8080 9780
8980 10870
D
mm
-33
-39
-47
-62
-93
-112
-125
-131
-140
-156
-187
-234
-280
-311
-327
-374
-420
-467
Wide Tele
degree
10.0
12.1 10.0
11.9 9.8
11.8 9.8
11.7 9.6
11.6 9.6
11.6 9.6
11.6 9.6
11.6 9.6
11.6 9.6
11.5 9.6
11.5 9.5
11.5 9.5
11.5 9.5
11.5 9.5
11.5 9.5
11.5 9.5
11.5 9.5

projector so heat can dissipate. Do not cover the vents
on the side or the front of the projector.
WARNING
* Installing your projector on the ceiling must be done
by a qualified technician. Contact your NEC dealer for
more information.
* Do not attempt to install the projector yourself.
Only use your projector on a solid, level surface. If the
projector falls to the ground, you can be injured and
the projector severely damaged.
Do not use the projector where temperatures vary
greatly. The projector must be used at temperatures
between 41F (5C) and 104F (40C). (Eco mode selected automatically at 95 to 104F/35 to 40C. Operational temperatures during use of wireless LAN
card: 41 to 95F / 5 to 35C).
Do not expose the projector to moisture, dust, or
smoke. This will harm the screen image.
Ensure that you have adequate ventilation around your
Reflecting the Image

Using a mirror to reflect your projector's image enables
you to enjoy a much larger image when a smaller space
is required. Contact your NEC dealer if you need a mirror system. If you're using a mirror system and your image is inverted, use the MENU and SELECT buttons on
your projector cabinet or your remote control to correct
the orientation. ( page 84)
12
Making Connections
Connecting Your PC or Macintosh Computer
NOTE: When using with a notebook PC, be sure to connect the projector and notebook PC while the projector is in standby mode and
before turning on the power to the notebook PC.
In most cases the output signal from the notebook PC is not turned on unless connected to the projector before being powered up.
* If the screen goes blank while using your remote control, it may be the result of the computer's screen-saver or power management software.
Enabling the computers external display

Displaying an image on the notebook PCs screen does not necessarily mean it outputs a signal to the projector.
When using a PC compatible laptop, a combination of function keys will enable/disable the external display.
Usually, the combination of the Fn key along with one of the 12 function keys gets the external display to come on or
off. For example, NEC laptops use Fn + F3, while Dell laptops use Fn + F8 key combinations to toggle through external
display selections.
COMPUTER 2 IN
COMPUTER 1 IN
AUDIO IN
USB
LAN
NOTE: The COMPUTER 1 IN connector supports Plug

& Play (DDC2).
COMPUTER 3 IN
PC CARD
COMPONENT IN
S-VIDEO IN
Cb/Pb
VIDEO IN
AUDIO IN
COMPUTER 1 IN
COMPUTER 2 IN
AUDIO OUT
MONITOR OUT
PC CONTROL
Cr/Pr
AUDIO IN
L/MONO
AC IN
VGA signal cable (supplied)

To mini D-Sub 15-pin connector on the projector. It is recommended that you use a commercially available distribution
amplifier if connecting a signal cable longer than the supplied
one.
Audio cable (not supplied)
NOTE: For older Macintosh, use a commercially

available pin adapter (not supplied) to connect to
your Mac's video port.
PHONE
IBM VGA or Compatibles (Notebook

type) or Macintosh (Notebook type)
NOTE: The LT380/LT280 is not compatible with video decoded outputs of either the NEC ISS-6020 and ISS-6010 switchers.
NOTE: An image may not be displayed correctly when a Video or S-Video source is played back via a commercially available scan
converter.
This is because the projector will process a video signal as a computer signal at the default setting. In that case, do the following.
* When an image is displayed with the lower and upper black portion of the screen or a dark image is not displayed correctly:
Project an image to fill the screen and then press the AUTO ADJ button on the remote control or the AUTO ADJUST button on the
projector cabinet.
* When noise appears on the sides of the screen:
Use the Overscan feature to display the image correctly.
Be sure to change the Overscan to 0% before pressing the AUTO ADJ or AUTO ADJUST button, otherwise an image may be
displayed with its sides cut off.
13

When Viewing a DVI Digital Signal (LT380 only)
To project a DVI digital signal, be sure to connect the PC and the projector using a DVI-D signal cable (not supplied)
before turning on your PC or projector. Turn on the projector first and select DVI (DIGITAL) from the source menu
before turning on your PC.
Failure to do so may not activate the digital output of the graphics card resulting in no picture being displayed. Should
this happen, restart your PC.
Do not disconnect the DVI-D signal cable while the projector is running. If the signal cable has been disconnected and
then re-connected, an image may not be correctly displayed. Should this happen, restart your PC.
NOTE:
Use a DVI-D cable compliant with DDWG (Digital Display Working Group) DVI (Digital Visual Interface) revision 1.0 standard. The
DVI-D cable should be within 10 m (394") long.
The DVI (DIGITAL) connector (COMPUTER 3) accepts VGA (640x480), SVGA (800x600), 1152x864, XGA (1024x768) and SXGA
(1280x1024 @ up to 60Hz).
COMPUTER 3 IN (DVI-D connector with HDCP)

AUDIO IN
USB
LAN
COMPUTER 3 IN
PC CARD
COMPONENT IN
S-VIDEO IN
VIDEO IN
AUDIO IN
COMPUTER 1 IN
COMPUTER 2 IN
AUDIO OUT
MONITOR OUT
PC CONTROL
Cr/Pr
Cb/Pb
AUDIO IN
L/MONO
AC IN
DVI-D cable
PHONE
IBM VGA or Compatibles or Macintosh
What is HDCP/HDCP technology?

HDCP is an acronym for High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection. High bandwidth Digital Content Protection (HDCP)
is a system for preventing illegal copying of video data sent over a Digital Visual Interface (DVI).
If you are unable to view material via the DVI input, this does not necessarily mean the projector is not functioning
properly. With the implementation of HDCP, there may be cases in which certain content is protected with HDCP and
might not be displayed due to the decision/intention of the HDCP community (Digital Content Protection, LLC).
14

To connect SCART output (RGB)
COMPUTER 1 IN
USB
Projector
LAN
COMPUTER 3 IN
PC CARD
COMPONENT IN
S-VIDEO IN
Video equipment such as DVD player
Cb/Pb
VIDEO IN
AUDIO IN
COMPUTER 1 IN
COMPUTER 2 IN
AUDIO OUT
MONITOR OUT
PC CONTROL
Cr/Pr
AUDIO IN
L/MONO
Female
AC IN
ADP-SC1
Commercially available SCART cable
Before connections: An exclusive SCART adapter (ADP-SC1) and a commercially available SCART cable are required for this connection.
From the menu, select [Setup] [Options] [Signal Select] [Computer 1] [Scart].
SCART is a standard European audio-visual connector for TVs, VCRs and DVD players. It is also referred to as Euroconnector.
NOTE: Audio signal is not available for this connection.

TIP: The ADP-SC1 SCART adapter is obtainable from your NEC dealer in Europe. Contact your NEC dealer in Europe for more
information.
15

Connecting an External Monitor
USB
LAN
COMPUTER 3 IN
PC CARD
COMPONENT IN
S-VIDEO IN
Cb/Pb
AUDIO IN
COMPUTER 1 IN
COMPUTER 2 IN
AUDIO OUT
MONITOR OUT
PC CONTROL
Cr/Pr
VIDEO IN
AUDIO IN
L/MONO
AUDIO OUT
MONITOR OUT
AC IN

VGA signal cable (not supplied)
AUDIO
IN
PHONE
You can connect a separate, external monitor to your projector to simultaneously view on a monitor the RGB analog
image you're projecting.
NOTE:
The MONITOR OUT connector will output no sound when the projector is in standby mode.
The MONITOR OUT connector will output no signal when [Power-saving] is selected in [Standby Mode] from the menu.
When the projector is in the standby mode, the image may not be correctly displayed while the cooling fans are running immediately after turning on or off the power.
The AUDIO OUT jack cannot be used as a headphone jack.
Output sound level can be adjusted in accordance with the sound level.
When audio equipment is connected, the projector speaker is disabled.
Daisy chain connection is not possible.
16

Connecting Your DVD Player with Component Output
COMPONENT IN
USB
LAN
COMPUTER 3 IN
PC CARD
COMPONENT IN
S-VIDEO IN
Cb/Pb
VIDEO IN
AUDIO IN
COMPUTER 1 IN
COMPUTER 2 IN
AUDIO OUT
MONITOR OUT
PC CONTROL
Cr/Pr
AUDIO IN
L/MONO
AUDIO IN
AC IN
Component video RCA3

cable (not supplied)
Audio Equipment
DVD player
L
AUDIO IN
L
AUDIO OUT
Cb
Cr
Component
You can connect a video cable to the "Y" connector of the COMPONENT connectors to display a VCR source. To do
so, from the menu, select [Setup] [Options] [Signal Select] [Component] [Video].
NOTE: Refer to your DVD player's owner's manual for more information about your DVD player's video output requirements.
17

Connecting Your VCR or Laser Disc Player
VIDEO IN
USB
LAN
AUDIO IN
COMPUTER 3 IN
PC CARD
S-VIDEO IN
COMPONENT IN
Cb/Pb
S-VIDEO IN
VIDEO IN
AUDIO IN
COMPUTER 1 IN
COMPUTER 2 IN
AUDIO OUT
MONITOR OUT
PC CONTROL
Cr/Pr
AUDIO IN
L/MONO
AC IN
S-Video cable (not supplied)

Video cable (not supplied)
Audio equipment
VCR/ Laser disc player
S-VIDEO VIDEO
VIDEO OUT
AUDIO IN
AUDIO OUT
NOTE: Refer to your VCR or laser disc player owner's manual for more information about your equipment's video output requirements.
NOTE: An image may not be displayed correctly when a Video or S-Video source is played back in fast-forward or fast-rewind via a
scan converter.
18

Connecting to a Network
The LT380/LT280 comes standard with a LAN port (RJ-45) which provides a LAN connection using a LAN cable.
Placing the optional wireless LAN card (NWL-100*) in the PC card slot of the projector also provides a wireless LAN
connection. To use a LAN connection, you are required to assign an IP address to the projector. For setting the LAN
mode, see page 86 (From the menu, select [Setup] [Installation] [LAN Mode])
With the LAN connection, two features are available: Projector control and Picture transmission.
Projector control feature

With the wired or wireless LAN connection, you can control (power on/off, input select, etc.) and receive information
from the projector over the network using a computer. The following two methods are available:
* Using the HTTP Server feature on the projector. ( page 48)
* Using PC Control Utility 3.0 from the supplied User Supportware 3 CD-ROM.
Picture transmission feature

With the wired or wireless LAN connection, you can send images and slides from a personal computer to the projector
which then can be projected on the screen. The following two methods are available:
* Using Image Express Utility 2.0 from the supplied User Supportware 3 CD-ROM.
* Using Ulead Photo Explore 8.0 from the supplied User Supportware 3 CD-ROM.
With the USB mouse connected to the projector, you can also operate the desktop screen on your Windows PC
connected to the LAN or the wireless LAN.
* Using Desktop Control Utility 1.0 from the supplied User Supportware 3 CD-ROM.
NOTE: Use a wireless LAN card conforming to the Wi-Fi standard for your personal computer.
TIP: Five Windows software programs (Image Express Utility 2.0, Desktop Control Utility 1.0, Ulead Photo Explorer 8.0, Viewer PPT
Converter and PC Control Utility 3.0) and a Macintosh software program (Image Express Utility 2 for Mac OS X) are contained on the
supplied Projector User Supportware 3 CD-ROM. For their functions and operations, see the user's guides (PDF) contained on the
same CD-ROM.
Example of LAN connection

(A) Example of wired LAN connection
Server
Hub
LAN cable (not supplied)

LAN
USB
LAN
COMPUTER 3 IN
PC CARD
COMPONENT IN
S-VIDEO IN
AUDIO IN
COMPUTER 1 IN
COMPUTER 2 IN
AUDIO OUT
MONITOR OUT
PC CONTROL
Cr/Pr
Cb/Pb
VIDEO IN
AUDIO IN
L/MONO
AC IN
19

(B) Example of wireless LAN connection
(Network Type Mode: Infrastructure)
PC with wireless
LAN card inserted
PC with built-in wireless

LAN function
Wireless LAN card

(Optional)
Access
Point
Wired LAN
To make connection with a wired LAN via an access point, you need to select the Infrastructure mode.
From the menu, select [Setup] [Installation] [LAN Mode] [PC Card] [Advanced] [Network Type]
[Mode] [Infrastructure].
(C) Example of wireless LAN connection (Network Type Mode: 802.11 Ad Hoc)
Wireless LAN card

(Optional)
PC with wireless
LAN card inserted
PC with built-in wireless

LAN function
To enable direct communication (i.e., peer-to-peer) between personal computers and projectors, you need to
select the 802.11 Ad Hoc mode.
From the menu, select [Setup] [Installation] [LAN Mode] [PC Card] [Advanced] [Network Type]
[Mode] [802.11 Ad Hoc].
The 802.11 Ad Hoc mode complies with IEEE802.11 standard.
When in Ad Hoc mode, only 802.11b is available for communication method.
Data transmission speed in Ad Hoc mode is limited up to 11Mbps.
20

Inserting and Removing a PC Card
To insert the NEC optional wireless LAN card or a PC memory card (also referred to as PC card in this manual), follow
the steps below.
CAUTION:
* Direction for Inserting the PC Card
The PC card has a top and bottom and must be inserted into the PC card slot in a specific direction. It cannot
be inserted backwards or upside-down.
Attempting to force it into the slot in the wrong direction may break the internal pin and damage the card slot.
Refer to the PC card's operating instructions for the proper direction of insertion.
* Back up your PC card's data in case it will need to be restored.
* To prevent electrostatic discharge damage to the wireless LAN card, wear an anti-static wrist strap. If no wrist
strap is available, ground yourself by touching metal such as a door knob.
A dummy card is inserted into the PC CARD slot at the time of
shipment. First remove the dummy cards before use.
Inserting the PC Card

1. Make sure the main power is off before inserting the
PC card. (This step is needed only when the wireless
LAN card being inserted into the projector's PC CARD PC card (not supplied)
slot)
3D
RE
FO
RM
AU
TO
AD
JU
ST
SO
UR
CE
D
N
TA
/S
N
O
BY
PO
PC
RD
2. Hold the PC card horizontally and insert it slowly into

the PC card slot with its top facing up.
PC
CA
LA
RD
ST MP
AT
WER US
US
CA
CO
MPO
NE
NT
LA
IN
S-VI
DE
O IN
VIDE Cb/Pb
O IN
AU
DIO
Cr/P
r
L/M AUDI
ON
O O IN
CO
MPU
IN
TER
CO
MPU
TER
AU
DIO
3 IN
1 IN
OU
T
CO
MON
ITOR
MPU
TER
OU
PC
The eject button pops out once the PC card is fully inserted.
Check that the PC card is fully inserted.
2 IN
CO
NT
RO
AC
NOTE: Do not try to force the PC card into the slot or you may bend
the pins inside the slot.
IN
PC Card Lock
The supplied PC card lock prevents a PC card or an optional wireless LAN card from being ejected during use. Some
PC cards cannot be used based on their size and shape.
Use the supplied screw to fix the PC card lock.
Wireless LAN car or PC card
PC card lock
US
B
PC
CA
RD
CO
MP
ON
E
NT
NT
S-V
S-V
IDE
O IN
VID
Cb
EO
US
B
PC
CA
RD
CO
MP
ON
E
IN
IDE
O IN
/Pb
Cb
VID
E
O IN
IN
Cr/
L/M
IN
/Pb
Pr
A
ON UDIO
O
IN
L/M
Cr/
Pr
A
ON UDIO
O
IN
R
21

Removing the PC Card
1. Make sure that the PC CARD access indicator is not lit. (This
step is needed only when the PC memory card being inserted
into the projectors PC CARD slot.)
NOTE: The PC CARD access indicator lights while its data is being accessed.
2. To remove the wireless LAN card, make sure that the main power
is off. (This step is needed only when the wireless LAN card being inserted into the projector's PC CARD slot)
Eject button
3D
RE
FO
RM
AU
TO
AD
JU
ST
SO
UR
CE
D
N
TA
/S
N
O
PC
CA
LA
RD
ST MP
PO ATUS
WER
BY
3. Press the eject button. The PC card pops out a little. Grasp the
edges of the PC card and pull it out.
PC
CA
CO
S-VI
US
RD
MPO
NE
NT
LA
IN
DE
O IN
VIDE Cb/Pb
O IN
AU
Cr/P
r
L/M AUDI
ON
O O IN
DIO
CO
IN
CO
MPU
AU
DIO
OU
MPU
TER
TER
3 IN
1 IN
T
MON
CO
ITOR
OU
MPU
TER
PC
CO
NT
2 IN
RO
AC
IN
PC Card Type
The PC Card slot accepts PCMCIA Type II only.
NOTE: The projector does not support NTFS formatted flash memory card or USB memory device.
Be sure to use a flash memory card or USB memory device formatted with the FAT32, FAT16 or FAT file system.
To format your flash memory card or USB memory device in your computer, refer to the document or help file that comes with your
Windows operating systems.
22

Connecting the Supplied Power Cable
Connect the supplied power cable to the projector.
First connect the supplied power cable's two-pin plug to the AC IN of the projector, and then connect the other plug of
the supplied power cable in the wall outlet.
SELE
CT
3D
RE
FO
RM
AU
TO
AD
JU
ST
SO
UR
CE
D
N
TA
/S
N
O
PC
CA
LA
RD
ST MP
PO ATUS
WER
BY
US
PC
CA
RD
CO
MPO
NE
NT
Y
S-VI
DE
O IN
LA
IN
Cb
/Pb
VIDE
O IN
AU
DIO
IN
Cr/P
r
L/M AU
ON DIO
O
IN
CO
MPU
TER
CO
MPU
TER
AU
DIO
OU
T
MON
ITOR
3 IN
1 IN
OU
T
CO
MPU
TER
PC
CO
NT
2 IN
RO
To wall outlet
AC
IN
Make sure that the prongs are fully

inserted into both the AC IN and the
wall outlet.
CAUTION:
Doing so can cause damage to the projector or PC card:
While the projector's lamp is lighted.
While the cooling fans are running. The cooling fans continue to work for 30 seconds after the projector is
turned off.
While the PC CARD Access Indicator lights. Doing so can damage your PC memory card.
23
3. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)

This section describes how to turn on the projector and to project a picture onto the screen.
Turning on the Projector

NOTE:
The projector has two power switches: a main power switch and a POWER (ON/STAND BY) button (POWER ON and OFF on the
remote control).
When plugging in or unplugging the supplied power cable, make sure that the main power switch is pushed to the off ()
position. Failure to do so may cause damage to the projector.
The projector has a feature to prevent itself from being used by unauthorized individuals. To use this feature, register a keyword.
( page 42)
1. To turn on the main power to the projector, press the

Main Power switch to the on position ( I ).
SEL
ECT
The POWER indicator will light orange.

See the Power Indicator section on page 107 for more
details.
3D
REF
ORM
PC CARD
AUT
O ADJ
UST
SOU
RCE
ON
/S
TA
ND
BY
CAR
D
COM
PON
ENT
LAMP
LAN
IN
S-VI
DEO
IN
Cb/P
VIDE
b
O IN
AUD
IO
Cr/P
r
L/MO AUD
NO IO
COM
PUT
ER
IN
COM
PUT
ER
AUD
IO
STATUS
3 IN
1 IN
OUT
MON
ITOR
OUT
COM
PUT
ER
PC
2. Remove the lens cap.
2 IN
POWER
CON
TRO
L
AC
3. Press the POWER (ON/STAND BY) button on the projector cabinet or POWER ON button on the remote
control for a minimum of 2 seconds when the power
indicator turns a steady green, and the projector is
ready to use.
IN
POWER
OFF
POWER
ON
COMPUTER
1
VIDEO
VIEWER
LAN
COMPONENT
S-VIDEO
PC CARD
LAMP
M ENU
STATUS
3D REFORM
PC
LAM CAR
D
P
STA
POW TUS
ER
USB
PC
AUTO ADJUST
SOURCE
ON/STAND BY
POWER
After you turn on your projector, ensure that the computer

or video source is turned on and that your lens cap is
removed.
SELECT
EN
Blinking for
one minute
Standby
LAMP
TE
EX
IT
Power On
LAMP
LAMP
STATUS
STATUS
STATUS
POWER
POWER
POWER
ON/STAND BY
Steady orange
light
Blinking green
light
Press this button for a

minimum of 2 seconds.
( page 107)
NOTE: When no signal is available, a blue, black or logo screen is displayed.
24
Steady green
light

Note on Startup screen (Menu Language Select screen)
When you first turn on the projector, you will get the Startup menu. This menu gives you the opportunity to select one
of the 21 menu languages.
To select a menu language, follow these steps:
1. Use the SELECT or button to select one of the 21

languages for the menu.
POWER
OFF
POWER
ON
COMPUTER
1
VIDEO
VIEWER
LAN
COMPONENT
S-VIDEO
SELECT
M ENU
3D REFORM
AUTO ADJUST
SOURCE
SELECT
EN
TE
EX
IT
POWER
OFF
POWER
ON
COMPUTER
2. Press the ENTER button to execute the selection.
VIDEO
VIEWER
LAN
COMPONENT
S-VIDEO
M ENU
SELECT
3D REFORM
AUTO ADJUST
SELECT
SOURCE
EN
TE
EX
IT
3. To close the menu, press the EXIT button.

POWER
OFF
POWER
ON
COMPUTER
After this has been done, you can proceed to the menu operation.
If you want, you can select the menu language later. ( [Language] on page 78)
VIDEO
VIEWER
LAN
COMPONENT
SELECT
S-VIDEO
M ENU
3D REFORM
AUTO ADJUST
SOURCE
SELECT
EN
TE
EX
IT
NOTE:
The projector cannot be turned off for 60 seconds after the lamp is turned on and while the POWER indicator is blinking green.
Immediately after the lamp is turned off or when the ambient temperature is high, the cooling fans will run for a moment and then
you will get an image on the screen.
Immediately after turning on the projector, screen flicker may occur. This is normal. Wait 3 to 5 minutes until the lamp lighting is
stabilized.
When the Lamp mode is set to Eco, the Lamp indicator will light green.
If one of the following things happens, the projector will not turn on.
- If the internal temperature of the projector is too high, the projector detects abnormal high temperature. In this
condition the projector will not turn on to protect the internal system. If this happens, wait for the projector's
internal components to cool down.
- When the lamp reaches its end of usable life, the projector will not turn on. If this happens, replace the lamp.
( page 104)
- If the lamp fails to light, and if the STATUS indicator flashes on and off in a cycle of six times, wait a full minute
and then turn on the power.
25
Selecting a Source
Selecting the computer or video source
Using the Remote Control
POWER
OFF
Press any one of the COMPUTER 1/2/3, Component, VIDEO, S-VIDEO, VIEWER
or LAN buttons.
POWER
ON
COMPUTER
1
VIDEO
VIEWER
LAN
COMPONENT
S-VIDEO
NOTE: The COMPUTER 3 button is not available for LT280.
M ENU
SELECT
EN
TE
EX
IT
Selecting from Source List

Press and quickly release the SOURCE button on the projector cabinet to display
the Source list. Each time the SOURCE button is pressed, the input source will
change as follows: Computer 1/2/3, Component, Video (VCR or laser disc
player), S-Video, Viewer (slides on a PC card) or LAN (LAN port [RJ-45] or
wireless LAN card).
To display the selected source, press the ENTER button.
PC CARD
LAMP
STATUS
3D REFORM
AUTO ADJUST
SOURCE
ON/STAND BY
3D REFORM
AUTO ADJUST
SOURCE
ON/STAND BY
POWER
Detecting the Signal Automatically

Press and hold the SOURCE button for a minimum of 1 second, the projector will
search for the next available input source. Each time you press and hold the
SOURCE button for a minimum of 1 second, the input source will change as
follows:
Computer1 Computer2 Computer3 Componet Video S-Video
Viewer Computer1 ...
If no input signal is present, the input will be skipped. When the input source you
wish to project is displayed, release the button.
NOTE: The COMPUTER 3 connector is available on LT380 only.
26
PC CARD
LAMP
STATUS
POWER
Adjusting the Picture Size and Position

Place your projector on a flat level surface and ensure that the projector is
square to the screen.
Lift the front edge of the projector to center the image vertically.
If the projected image does not appear square to the screen, use the Keystone
feature for proper adjustment. ( page 29, 38)
Rotate the front of the projector right or left (to the right in this example) to
center the image horizontally on the screen.
Adjust the Tilt Foot
RD
CA
P
M
LA US
AT
ST WER
BY
PC
3D
RE
FO
RM
AU
TO
AD
JU
ST
SO
UR
CE
ON
/S
TA
ND
CAUTION:
Do not try to touch the ventilation outlet during Tilt Foot adjustment as
it can become heated while the projector is turned on and during its
cool down period after it is turned off.
PO
1. Lift the front edge of the projector.
1
2
2. Push up the Adjustable Tilt Foot Levers on the right and left sides
of the projector to extend the adjustable tilt feet (maximum height).
Adjustable Tilt
Foot Lever
3. Lower the front of the projector to the desired height.

Adjustable Tilt
Foot Lever
LA
CA
PC
ND
TA
/S
ON
CT
LE
SE
3D
RM
FO
RE
TO
AU
ST
JU
AD
CE
UR
SO
TIP: When [Auto Keystone] is turned on,

adjusting the height of a projected image
or changing projection angle will result in
Auto Keystone function to work to quickly
correct the vertical distortion. The [Keystone] screen will be displayed.
For operating the [Keystone] screen, see
" Correcting Keystone Distortion" on
page 29.
BY
RD
P
US
AT
ST WER
PO
4. Release the Adjustable Tilt Foot lever to lock the Adjustable tilt foot.
There is approximately 10 degrees (up) of adjustment for the front of the
projector.
NOTE: Your "Keystone" correction data can be reset by pressing and holding the
3D REFORM button for a minimum of 2 seconds.
CAUTION:
Do not use the tilt-foot for purposes other than originally intended.
Misuses such as using the tilt foot to carry or hang (from the wall or
ceiling) the projector can cause damage to the projector.
27

Zoom
Use the ZOOM lever to adjust the image size on the screen.
Focus
Use the FOCUS ring to obtain the best focus.
28
Correcting Keystone Distortion

Auto Keystone Correction
The Auto Keystone correction feature will correct vertical distortion of a projected image on the screen. No special
operation required. Just put the projector on a flat surface.
To use the Auto Keystone function, first you must select [Auto] in [Keystone] from the menu.
Manual Keystone Correction

You can also correct keystone distortion manually.
To do so:
1. Press the 3D REFORM button on the remote control or the projector

cabinet.
The Keystone screen will be displayed on the screen.
When [Auto] is selected in [Keystone] from the menu, start from step 3.
2. Press the SELECT button to select [Vertical] and then use the
SELECT or so that the left and right sides of the projected image are parallel.
* Adjust the vertical keystone distortion.
Projected area
Screen frame
3. Align the left (or right) side of the screen with the left (or right) side
of the projected image.
Use the shorter side of the projected image as the base.
In the right example, use the left side as the base.
NOTE: When [Manual] is selected in [Keystone] from the menu, project an image
adjusting projector position so that the screen is smaller than the area of the projected
image. See page 77 for selecting [Manual] in [Keystone].
4. Press the SELECT button to select [Horizontal] and then use the
SELECT or so that the top and bottom sides of the projected
image are parallel.
Adjust the horizontal keystone distortion.
29
Align left side

5. Repeat steps 2 and 4 to correct keystone distortion.
6. After completing Keystone correction, press the ENTER button.
The Keystone screen will disappear.
To perform Keystone correction again, press the 3D REFORM button to
display the Keystone screen and repeat above steps 1 to 6.
NOTE:
Turning on the projector will reset the previous correction setting values and correct distortion anew if the projection angle is
changed from the last use.
If the projection angle is the same as in the last use, the previous correction setting values are retained in the memory.
To use the previous correction setting values after changing projection angle, select [Manual] in [Keystone] from the menu.
( page 77)
To reset the 3D Reform correction setting values, press and hold the 3D REFORM button for a minimum of 2 seconds.
Each time the 3D REFORM button is pressed, the item will change as follows: Keystone Cornerstone None Keystone
...
For information on [Cornerstone], see Correcting Horizontal and Vertical Keystone Distortion (Cornerstone) on page 38.
The 3D Reform feature can cause an image to be slightly blurred because the correction is made electronically.
30
Optimizing an RGB Image Automatically

Adjusting the Image Using Auto Adjust
Optimizing an RGB image automatically.
Press the Auto Adjust button to optimize an RGB image automatically.
This adjustment may be necessary when you connect your computer for the first time.
[Poor picture]
NT
ER
EX
IT
LASER
L-CLICK
R-CLICK
MOUSE
FREEZE
SELECT
VOLUME
MAGNIFY
PAGE
UP
[Normal picture]
3D REFORM
AUTO ADJUST
SOURCE
DOWN
PICTURE
3D REFORM
PIC-MUTE
HELP
NOTE:
Some signals may take time to display or may not be displayed correctly.
The Auto Adjust function does not work for component or video signals.
If the Auto Adjust operation cannot optimize the RGB signal, try to adjust Clock and Phase manually. ( page 72)
Adjusting Volume Up & Down

Sound level from the speaker and the AUDIO OUT
jack (Stereo mini) on the projector can be adjusted.
NT
ER
EX
IT
LASER
NOTE: When no menus appear, the SELECT buttons

on the projector cabinet work as a volume control.
L-CLICK
R-CLICK
MOUSE
FREEZE
Increase volume
VOLUME
MAGNIFY
PAGE
UP
DOWN
Decrease volume
31
PICTURE
3D REFORM
PIC-MUTE
HELP
Using the Laser Pointer

You can use the laser to draw your audience's attention to a red dot that you can place on any object.
CAUTION:
Do not look into the laser pointer while it is on.
Do not point the laser beam at a person.
Do not allow children to use the laser pointer.
Press and hold the LASER button to activate the laser pointer.
LASE
LA
Setting the function switch

There are two switches on the bottom of the battery case: an applicable projector selector switch (1) and laser enable/
disable switch (2). Check the projector being used and decide whether to enable or disable laser, then set these
switches as necessary using the tip of a thin ball-point pen. On this model, an applicable projector selector switch (1)
is not used.
OFF ON
Switch (2)
On ......................... Enabled (the laser lights when the LASER button is pressed) [Factory default]
Off ......................... Disabled (the laser does not light even when the LASER button is pressed)
Disable the laser when using in an environment in which the unit is accessible to children.
32
Turning off the Projector

To turn off the projector:
1. Press the POWER (ON/STAND BY) button on the projector
cabinet or the POWER OFF button on the remote control. The
[Power Off / Are you sure?] message will appear.
POWER
OFF
POWER
ON
COMPUTER
1
VIDEO
VIEWER
LAN
COMPONENT
S-VIDEO
M ENU
PC CARD
LAMP
STATUS
ORM
AUTO ADJUST
SOURCE
SELECT
POWER
ON/STAND BY
EN
2. Press the ENTER button or the POWER (ON/STANDBY) or

the POWER OFF button again.
The power indicator will glow orange. After the projector turns
off, the cooling fans keep operating for 30 seconds (Cooling-off
time).
NOTE: Immediately after turning on the projector and displaying an image, you cannot turn off the projector for 60 seconds.
TE
EX
IT
POWER
OFF
POWER
ON
COMPUTER
1
VIDEO
VIEWER
LAN
COMPONENT
S-VIDEO
M ENU
PC CARD
LAMP
STATUS
ORM
AUTO ADJUST
SOURCE
SELECT
POWER
ON/STAND BY
EN
TE
EX
IT
3. Turn off the Main Power switch. The power indicator will go
out.
3D
REF
PC CARD
ORM
AUT
O ADJ
UST
SOU
RCE
/S
PC
LAM CAR
D
P
TA
ND
BY
While the cooling fans are running. (The cooling fans continue
to work for 30 seconds after the projector is turned off).
SEL
ECT
ON
CAUTION
Do not unplug the power cable from the wall outlet or do
not turn off the main power under any one of the following
circumstances.
Doing so can cause damage to the projector or PC card:
While the projector lamp is lighted.
CAR
D
COM
PON
ENT
STA
POW TUS
ER
USB
PC
LAN
IN
S-VI
LAMP
DEO
IN
Cb/P
VIDE
b
O IN
AUD
IO
Cr/P
r
L/MO AUD
NO IO
IN
COM
PUT
ER
COM
PUT
ER
AUD
IO
STATUS
3 IN
1 IN
OUT
MON
ITOR
OUT
COM
PUT
ER
PC
2 IN
POWER
CON
TRO
L
AC
IN
While the PC CARD Access Indicator lights. Doing so can damage your PC memory card.
After Use
Preparation: Make sure that the main power is turned off.
1. Unplug the power cable.

2. Disconnect any other cables.
3. Retract adjustable tilt feet if extended.
4. Cover the lens with the lens cap.
5. Put the projector and accessories in the supplied soft case.
NOTE: Before putting the projector in the soft case, be sure to retract the feet. Failure to do so may cause the damage to the projector.
33
4. Convenient Features
Turning Off the Image and Sound
Press the PIC-MUTE button to turn off the image and sound for a short period of time.
Press again to restore the image and sound.
FREEZE

VOLUME
PAGE
MAGNIFY
UP
DOWN
Freezing a Picture
PICTURE
3D REFORM
PIC-MUTE
HELP
L-CLICK
R-CLICK
MOUSE
FREEZE
Press the FREEZE button to freeze a picture. Press again to resume motion.
VOLUME
PAGE
MAGNIFY
UP
DOWN
PICTURE
3D REFORM
PIC-MUTE
HELP
Enlarging and Moving a Picture

You can enlarge the area you want up to 400 percent.
To do so:
1. Press the MAGNIFY (+) button.

Each time the MAGNIFY (+) button is pressed,
the image is magnified.
FREEZE

VOLUME
PAGE
MAGNIFY
UP
DOWN
* Image can be magnified up to 400%
2. Press the SELECT button.

The area of the magnified image will be moved
PICTURE
3D REFORM
PIC-MUTE
HELP
POWER
OFF
POWER
ON
COMPUTER
1
VIDEO
VIEWER
LAN
COMPONENT
S-VIDEO
M ENU
SELECT
EN
TE
EX
IT
FREEZE
3. Press the MAGNIFY (-) button.
Each time the MAGNIFY (-) button is pressed, the

image is reduced.
VOLUME
MAGNIFY
PAGE
UP
DOWN
Changing Lamp Mode
PICTURE
3D REFORM
PIC-MUTE
HELP
NT
The lamp life can be extended by using the Eco mode.
ER
EX
IT
LASER
L-CLICK
To change to the [Eco] mode, do the following:
R-CLICK
MOUSE
FREEZE
1. Press the LAMP MODE button to display [Lamp Mode] screen.

2. Use the SELECT or button to select [Eco] mode.
3. Press the ENTER button. Or press the SELECT button to select [OK] and
press the ENTER button.
To cancel it, select [Cancel] and press the ENTER button.
To change from [Eco] to [Normal], Go back to Step 2 and select [Normal]. Repeat
Step 3.
34

VOLUME
MAGNIFY
PAGE
UP
DOWN
PICTURE
3D REFORM
PIC-MUTE
HELP
Getting Integrated Help
NT
ER
EX
IT
POWER
OFF
LASER
POWER
ON
COMPUTER
You get the contents about Help in English, German and

Japanese.
L-CLICK
VIDEO
R-CLICK
MOUSE
MAGNIFY
VIEWER
LAN
COMPONENT
FREEZE
S-VIDEO

VOLUME
M ENU
PAGE
UP
SELECT
DOWN
PICTURE
3D REFORM
PIC-MUTE
HELP
EN
Display Help
TE
EX
IT
Exit Help
Using a USB Mouse
USB
Using a USB mouse gives you a smooth operation. A commercially

available USB mouse can be used.
USB
LAN
COMPUTER 3 IN
PC CARD
COMPONENT IN
S-VIDEO IN
Cb/Pb
AUDIO IN
COMPUTER 1 IN
COMPUTER 2 IN
AUDIO OUT
MONITOR OUT
PC CONTROL
Cr/Pr
AUDIO IN
VIDEO IN
L/MONO
NOTE: There may be some brands of a USB mouse that the projector does
not support.
AC IN
Operate the Menus using the USB mouse

Mouse Cursor
When connecting a USB mouse to the projector, you get a mouse cursor on the screen.
Unless you use your USB mouse within 10 seconds, the mouse cursor disappears.
NOTE: You can change the shape of the mouse cursor. To do so, select the menu [Setup] [Tools] [Mouse] [Mouse
Pointer].
Menu Display
Clicking with the left mouse button displays the menu.
To close the menu, click anywhere in the background.
Adjusting and Setting Display
You can select a menu item and click with the left mouse button to make adjustments and settings.
Using the middle button on the mouse
The projector supports the middle button on your mouse.
With the middle button you can do the following:
You can use a scroll bar in the menu or the help.
You can click the middle button to display or hide the ChalkBoard toolbar.
Example:
Click (or press and hold) the left mouse button on the or to adjust the brightness. Or click and drag the left
mouse button on the slide bar horizontally to adjust it.
To save the adjustments, click
Click
. The display is closed.
with the left mouse button to display a description of the selected menu item.
Click and drag the title bar with the left mouse button to move the adjustment or setting dialog box.
35
Using Remote Mouse Receiver

The remote mouse receiver enables you to operate your computers mouse functions from the remote control. It is a
great convenience for your computer-generated presentations.
Connecting the remote mouse receiver to your computer

If you wish to use the remote mouse function, connect the mouse receiver and computer.
The mouse receiver can be connected directly to the computers USB port (type A).
NOTE: Depending on the type of connection or OS installed on your computer, you may have to restart your computer or change
your computer settings.
Computer
To USB port of PC or Macintosh
When operating a computer via the remote mouse receiver

7m/22 feet
30
30
Remote sensor on the remote mouse receiver
When connecting using the USB port

For PC, the mouse receiver can only be used with a Windows 98/Me/XP*, Windows 2000 or MacOS X 10.0.0 or later
operating system.
* NOTE: In SP1 or older verison of Windows XP, if the mouse cursor will not move correctly, do the following:
Clear the Enhance pointer precision check box underneath the mouse speed slider in the Mouse Properties dialog box [Pointer
Options tab].
NOTE: Wait at least 5 seconds after disconnecting the mouse receiver before reconnecting it and vice versa. The computer may not
identify the mouse receiver if it is repeatedly connected and disconnected in rapid intervals.
36
Operating your computers mouse from the remote control
You can operate your computer's mouse from the remote control.
PAGE UP/DOWN Button ................. scrolls the viewing area of the window or to move to the previous or next slide in PowerPoint
on your computer.
SELECT Button ................. moves the mouse cursor on your computer.
MOUSE L-CLICK Button ................. works as the mouse left button.
MOUSE R-CLICK Button ................. works as the mouse right button.
NOTE: When you operate the computer using the SELECT button with the menu displayed, both the menu and the mouse
pointer will be affected. Close the menu and perform the mouse operation.
About Drag Mode:

By pressing the MOUSE L-CLICK or R-CLICK button for 2 or 3 seconds then releasing, the drag mode is set and the
drag operation can be performed simply by pressing the SELECT button. To drop the item, press the MOUSE
L-CLICK (or R-CLICK) button. To cancel it, press the MOUSE R-CLICK (or L-CLICK) button.
TIP: You can change the Pointer speed on the Mouse Properties dialog box on the Windows. For more information, see the user
documentation or online help supplied with your computer.
37
Correcting Horizontal and Vertical Keystone Distortion (Cornerstone)

Use the 3D Reform feature to correct keystone (trapezoidal) distortion to make the top or bottom and the left or right
side of the screen longer or shorter so that the projected image is rectangular.
Cornerstone
1. Press and hold the 3D REFORM button for a minimum of 2 seconds to reset current adjustments.
Current adjusments for [Keystone] or [Cornerstone] will be cleared.
2. Project an image so that the screen is smaller than the area of the raster.
3. Pick up any one of the corners and align the corner of the image with a corner of the screen.
Projected image
The drawing shows the
upper right corner.
Screen
4. Press the 3D REFORM button on the remote control twice.

The Cornerstone adjustment screen is displayed.
5. Use the SELECT button to select one icon which points in the direction you wish to move the
projected image frame.
6. Press the ENTER button.
7. Use the SELECT button to move the projected image frame as shown on the example.
Screen
38
Screen
9. Use the SELECT button to select another icon which points in the direction.
On the Cornerstone adjustment screen, select [Exit] or press the EXIT button on the remote control.
Screen
The confirmation screen is displayed.
10.Press the SELECT or button to highlight the [OK] and press the ENTER button.
This completes the keystone correction.
Selecting [Cancel] will return to the adjustment screen without saving changes (Step 3).
Selecting [Reset] will return to the factory default.
Selecting [Undo] will exit without saving changes.
NOTE: To reset the 3D Reform correction setting values, press and hold the 3D REFORM button for a minimum of 2 seconds.
NOTE: During 3D Reform adjustment, [Aspect Ratio] and [Screen] may not be available. Should this happen, first reset the 3D
Reform data and then do each setting. Second repeat the 3D Reform adjustment. Changing [Aspect Ratio] and/or [Screen] setting
can limit [3D Reform] in its adjustable range.
39
The adjustable ranges for 3D Reform are as follows:
Cornerstone
Keystone
Horizontal
Max. +/ 35 approx.
Max. +/ 27 approx.
Vertical
Max. +/ 40 approx.
* The following are conditions under which the maximum angle is achived:
Image is projected in Wide (Zoom lever)
Resolution is XGA
Higher resolution than XGA narrows the adjustable range.
Menu items should be set as follows:
Aspect Ratio ........... 4:3
Screen Type ........... 4:3
Horizontal and Vertical are adjusted separately.
A combination of both adjustments narrows the adjustable range.
When [4:3 Fill] is selected in [Aspect Ratio], [Cornerstone] and "Horizontal Keystone" are not available.
NOTE:
If the Cornerstone screen is unavailable (grayed), press and hold the 3D REFORM button for a minimum of 2 seconds to reset the
current correction data. The Cornerstone function becomes available.
Turning on the projector will reset the previous correction setting values and correct distortion anew if the projection angle is
changed from the last use.
If the projection angle is the same as in the last use, the previous correction setting values are retained in the memory.
To use the previous correction setting values after changing projection angle, select [Manual] in [Keystone] from the menu. (
page 77)
NOTE: Using 3D Reform correction can cause the image to be slightly blurred because the correction is made electronically.
40
Making Freehand Drawings on a Projected Image

(ChalkBoard)
The ChalkBoard feature allows you to write and draw messages on a projected image.
NOTE: The ChalkBoard feature is available only when a USB mouse is used.
To display the ChalkBoard tool bar, click the middle button on your mouse or select [ChalkBoard] from the menu.
The tool bar contains the following icons.
Drag ................. Drags to move the tool bar.

Pen ................... Left-click and drag to draw. Left-click or right-click the pen icon to display the pen palette containing four
lines of different thickness from which you can select a line you prefer by left-clicking.
Color ................ Selects a color. Left-click to display the color palette from which you can select a color you prefer by leftclicking.
Eraser ............... Left-click and drag to erase part of a drawing. Left-click or right-click the eraser icon to display the eraser
palette containing four erasers of different thickness from which you can select an eraser you prefer by leftclicking.
Clear ................. Left-click to clear the drawing completely from the ChalkBoard screen.
Hide .................. Hides the tool bar by left-clicking. Right-clicking anywhere on the screen displays the ChalkBoard tool bar
again.
Exit ................... Clears the complete drawing and exits the ChalkBoard.
NOTE:
The menu is not available while you display the ChalkBoard screen.
Selecting another source or switching slides in the Viewer clears a drawing completely.
41
Preventing Unauthorized Use of the Projector

Assigning a keyword prevents the projector from being used by unauthorized individuals.
Assigning a Keyword for the first time

1. Press the MENU button.
The menu will be displayed.
2. Press the SELECT button to highlight the [Setup] submenu and press the ENTER button.
The page tab [Basic] will be highlighted.
3. Press the SELECT button twice to highlight the page tab [Security].
42
4. Press the SELECT button four times to highlight [Security].
5. Press the ENTER button to display the Security screen.
6. Press the SELECT button once to highlight the Keyword entry box and press the ENTER button.
The Software keyboard will be displayed.
43
7. Enter an alphanumeric keyword using the Software keyboard
For example, to enter 1234, follow the steps 7-1 to 7-4 below.
NOTE:
Please make a note of your keyword.
Do not use spaces (SP) in your keyword.
7-1. Highlight the number 1 and press the ENTER button.
The asterisk will be displayed in the Keyword entry box.
7-2. Press the SELECT button once to highlight 2 and press the ENTER button.
7-3. For 3 and 4, use the same procedure as step 7-2.
7-4. Press the SELECT button to highlight [OK] and press the ENTER button.
The Software keyboard will disappear.
8. Press the SELECT button once to highlight [Off] and press the SELECT button to highlight [On].
9. Press the SELECT button to highlight [OK] and press the ENTER button.
The confirmation screen will be displayed.
10.Select [Yes] and press the ENTER button.
The Security Function is now enabled.

NOTE: A PC card can be used as a protect key. You can skip the keyword entry by inserting a registered PC card when turning on the
projector. ( page 82)
44
Checking If Security is enabled
Turn off the projector and turn it back on to check if the Security function is enabled.
1. Press the POWER (ON/STANDBY) button.

The [Power Off / Are you sure?] message will appear.
Press the ENTER button or the POWER (ON/STANDBY) or the POWER OFF button again.
The lamp lights off and the POWER indicator flashes orange. Please wait until the POWER indicator changes from
flashing to steady light.
2. When the POWER indicator lights steady orange, push the Main POWER switch to the off position (O).
The projector will turn off.
3. Push the Main POWER switch to the on position (I).
The POWER indicator lights orange. The projector is in standby condition.
4. Press and hold the POWER (ON/STANDBY) button for a minimum of two seconds.
The projector will turn on. The [Projector is locked! Enter your keyword.] message will be displayed at the bottom of
the screen.
The Keyword entry screen will be displayed

7. Use the same procedures as steps 1 to 7 described in the Assigning a Keyword for the first time section
to enter 1234.
Each time one number is entered, an (asterisk) will appear. Keyword appears as asterisks so the real keyword
is hidden.
8. After entering your keyword, highlight [OK] and press the ENTER button.
The Software keyboard will disappear. This will allow you to operate the projector.
45
Disabling the Security
The on-screen menu will be displayed.
NOTE: Immediately after the projector has been turned on and the Projector is locked! Enter your keyword. message is
displayed at the bottom of the screen, pressing the MENU button will display the Keyword entry will be displayed. At this time,
pressing the MENU button will display the on-screen menu.
2. Press the SELECT button to highlight [Setup] and press the ENTER button.
The page tab [Basic] will be highlighted.
3. Press the SELECT button twice to highlight the page tab [Security].
4. Press the SELECT button four times to highlight [Security] and press the ENTER button.
The Keyword entry screen will be displayed

6. Use the same procedures as steps 1 to 7 described in the Assigning a Keyword for the first time section
to enter 1234.
Each time one number is entered, an (asterisk) will appear. Keyword appears as asterisks so the real keyword
is hidden.
7. After entering your keyword, highlight [OK] and press the ENTER button.
The Software keyboard will disappear. The Security screen will be displayed.
8. Highlight [On] and press the SELECT button to highlight [Off].
9. Press the SELECT button to highlight [OK] and press the ENTER button.
The Security Function is now disabled.
NOTE: Do not forget your keyword. However, if you forget your keyword, NEC or your dealer will provide you with your Release Code
upon proof of ownership.
46
Using a USB Memory Device

The projector is compatible with a USB memory device which supports the viewer and security features.
To use a USB memory device, connect the device to the USB

port (type A).
Select one of the drive icons for your USB memory in a pane on
the left side of the Viewer window.
To use a USB memory device as a Protect key for Security function, select one from the Drive icons in the Security setting screen.
( page 82)
USB
LAN
COMPUTER 3 IN
PC CARD
COMPONENT IN
S-VIDEO IN
VIDEO IN
AUDIO IN
COMPUTER 1 IN
COMPUTER 2 IN
AUDIO OUT
MONITOR OUT
PC CONTROL
Cr/Pr
Cb/Pb
AUDIO IN
L/MONO
AC IN
NOTE:
Use commercially available USB memory devices. Some USB memory devices (brands) may not work. See our website for
available USB memory devices:http://www.nec-pj.com
The projector does not support NTFS formatted flash memory card or USB memory device.
To format your flash memory card or USB memory device in your computer, refer to the document or help file that comes with
your Windows.
You cannot use a USB memory device when connecting a USB mouse to the projector.
Do not do the following while the USB memory devices access indicator is lit or flashing (while data is being accessed.) Doing so
can damage your USB memory device. Back up your data in case it will need to be restored.
* Pulling out the USB memory device from the USB port of the projector.
* Turning off the main power switch or unplugging the power cable.
The drive for USB 1-4 is displayed only when the USB memory device is connected to the projector.
Some USB memory devices (brands) cannot be used as Protect key for the projectors Security function.
CAUTION: Do not insert a USB memory device into the LAN port (RJ-45). Doing so can cause damage to the LAN
port (RJ-45).
47
Operation Using an HTTP Browser

Overview
The use of HTTP server functions will allow control of the projector from a web browser without the installation of
special software. Please be sure to use Microsoft Internet Explorer 4.x or a higher version for the web browser. (This
device uses JavaScript and Cookies and the browser should be set to accept these functions. The setting method
will vary depending on the version of browser. Please refer to the help files and the other information provided in your
software.)
NOTE:
* The displays or buttons response can be slowed down or operation may not be accepted depending the settings of your network.
Should this happen, consult your network administrator.
* The projector may not respond if its buttons are repeatedly pressed in rapid intervals. Should this happen, wait a moment and
repeat. If you still cant get any response, turn off and back on the projector.
Access is gained to the HTTP server functions by specifying
http:// <the projectors IP address> /index.html
in the entry column of the URL.
CAUTION:
Do not use the HTTP Server functions and PC Control Utility 3.0 included on the supplied CD-ROM. Using both at
the same time may result in a connection failure or slow response.
Preparation Before Use

Make network connections and set up the projector and confirm that it is complete before engaging in browser operations. ( [LAN Mode] on page 86)
Operation with a browser that uses a proxy server may not be possible depending on the type of proxy server and the
setting method. Although the type of proxy server will be a factor, it is possible that items that have actually been set
will not be displayed depending on the effectiveness of the cache, and the contents set from the browser may not be
reflected in operation. It is recommended that a proxy server not be used unless it is unavoidable.
Handling of the Address for Operation via a Browser

Regarding the actual address that is entered for the address or entered to the URL column when operation of the
projector is via a browser, the host name can be used as it is when the host name corresponding to the IP address of
the projector has been registered to the domain name server by a network administrator, or the host name corresponding to the IP address of the projector has been set in the HOSTS file of the computer being used.
Example 1:
Example 2:
When the host name of the projector has been set to pj.nec.co.jp,
http://pj.nec.co.jp/index.html
is specified for the address or the entry column of the URL.
When the IP address of the projector is 192.168.73.1, access is gained to the
HTTP server functions by specifying
http://192.168.73.1/index.html
for the address or the entry column of the URL.
48
Structure of the HTTP Server
Power: This controls the power of the projector.

On ................... Power is switched on.
Off ................... Power is switched off.
Volume: This controls the volume of the projector.
..................... Increases the volume adjustment value.
..................... Decreases the volume adjustment value.
Mute: This controls the mute function of the projector.
Picture On ....... Mutes the video.
Picture Off ....... Cancels the video muting.
Sound On ........ Mutes the audio.
Sound Off ........ Cancels the audio muting.
OSD On .......... Mutes the on-screen display.
OSD Off .......... Cancels the muting of the on-screen display.
All On .............. Mutes each of the video, audio, and on-screen display functions.
All Off .............. Cancels the muting of each of the video, audio, and on-screen display functions.
Picture: Controls the video adjustment of the projector.
Brightness ... Increases the brightness adjustment value.
Brightness ... Decreases the brightness adjustment value.
Contrast ...... Increases the contrast adjustment value.
Contrast ...... Decreases the contrast adjustment value.
Color ........... Increases the color adjustment value.
Color ........... Decreases the color adjustment value.
Hue ............. Increases the hue adjustment value.
Hue ............. Decreases the hue adjustment value.
Sharpness ... Increases the sharpness adjustment value.
Sharpness ... Decreases the sharpness adjustment value.
The functions that can be controlled will vary depending on the signal being input to the projector.
49
Source Select: This switches the input connector of the projector.
Computer1 ...... Switches to the COMPUTER 1 IN connector.
Computer2 ...... Switches to the COMPUTER 2 IN connector.
Computer3 ...... Switches to the COMPUTER 3 IN connector. (LT380 only)
Component ..... Switches to the COMPONENT IN connectors.
Video ............... Switches to the VIDEO IN connector.
S-Video ........... Switches to the S-VIDEO IN connector.
Viewer ............. Switches to the Viewer.
LAN ................. Switches to a LAN signal.
Projector Status: This displays the condition of the projector.
Lamp Life Remaining ..... Displays the remaining life of the lamp as a percentage.
Lamp Hours Used ....... Displays how many hours the lamp has been used.
Filter Hours Used ........ Displays how many hours the filter has been used.
Projector Hours Used . Displays how many hours the projector has been used.
Error Status ................. Displays the status of errors occurring within the projector.
Refresh ....................... Updates the display of the following conditions.
50
Using the Projector to Operate a Computer Connected on a

Network (Desktop Control Utility 1.0)
When Desktop Control Utility 1.0 on the included User Supportware 3 CD-ROM is installed on the computer, that
computer can be operated using the projector over a network.
For example, say you have a PowerPoint file on a computer in your office that you want to use for a presentation at a
meeting. If the computer in the office is connected by LAN to the projector in the meeting room, the projector can be
operated to project the image of the desktop of the computer (Windows 2000 or XP) in the office and display the
PowerPoint file during the meeting. This eliminates the need for taking the computer from the office to the meeting
room.
Meeting room
Office
Disclaimer
You can use the Desktop Control Utility 1.0 to operate a computer located in a separate room from the projector over
a network. This means there might be potential security risks that you may be exposed to which could cause damage
by unauthorized access or illegal use. We recommend you take some measures to prevent third parties from unauthorized access to your data or information.
We share neither liability nor responsibility to any loss or damages arising from information leak or power down
without notice.
NOTE: In Windows operating system, click [Control Panel] [Power Options] [System Standby] [Never]. This will disconnect a LAN connection when the computer goes in standby mode.
NOTE: To use the Desktop Control Utility 1.0, you need to have a USB mouse inserted into the USB port of the projector.
51
Operations on the Computer
1. Connect the computer to the LAN and make the required settings.
2. Install Desktop Control Utility 1.0 on the computer.
For instructions on installation, refer to the included NEC Software Utility Installation Guide.
For instructions on operating the software, see the Desktop Control Utility 1.0s help file.
3. Prepare the documents to be presented at the meeting and save them on the computer.
4. Start up Desktop Control Utility 1.0.
The Startup password window appears.
Window at the first startup
Window after entering your startup password
Important:
Your startup password will be required each time
you start Desktop Control Utility 1.0.
5. Input the startup password and click [OK].

The [Current password] input window appears.
If you forget or lost your startup password, install the program again.
NOTE: The [Current password] will be changed each time you start Desktop Control Utility 1.0.
6. Make a note of the password.
7. Click [OK].
Desktop Control Utility 1.0 starts.
Go to the room where the projector is installed, taking the password you made a note in the previous Step [6].
52
Operations on the projector Connecting to the computer
1.
Make the LAN settings on the projector.

Make the LAN settings at [Setup] [Installation] [LAN Mode] in the menu. ( page 86)
2.
3.
Connect a commercially available USB mouse to the projector. ( page 35)

Click anywhere on the screen with the USB mouse.
4.
The menu appears.

Click [Source], then click [LAN].
The help message is displayed.
The message is displayed only when a password for Desktop Control Utility 1.0 is not assigned.
5.
Follow the message to press the MENU button on the projector cabinet or the remote control.
The connections bar appears at the bottom left of the screen.
6.
Click the password input icon
7.
Click [Entry].
The password input window appears.
8.
Click
The character input window appears. ( page 117)
53
9.
Input the password you made a note of in the previous Step [6] in Operations on the Computer.
10. Input the password and click [OK].

The password input window is turned off.
.
11. Click the PC search icon
The PC search window appears.
12. Click [OK].

The connection selection window appears.
To search by inputting the IP address of the connected computer, click

[Input IP Address], then click [OK].
13. Click the computer to which you want to connect, then click [OK].
on the PC Search window, click
The desktop of the connected computer appears.
NOTE: Once the desktop appears, the menu will no longer appear when the USB mouse is clicked. To display the menu while the
desktop is displayed, press the button on the projector itself or on the remote control.
Operations on the projector Operating the desktop

A USB mouse connected to the projector can be used to operate the displayed desktop.
If the MENU button on the projector cabinet or the remote control is pressed while the desktop is displayed, an
additional operations bar appears at the bottom left of the screen.
54
The following operations are available only with buttons on the projector cabinet or the remote control.
Disconnect icon ................. Use to cut off communications with the computer.
Shift icon ............................ Select this icon and press the ENTER button to set the shift lock mode. Select this icon and
press the ENTER button again to cancel the shift lock mode.
Ctrl icon ............................. Select this icon and press the ENTER button to set the control lock mode. Select this icon
and press the ENTER button again to cancel the control lock mode.
Esc icon ............................. Use to do the same operation as when the Esc button on the computer is pressed. Use it
for example to stop a PowerPoint slideshow.
Operations on the projector Disconnecting communication

1. Press the MENU button while the desktop is displayed.
The additional operations bar appears at the bottom left of the screen.
2. Select the disconnect icon

and press the ENTER button.
To reconnect the communication, click the PC search icon
and repeat steps 12 and 13 in the previous page.
NOTE: Disconnection is possible by clicking the projector icon and then "Disconnect" on the task bar.
Operations on the projector Exiting the desktop operation

Exiting the desktop operation using the taskbar in Windows.
1. Click the projector icon
on the taskbar while the desktop is displayed.
The pop-up menu appears.
2. Click [Exit].
Desktop Control Utility 1.0 quits
3. Click anywhere on the screen.
4. Click again anywhere on the screen.
The menu appears.
5. Click [Source] and then click any other source than [LAN].
The menu turns off.
55
5. Using the Viewer

Making the Most out of the Viewer Function
Features
You can view presentation data and play images on the projector. A PC card is used to view presentation data prepared on the computer and to play images projected with the projector.
The Viewer feature allows you to view slides stored on a PC memory card (referred to as PC card in this manual) or
USB memory on the projector. Even if no computer is available, presentations can be conducted simply with the
projector. This feature is convenient for holding presentations at meetings and in offices, as well as for playing images
taken on digital cameras.
NOTE:
To use the Viewer, first you need to create presentation materials on your PC (JPEG, BMP, GIF*1, PNG*1, Index*2 files).
For creating presentation materials using the Ulead Photo Explore 8.0, see the supplied "User Supportware 3 Users Guide" or Online help in Ulead Photo Explorer 8.0.
*1 Both PNG and GIF format support non-interlaced images only.
*2 Index file is a file created using the Ulead Photo Explore 8.0 contained on the supplied NEC User Supportware 3 CD-ROM.
See the supplied User Supportware 3 Users Guide for installing the Ulead Photo Explore 8.0 on your computer.
Easy to use
Presentations can be started immediately simply by inserting a PC card or USB memory (not supplied)
Easy slide switching
Remote control operation
Jumping to a list of slides or any specific slide
Simple utility software (for computer)
Ulead Photo Explore 8.0SE Basic operable on Windows XP/Windows 2000.
Slides can be created by capturing the currently displayed image.
Control screen for displaying lists of slides and editing.
Microsoft, Windows and PowerPoint are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
56
5. Using the Viewer
Operating the Viewer Function from the Projector (playback)

This section describes the operation for showing slides created using the Viewer function with the projector. It is also
possible to make slides directly from the images projected with the projector.
Projecting slides (Viewer)

Preparation: Store JPEG or BMP files (JPEG, BMP, non-interlaced GIF or non-interlaced PNG files) in a PC card or
USB memory inserted into your PC.
1. Insert a PC card into the PC card slot or USB memory into the USB port of the projector.
2. Press the VIEWER button on the remote control or select the [Viewer] from the source list.
An image stored in the PC card or USB memory will be displayed.
3. Press the MENU button to display the Viewer menu.
The Viewer menu will appear when you press the MENU button on the remote control or the projector cabinet.
The Viewer menu includes the following commands:

Play ................... Plays back automatically or manually depending on the setting in Options. This allows you to move on to the
next slide when [Manual] is selected in the [Play Mode].
Stop ................... This allows you to stop Auto Play while you are playing back and to resume playing from the selected slide
or folder when [Auto] is selected in the [Play Mode].
Thumbnails ........ Displays a list of thumbnails of Graphic files stored in the PC card or USB memory inserted into the projector.
Logo .................. Replace the default background logo with another logo in JPEG, BMP, non-interlaced GIF or non-interlaced
PNG format.
Options .............. Displays the Viewer setting options.
4. Select [Play] and then press the ENTER button to display the first slide or to start playing slides automatically.
57
5. Using the Viewer

Viewer Window Elements
Thumbnail/file name
Number of files
List of folders
Slot 1
RECYCLED
PICTURE
3 Files
0000.jpg
0001.jpg
0002.jpg
Scroll bar
Highlight
Cursor (orange)
Information
1/3 0000.jpg
60KB
08/21/2005 06/29 263KB

select : ENTER
Highlight .................................. Indicates the selected folder or drive.

List of folders .......................... Indicates folders contained on a PC card or USB memory.
Information .............................. Indicates information of the selected file or folder.
Folder: folder name, creation date (month/day/year), creation time (hour/minute).
File: slide number/number of displayable slides in a folder, file name, creation date (month/day/
year), creation time (hour/minute), file size.
Number of files ........................ Indicates number of displayable slides in the selected folder. The maximum number of images
recognized as slides within one directory is about 1000.
Thumbnail/file name ................ Indicates thumbnails and names contained in a folder.
Cursor ..................................... Indicates the selected slide.
Scroll bar ................................. Used to view folders or files not visible in the window.
58
5. Using the Viewer

Setting Option for Viewer
Play Mode:
Manual .................. Views a slide manually when the Viewer source is selected.
Auto ...................... Plays back slides automatically when the Viewer source is selected.
Interval:
Specifies interval time between 5 and 300 seconds.
Start:
Specifies start screen when the Viewer source is selected.
Show Thumbnails:
Selecting the Viewer source will display a list of thumbnails of graphic files stored in the PC card or USB memory
when [On] is selected.
[On]
[Off]
Slot 1
RECYCLED
PICTURE
0000.jpg
1/3 0000.jpg
Slot 1
RECYCLED
PICTURE
3 Files
0001.bmp
0000.jpg
0002.jpg
1/3 0000.jpg
08/21/2005 06/29 263KB
60KB
select : ENTER
3 Files
0002.jpg
08/21/2005 06/29 263KB
60KB
select : ENTER
folder : EXIT
0001.jpg
folder :
EXIT
Sort:
Rearranges the slides or thumbnails by name, extension, date or size.
NOTE: This setting is not available for the following folders:

* Folders created with the "Output Viewer" feature of Ulead Photo Explorer 8.0 or with Viewer PPT Converter 3.0
OK/Cancel:
To close the Options menu with saving changes, select [OK] and press the ENTER button.
To close the Options menu without saving changes, select [Cancel] and press the ENTER button.
59
5. Using the Viewer

Exiting Viewer
To exit Viewer, switch to another input such as Computer 1, Computer 2, Computer 3 (LT380 only), Component, Video,
S-Video or LAN.
* To switch to another input, there are two ways:
* Press the COMPUTER 1, COMPUTER 2, COMPUTER 3, COMPONENT, VIDEO, S-VIDEO or LAN button on
the remote control.
* Press the MENU button on the remote control to display the Viewer menu. Press the MENU button again to
display the main menu and select the input from the [Source] submenu.
With this function it is possible to switch directly to a slide when the picture of a VCR or computer is being projected.
Example: When conducting presentations using a combination of slides and moving pictures from a VCR, etc., it is
possible to switch from a Viewer slide to the video picture then back to the Viewer slide simply by using the Viewer
button.
NOTE: Even if you switch the current Viewer source to another source, the current slide is retained. When you return back to the
Viewer, you will get the slide that has been retained.
Viewing Digital Images

Digital images can be played with the Viewer if the following conditions are met:
If the image can be stored on an MS-DOS format PC card.
If the image can be stored in a format supported by the Viewer. With the Viewer, images on the card are searched
for in directories and images in JPEG, BMP, non-interlaced GIF or non-interlaced PNG format are recognized as
slides.
NOTE: The maximum number of images recognized as slides within one directory is about 1000.
60
5. Using the Viewer
Changing Background Logo

You can change the default background logo using the Viewer feature.
NOTE: File size must be 256KB or less. File formats other than JPEG, BMP, non-interlaced GIF or non-interlaced PNG are not
available.
Preparation: Store JPEG or BMP files (JPEG, BMP, non-interlaced GIF or non-interlaced PNG files) in a PC card or
USB memory inserted into your PC and insert the PC card into the projector's slot or USB memory into the projector's
USB port.
1. Press the VIEWER button on the remote control to display an image.

3. Use the button to select [Thumbnails] and then press the ENTER button.
The Thumbnail screen will be displayed.
Slot 1
RECYCLED
PICTURE
3 Files
0000.jpg
1/3 0000.jpg
0001.jpg
0002.jpg
08/21/2005 06/29 263KB
60KB
select : ENTER
folder :
EXIT
NOTE: To change highlight from the Thumbnails screen (right window) to a directory tree (left window) , press the EXIT button. To
return highlight to the Thumbnails screen, press the ENTER button.
4. Use button to select a file (slide) for your background logo.
6. Use the button to select [Logo] and then press the ENTER button.
A confirmation dialog box will be displayed.
7. Use the button to select [Yes] and press the ENTER button. This completes changing a logo for the
background.
*
Once you have changed the background from the NEC logo to another, you cannot return the logo to background
even by using [Reset]. To put the NEC logo back in the background logo, repeat the above steps. The NEC logo file
is included on the supplied User Supportware 3 CD-ROM (/Logo/NEC_BB_X.JPG).
61
6. Using On-Screen Menu

Using the Menus
1. Press the MENU button on the remote control or the projector cabinet to display the menu.
Submenu
Submenu window
Main menu
Currently available
buttons
NOTE: The commands such as , ENTER, EXIT in the gray bar show available buttons for your operation.
2. Press the SELECT buttons on the remote control or the projector cabinet to display the submenu.
3. Press the ENTER button on the remote control or the projector cabinet to highlight the top item or the first
tab.
4. Use the SELECT buttons on the remote control or the projector cabinet to select the item you want to
adjust or set.
You can use the SELECT buttons on the remote control or the projector cabinet to select the tab you
want.
NOTE: You can select a tab only when the tab color is orange.
5. Press the ENTER button on the remote control or the projector cabinet to display the submenu window.
6. Adjust the level or turn the selected item on or off by using the SELECT buttons on the remote
control or the projector cabinet.
Changes are stored until you adjust it again.
7. Repeat steps 2 -6 to adjust an additional item, or press the EXIT button on the remote control or the
projector cabinet to quit the menu display.
NOTE: When a menu or message is displayed, several lines of information may be lost, depending on the signal or settings.
62
Menu tree
Menu
Source
Adjust
Basic menu items are indicated by

shaded area.
Item
Computer 1, Computer 2, Computer 3 (LT380 only), Component, Video, S-Video, Viewer, LAN, Entry List
Picture
Preset
1 to 6
Detail Settings
Reference
Gamma Correction
Color Temperature
White Balance
Color Correction
Image Options
Video
Setup
Sound
Basic
Brightness
Contrast
Sharpness
Color
Hue
Reset
Clock
Phase
Horizontal Position
Vertical Position
Blanking
Overscan
Aspect Ratio
3D Y/C Separation
Vertical Enhancer
Deinterlace
Telecine
Keystone
Cornerstone
Wall Color
Lamp mode
Menu Mode
Language
Menu
Security
Color Select
Display Select
Display Time
Background
Control Panel Lock
Menu Lock
Logo Lock
Security
High-Bright, Presentation, Video, Movie,

Graphic, sRGB
Dynamic, Natural, Black Detail
5000, 6500, 7800, 8500, 9300, 10500
Brightness RGB, Contrast RGB
Red, Green, Blue,Yellow, Magenta,
Cyan
Manual, Auto
Top, Bottom, Left, Right

0%, 5%, 10%
4:3
4:3, Letterbox, Wide Screen, Crop
16:9
4:3 Window, Letterbox, Wide Screen, 4:3 Fill
Off, On: Still, Normal, Movie
Off, 1, 2, 3
Off, On: Still, Normal, Movie
Off, On: 2-2/2-3 Auto, 2-2 On, 2-3 On
Volume, Bass, Treble, Balance, 3D Surround
Auto, Manual
Off, Blackboard, Blackboard (Gray), Light yellow, Light green, Light blue,
Sky blue, Light rose, Pink
Normal, Eco
Basic Menu, Advanced Menu
English, Deutsch, Franais, Italiano, Espaol, Svenska, Suomi, Norsk,
Nederlands, Trke, Polski,
,
, Magyar, Portugus,
Cestina ,
, Dansk,
,
,
Color1 to 5, Monochrome
Source: On, Off / Message: On, Off
Manual, Auto 5 sec, Auto 15 sec, Auto 45 sec
Blue, Black, Logo
Off, On
Off, On
Off, On
Off, On, Keyword, Use Protect Key, Drive, Read, Register, Delete
63
Menu
Setup
Installation
Item
Orientation
Screen
LAN Mode
Options
Projector Name
Communication Speed
Standby Mode
Auto Adjust
Auto Start
Power Management
Fan Mode
Default Source Select
Signal Select
Tools
Information
Reset
Usage Time
Source Page1
Source Page2
LAN Built-in
LAN PC Card
LAN Wireless
Version
Color System
S-Video Mode Select
OUT Terminal
ChalkBoard
Off Timer
Mouse
Desktop Front, Ceiling Rear, Desktop Rear, Ceiling Front

Screen Type: 4:3, 16:9 / Position
Built-in
PC Card
Advanced: Network Type, WEP
Domain
Mail
4800, 9600, 19200, 38400
Normal, Power-Saving
Off, Normal, Fine
Off, On
Off, 0:05, 0:10, 0:20, 0:30
Auto, High
Last, Auto, Select (Computer1, Computer2, Computer3 (LT380 only),
Component, Video, S-Video, Viewer, LAN)
Computer1
RGB/Component, RGB, Componet, Scart
Computer2
RGB/Component, RGB, Componet
Component
Component, Video
Component (Video), Video, S-Video
Off, S2
Last, Computer1, Computer2, Component
Off, 0:30, 1:00, 2:00, 4:00, 8:00, 12:00, 16:00

Mouse Pointer: Pointer 1 to 9 / Button: Right Hand, Left Hand
Sensitivity: Fast, Medium, Slow
Lamp Life Remaining, Lamp Hours Used, Filter Hours Used, Projector Hours Used
Input Terminal, Signal Type, Video Type, Source Name, Entry No.
Horizontal Frequency, Vertical Frequency, Sync Type, Sync Polarity, Scan Type
IP Address, Subnet Mask, Gateway, MAC Address
IP Address, Subnet Mask, Gateway, MAC Address
SSID, Mode, WEP, Channel, Signal Level
Firmware, Data
Current Signal, All Data, All Data (Including Entry List), Clear Lamp Hours, Clear Filter Hours
64
Menu Elements
Slide bar
Tab
Highlight
Close button
Help button
Radio button
Check box
Solid triangle
OK button
Cancel button
Menu windows or dialog boxes typically have the following elements:

Highlight ................ Indicates the selected menu or item.
Solid triangle ......... Indicates further choices are available. A highlighted triangle indicates the item is active.
Tab ........................ Indicates a group of features in a dialog box. Selecting on any tab brings its page to the front.
Radio button ......... Use this round button to select an option in a dialog box.
Check box ............. Place a checkmark in the square box to turn the option On.
Slide bar ................ Indicates settings or the direction of adjustment.
OK button .............. Press to confirm your setting. You will return to the previous menu.
Cancel button ........ Press to cancel your setting. You will return to the previous menu.
Close button .......... Click to close the window and saving changes. (USB mouse only)
Help button ........... Indicates that help about that feature is available (USB mouse only). Press the HELP button on the remote
control to display help.
65
Menu Descriptions & Functions [Source]
Computer 1 and 2
Selects the computer connected to your COMPUTER 1 or COMPUTER 2 input connector signal.
NOTE: An optional component cable (Component V or ADP-CV1 cable) is needed for a component signal.
Computer 3 (LT380 only)

Selects the computer connected to your COMPUTER 3 (DVI-D) connector.
Component
Selects what is connected to your COMPONENT IN (Y, Cb/Pb, Cr/Pr).
Video
Selects what is connected to your VIDEO input-VCR, laser disc player, DVD player or document camera.
S-Video
Selects what is connected to your S-VIDEO input-VCR, DVD player, or laser disc player.
NOTE: A frame may freeze for a brief period of time when a video is played back in fast-forward or fast-rewind with a Video or SVideo source.
Viewer
This feature enables you to make presentations using a PC card that contains captured images and slides created
with the exclusive Photo Explore 8.0 for NEC contained on the CD-ROM. See the supplied NEC Software Utility
Installation Guide for installing the Photo Explore 8.0 for NEC.
See page 56 for viewing slides.
LAN
Selects a signal from the LAN port (RJ-45) or the NEC optional wireless LAN card plugged into the projector's card
slot.
66

[Entry List]
Use the SELECT buttons on your remote control or the projector cabinet to select the signal and press the
ENTER button on the remote control or the projector cabinet to display the [Entry Edit Command] screen.
Entering the Currently Projected Signal into the Entry List

1. Display the Entry List.
2. Use the SELECT or button on your remote control or the projector cabinet to select any number and
press the ENTER button on the remote control or the projector cabinet to display the [Entry Edit Command] screen.
3. Use the SELECT or button to select [Store] and press the ENTER button.
Using the [Entry List]

Making any adjustments to the current picture will automatically register its adjustments to the [Entry List]. The registered signal can be loaded any time from the [Entry List].
NOTE: Up to 100 presets can be registered except settings on the Picture.
67

[Entry Edit Command]
You can edit signals on the [Entry List].

Load ...................... Enables you to select a signal from the list.
Store ..................... Enables you to store the currently projected signal.
Cut ........................ Enables you to remove a selected signal from the list and place it on the "clipboard" in the projector.
Copy ...................... Enables you to copy a selected signal from the list and place it on the "clipboard" in the projector.
Paste ..................... Enables you to paste the signal placed on the "clipboard" to any other line of the list.
Edit ........................ Enables you to change source names.
Source Name:
Enter a signal name. Up to 18 alphanumeric characters can be used.
Input Terminal:
Change the input terminal.
Lock:
Set so that the selected signal cannot be deleted when "All Delete" is executed. After executing [Lock], the
changes cannot be saved.
Skip:
Set so that the selected signal will be skipped during auto search.
When complete, select OK and press ENTER. To exit without storing the setting, select Cancel. Select [Source
Name] and press ENTER to display the Source Name Edit window. You can change source name on this
window. Press to display the software keyboard, which you can enter alphanumeric characters. See page
117 for the key function of the software keyboard.
All Delete ............... This feature enables you to delete all the registered signals in the Entry List.
The following buttons are not available for the currently projecting signals:
1) The Cut and Paste buttons on the [Entry Edit Command] screen
2) The Input Terminal button on the [Entry Edit] screen
NOTE: When all the signals in the [Entry List] are deleted, the currently projected signal will be also deleted except locked signals.
68
Menu Descriptions & Functions [Adjust]
[Picture]
[Preset]
This option allows you to adjust neutral tint for yellow, cyan or magenta. There are six factory presets optimized for
various types of images, you can set user adjustable settings.
69

[Detail Settings]
This will provide you with three pages of menus that provide more detailed settings.
[General]
Selecting Reference Setting [Reference]
This feature allows you to use color correction or gamma values as reference data to optimize for various types of
images. You can select one of the following six settings.
High-Bright ........ Recommended for the use in a brightly lit room.
Presentation ...... Recommended for making a presentation using a PowerPoint file.
Video ................. Recommended for regular picture such as TV program.
Movie ................ Recommended for movies.
Graphic .............. Recommended for graphics.
sRGB ................. Standard color values.
Selecting Gamma Correction Mode [Gamma Correction]
Each mode is recommended for:
Dynamic ............ Creates a high-contrast picture.
Natural ............... Natural reproduction of the picture.
Black Detail ........ Emphasizes detail in dark areas of the picture.
Adjusting Color Temperature [Color Temperature]
This feature adjusts the color temperature using the slide bar.
Move the slide bar to the right to increase color temperature (more blue); to the left to decrease color temperature
(more red).
NOTE:
When [Presentation] or [High-Bright] is selected in [Reference], this function is not available.
When [White Balance] settings has been changed, the color temperature value on screen does not reflect the real color
temperature.
[White Balance]
Adjusting White Balance [White Balance]
This allows you to adjust the white balance. Brightness for each color (RGB) is used to adjust the black level of the
screen; Contrast for each color (RGB) to adjust the white level of the screen.
[Color Correction]
Selecting Color Correction [Color Correction]
Adjusts red, green, blue, yellow, magenta and cyan each independently to correct the tint of the whole screen.
70

[Brightness]
Adjusts the brightness level or the back raster intensity.
[Contrast]
Adjusts the intensity of the image according to the incoming signal.
You have two options: Manual and Auto.
NOTE: The Auto Contrast function will not work when the on-screen menu or a message is displayed
[Sharpness]
Controls the detail of the image for Video (not valid for RGB and digital signals).
[Color]
Increases or decreases the color saturation level (not valid for RGB and digital signals).
[Hue]
Varies the color level from +/- green to +/-blue. The red level is used as reference. This adjustment is only valid for
Video, Component and TV standard inputs (not valid for RGB and digital signals).
[Reset]
The settings and adjustments for [Picture] will be returned to the factory settings with the exception of the following;
Preset numbers and [Reference] within the [Preset] screen.
The settings and adjustments under [Detail Settings] within the [Preset] screen that are not currently selected will not
be reset.
71

[Image Options]
Adjusting Clock and Phase [Clock/Phase]

This allows you to manually adjust Clock and Phase.
Clock ..................... Use this item to fine tune the computer image or to remove any vertical banding that might appear. This
function adjusts the clock frequencies that eliminate the horizontal banding in the image.
This adjustment may be necessary when you connect your computer for the first time.
Phase .................... Use this item to adjust the clock phase or to reduce video noise, dot interference or cross talk. (This is
evident when part of your image appears to be shimmering.)
Use [Phase] only after the [Clock] is complete.
72

Adjusting Horizontal/Vertical Position [Horizontal/Vertical Position]
Adjusts the image location horizontally and vertically.
Masking Unwanted Area [Blanking]

This feature allows you to mask any unwanted area of the screen image.
Selecting Overscan Percentage [Overscan]

Select overscan percentage (0%, 5% and 10%) for signal.
Projected image
Overscaned by 10%
73

Selecting Aspect Ratio [Aspect Ratio]
Screen Type 4:3
Screen Type 16:9
Aspect Ratio allows you to select the best Aspect mode to display your source image.
When screen type 4:3 is selected for the source, the following selections will display:
4:3 ......................... Standard 4:3 aspect
Letter Box .............. Reduced to display the true aspect with black borders on top and bottom
Wide Screen .......... Left & Right stretched with black borders on top and bottom
Crop ...................... Left & Right stretched. Left & Right sides cut. Available for 4:3 only.
When screen type 16:9 is selected for the source, the following selections will display:
4:3 Window ........... Reduced to display the true aspect with black borders on right and left
Letter Box .............. Standard 16:9 aspect
Wide Screen .......... Left and right stretched to display the true aspect
4:3 Fill ................... Stretched to display in 16:9 aspect ratio
NOTE: You can adjust image position vertically for a source with black borders on top and bottom. ( page 85)
NOTE: Please note that using this projector for the purpose of commercial gain or the attraction of public attention in a venue such
as a coffee shop or hotel and employing compression or expansion of the screen image with a [Aspect Ratio] or [Screen] setting
may raise concern about the infringement of copyrights which are protected by copyright law.
NOTE: During 3D Reform adjustment, [Aspect Ratio] may not be available.
Should this happen, first reset the 3D Reform data and then do setting again. Second repeat the 3D Reform adjustment.
Changing the aspect ratio can limit 3D Reform in its adjustable range.
Input
Signal
Screen
Type
4:3
Letterbox
4:3 Screen
4:3
Letterbox
16:9 Screen
4:3 Window
4:3 Fill
Squeeze
Wide Screen
Crop
Wide Screen
Letterbox
74

[Video]
Turning On/Off 3 Dimension Separation [3D Y/C Separation]

This function turns on or off the 3 dimensional separation feature.
Off ............................... Turns off the function.
On
Still ................. Recommended for a still image.

Normal ............ The projector detects and corrects the image automatically.
Movie .............. Recommended for a moving image.
TIP: When the image is poor quality, turn on [3D Y/C Separate]. If there is still poor quality, try turning off [Deinterlace] or try turning
off [3D Y/C Separate] and select [Normal] in [Deinterlace].
NOTE: This feature is available for NTSC3.58 of Video signal only.
Setting Vertical Edges [Vertical Enhancer]

This function enhances the vertical edges around objects in the image.
NOTE: This function is not available for an RGB, HDTV and Component signal.
Selecting Interlace or Deinterlace [Deinterlace]

This function allows you to select between "Interlace" and "Deinterlace".
Off ............................... Project the interlaced signal.
On
Still ................. Select when a still image is displayed. When this option is selected for a moving image, jitter or artifacts
can be seen.
Normal ............ The projector automatically determines a still or moving image to display a clear picture. If selecting
[Normal] causes excess jitter or artifacts, select [Movie].
Movie .............. Select when a moving image is displayed. This will eliminate jitter and artifacts in a moving image. This
option is available only for SDTV.
Setting Telecine Mode [Telecine]

Use 3:2 pull down correction to eliminate jitter and artifacts in video.
NOTE: This feature is available only when [Deinterlace] is turned on and an SDTV signal is selected.
Off ..................................... Turns off the Telecine mode.
On
2-2/2-3 Auto ......... Detects pull-down correction method.

2-2 On .................. Uses 2-2 pull-down correction method
2-3 On .................. Uses 2-3 pull-down correction method
75

[Sound]
Controlling Sound [Volume/Bass/Treble/Balance]

Adjusts the volume, bass and treble level, left and right balance of the projector speaker and AUDIO OUT (Stereo Mini
Jack).
Enabling 3D Surround [3D Surround]

Turn on or off the 3D surround effect.
If the AUDIO OUT stereo mini jack of the projector is connected to an external equipment, adjusting the sound on the
external equipment can cause sound to be distorted or cracked, depending on the bass, treble or 3D Surround
adjustment. If this happnes, return the adjustments of the projector to the factory default (Bass:0, Treble: 0, 3D Surround: 0).
76
Menu Descriptions & Functions [Setup]
[Basic]
Selecting Keystone Mode [Keystone]

This feature allows you to correct keystone distortion manually or automatically.
Selecting this item will display the Keystone setting menu.
Auto ...................... This feature allows the projector to detect its tilt and correct vertical distortion automatically.
Manual .................. You can correct vertical distortion manually from the menu.
Changes will be saved even when you turn off the projector.
Adjust .................... You can display the Keystone screen. ( page 29)
NOTE: When [Cornerstone] is selected, [Adjust] is not available.
Selecting Cornerstone Mode [Cornerstone]
This option allows you to correct trapezoidal distortion.

Selecting this item will display the Cornerstone adjustment screen. ( page 38)
NOTE: When [Keystone] is selected, [Cornerstone] is not available.
77

Using the Wall Color Correction [Wall Color]
This function allows for quick adaptive color correction in applications where the screen material is not white.
The following nine options are available.
Setting Lamp Mode to Normal or Eco [Lamp Mode]

This feature enables you to select two brightness modes of the lamp: Normal and Eco modes. The lamp life can be
extended by using the Eco mode. Selecting Eco mode decreases fan noise compared to in Normal mode.
Normal Mode ........ This is the default setting (100% Brightness).
Eco Mode .............. Select this mode to increase the lamp life (80% Brightness).
NOTE: If the projector is overheated in Normal mode, there may be a case where the Lamp mode will be forced into the Eco mode to
protect the projector. This mode is called "forced Eco mode".
During "forced Eco mode" cannot be changed from the menu.When the projector is in forced Eco mode, the picture brightness
decreases.
When the projector comes back to normal temperature, the Lamp mode returns to Normal mode.
The LAMP indicator's steady green light indicates the lamp is in Eco mode.
Selecting Menu Mode [Menu Mode]

This feature allows you to select two menu modes: Basic Menu and Advanced Menu.
Basic Menu ........... This is the basic menu that contains minimum essentials of menus and commands.
Advanced Menu ..... This is the menu that contains all the available menus and commands.
Selecting Menu Language [Language]

You can choose one of 21 languages for on-screen instructions.
78

[Menu]
Selecting Menu Color [Color Select]

You can choose a color for the menu.
Turning On / Off Source Display and Message [Display Select]

Source ................... This option turns on or off input name display such as Computer 1, Computer 2, Computer 3 (LT380 only),
Component, Video, and No Input to be displayed in the top right corner of the screen.
Message ................ This option turns on and off messages. Even though selecting [Off], the following message will appear.
* The lamp has reached the end of its usable life. Please replace the lamp. Press the EXIT button and the
message will disappear.
* Projector is locked When unlocking the projector security, the message will disappear.
Selecting Menu Display Time [Display Time]

This option allows you to select how long the projector waits after the last touch of a button to turn off the menu. The
preset choices are [Manual], [Auto 5 sec], [Auto 15 sec], and [Auto 45 sec]. The [Auto 45 sec] is the factory preset.
Selecting a Color or Logo for Background [Background]

Use this feature to display a blue/black screen or logo when no signal is available. The default background is blue. You
can change the logo screen using the Viewer feature. ( pages 61)
[Security]
Disabling the Cabinet Buttons [Control Panel Lock]

This option turns on or off the Control Panel Lock function.
NOTE:
This Control Panel Lock does not affect the remote control functions.
When the control panel is locked, pressing and holding the EXIT button on the projector cabinet for about 10 seconds will change
the setting to [Off].
79

Setting a Password [Menu Lock] / [Logo Lock]
A password can be set for your projector to avoid operation by an unauthorized person.
When [Menu Lock] is set, changing the menu from Basic to Advanced will display the Password input screen.
When [Logo Lock] is set, doing any one of the following two operations will display the Password input screen.
Changing the background either from or to [Logo]
Changing the logo data in a PC card or USB memory.
[Entry]
To assign your password:
NOTE: Up to 15 alphanumeric characters can be assigned.

1. Type a password.
Select [On] and press the ENTER button.
The [Enter the Password] screen will be displayed.
Make sure that is highlighted and then press the ENTER button.
The Software keyboard appears. Use the Software keyboard to type a password and then highlight [OK] on
the [Enter the Password] screen and press the ENTER button.
The [Confirm Password] screen will be displayed.
2. Type the same password again. Highlight [OK] on the [Enter the Password] screen and press the ENTER
button.
Your password will be assigned.
[Delete] :
To delete your password:
1. Select [Off] and press the ENTER button. The [Current Password] screen will be displayed.
2. Use the Software keyboard to type your password. Highlight [OK] on the [Current Password] screen and
then press the ENTER button.
Your password will be deleted.
80

[Security]
The Security function enables you to protect your projector so that the projector will not project a signal unless you
enter a keyword. There is also an option to lock the projector by using a registered PC card* or USB memory* as a
protect key. Once you have registered your PC card as a protect key, you are required to insert the registered PC card
into the PC card slot of the projector each time you turn on the projector. You can enable the Security function by using
a keyword only.
The projector does not support NTFS formatted flash memory card or USB memory device.
To format your flash memory card or USB memory device in your computer, refer to the document or help file that
comes with your Windows.
On/Off .................... This turns the Security function on or off.
Keyword ................ Enter an appropriate keyword when you use the Security function. (Up to 10 characters can be used.) The
Security function is available only when your keyword is entered.
Use Protect key ..... Check this box to lock your projector when using a PC card. To use a keyword without a PC card, do not
check this box.
Drive ...................... Switches between PC Card slot and USB port (type A).
Read ...................... Reads data from a PC card.
Register ................. Registers data from the PC card. The Security function is not available unless at least one PC card is
registered. (if the [Use Protect key] check box is selected) Up to 5 PC cards can be registered.
Delete .................... Deletes data of a registered PC card.
To set up a keyword to enable the Security function without using a registered PC card.
1. Use the SELECT button to select [Keyword] and use the software keyboard to enter a keyword.
NOTE: Please make a note of your keyword.
2. Use the SELECT button to select [On] and use the SELECT button to select [OK], then the Security
function will be enabled.
An [Are you sure?] message will appear. Use the SELECT button to select [Yes] and press the ENTER
button.
The Security function takes effect.
81

To register a PC card as a protect key.
1. Insert a PC card into the PC card slot of the projector.

2. Use the SELECT button to select [Use Protect Key] and press the ENTER button.
3. Use the SELECT button to select [Read] and press the ENTER button.
Data of the PC card will be read into the projector.
4. Use the SELECT button to select [Register] and press the ENTER button.
Downloaded data will be registered and be displayed in the list window.
5. Use the SELECT button to select [Keyword] and use the software keyboard to enter a keyword.
NOTE: To use a PC card as a protect key, you must also set up a keyword. Please make a note of your keyword.
This completes registration of your PC card.
To enable Security, use the SELECT button to select [On] and use the SELECT button to select [OK] and
Security function will be enabled. An [Are you sure?] message will appear. Use the SELECT button and press the
ENTER button.
The Security function takes effect.
To turn on the projector when Security is enabled (when using your keyword only).
1. Press and hold the POWER button for a minimum of two seconds.
The projector will be turned on and display a message to the effect that the projector is security-protected.
The Release Code input screen will be displayed.
3. Enter your keyword in the Release Code input screen.
You can view the projected image.
NOTE: Do not forget your keyword. However, if you forget your keyword, NEC or your dealer will provide you with your Release
Code. See more information at the end of this section.
To turn on the projector when Security is enabled (when using PC card as a protect key).
1. Insert your registered PC card into the PC card slot.

The projector will turn on and then recognize the PC card. Once the image has been projected, it will stay
on without the PC card.
The security disable mode is maintained until the main power is turned off (by setting the main power switch to
"O" or unplugging the power cord). In the following cases you will be asked to check the protect key or input the
keyword:
(1)When [OK] is selected at an image for which security is set and the power is turned off then back on
(2)When the main power is turned off then back on while the security function is enabled
(3)When you attempt to display an image for which security is set while the security function is enabled
Blanks (spaces) cannot be used in the Keyword section.
82

To delete PC card data you registered.
1. Use the SELECT button to select [Delete] and use the SELECT button to select the list window.
2. Use the SELECT button to select the PC card data you wish to delete.
3. Press the SELECT button to select [Delete] and press the ENTER button.
The PC card data will be deleted.
If you've lost your registered PC card, proceed as follows:
NOTE: NEC or your dealer will provide you with your Release Code in exchange for your registered keyword and Request Code. See
more information at the end of this section.
The projector will be turned on and display a message to the effect that the projector is security-protected.
The Release Code input screen will be displayed as well as your Request Code (24 alphanumeric characters).
3. Enter your Release Code in the Release Code Input screen.
The projector will turn on.
* If the projector is turned on by entering the Release Code, your Security will be disabled.
NOTE:
Some types of PC cards cannot be registered as your protect key.
It is recommended that you register two or more PC cards in case you lose or damage your registered PC card.
Formatting your registered PC card will disable your protect key function.
NOTE:
Europe : http://www.nec-europe.com/
83

[Installation]
Selecting Projector Orientation [Orientation]

This reorients your image for your type of projection. The options are: desktop front projection, ceiling rear projection,
desktop rear projection, and ceiling front projection.
Desktop front
Ceiling rear
Desktop rear
Ceiling front
NOTE: Selecting one of the other options than [Desktop Front] will make the [Auto Keystone] unavailable.
84

Selecting Aspect Ratio and Position for Screen [Screen]
Screen Type ........... Select one of two options: 4:3 Screen or 16:9 Screen for the screen to be used. See also [Aspect Ratio].
( page 74)
Position ................. This feature allows you to adjust the vertical position of the image when 16:9 has been selected for the
screen type.
When 16:9 has been selected there is black area above and below the image.
NOTE: This option is available only when [16:9] is selected in [Screen Type].
NOTE: During 3D Reform adjustment, [Screen Type] and [Screen Position] may not be available. To make available, first reset the 3D
Reform data and then do settings again. Secondly repeat the 3D Reform adjustment. Changing [Screen Type] and [Screen Position]
can limit 3D Reform in its adjustable range.
85

[LAN Mode]
Setting LAN Mode
This feature allows you to set various setting items when the projector is used on your network.
CAUTION
Consult with your network administrator about these settings.
Connect a LAN cable (Eathernet cable) to the LAN port (RJ-45). ( page 19)
For wireless LAN connection, use the NEC optional wireless LAN card (NWL-100*).
* Last digit of the model code varies depending on which country you live in. For more information, visit our
Website.
To use wireless LAN, insert the NEC optional wireless LAN card (NWL-100*) into the PC Card slot.
( "Inserting and Removing a PC Card on page 21)
Always insert or remove the wireless LAN card when the main power is turned off. Failure to do so may
cause projector malfunction or damage to the wireless LAN card. If the projector will not work correctly, turn
off the projector, wait 30 seconds, and turn it back on.
Hints on How to Set Up LAN Connection

To configure the projector to communicate on the network using the LAN port (RJ-45) or the optional wireless LAN
card:
1. Select the [Built-in] tab for the LAN port (RJ-45) or the [PC Card] tab for the optional wireless LAN card.
2. On the [Built-in] tab or the [PC Card] tab, select a number from the [Profiles] list for your LAN settings.
Two settings can be stored in memory for each the LAN port and the wireless LAN card respectively.
3. On the [Built-in] tab or the [PC Card] tab, turn on or off [DHCP], specify IP address, Subnet Mask,
Gateway and DNS Configuration. Select [OK] and press the ENTER button.
( page 87, 88)
To recall the settings from memory:
After selecting the [Built-in] tab or the [PC Card] tab, select the number from the [Profiles] list.
Select [OK] and press the ENTER button. ( page 87, 88)
To connect a DHCP server:
On the [Built-in] tab or the [PC Card] tab, select [DHCP] and press the ENTER button. A check mark will be placed.
Select again and press the ENTER button. The check box will be cleared.
When setting an IP address without using a DHCP server, clear the check box for [DHCP]. ( page 87, 88)
To set only for wireless LAN (Network Type and WEP):
1. On the [PC Card] tab, select [Profiles] and then select [Profile 1] or [Profile 2].
2. On the [PC Card] tab, select [Advanced] and press the ENTER button. The [Advanced] menu will be
displayed.
( page 89, 90)
To select a wireless LAN access point:
1. On the [PC Card] tab, select [Profiles] and then select [Profile 1] or [Profile 2].
2. On the [PC Card] tab, select [Advanced] and press the ENTER button.
3. On the Advanced menu, select [Network Type] [Site Survey] and press the ENTER button.
4. Select [Mode] and then select [Infrastructure].
( page 89)
86

To receive error messages or information on the remaining lamp life via e-mail:
1. On the [Mail] tab, select [Alert Mail] and press the ENTER button. A check mark will be placed.
2. Set [Sender's Address], [SMTP Server Name] and [Recipient's Address]. Select [OK] and press the
ENTER button.
( page 92)
To execute [Easy Connection] using Image Express Utility 2.0:
The [Easy Connection] is a mode that can abbreviate the troublesome LAN settings when using the Image Express Utility 2.0 and connecting the PC and projector via a wireless LAN.
The Image Express Utility 2.0 is contained on the supplied User Supportware 3 CD-ROM. To use [Easy Connection], select [PC Card] [Profiles] [Easy Connection]. ( page 88)
[Built-in]
Profiles (for LAN port [RJ-45]):

Up to two settings for the LAN port (RJ-45) can be stored in memory of the projector.
Select [Profile 1] or [Profile 2] and then do settings for [DHCP] and the other options.
After doing this, select [OK] and press the ENTER button. This will store your settings in memory.
DHCP:
Enabling this option automatically assigns an IP address to the projector from your DHCP server.
Disabling this option allows you to register the IP address or subnet mask number obtained from your network
administrator.
IP Address ............. Set your IP address. Press
to display the software keyboard and type in 12 numeric characters.
Subnet Mask ......... Set your subnet mask number. Press
Gateway ................ Set the default gateway of the network connected to the projector. Press
and type in 12 numeric characters.
to display the software keyboard
DNS Configuration Type in the IP address of DNS server on the network connected to the projector. Twelve numeric characters
are used.
Reconnect ............. Use this button to connect the projector to a network.
87

[PC Card]
Profiles (for PC Card):

To execute a wireless LAN easily using Image Express Utility 2.0, select [Easy Connection].
Up to two settings for the optional wireless LAN card can be stored in memory of the projector.
Select [Profile 1] or [Profile 2] and then do settings for [DHCP] and the other options.
After doing this, select [OK] and press the ENTER button. This will store your settings in memory.
DHCP:
Place a check mark to automatically assign an IP address to the projector from your DHCP server.
Clear this check box to register the IP address or subnet mask number obtained from your network administrator.
IP Address ............. Set your IP address. Press
Subnet Mask ......... Set your subnet mask number. Press
Gateway ................ Set the default gateway of the network connected to the projector. Press
and type in 12 numeric characters.
to display the software keyboard
DNS Configuration Type in the IP address of DNS server on the network connected to the projector. Twelve numeric characters
are used.
Advanced .............. Displays the Advanced menu which includes various setting for wireless LAN connection (Network Type
and WEP). See the Advanced menu later on.
Reconnect ............. Use this button to connect the projector to a network.
88

[Advanced] menu
[Network Type] (required for wireless only)
Site Survey:
Displays a list of available SSIDs for wireless LAN on site. Select an SSID which you can access.
To select an SSID, highlight [SSID] and use the SELECT to select [OK] and press the ENTER button.
: access point
: Ad Hoc PC
: WEP enabled
NOTE: You cannot connect to a device with the SSID for Channel 14 because it is not displayed in the list.
SSID (Network name):
Enter an identifier (SSID) for wireless LAN when selecting [Infrastructure] or [802.11 Ad Hoc] in [Mode]. Communication can be done only with equipment whose SSID matches SSID for your wireless LAN. Up to 32 alphanumeric characters can be used.
NOTE: To disable SSID, select a space (null) or [ANY] (All caps).

Mode:
Select communication method when using wireless LAN.
Infrastructure ........ Select this option when communicating with one or more equipment connected to the wireless or wired
LAN network via an access point.
802.11 Ad Hoc ...... Select this option when using the wireless LAN to directly communicate with a computer in peer-to-peer
mode. This is a method that meets the IEEE802.11 wireless standard.
NOTE: When in Ad Hoc mode, only 802.11b is available for communication method.
Data transmission speed in Ad Hoc mode is limited up to 11Mbps.
Channel:
Select a channel. There are 14 options available.
89

[WEP] (required for wireless only)
Select this option whether using the WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) key for encryption or not. To use encryption,
specify WEP key.
Disable .................. Will not turn on the encryption feature. Your communications may be monitored by someone.
64bit ...................... Uses 64-bit datalength for secure transmission.
128bit .................... Uses 128-bit datalength for secure transmission. This option will increase privacy and security when compared to use of 64-bit datalength encryption.
152bit .................... Uses 152-bit datalength for secure transmission. This option will increase privacy and security when compared to use of 128-bit datalength encryption.
NOTE:
The WEP settings must be the same as communication devices such as PC or access point in your wireless network.
When you use WEP, your image transmission speed will slow down.
Key Select:
Selects one key from the four keys below when selecting [64bit], [128bit] or [152bit] in [WEP].
Key1-4:
Enter encryption key when selecting [64bit], [128bit] or [152bit] in [WEP].
Up to 5 characters can be set in 64 bit, up to 13 characters in 128 bit and up to 16 characters in 152 bit. Press the
[HEX] button to change to [ASCII] to set the key in ASCII digit. You can toggle this button between [ASCII] and
[HEX].
The key can also be set in hexadecimal digit.
* Enter 0X(numeral and alphabet respectively) right in front of your key code.
* Hexadecimal uses 0 to 9 and A to F.
* When setting in a hexadecimal digit, up to 10 characters can be set in 64 bit, up to 26 characters in 128 bit and
up to 32 characters in 152 bit.
90

Using Software Keyboard to enter an encryption key
1. Select one of [Key 1], [Key 2], [Key 3] and [Key 4] and press the ENTER button.
The software keyboard will be displayed.
2. Use the SELECT button to select one key and press the ENTER button.
3. After finishing entering the WEP key, use the SELECT button to select [OK] and press the
ENTER button.
The software keyboard will disappear.
[Domain]
Host Name ............ Type in a hostname. Up to 60 alphanumeric characters can be used.

Domain Name ....... Type in domain name of the network connected to the projector. Up to 60 alphanumeric characters can be
used.
91

[Mail]
Alert Mail:
Checking this box enables Alert Mail feature.
This option notifies your computer of an error message via e-mail when using wireless or wired LAN. The error
message will be notified when the projector lamp has reached the end of its usable life or an error occurs in the
projector.
Sample of a message sent from the projector:
The lamp is at the end of its usable life. Please replace the lamp.
Projector Name: X X X X
Lamp Hours Used: xxxx [H]
Filter Hours Used: xxxx [H]
Projector Hours Used: xxxxxx [H]
Sender's Address:
Specify the senders address. Use the Software keyboard. Up to 60 alphanumeric and symbols characters can be
used. See "Using Software Keyboard" in Appendix for more details.
SMTP Server Name:
Type in the SMTP server name to be connected to the projector. Up to 60 alphanumeric characters can be used.
Recipient's Address 1 to 3:
Type in your recipient's address. Up to 60 alphanumeric and symbols characters can be used.
Test Mail:
Send a test mail to check if your settings are correct.
NOTE:
If you entered an incorrect address in a test, you may not receive an Alert mail. Should this happen, check if the Recipient's
Address is correctly set.
Unless any one of the [Sender's Address], [SMTP Server's Name] or [Recipient's Address 1-3] is selected, [Test Mail] is not
available.
Be sure to highlight [OK] and press the ENTER button before executing [Test Mail].
NOTE: To use the Mail Alert feature on wireless LAN connection, select [Infrastructure] for [Mode] in [Network Type].
92

[Projector Name]
Specify a unique projector name. Press
to display the software keyboard and type in. Up to 16 alphanumeric
characters can be used. After entering a name, select [OK] and press the ENTER button.
Using Software Keyboard
1 to 0 and
Characters ....... Use to type in password or keyword.
MODE .................... Selects one of three modes for alphabet and special characters.
SP ......................... Inserts a space
BS ......................... Deletes one character backward
.......................... Returns to the previous
.......................... Advances to the next
OK ......................... Executes the selection
Cancel ................... Cancels the selection
Selecting Communication Speed [Communication Speed]

This feature sets the baud rate of the PC Control port (Mini D-Sub 9 Pin). It supports data rates from 4800 to 38400
bps. The default is 38400 bps. Select the appropriate baud rate for your equipment to be connected (depending on the
equipment, a lower baud rate may be recommended for long cable runs).
Your selected communication speed will not be affected even when [Reset] is done from the menu.
Selecting Power-saving in [Standby Mode]

The projector has two standby modes: [Normal] and [Power-saving].
Power-saving mode is the mode that allows you to put the projector in the power-saving condition which consumes
less power than the Normal mode. The projector is preset for Normal mode at the factory.
NOTE:
The HTTP server functions are not available during Power-saving mode.
The MONITOR OUT function is not available during Power-saving mode.
Control through the PC Control connector and LAN mode is not available during Power-saving mode. For PC control and LAN
mode of the projector it is recommended to leave the projector in the Normal mode.
Normal mode ....................... Power indicator: Orange light/ Status indicator: Green light
Power-saving mode ............. Power indicator: Orange light/Status indicator: Off
( page 107)
93

[Options]
Setting Auto Adjust [Auto Adjust]

This feature sets the Auto Adjust mode so that the RGB image can be automatically or manually adjusted for noise
and stability. You can automatically make adjustment in two ways: [Normal] and [Fine].
Off ......................... The RGB image will not be automatically adjusted.
You can manually optimize the RGB image.
Normal .................. Default setting. The RGB image will be automatically adjusted. Normally select this option.
Fine ....................... Select this option if fine adjustment is needed. It takes more time to switch to the source than when [Normal] is selected.
Enabling Auto Start [Auto Start]

Turns the projector on automatically when the power cable is inserted into an active power outlet and the main power
switch is turned on. This eliminates the need to always use the POWER (ON/STANDBY) button on the remote control
or projector cabinet.
To use the Auto Start function, you must first press the main power switch to the position "On" before plugging the
power cable.
Enabling Power Management [Power Management]

When this option is selected you can enable the projector to automatically turn off (at the selected time: 5min., 10min.,
20min., 30min.) if there is no signal received by any input.
Enabling High Speed Fan Mode [Fan Mode]

This option allows you to select two modes for fan speed: Auto mode and High speed mode.
Auto ...................... The built-in fans automatically run at a variable speed according to the internal temperature.
High ...................... The built-in fans run at high speed.
When you wish to cool down the temperature inside the projector quickly, select [High].
NOTE: Select High mode if you continue to use the projector for consecutive days.
Selecting Default Source [Default Source Select]

You can set the projector to default to any one of its inputs each time
Last ....................... Sets the projector to default to the previous or last active input each time the projector is turned on.
Auto ...................... Searches for an active source in order of Computer1 Computer2 Computer3 (LT380 only) Component Video S-Video Viewer Computer1 and displays the first found source.
Select .................... Displays the selected source input every time the projector is started up. Select an input from the pull-down
menu.
94

Selecting Signal Format [Signal Select]
Computer 1/2
Allows you to set [Computer 1] and [Computer 2] to automatically detect an incoming RGB or component source
such as a computer or DVD player. However there may be some RGB and component signals that the projector is
unable to detect. In this case, select [RGB] or [Component].
Select [Scart] in COMPUTER 1 for the European Scart signal.
Component
Select a signal type from the COMPONENT (Y, Cb/Pb, Cr/Pr) connectors.
Component ............ Selects a component signal.
Video ..................... Selects a component signal such as Y/Cb/Cr or Y/Pb/Pr.
NOTE: When using the "Y" connector of the COMPONENT connectors to display a Video signal, select "Video".
Selecting [Color System]

This feature enables you to select video standards manually.
Normally select [Auto]. Select the video standard from the pulldown menu. This must be done for Component (Video),
Video and S-Video Connector separately.
Selecting S-Video Mode [S-Video Mode Select]

This feature is used to select the S-Video signal detection mode.
This allows identifying of the S-Video signals with different aspect ratio (16:9 and 4:3).
Off ......................... Does not identify any S-Video signal.
S2 .......................... Identifies the 16:9 or 4:3 signal.
NOTE: The Aspect Ratio is not available when S2 signal is detected.
Setting MONITOR OUT Connector [OUT Terminal]

This option allows you to determine which RGB or component source is output from the MONITOR OUT connector
during Standby mode.
Last ....................... The signal from the last COMPUTER 1, COMPUTER 2 or COMPONENT input will be output to the MONITOR
OUT connector.
Computer 1, 2 ....... The signal from the COMPUTER1, COMPUTER2 or Component input will be output to the MONITOR OUT
connector.
Component ............ The signal from the COMPONENT input will be output to the MONITOR OUT connectors.
NOTE: The MONITOR OUT function is not available during Power-saving mode
95

[Tools]
Selecting the ChalkBoard [ChalkBoard]

This option displays the ChalkBoard tool bar.
The ChalkBoard feature allows you to write and draw messages on a projected image. ( page 41)
NOTE: The ChalkBoard feature is available only when a USB mouse is used.
Using Off Timer [Off Timer]

1. Select your desired time between 30 minutes and 16 hours: Off, 0:30, 1:00, 2:00, 4:00, 8:00, 12:00, 16:00.
2. Select [OK] and press the ENTER button on the remote control.
3. The remaining time starts counting down.
4. The projector will turn off after the countdown is complete.
NOTE:
To cancel the preset time, set [Off] for the preset time or turn off the power.
When the remaining time reaches 3 minutes before the projector is turned off, the [Projector will turn off in 3 minutes] message
will be displayed on the bottom of the screen.
Setting Mouse Pointer, Button and Sensitivity [Mouse]

This option lets you to change your USB mouse settings. The mouse settings feature is available for USB mouse only.
Choose the settings you want:
Mouse Pointer ....... Pointer 1 - 9
Mouse Button ........ [Right Hand] or [Left Hand]
Mouse Sensitivity .. [Fast], [Medium] or [Slow]
96
Menu Descriptions & Functions [Information]
Displays the lamp and the projector usage hours, the status of the current signal and settings and LAN settings. This
dialog box has seven pages.
The information included are as follows:
[Usage Time]
Lamp Life Remaining (%)

Lamp Hours Used (H)
Filter Hours Used (H)
Projector Hours Used (H)
NOTE: The progress indicator shows the percentage of remaining lamp life. The value informs you of the amount of lamp, filter and
projector usage respectively.
97

[Source Page1]
Input Terminal
Video Type
Entry No.
Signal Type
Source Name
[Source Page2]
Horizontal Frequency
Sync Type
Scan Type
Vertical Frequency
Sync Polarity
98

[LAN Built-in]
This page shows information on settings for the LAN port (RJ-45)
IP Address ............. Indicates the IP address of the projector when the LAN port (RJ-45) is used.
Subnet Mask ......... Indicates the subnet mask of the projector when the LAN port (RJ-45) is used
Gateway ................ Indicates the gateway of the network connected to the projector when the LAN port (RJ-45) is used.
MAC Address ........ Indicates the MAC address of the LAN port (RJ-45).
[LAN PC Card]
This page shows information on settings for the optional wireless LAN card
IP Address ............. Indicates the IP address of the projector when the optional wireless LAN card is used.
Subnet Mask ......... Indicates the subnet mask of the projector when the optional wireless LAN card is used.
Gateway ................ Indicates the gateway of the network connected to the projector when the optional wireless LAN card is
used.
MAC Address ........ Indicates the MAC address of the optional wireless LAN card.
99

[LAN Wireless]
This page shows information on settings for WEP key for encryption.
SSID ...................... Indicates the identifier (SSID) for your wireless LAN.
Mode ..................... Indicates that [Infrastructure] or [802.11 Ad Hoc] is selected for your communication method
WEP ...................... Indicates your selected datalength encryption: On or Off
Channel ................. Indicates the channel you selected in the [Site Survey]. The channel must match for all wireless devices
communicating on your wireless LAN.
Signal Level ........... Indicates receiving condition of radio signal level while you are using a wireless LAN connection (Only when
PC Card is used)
[Version]
Firmware
Data
100
Menu Descriptions & Functions [Reset]
Returning to Factory Default
The Reset feature allows you to change adjustments and settings to the factory preset for sources by the following
methods:
[Current Signal]
Resets the adjustments for the current signal to the factory preset levels.
All the items in [Adjust] can be reset.
[All Data]
Reset all the adjustments and settings for all the signals to the factory preset except [Entry List], [Language],
[Background], [Control Panel Lock], [Menu Lock], [Logo Lock], [Security], [LAN Mode], [Projector Name], [Communication Speed], [Standby Mode], [Lamp Life Remaining], [Lamp Hours Used], [Filter Hours Used] and [Projector
Hours Used].
[All Data (Including Entry List)]

Reset all the adjustments and settings for all the signals to the factory preset except [Language], [Background],
[Control Panel Lock], [Menu Lock], [Logo Lock], [Security], [LAN Mode], [Projector Name], [Communication Speed],
[Standby Mode], [Lamp Life Remaining], [Lamp Hours Used], [Filter Hours Used] and [Projector Hours Used].
Also deletes all the signals in the [Entry List] and returns to the factory preset.
NOTE: Locked signals in Entry List cannot be reset.
Clearing Lamp Hour Meter [Clear Lamp Hours]

Resets the lamp clock back to zero.
NOTE: Elapsed time of the lamp use will not be affected even when [Reset] is done from the menu.
NOTE: The projector will turn off and go into standby mode after 2100 hours (up to 3100 hours in Eco mode) of service. In this
condition you cannot clear the lamp hour meter on the menu. If this happens, press the HELP button on the remote control for 10
seconds to reset the lamp clock back to zero. Do this only after replacing the lamp.
Resetting the Filter Usage Hours [Clear Filter Hours]

Resets the filter usage back to zero.
NOTE: Elapsed time of the filter use will not be affected even when [Reset] is done from the menu.
101
7. Maintenance
This section describes the simple maintenance procedures you should follow to clean the filter and replace the lamp.
Cleaning or Replacing the Filter

The air-filter sponge keeps dust and dirt from getting inside the projector and should be cleaned after every 100 hours
of operation (more often in dusty conditions). If the filter is dirty or clogged, your projector may overheat.
CAUTION
Turn off the projector, turn off the main power switch and unplug the projector before replacing the filter.
Only clean the outside of the filter cover with a vacuum cleaner.
Do not attempt to operate the projector without the filter cover.
To clean the air-filter:
T
EC
EL
S
Vacuum the filter-through the filter cover.
To reset the filter usage time, from the menu, select [Reset] [Clear Filter Hours].
( page 101 for resetting the filter usage time)
To replace the filter (sponge):

1. Remove the filter cover by pushing down on the catch of the cover until you feel it detach.
Catch
CT
LE
SE
3D
RM
FO
RE
TO
AU
ST
JU
AD
CE
UR
SO
LA
CA
PC
ND
TA
/S
ON
BY
RD
P
US
AT
ST WER
PO
2. Gently peel off the filter (sponge) and replace it with the new one.
102
7. Maintenance
3. Reinstall the new filter cover.
NOTE: Do not wash the filter with soap and water. Soap and water will damage the filter membrane. Before replacing the filter,
remove dust and dirt from the projector cabinet. Keep out dust and dirt during filter replacement.
NOTE: When you replace the lamp, it is also wise to replace the filter. The filter comes in the same package with your replacement
lamp.
Cleaning the Cabinet and the Lens
TA
3D
EF
TO
JU
/S
TA
LA
A
C
Y
B
D
C
P
TU
ER
1. Turn off the projector before cleaning.

2. Clean the cabinet periodically with a damp cloth. If heavily soiled, use a mild detergent. Never use strong
detergents or solvents such as alcohol or thinner.
3. Use a blower or lens paper to clean the lens, and be careful not to scratch or mar the lens.
T
EC
EL
S
SELE
CT
3D
RE
FO
RM
AU
TO
AD
JU
ST
SO
UR
CE
O
N
/S
TA
N
D
BY
PO
PC
RD
CO
S-V
IDE
PC
CA
LA
RD
ST MP
AT
WE US
R
US
CA
MP
ON
EN
LA
T IN
O IN
VID
EO
Cb
/Pb
IN
AU
Cr/
Pr
L/M AUDIO
ON
O
IN
DIO
CO
IN
CO
MP
UT
AU
DIO
OU
MP
ER
UT
ER
3 IN
1 IN
T
MO
CO
NIT
OR
OU
MP
UT
ER
PC
2 IN
CO
NT
RO
AC
IN
103
7. Maintenance
Replacing the Lamp

After your lamp has been operating for 2000 hours (up to 3000 hours in Eco mode) or longer, the LAMP indicator in the
cabinet will blink red and the message [The lamp has reached the end of its usable life. Please replace the lamp.]
will appear. Even though the lamp may still be working, replace it at 2000 (up to 3000 hours in Eco mode) hours to
maintain optimal projector performance. After replacing the lamp, be sure to clear the lamp hour meter. ( page 101)
CAUTION
DO NOT TOUCH THE LAMP immediately after it has been used. It will be extremely hot. Turn the projector off, wait
30 seconds, turn off the main power switch and then disconnect the power cable. Allow at least one hour for the
lamp to cool before handling.
DO NOT REMOVE ANY SCREWS except two lamp case screws. You could receive an electric shock.
Do not break the glass on the lamp housing.

Keep finger prints off the glass surface on the lamp housing. Leaving finger prints on the glass surface might cause
an unwanted shadow and poor picture quality.
The projector will turn off and go into standby mode after 2100 (up to 3100 hours in Eco mode) hours of service. If
this happens, be sure to replace the lamp. If you continue to use the lamp after 2000 hours (up to 3000 hours in
Eco mode) of use, the lamp bulb may shatter, and pieces of glass may be scattered in the lamp case. Do not touch
them as the pieces of glass may cause injury. If this happens, contact your NEC dealer for lamp replacement.
To replace the lamp:

Optional lamp and tools needed for replacement:
Replacement lamp VT75LP
Phillips screwdriver or equivalent
1. Place the projector on a soft cloth and turn it over to access the lamp cover on the bottom.
2. Use a Philips screwdriver to push and release the tab.

Push up and remove the lamp cover.
1
2
1
104
7. Maintenance
3. Loosen the two screws securing the lamp housing until the phillips screwdriver goes into a freewheeling
condition. The two screws are not removable.
Remove the lamp housing by holding it.
Interlock
NOTE: There is an interlock on this case to prevent the risk of electrical shock. Do not attempt to circumvent this interlock.
4. Insert a new lamp housing until the lamp housing is plugged into the socket.
CAUTION
Do not use a lamp other than the NEC replacement lamp VT75LP.
Order this from your NEC dealer.
Secure it in place with the two screws.

Be sure to tighten the screws.
5. Reattach the lamp cover.

Slip the lamp cover back until it snaps into place.
105
7. Maintenance
6. Connect the supplied power cable, turn on the Main Power switch and turn on the projector.
7. Finally, select the menu [Reset] [Clear Lamp Hours] to reset the lamp usage hours.
NOTE: When the lamp exceeds 2100 hours (up to 3100 hours in Eco mode) of service, the projector cannot turn on and the menu is
not displayed.
If this happens, press the HELP button on the remote control for 10 seconds to reset the lamp clock back to zero.
When the lamp time clock is reset to zero, the LAMP indicator goes out.
106
8. Appendix
Troubleshooting
This section helps you resolve problems you may encounter while setting up or using the projector.
Indicator Messages
Power Indicator
Indicator Condition
Projector Condition
Off
Blinking light
Green
0.5 sec On,

0.5 sec Off
2.5 sec On,
0.5 sec Off
0.5 sec On,
0.5 sec Off
Orange
Steady light
Green
Orange
Note
The main power is off
The projector is getting ready to turn on. Wait for a moment.

Off Timer is activated.
The projector is cooling down.
Wait for a moment.
The projector is turned on.

The projector is in Standby.
Status Indicator
Indicator Condition
Off
Blinking light
Red
Green
Orange
Steady light
Projector Condition
Normal
1 cycle (0.5 sec On, Lamp cover error
2.5 sec Off)
2 cycle (0.5 sec On, Temperature error
0.5 sec Of)
3 cycle (0.5 sec On, Power error
0.5 sec Off)
4 cycle (0.5 sec On, Fan error
0.5 sec Off)
6 cycle (0.5 sec On, Lamp error
0.5 sec Off)
Re-firing the lamp
1 cycle(0.5 sec On, Network conflict
2.5 sec Off)
Orange
Control Panel Lock is on
Green
Note
Replace the lamp cover correctly.

( page 105)
The projector is overheated. Move
the projector to a cooler location.
Power unit will not work correctly.
Fans will not work correctly.
Lamp fails to light. Wait a full
minute and then turn on again.
The projector is re-firing.
Both the built-in LAN and the wireless
LAN cannot be connected to the same
network at the same time.
To use both built-in LAN and wireless
LAN at the same time, connect them to
different networks. ( page 87)
You have pressed cabinet button
when Control Panel Lock is on.
( page 79)
Lamp Indicator
Indicator Condition
Off
Blinking light
Red
Steady light
Red
Green
Projector Condition
Normal
Lamp has reached its end of life. Lamp
replacement message will be displayed.
Lamp has been used beyond its limit. The
projector will not turn on until the lamp is
replaced.
Lamp is in Eco mode
107
Note
Replace the lamp.

( page 104)
Replace the lamp.
( page 104)
8. Appendix
Common Problems & Solutions ( "Power/Status/Lamp Indicator" on page 107)
Problem
Check These Items
Does not turn on
Check that the power cable is plugged in and that the power button on the projector cabinet or the remote
control is on. ( page 23, 24)
Ensure that the lamp cover is installed correctly. ( page 105)
Check to see if the projector has overheated. If there is insufficient ventilation around the projector or if the
room where you are presenting is particularly warm, move the projector to a cooler location.
Check to see if the lamp usage exceeds 2100 hours (up to 3100 hours : Eco mode). If so, replace the lamp.
After replacing the lamp, reset the lamp hours used. ( page 101)
The lamp may fail to light. Wait a full minute and then turn on the power again.
Will turn off
Ensure that the Power Management or Off Timer is off. ( page 94, 96)
No picture
Use the SOURCE button on the projector cabinet or the VIDEO, the S-VIDEO, the COMPUTER 1, the COMPUTER 2, the COMPUTER 3 (LT380 only), COMPONENT, the VIEWER or the LAN button on the remote control
to select your source. ( page 26)
Ensure your cables are connected properly.
Use menus to adjust the brightness and contrast. ( page 71)
Check to see if the image is muted. ( page 34)
Remove the lens cap.
Reset the settings or adjustments to factory preset levels using the Reset in the Menu. ( page 101)
Enter your registered keyword if the Security function is enabled. ( page 42)
Be sure to connect the projector and notebook PC while the projector is in standby mode and before turning on
the power to the notebook PC.
In most cases the output signal from the notebook PC is not turned on unless connectedto the projector before being powered up.
* If the screen goes blank while using your remote control, it may be the result of the computer's screensaver or power management software.
See also the next page.
Color tone or hue is

unusual
Check if an appropriate color is selected in [Wall Color]. If not, select an appropriate option. ( page 78)
Adjust [Hue] in [Adjust]. ( page 71)
Image isnt square to

the screen
Reposition the projector to improve its angle to the screen. ( page 27)
Use the 3DReform function to correct the trapezoid distortion. ( page 29)
Picture is blurred
Adjust the focus. ( page 28)

Ensure that the distance between the projector and screen is within the adjustment range of the lens. ( page
11)
Condensation may form on the lens if the projector is cold, brought into a warm place and is then turned on.
Should this happen, let the projector stand until there is no condensation on the lens.
Image is scrolling
vertically, horizontally
or both
to select your source (Video, S-Video, Computer, Component, Viewer or LAN). ( page 26)
Adjust the computer image manually with the [Clock]/[Phase] in [Adjust] [Image Options]. ( page 72)
Remote control does

not work
Install new batteries. ( page 9)

Make sure there are no obstacles between you and the projector.
Stand within 22 feet (7 m) of the projector. ( page 9)
Indicator is lit or
blinking
See the POWER/STATUS/LAMP Indicator. ( page 107)
Vertical stripes in RGB

mode
Press the AUTO ADJUST button on the projector cabinet or the AUTO ADJ. button on the remote control. (
page 31)
Adjust the computer image manually with the [Clock]/[Phase] in [Adjust] [Image Options].( page 72)
USB mouse does not

work
Make sure that your USB mouse is properly connected to the projector.
The projector may not support some brands of a USB mouse.
For more information contact your dealer.
108
8. Appendix
If there is no picture, or the picture is not displayed correctly.
Power on process for the projector and the PC.

Be sure to connect the projector and notebook PC while the projector is in standby mode and before turning on the
power to the notebook PC.
In most cases the output signal from the notebook PC is not turned on unless connected to the projector before
being powered up.
NOTE: You can check the horizontal frequency of the current signal in the projectors menu under Information. If it reads 0kHz,
this means there is no signal being output from the computer. See page 98 or go to next step.
Enabling the computers external display.

When using a PC compatible laptop, a combination of function keys will enable/disable the external display. Usually, the combination of the Fn key along with one of the 12 function keys gets the external display to come on or
off. For example, NEC laptops use Fn + F3, while Dell laptops use Fn + F8 key combinations to toggle through
external display selections.
Non-standard signal output from the computer

If the output signal from a notebook PC is not an industry standard, the projected image may not be displayed
correctly. Should this happen, deactivate the notebook PCs LCD screen when the projector display is in use. Each
notebook PC has a different way of deactivate/reactivate the local LCD screens as described in the previous step.
Refer to your computers documentation for detailed information.
Image displayed is incorrect when using a Macintosh

When using a Macintosh with the projector, set the DIPswitch of the Mac adapter (not supplied with the projector)
according to your resolution. After setting, restart your Macintosh for the changes to take affect.
For setting display modes other than those supported by your Macintosh and the projector, changing the DIP
switch on a Mac adapter may bounce an image slightly or may display nothing. Should this happen, set the DIP
switch to the 13 fixed mode and then restart your Macintosh. After that, restore the DIP switches to a displayable
mode and then restart the Macintosh again.
NOTE: A Video Adapter cable manufactured by Apple Computer is needed for a PowerBook which does not have a mini D-Sub
15-pin connector.
Mirroring on a PowerBook
* When using the projector with a Macintosh PowerBook, output may not be set to 1024 x 768 unless mirroring
is off on your PowerBook. Refer to owners manual supplied with your Macintosh computer for mirroring.
Folders or icons are hidden on the Macintosh screen

Folders or icons may not be seen on the screen. Should this happen, select [View] ->[Arrange] from the Apple
menu and arrange icons.
109
8. Appendix
Specifications
This section provides technical information about the projector's performance.
Model Number
Optical
LCD Panel
Resolution
Lens
Lamp
Image Size
Projection Distance
Projection Angle
Electrical
Inputs
Outputs
USB Port
LAN Port
Video Compatibility
Scan Rate
Video Bandwidth
Color Reproduction
Horizontal Resolution
External Control
Sync Compatibility
Built-in Speakers
Power Requirement
Input Current
Power Consumption
LT380/LT280
LT380: 0.8" p-Si TFT active-matrix with Micro Lens Array

LT280: 0.7" p-Si TFT active-matrix with Micro Lens Array
1024 768 pixels* up to UXGA with Advanced AccuBlend
Manual zoom and focus:
LT380: F1.7 - 2.0 f=24.2 - 29.0 mm
LT280: F1.7 - 2.0 f=21.6 - 25.9 mm
200 W DC (152 W DC in Eco mode)
21 inches - 300 inches (0.53 m - 7.62 m) diagonal
LT380: 2.33 - 35.89 ft / 0.71 -10.94 m
LT280: 2.36 -35.66 ft / 0.72 -10.87 m
LT380: 10.3 - 11.2 (wide) / 8.5 - 9.2 (tele)
LT280: 11.5 - 12.1 (wide) / 9.5 - 10.0 (tele)
2 Analog RGB (Mini D-Sub 15 P), 1 Digital RGB (DVI-D 24 P : LT380

only), 1 Component Y, Cb/Pb, Cr/Pr (3 RCA), 2 Component (Mini D-Sub
15 P) shared with COMPUTER 1/2 input, 1 S-Video (Mini DIN 4P), 1
Video, 1 PC Card, 1 Stereo Mini Audio, 1 (L/R) RCA Audio, 1 PC Control
(Mini D-Sub 9P)
1 RGB (Mini D-Sub 15P), 1 Stereo Mini Audio
1 A Type
RJ-45
NTSC, NTSC4.43, PAL, PAL-60, PAL-N, PAL-M, SECAM, HDTV: 1080i,
1080i/50Hz, 720p, 576p, 576i, 480p, 480i/60Hz
Horizontal: 15 kHz to 100 kHz (RGB: 24 kHz or over)
Vertical: 48 Hz to 120 Hz
RGB: 100 MHz (-3dB)
16.7 million colors simultaneously, Full color
NTSC / NTSC4.43 / PAL / PAL-M / PAL-N / PAL60: 540 TV lines
SECAM: 300 TV lines
RGB: 1024 dots (H) 768 dots (V)
RS232, IR, LAN, USB
Separate Sync / Composite Sync / Sync on G
1W 1 (monaural)
100 - 240V AC, 50/60Hz
3.3 - 1.4A
292W in Lamp Normal mode
230W in Lamp Eco mode
16W in Standby Normal mode, 10W in Standby Power-saving mode
* Effective pixels are more than 99.99%.
110
8. Appendix
Mechanical
Installation
Dimensions
Weight
Environmental Considerations
Operational Temperatures :
Orientation: Desktop/Front, Desktop/Rear, Ceiling/Front, Ceiling/Rear

11.6" (W) 4.7" (H) 11.3" (D)
294 mm (W) 120 mm (H) 288 mm (D)
(not including protrusions)
7.7 lbs / 3.5 kg
41 to 104F / 5 to 40C,
(Eco mode selected automatically at 95 to 104F/35 to 40C, operational temperatures during use of wireless LAN card: 41 to 95 F / 5 to
35C ), 20% to 80% humidity (non-condensing)
Storage Temperatures :
Regulations
14 to 122F (-10 to 50C), 20% to 80% humidity

(non-condensing)
UL/C-UL Approved (UL 60950-1, CSA 60950-1)
Meets DOC Canada Class B requirements
Meets FCC Class B requirements
Meets AS/NZS CISPR.22 Class B
Meets EMC Directive (EN55022, EN55024, EN61000-3-2, EN61000-33)
Meets Low Voltage Directive (EN60950-1, TV GS Approved)

Europe : http://www.neceurope.com/
The specifications are subject to change without notice.
111
112
Unit: mm (inch)
127.2 (5.0")
64.5 (2.54")
120 (4.72")
Lens center
Lens center
71.5 (2.82")
294 (11.57")
288 (11.34")
SELECT
PC CARD
LAMP
STATUS
3D REFORM
AUTO ADJUST
USB
SOURCE
ON/STAND BY
POWER
LAN
COMPUTER 3 IN
PC CARD
COMPONENT IN
Cb/Pb
S-VIDEO IN
MONITOR OUT
AUDIO OUT
COMPUTER 1 IN
AUDIO IN
COMPUTER 2 IN
Cr/Pr
AUDIO IN
VIDEO IN
L/MONO
PC CONTROL
AC IN
LT380
Cabinet Dimensions
8. Appendix
113
Unit: mm (inch)
127.2 (5.0")
64.5 (2.54")
120 (4.72")
Lens center
Lens center
71.5 (2.82")
294 (11.57")
288 (11.34")
SELECT
PC CARD
LAMP
STATUS
3D REFORM
AUTO ADJUST
USB
SOURCE
ON/STAND BY
POWER
LAN
PC CARD
COMPONENT IN
Cb/Pb
S-VIDEO IN
MONITOR OUT
AUDIO OUT
COMPUTER 1 IN
AUDIO IN
COMPUTER 2 IN
Cr/Pr
AUDIO
VIDEO IN
L/MONO
PC CONTROL
AC IN
LT280
8. Appendix
8. Appendix
Pin Assignments of D-Sub COMPUTER 1/2 Input Connector

Mini D-Sub 15 Pin Connector
5
10 9 8 7 6
15 14 13 12 11
Pin No.
Signal Level
Video signal : 0.7Vp-p (Analog)
Sync signal : TTL level
* COMPUTER 1 IN connector only
RGB Signal (Analog)
YCbCr Signal
Red
Cr
Green or Sync on Green
Blue
Cb
Ground
Ground
Red Ground
Cr Ground
Green Ground
Y Ground
Blue Ground
Cb Ground
No Connection
10
Sync Signal Ground
11
SCART Sync
12
Bi-directional DATA (SDA)*
13
Horizontal Sync or Composite Sync
14
Vertical Sync
15
Data Clock*
114
8. Appendix
Compatible Input Signal List

Signal
Resolution
( Dots )
Frequency H.
( kHz )
Refresh Rate
( Hz )
NTSC
15.73
60.00
PAL
15.63
50.00
PAL60
15.73
60.00
SECAM
15.63
50.00
VESA
640 480
31.47
59.94
IBM
640 480
31.48
59.95
MAC
640 480
35.00
66.67
VESA
640 480
37.86
72.81
VESA
640 480
37.50
75.00
IBM
640 480
39.38
75.00
VESA
640 480
43.27
85.01
VESA
800 600
35.16
56.25
VESA
800 600
37.88
60.32
VESA
800 600
48.08
72.19
VESA
800 600
46.88
75.00
VESA
800 600
53.67
85.06
MAC
832 624
49.72
74.55
VESA
1024 768
48.36
60.00
VESA
1024 768
56.48
70.07
MAC
1024 768
60.24
74.93
VESA
1024 768
60.02
75.03
VESA
1024 768
68.68
85.00
VESA
1152 864
67.50
75.00
SUN
1152 900
61.80
65.95
VESA
1280 960
60.00
60.00
VESA
1280 1024
63.98
60.02
65.18
MAC
1280 1024
69.87
SXGA+
1400 1050
60.00
VESA
1600 1200
75.00
60.00
VESA
1600 1200
81.25
65.00
VESA
1600 1200
87.50
70.00
VESA
1600 1200
93.75
75.00
HDTV (1080i)(1125i)
1920 1080
33.75
60.00 Interlace
HDTV (1080i)(1125i)
1920 1080
28.13
50.00 Interlace
HDTV (720p)(750p)
1280 720
45.00
60.00 Progressive
HDTV (720p)
1280 720
37.50
50.00 Progressive
SDTV(576p)(625p)
31.25
50.00 Progressive
SDTV (480p)(525p)
31.47
59.94 Progressive
DVD YCbCr
15.73
59.94 Interlaced
DVD YCbCr
15.63
50.00 Interlaced
#: Signals in above flagged with # are compressed with Advanced AccuBlend.

D: Images above flagged with "D" are supported by digital signal.
NOTE: Some composite sync signals may not be displayed correctly.

Signals other than those specified in the table above may not be displayed correctly. If this should happen, change the refresh rate
or resolution on your PC. Refer to Display Properties help section of your PC for procedures.
UXGA (1600 1200) is supported for separate sync signal only.
115
8. Appendix
PC Control Codes and Cable Connection

PC Control Codes
Function
Code Data
POWER ON
02H
00H
00H
00H
00H
02H
POWER OFF
02H
01H
00H
00H
00H
03H
INPUT SELECT COMPUTER 1
02H
03H
00H
00H
02H
01H
01H
09H
02H
03H
00H
00H
02H
01H
02H
0AH
02H
03H
00H
00H
02H
01H
1AH
22H
INPUT SELECT COMPONENT
02H
03H
00H
00H
02H
01H
10H
18H
INPUT SELECT VIDEO
02H
03H
00H
00H
02H
01H
06H
0EH
INPUT SELECT S-VIDEO
02H
03H
00H
00H
02H
01H
0BH
13H
INPUT SELECT VIEWER
02H
03H
00H
00H
02H
01H
1FH
27H
PICTURE MUTE ON
02H
10H
00H
00H
00H
12H
PICTURE MUTE OFF
02H
11H
00H
00H
00H
13H
SOUND MUTE ON
02H
12H
00H
00H
00H
14H
SOUND MUTE OFF
02H
13H
00H
00H
00H
15H
ON SCREEN MUTE ON
02H
14H
00H
00H
00H
16H
ON SCREEN MUTE OFF
02H
15H
00H
00H
00H
17H
4:3
03H
10H
00H
00H
05H
18H
00H
00H
00H
00H
30H
Letterbox
03H
10H
00H
00H
05H
18H
00H
00H
01H
00H
31H
Widescreen
03H
10H
00H
00H
05H
18H
00H
00H
02H
00H
32H
Crop
03H
10H
00H
00H
05H
18H
00H
00H
03H
00H
33H
ASPECT RATIO (4:3 Screen)
ASPECT RATIO (16:9 Screen)

4:3 Window
03H
10H
00H
00H
05H
18H
00H
00H
00H
00H
30H
Letterbox
03H
10H
00H
00H
05H
18H
00H
00H
01H
00H
31H
Widescreen
03H
10H
00H
00H
05H
18H
00H
00H
02H
00H
32H
04H
00H
34H
4:3 Fill
03H
10H
00H
00H
05H
18H
00H
00H
AUTO ADJUST
02H
0FH
00H
00H
02H
05H
00H
18H
NOTE: Contact your local dealer for a full list of PC Control Codes if needed.
Cable Connection
Communication Protocol
Baud rate ........................................ 38400 bps
Data length ..................................... 8 bits
Parity .............................................. No parity
Stop bit .......................................... One bit
X on/off .......................................... None
Communications procedure ........... Full duplex
NOTE: Depending on the equipment, a lower baud rate may be recommended for long cable runs.
116
8. Appendix
PC Control Connector (D-SUB 9P)
To TxD of PC
To RxD of PC
To GND of PC
2
6
3
7
4
8
5
9
To RTS of PC
To CTS of PC
NOTE 1: Pins 1, 4, 6 and 9 are no used.

NOTE 2: Jumper Request to Send and Clear to Send together on both ends of the cable to simplify cable connection.
NOTE 3: For long cable runs it is recommended to set communication speed within projector menus to 9600 bps.
Using Software Keyboard
1 to 0 and Characters
.............................. Use to type in password or keyword.
MODE .................... Selects one of three modes for alphabet and special characters.
SP ......................... Inserts a space
BS ......................... Deletes one character backward
.......................... Returns to the previous
.......................... Advances to the next
OK ......................... Executes the selection
Cancel ................... Cancels the selection
NOTE: You can drag the Software keyboard on the screen by clicking and holding any part on the keyboard except buttons.
117
8. Appendix
Troubleshooting Check List

Before contacting your dealer or service personnel, check the following list to be sure repairs are needed also by
referring to the Troubleshooting section in your users manual. This checklist below will help us solve your problem
more efficiently.
* Print the following pages.
Frequency of occurrence always sometimes (How often?_____________________) other (__________________)
Power
No power (POWER indicator does not light green) See also Status Indicator (STATUS).
Power cable's plug is fully inserted into the wall outlet.
Main power switch is pressed to the ON position.
Lamp cover is installed correctly .
Lamp Hours Used (lamp operation hours) was cleared after
lamp replacement.
No power even though you press and hold the POWER button
for a minimum of 2 seconds.
Shut down during operation.

Power Management is turned off (only models with the Power
Management function).
Off Timer is turned off (only models with the Off Timer function ).
Video and Audio

No image is displayed from your PC or video equipment to the
projector.
Still no image even though you connect the projector to the PC
first, then start the PC.
Enabling your notebook PCs signal output to the projector.
A combination of function keys will enable/disable the external display. Usually, the combination of the Fn key along
with one of the 12 function keys turns the external display
on or off.
No image (blue background, logo, no display).
Still no image even though you press the AUTO ADJUST button.
Still no image even though you carry out [Reset] in the
projectors menu.
Signal cable's plug is fully inserted into the input connector
A message appears on the screen.
( _____________________________________________ )
The source connected to the projector is active and available.
Still no image even though you adjust the brightness and/or
the contrast.
Input source's resolution and frequency are supported by the
projector.
Parts of the image are lost.

Still unchanged even though you press the AUTO ADJUST button.
Still unchanged even though you carry out [Reset] in the
projectors menu.
Image is too dark.

Remains unchanged even though you adjust the brightness
and/or the contrast.
Image is distorted.
Image appears to be trapezoidal (unchanged even though you
carry out the [Keystone] or [3D Reform] adjustment).
No sound.
Audio cable is correctly connected to the audio input of the
projector.
Still unchanged even though you adjusted the volume level.
AUDIO OUT is connected to your audio equipment (only models with the AUDIO OUT connector).
Image is shifted in the vertical or horizontal direction.

Horizontal and vertical positions are correctly adjusted on a
computer signal.
projector.
Some pixels are lost.
Image is flickering.
projectors menu.
Image shows flickering or color drift on a computer signal.
Image appears blurry or out of focus.
Still unchanged even though you checked the signals resolution on PC and changed it to projectors native resolution.
Still unchanged even though you adjusted the focus.
Other
Remote control does not work.
No obstacles between the sensor of the projector and the remote control.
Projector is placed near a fluorescent light that can disturb the
infrared remote controls.
Batteries are new and are not reversed in installation.
If present on the remote control, projector selector switch is
not used.
118
Buttons on the projector cabinet do not work ( only models with

the Control Panel Lock function).
Control Panel Lock is not turned on or is disabled in the menu.
Still unchanged even though you press and hold the EXIT button for a minimum of 10 seconds.
8. Appendix
In the space below please describe your problem in detail.
Information on application and environment where your projector is used

Installation environment
Projector
Model number:
Screen size:
Serial No.:
Screen type:
White matte Beads Polarization

Wide angle High contrast
Date of purchase:
Throw distance:
Lamp operating time (hours):

Lamp Mode:
inch
Normal Eco
Orientation:
feet/inch/m
Ceiling mount Desktop
Power outlet connection:
Information on input signal:

Horizontal synch frequency [
] kHz
Connected directly to wall outlet
Vertical synch frequency
] Hz
Synch polarity
H (+) ()
Connected to power cord extender or other (the number of connected equipment______________)

Connected to a power cord reel or other (the number
of connected equipment______________)
V (+) ()
Synch type
Separate Composite
Sync on Green
Computer
STATUS Indicator:
Steady light
Orange Green
Manufacturer:
Flashing light
Model number:
] cycles
Remote control model number:
Notebook PC / Desktop
Native resolution:
Refresh rate:
Video adapter:
Projector
Other:
PC
DVD player
Video equipment
Signal cable
VCR, DVD player, Video camera, Video game or other
NEC standard or other manufacturers cable?

Model number:
Length:
inch/m
Manufacturer:
Distribution amplifier
Model number:
Model number:
Switcher
Model number:
Adapter
Model number:
119
8. Appendix
TravelCare Guide
5) Problems or damage caused by use in hot or humid places, in

vehicles, boats or ships, etc.
TravelCare - a service for international travelers
6) Problems or damage caused by expendable supplies or devices

connected to the product other than those designated by NEC.
This product is eligible for "TravelCare", NEC's unique international warranty.

Please note that TravelCare coverage differs in part from coverage under the warranty included with the product.
7) Problems caused by natural consumption, wear or deterioration

of parts under normal usage conditions.
8) Problems or damage to lamps and other expendable supplies,
included parts or optional parts.
Services offered with TravelCare
9) Other conditions stipulated in the warranty included with the product also apply.
This warranty allows customers to receive service on their product at

the NEC and NEC-designated service stations in the countries listed
herein when temporarily traveling internationally for business or pleasure.
For details on services offered by the different service stations, please
refer to the "List of TravelCare Outlets" below.
NOTE: The product can be used overseas with voltages of 100 to 120V and 200
to 240V by using a power cable suited for the standards and power source voltage of the country in which the product is being used.
List of TravelCare Outlets
1 Repair services
The product will be repaired and delivered within 10 business days,
not including shipping time.
During the term of warranty, the cost of maintenance parts, labor
costs for repairs and shipping costs within the service station's coverage area are covered by the warranty.
This list applies as of October 1, 2005.

For the most up-to-date information, please refer to the websites of the
service stations in the various countries on the List of TravelCare Outlets or to the NEC website at http://www.nec-pj.com.
In Europe
NEC Europe, Ltd. / European Technical Centre
Address:
Unit G, Stafford Park 12, Telford TF3 3BJ, U.K.
Telephone:
+44 1952 237000
Fax Line:
+44 1952 237006
Email Address:
AFR@uk.neceur.com
WEB Address:
http://www.neceur.com
2 Replacement product rental service

If the customer desires, he or she can rent a replacement product
while the original product is being repaired.
Fee: US$200 for 12 days
This fee must be paid at the local service station in cash or credit
card.
The US$200 rental fee is non-refundable even if the customer rents it
less than 12 days before returning.
The replacement product will be delivered within 3 business days.
If the customer did not return the replacement product within 12 days,
the customer will be charged the price of the unit.
If the customer returned the replacement product in a faulty or damaged condition, the repair cost will be charged to the customer.
Note that this service is not offered in all countries and regions. Please
refer to the "List of TravelCare Outlets".
In addition, this replacement product rental service is not offered after the product's warranty has expired.
(Regions Covered)
EU:
Austria*, Belgium*, Denmark*, Finland*, France*, Germany*,
Greece*, Ireland*, Italy*, Luxembourg*, The Netherlands*,
Portugal*, Spain*, Sweden* and the United Kingdom*
EEA:
Norway*, Iceland and Liechtenstein
In North America
NEC Solutions (America), Inc.
Address:
1250 N. Arlington Heights Road,
Itasca, Illinois 60143, U.S.A.
Telephone:
+1 800 836 0655
Fax Line:
+1 800 356 2415
Email Address:
vsd.tech-support@necsam.com
WEB Address:
http://www.necvisualsystems.com
Term of warranty
1
a. Upon presentation of the warranty or receipt received upon purchase:
(Regions Covered)
U.S.A. *, Canada*
Valid for the term indicated on the warranty or the normal term of
warranty for the country of purchase.
In Oceania
NEC Australia Pty., Ltd.
Address: New South Wales;
184 Milperra Road, Reversby 2212
Victoria;
Unit 1/6 Garden Road, Clayton 3168
South Australia;
84A Richmond Road, Keswick 5035
Queensland;
Unit 4/305 Montague Road West End 4101
Western Australia;
45 Sarich Court Osborne Park 6017
Telephone:
131 632 (from domestic)
+61 8 8375 5706 (from overseas)
Fax Line:
+61 8 8375 5757
Email Address:
lee.gramola@nec.com.au
WEB Address:
http://www.nec.com.au
b. When only the product is brought in:

Valid for a period of within 14 months of the date of manufacture
indicated by the serial number attached to the product.
2 When a product whose term of warranty is expired is brought in:
Repairs will be offered for a fee. In this case the customer is not
eligible for the replacement product rental service.
3 In the following cases, repairs may be charged, even if the product's
warranty is still in effect:
1) If the term of warranty, model name, serial number and name of

the store of purchase are not indicated on the warranty or have
been altered.
2) Problems or damage caused by dropping or shocks during shipment or movement by the customer or by improper handling by
the customers.
3) Problems or damage caused by improper usage or unwarrantable alterations or repairs by the customer.
(Regions Covered)
Australia*, New Zealand
4) Problems or damage caused by fire, salt damage, gas damage,

earthquakes, lightning damage, storm or flood damage or other
natural disasters or such external factors as dust, cigarette
smoke, abnormal voltage, etc.
120
8. Appendix
In Asia and Middle East
NEC Viewtechnology, Ltd.
Address:
686-1, Nishioi, Oi-Machi, Ashigarakami-Gun,
Kanagawa 258-0017, Japan
Telephone:
+81 465 85 2369
Fax Line:
+81 465 85 2393
Email Address:
support_pjweb@nevt.nec.co.jp
WEB Address:
http://www.nec-pj.com
Lenso Communication Co., Ltd.

Address:
292 Lenso House 4, 1st Floor, Srinakarin Road,
Huamark, Bangkapi, Bangkok 10240, Thailand
Telephone:
+66 2 375 2425
Fax Line:
+66 2 375 2434
Email Address:
pattara@lenso.com
WEB Address:
http://www.lenso.com
(Regions Covered)
Thailand
(Regions Covered)
Japan*
ABBA Electronics L.L.C.

Address:
Tariq Bin Ziyad Road, P.O.Box 327, Dubai,
United Arab Emirates
Telephone:
+971 4 371800
Fax Line:
+971 4 364283
Email Address:
ABBA@emirates.net.ae
NEC Hong Kong Ltd.

Address:
25/F.,The Metropolis Tower, 10 Metropolis Drive,
Hunghom, Kowloon, Hong Kong
Telephone:
+852 2369 0335
Fax Line:
+852 2795 6618
Email Address:
esmond_au@nechk.nec.com.hk
WEB Address:
http://www.nec.com.hk
(Regions Covered)
United Arab Emirates
(Regions Covered)
Hong Kong
NEC Taiwan Ltd.
Address:
Telephone:
Fax Line:
Email Address:
WEB Address:
Samir Photographic Supplies

Address:
P.O.Box 599, Jeddah 21421, Saudi Arabia
Telephone:
+966 2 6828219
Fax Line:
+966 2 6830820
Email Address:
asif@samir-photo.com
7F, No.167, SEC.2, Nan King East Road, Taipei,

Taiwan, R.O.C.
+886 2 8500 1714
+886 2 8500 1420
chenguanfu@nec.com.tw
http://www.nec.com.tw
(Regions Covered)
Taiwan
NEC Solutions Asia Pacific Pte. Ltd
Address:
401 Commonwealth Drive, #07-02, Haw Par
Technocentre, Singapore 149598
Telephone:
+65 6 273 8333
Fax Line:
+65 6 274 2226
Email Address:
tehgh@rsc.ap.nec.com.sg
WEB Address:
http://www.nec.com.sg/ap
Riyadh
Address:
Telephone:
Fax Line:
Email Address:
P.O.Box 5519, Riyadh 11432, Saudi Arabia

+966 1 4645064
+966 1 4657912
bhimji@samir-photo.com
Alkhobar
Address:
Telephone:
Fax Line:
Email Address:
P.O.Box 238, Alkhobar 31952, Saudi Arabia

+966 3 8942674
+966 3 8948162
chamsedin@samir-photo.com
(Regions Covered)
Saudi Arabia
(Regions Covered)
Singapore
NOTE: In countries designated with an asterisk(*), replacement product rental

service are offered.
NEC Systems Integration Malaysia Sdn Bhd

Ground Floor, Menara TA One, 22, Jalan P. Ramlee,
Address:
50250 Kuala Lumpur, Malaysia
Telephone:
+6 03 2178 3600 (ISDN)
Fax Line:
+6 03 2178 3789
Email Address:
necare@nsm.nec.co.jp
WEB Address:
http://www.necarecenter.com
(Regions Covered)
Malaysia
Tele Service Co., Ltd.
Address:
2nd Fl., Ire B/D. #2, 4Ga, Yangpyeng-Dong,
Youngdeungpo-Gu, Seoul, Korea 150-967
Telephone:
+82 2 2163 4193
Fax Line:
+82 2 2163 4196
Email Address:
moneybear@hyosung.com
(Regions Covered)
South Korea
121
8. Appendix
Date:
P-1/
TO: NEC or NEC's Authorized Service Station:

FM:
(Company & Name with signature)

Dear Sir (s),
I would like to apply your TravelCare Service Program based on attached registration and qualification sheet and agree with your
following conditions, and also the Service fee will be charged to my credit card account, if I don't return the Loan units within the
specified period. I also confirm following information is correct. Regards.
Application Sheet for TravelCare Service Program

Country,
product purchased :
User's Company Name :
User's Company Address :
Phone No., Fax No. :
User's Name :
User's Address :
Local Contact office :
Local Contact office Address :
User's Model Name :
Date of Purchase :
Serial No. on cabinet :
Problem of units per User :
Required Service :
(1) Repair and Return
(2) Loan unit
(1) Credit Card
(2) Travelers Cheque
Requested period of Loan unit :

Payment method :
In Case of Credit Card :
Card No. w/Valid Date :
122
(3) Cash
8. Appendix
5. Loan Service Charges and Conditions:
Upon acceptance of this NEC Projector, Customer agrees to assume
liability for this loan unit.
Condition of your TravelCare Service Program

Enduser is requested to understand following condition of TravelCare
Service Program and complete the necessary information on the application sheet.
The current cost of use of this loan unit is $200.00 USD for 12 calendar
days.
If Customer does not return the unit within the 12 calendar days, Customer will be charged the next highest cost up to and including the full
list price to Credit Cards, which price will be informed by NEC Authorized Service Stations. Please see the attached listing of contacts for
each country to arrange for pickup of the loan unit.
1. Service Options:
There are 3 types of "Service" available. Enduser has to understand
following condition and is required to fill in the Application Sheet.
1) Repair and Return:
The 'Faulty unit' is sent or collected from the customer. It is repaired
and returned within 10 days to the customer, excluding transport time.
If you return to their country of origin with the loan unit, you will be
charged additional freight to return the unit to the loaning country.
There may have a case, repair and return can't be done by NEC
Authorized Service Station, because of shortage of spare parts due
to same model is not sold in the territory.
Thank you for your understanding of this program.
2) Repair and Return with Loan: (This service is limited to some Service Stations)
This service is offered to the Enduser, who cannot wait until their unit
is repaired.
The customer can borrow a unit for $200 up to 12 days. Customer
then sends in inoperable unit to nearest NEC Authorized Service
Station for service. In order to prevent collection problem, Enduser is
required to fill in Application Sheet.
Enduser needs to confirm the availability of the Service to NEC Authorized Service Stations.
3) Loan Only:
For this service, NEC Authorized Service Station supplies the customer with a loan unit for US$200 up to 12 days. Customer keeps the
inoperable unit and when customer returns home, customer arranges
to have the projector serviced in the home country.
2. Warranty Exclusions:
This program does not apply if the Projector's serial number has been
defaced, modified or removed.
If, in the judgement of NEC Authorized Service Station or its agent the
defects or failures result from any cause other than fair wear and tear or
NEC neglect, or fault including the following without limitation:
1) Accidents, transportation, neglect, misuse, abuse, water, dust, smoke
or default of or by the Customer its employees or agents or any third
party;
2) Failure or fluctuation of electrical power, electrical circuitry, air conditioning, humidity control or other environmental conditions such as
use it in smoking area;
3) Any fault in the attachments or associated products or components
(whether or not supplied by NEC or its agents which do not form part
of the Product covered by this warranty);
4) Any act of God, fire, flood, war, act of violence or any similar occurrence;
5) Any attempt by any person other than any person authorized by NEC
to adjust, modify, repair, install or service the product.
6) Any Cross-border charges such as, duty, insurance, tax etc.
3. Charges for Warranty Exclusions and Out of Warranty Case:
In case faulty unit is under warranty exclusions case or under Out of
Warranty period, NEC Authorized Service Station will Inform estimation
of actual service cost to the Enduser with reason.
4. Dead on Arrival (DOA):
Enduser must take this issue up with their original supplier in the country of purchase.
NEC Authorized Service Station will repair the DOA unit as a Warranty
repair, but will not exchange DOA unit with new units.
Ver. 1 10/05
123
7N8P6231
Printed in Japan
Printed on recycled paper
Ver. 1. 10/05
COMPUTER 2 IN
COMPUTER 3 IN
(LT380 only)
COMPUTER 1 IN
Connect your computer to the

projector.
LAN
COMPONENT IN
Cb/Pb
VIDEO IN
AUDIO IN
COMPUTER 1 IN
COMPUTER 2 IN
AUDIO OUT
MONITOR OUT
PC CONTROL
ON/STAND BY
POWER
Allumer le projecteur.
Accensione del proiettore.
Encienda el proyector.
Connecter lordinateur au
projecteur.
Sl p strmmen till projektorn.

VGA-Signalkabel (Lieferumfang)
Cble de signal VGA (fourni)
Cavo dei segnali VGA (in dotazione)
Cable de seal VGA (suministrado)
VGA-signalkabel (medfljer)
Press and hold for 2 seconds

Fr 2 Sekunden gedrckt halten
Maintenez appuy pendant 2 secondes
Premere e tenere premuto per 2 secondi
Mantenga pulsado durante 2 segundos
Hll intryckt i 2 sekunder
LAN
SELECT
EN
TE
EX
IT
POWER
OFF
Select a source.
Auswhlen einer Quelle.
Slectionner une source.
Selezione di una fonte.
Seleccin de una fuente.
Vlja en klla.
POWER
ON
COMPUTER
1
VIDEO
VIEWER
LAN
COMPONENT
S-VIDEO
M ENU
PC CARD
LAMP
STATUS
3D REFORM
AUTO ADJUST
SOURCE
ON/STAND BY
SELECT
POWER
EN
TE
EX
IT
Cb/
Pb
IN
AU
Cr/
Pr
L/M AU
ON DIO
O
IN
DIO
CO
IN
CO
MP
UT
AU
DIO
OU
Connect the supplied power cable.

Schlieen Sie das mitgelieferte Netzkabel an.
Connecter le cble d'alimentation fourni.
Collegate il cavo dalimentazione in dotazione.
Conecte el cable de alimentacin suministrado.
Anslut den medlevererade ntkabeln.
MP
ER
UT
ER
3 IN
1 IN
TIP: Press the AUTO ADJ. button to optimize an RGB

image automatically.
T
MO
CO
NIT
OR
OU
MP
PC
UT
ER
2 IN
CO
NT
RO
L
AC
TIPP: Drcken Sie zum automatischen Optimieren des

RGB-Bildes die AUTO ADJ.-Taste.
IN
FREEZE
ASTUCE: Appuyer sur la touche AUTO ADJ. pour

optimiser automatiquement une image RGB.
SELE
CT
3D
REFO
PC CARD
RM
AUTO
ADJU
ST
SOUR
CE
ON
/ST
PC
LAMP CARD
STAT
POWE US
R
AN
D
BY
PC
LAMP
USB
CARD
COMP
ONEN
LAN
T IN
Y
EO
IN
VIDEO
Cb/Pb
IN
AUDI
Cr/Pr
STATUS
COMP
O IN
L/MON AUDI
O
O
UTER
3 IN
COMP
UTER
R
1 IN
AUDI
O OUT
COMP
MONI
TOR
UTER
OUT
2 IN
PC
POWER
CONT
ROL
AC
SOURCE
ON/STAND BY
PICTURE
3D REFORM
PIC-MUTE
HELP
CT
LE
SE
3D
RE
FO
RM
AU
TO
AD
JU
ST
SO
UR
CE
ON
/ST
AN
PC
PAGE
UP
AUTO ADJUST
SUGERENCIA: Pulse el botn de AUTO ADJ. para

optimizar una imagen RGB automticamente.
Fn
MAGNIFY
DOWN
3D REFORM
TIPS: Tryck p AUTO ADJ.-tangenten fr att optimera en

RGB-bild automatiskt.
IN
RD
CA
S-VID
SUGGERIMENTO: Premete il tasto AUTO ADJ. per

ottimizzare automaticamente limmagine RGB.
VOLUME
PO
EO
MP
LA US
AT R
ST WE
VID
Turn on the main power switch.

Schalten Sie den Hauptnetzschalter ein.
Enfoncer linterrupteur dalimentation gnral.
Accendete linterruttore principale.
Active el interruptor de alimentacin principal.
Sl p huvudstrmbrytaren.
VIEWER
M ENU
BY
Anslut din dator till projektorn.
S-VIDEO
Conectar el ordenador al proyector.
COMPONENT
Schalten Sie den Projektor ein.
AC IN

Nehmen Sie die Linsenkappe ab.
Retirer le cache-objectif.
Rimuovete il copriobiettivo.
Quite la tapa de la lente.
Ta bort linsskyddet.
VIDEO
Cr/Pr
Schlieen Sie ihren Computer an

den Projektor an.
Collegate il vostro computer al

proiettore.
POWER
ON
COMPUTER
STATUS
SOURCE
AUDIO IN
L/MONO
LAMP
AUTO ADJUST
COMPUTER 3 IN
PC CARD
S-VIDEO IN
POWER
OFF
PC CARD
Turn on the projector.

USB
F1
F12
( page 13, 109 of the Users Manual)
U
SO
ST
JU
AD
TO
AU
RM
FO
RE
3D
CT
LE
SE
1
2
Correcting Keystone Distortion [Keystone]
Adjustable Tilt
Foot Lever
Korrigieren der Trapezverzerrung [Trapez]
Correction de la dformation trapzodale [Keystone]

Correzione della deformazione trapezoidale [Chiave]
SO
UR

3D
RE
FO
RM
AU
TO
AD
JU
ST
Correccin de la distorsin trapezoidal [Keystone]

CT
LE
SE
Adjust the picture size and position.

Einstellung der Bildgre und
Bildposition.
Ajuster la taille et de la position de
limage.
Regolate delle dimensioni e della
posizione dellimmagine.
Ajuste del tamao y la posicin de
la imagen.
Justera bildstorlek och position.
Korrigera den keystonedistorsionen [Keystone]

Adjust the tilt foot/Einstellung des Kippfues/
Rgler le pied de rglage de linclinaison/Regolate
il piedino dinclinazione/Ajuste de las patas de
inclinacin/Justera lutningen med foten.
( Page 27 of the Users Manual)
( page 29 of the Users Manual)
POWER
OFF
COMPUTER
1
VIDEO
Schalten Sie den Projektor aus.
ZOOM
POWER
ON
Turn off the projector.
VIEWER
LAN
COMPONENT
S-VIDEO
Eteignez le projecteur.
M ENU
PC CARD
LAMP
Spegnete il proiettore.
STATUS
ORM
AUTO ADJUST
SOURCE
ON/STAND BY
SELECT
POWER
Desactive el proyector.
EN
Stng av projektorn.
TE
EX
IT
Turn off the Main Power switch.

Schalten Sie schlielich den Hauptnetzschalter
aus.
teignez le commutateur dalimentation
principale.
SELE
CT
3D
REFO
PC CARD
RM
AUTO
ADJU
ST
SOUR
CE
D
AN
/ST
ON
PC
LAMP CARD
STAT
POWE US
R
BY
PC
USB
CARD
COMP
ONEN
LAN
T IN
S-VID
Spegnete linterruttore dellalimentazione

Focus
EO
IN
VIDEO
Cb/Pb
IN
AUDI
Cr/Pr
STATUS
COMP
O IN
L/MON AUDI
O
O
UTER
3 IN
COMP
UTER
R
1 IN
AUDI
O OUT
COMP
MONI
TOR
UTER
OUT
2 IN
PC
Mise au point optique

Fuoco
Enfoque
Fokus
( page 28 of the Users Manual)
POWER
CONT
ROL
principale.
AC
Fokus
Desactive el interruptor de alimentacin

principal.
Stng slutligen av med huvudstrmbrytaren.
Unplug the power cable.
Trennen Sie das Netzkabel ab.
Dconnectez le cble dalimentation.
Scollegate il cavo di alimentazione.
Desenchufe el cable de alimentacin.
Dra ut ntkabeln.
( page 33 of the user's manual)
LAMP
IN
Portable Projector
LT380/LT280
English
Deutsch
Franais
Italiano
Espaol
Svenska
Troubleshooting
Check List
What's in the Box?
RD
CA
PO
SE
LE
CT
3D
RM
FO
RE
TO
AU
ST
JU
AD
CE
UR
SO
D
AN
/ST
ON
PC
BY
LA
MP
US
AT R
ST WE
Make sure your box contains everything listed. If any pieces are missing, contact your dealer.
Please save the original box and packing materials if you ever need to ship your Projector.
Projector
Soft case
(24BS7561)
Lens cap
(24F41091)
ER
W
PO FF
O
DEO
VI
M
CO
PU
TE
2
NEN
ER
W
PO ON
PO
DEO
CO
VI
S-
T
EW
VI
ER
LA
N
S
EL
EC
T
LASE
R
L-C
LIC
MO
USE
FREE
ZE
ASPE
CT
LAM
P MO
VOLU
ME
DE
MA
GN
IFY
PIC
UP
TURE
PIC
-MUT
E
3D
HELP
AUTO
R-C
LIC
ADJ.
PAGE
DOW
N
REFOR
M
Remote control
(7N900691)
Batteries (AA x 2)

(7N900721)
Power cable
(7N080220) US
(7N080007) EU
VGA signal cable

(7N520054)
CD-ROM
Users manual and User Supportware 3
For North America only

Registration card
Limited warranty
For Europe only
Guarantee policy
Security sticker
PC card lock (24F41391)
Screw x 1 (24V00281)
English
How to Use the Supplied User Documents

Four user documents are included with the projector.
First read Important Information. It covers information about projector safety, cautions, lamp replacement and
troubleshooting.
Quick Setup Guide
The Quick Setup Guide provides initial setup and usage information regarding source connection, turning on the
power, selecting a source and other basic operating instructions.
NEC Software Utility Installation Guide [Wired and Wireless Network Setup Guide]
The NEC Software Utility Installation Guide provides installation information and what you can do with five
program utilities contained on the supplied User Supportware 3 CD-ROM.
User's Manual on CD-ROM
The complete user's manual is supplied on the CD-ROM in PDF (Portable Document Format) and provides
detailed product and usage information for your NEC projector.
The manual is available in seven languages (English, German, French, Italian, Spanish, Swedish and Japanese).
To view or print the PDF files Adobe Acrobat Reader or Adobe Reader is required.
NOTE: Adobe Acrobat Reader or Adobe Reader can be downloaded from Adobes website.
Visit http://www.adobe.com and obtain the current version for your OS.
To view the user's manual (PDF)

[Windows]
1. Place the supplied CD-ROM in your computer's CD-ROM drive.
2. Double-click the [My Computer] icon on the Windows desktop.
3. Double-click the [NECPJ-UM] CD-ROM icon.
4. Double-click [start_menu.pdf].
Adobe Acrobat Reader or Adobe Reader will start and allow you to view the Start Menu.
5. Click [User's Manual].
The Index menu will be displayed.
6. Click the chapter title you want to view.
[Macintosh]
1. Place the supplied CD-ROM in your Macintosh's CD-ROM drive.
2. Double-click the [NECPJ-UM] CD-ROM icon on your Macintosh' Desktop.
3. Double-click [start_menu.pdf].
Adobe Acrobat Reader or Adobe Reader will start and allow you to view the Start Menu.
4. Click [User's Manual].
The Index menu will be displayed.
5. Click the chapter title you want to view.
To copy the User's Manual (PDF) to your computer:

The user's manuals on the supplied CD-ROM can be copied to your computer hard drive.
Select your language version of [LT380_index_*.pdf] and [LT380_manual_*.pdf] from the [manual] folder on the
supplied CD-ROM and copy them to your computer hard drive.

See the Users manual (PDF format) on the
supplied CD-ROM for detailed information.
E-1
Safety Cautions
Precautions
Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC LT380/LT280 projector and keep the manual handy for future
reference. Your serial number is located on the bottom of your projector. Record it here:
CAUTION
To turn off main power, be sure to remove the plug from power outlet.
The power outlet socket should be installed as near to the equipment as possible, and should be easily
accessible.
CAUTION
TO PREVENT SHOCK, DO NOT OPEN THE CABINET.
THERE ARE HIGH-VOLTAGE COMPONENTS INSIDE.
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
This symbol warns the user that uninsulated voltage within the unit may be sufficient to cause electrical
shock. Therefore, it is dangerous to make any kind of contact with any part inside of the unit.
This symbol alerts the user that important information concerning the operation and maintenance of this
unit has been provided.
The information should be read carefully to avoid problems.
;;
;
;
;
;;;;
WARNING: TO PREVENT FIRE OR SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
DO NOT USE THIS UNITS PLUG WITH AN EXTENSION CORD OR IN AN OUTLET UNLESS ALL THE PRONGS
CAN BE FULLY INSERTED.
DOC Compliance Notice (for Canada only)
This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.
Acoustic Noise Information Ordinance-3. GSGV (for Germany only):

The sound pressure level is less than 70 dB (A) according to ISO 3744 or ISO 7779.
This label is on the side of the remote control.
This mark is on the top of the remote control.
CAUTION
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result
in hazardous radiation exposure.
CAUTION
Do not look into the laser pointer while it is on and do not point the laser beam at a person. Serious injury
could result.
CAUTION
Avoid displaying stationary images for a prolonged period of time.
Doing so can result in these images being temporarily sustained on the surface of the LCD panel.
If this should happen, continue to use your projector. The static background from previous images will
disappear.
WARNING TO CALIFORNIA RESIDENTS:

Handling the cables supplied with this product, will expose you to lead, a chemical known to the State of California
to cause birth defects or other reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling.
E-2
Disposing of your used product

EU-wide legislation as implemented in each Member State requires that used electrical and electronic
products carrying the mark (left) must be disposed of separately from normal household waste. This
includes projectors and their electrical accessories or lamps. When you dispose of such products, please
follow the guidance of your local authority and/or ask the shop where you purchased the product.
After collecting the used products, they are reused and recycled in a proper way. This effort will help us
reduce the wastes as well as the negative impact such as mercury contained in a lamp to the human
health and the environment at the minimum level.
The mark on the electrical and electronic products only applies to the current European Union Member
States.
RF Interference (for USA only)

WARNING
The Federal Communications Commission does not allow any modifications or changes to the unit EXCEPT those
specified by NEC Solutions (America), Inc. in this manual. Failure to comply with this government regulation could
void your right to operate this equipment. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable
protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular
installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by
turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the
following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio / TV technician for help.
For UK only: In UK, a BS approved power cable with moulded plug has a Black (five Amps) fuse installed for use with
this equipment. If a power cable is not supplied with this equipment please contact your supplier.
Important Safeguards
These safety instructions are to ensure the long life of your projector and to prevent fire and shock. Please read them
carefully and heed all warnings.
Installation
Do not place the projector in the following conditions:
- on an unstable cart, stand, or table.
- near water, baths or damp rooms.
- in direct sunlight, near heaters or heat radiating appliances.
- in a dusty, smoky or steamy environment.
- on a sheet of paper or cloth, rugs or carpets.
If you wish to have the projector installed on the ceiling:
- Do not attempt to install the projector yourself.
- The projector must be installed by qualified technicians in order to ensure proper operation and reduce the
risk of bodily injury.
- In addition, the ceiling must be strong enough to support the projector and the installation must be in accordance with any local building codes.
- Please consult your dealer for more information.
E-3
Place the projector in a horizontal position

The tilt angle of the projector should not exceed 10 degrees, nor should the projector be installed in any way other than
the desktop and ceiling mount, otherwise lamp life could decrease dramatically.
10
Fire and Shock Precautions

Ensure that there is sufficient ventilation and that vents are unobstructed to prevent the build-up of heat inside your
projector. Allow at least 4 inches (10cm) of space between your projector and a wall.
Do not try to touch the ventilation outlet on the left front (when seen from the front) as it can become heated while
Prevent foreign objects such as paper clips and bits of paper from falling into your projector. Do not attempt to
retrieve any objects that might fall into your projector. Do not insert any metal objects such as a wire or screwdriver
into your project. If something should fall into your projector, disconnect it immediately and have the object removed
by a qualified service personnel.
Do not place any objects on top of the projector.
Do not touch the power plug during a thunderstorm. Doing so can cause electrical shock or fire.
The projector is designed to operate on a power supply of 100-240V AC 50/60 Hz. Ensure that your power supply
fits this requirement before attempting to use your projector.
Do not look into the lens while the projector is on. Serious damage to your eyes could result.
Keep any items such as magnifying glass out of the light path of the projector. The light being projected from the lens
is extensive, therefore any kind of abnormal objects that can redirect light coming out of the lens, can cause unpredictable outcome such as fire or injury to the eyes.
Do not cover the lens with the black lens cap or equivalent while the projector is on. Doing so can lead to melting of
the cap and possibly burning your hands due to the heat emitted from the light output.
Do not place any objects, which are easily affected by heat, in front of the projector lens or a projector exhaust vent.
Doing so could lead to the object melting or getting your hands burned from the heat that is emitted from the light
output and exhaust.
Handle the power cable carefully. A damaged or frayed power cable can cause electric shock or fire.
- Do not use any power cables than the supplied one.
- Do not bend or tug the power cable excessively.
- Do not place the power cable under the projector, or any heavy object.
- Do not cover the power cable with other soft materials such as rugs.
- Do not heat the power cable
- Do not handle the power plug with wet hands.
Turn off the projector, unplug the power cable and have the object removed by a qualified NEC service personnel
under the following conditions:
- When the power cable or plug is damaged or frayed.
- If liquid has been spilled into the projector, or if it has been exposed to rain or water.
- If the projector does not operate normally when you follow the instructions described in this user's manual.
- If the projector has been dropped or the cabinet has been damaged.
- If the projector exhibits a distinct change in performance, indicating a need for service.
- If the projector is not to be used for an extended period of time.
Disconnect the power cable and any other cables before carrying the projector
Turn off the projector and unplug the power cable before cleaning the cabinet or replacing the lamp.
When using a LAN cable:
For safety, do not connect to the connector for peripheral device wiring that might have excessive voltage.
E-4
CAUTION
Do no use the tilt-foot for purposes other than originally intended. Misuses such as using the tilt foot to carry or
hang (from the wall or ceiling) the projector can cause damage to the projector.
Do not send the projector in the soft case by parcel delivery service or cargo shipment. The projector inside
the soft case could be damaged.
Select [High] in Fan mode if you continue to use the projector for consecutive days. (From the menu, select
[Setup - Options] [Fan Mode] [High].)
Doing so can cause damage to the projector:
- While the projector's lamp lights.
- While the cooling fans are running. The cooling fans continue to work for 30 seconds after the projector is
turned off.
- While the PC CARD Access Indicator lights. Doing so can damage your PC memory card.
Lamp Replacement
To replace the lamp, follow all instructions provided on page E-8 to E-9.
Be sure to replace the lamp when the message [The lamp has reached the end of its usable life. Please
replace the lamp.] appears. If you continue to use the lamp after the lamp has reached the end of its usable
life, the lamp bulb may shatter, and pieces of glass may be scattered in the lamp case. Do not touch them as the
pieces of glass may cause injury.
If this happens, contact your dealer for lamp replacement.
A Lamp Characteristic
The projector has a high-pressure mercury lamp as a light source.
A lamp has a characteristic that its brightness gradually decreases with age. Also repeatedly turning the lamp on
and off will increase the possibility of its lower brightness.
CAUTION:
When removing the lamp from a ceiling-mounted projector, make sure that no one is under the projector. Glass
fragments could fall if the lamp has been burned out.
E-5
Cleaning or Replacing the Filter

The air-filter sponge keeps dust and dirt from getting inside the projector and should be cleaned after every 100 hours
of operation (more often in dusty conditions). If the filter is dirty or clogged, your projector may overheat.
CAUTION
Turn off the projector, turn off the main power switch and unplug the projector before replacing the filter.
Only clean the outside of the filter cover with a vacuum cleaner.
Do not attempt to operate the projector without the filter cover.
To clean the air-filter:
SE
LE
CT
Vacuum the filter-through the filter cover.
To reset the filter usage time, from the menu, select [Reset] [Clear Filter Hours].
( Users Manual: page 101 for resetting the filter usage time)
To replace the filter (sponge):

1. Remove the filter cover by pushing down on the catch of the cover until you feel it detach.
Catch
PO
JU
AD
TO
AU
SE
LE
CT
3D
RE
FO
RM
RD
CA
BY
PC
D
AN
/ST
ON
CE
UR
SO
ST
MP
LA US
AT R
ST WE
2. Gently peel off the filter (sponge) and replace it with the new one.
E-6
3. Reinstall the new filter cover.
NOTE: Do not wash the filter with soap and water. Soap and water will damage the filter membrane. Before replacing the filter,
remove dust and dirt from the projector cabinet. Keep out dust and dirt during filter replacement.
NOTE: When you replace the lamp, it is also wise to replace the filter. The filter comes in the same package with your replacement
lamp.
Cleaning the Cabinet and the Lens

1. Turn off the projector before cleaning.
2. Clean the cabinet periodically with a damp cloth. If heavily soiled, use a mild detergent. Never use strong
detergents or solvents such as alcohol or thinner.
PO
BY
3D
RM
FO
RE
TO
AU
ST
JU
AD
CE
UR
SO
PC
ND
TA
/S
ON
RD
CA
P
M
LA US
AT
ST WER
3. Use a blower or lens paper to clean the lens, and be careful not to scratch or mar the lens.
CT
LE
SE
SEL
ECT
3D
RE
FOR
M
AU
TO
AD
JUS
T
SO
UR
CE
ON
/S
TA
PC
LAM CAR
D
P
STA
POW TUS
ER
ND
BY
US
B
PC
CA
RD
CO
MP
ON
S-V
ENT
LAN
IN
IDE
O IN
VID
Cb/
EO
Pb
IN
Cr/P
r
L/M AUD
ONO IO
AU
DIO
CO
IN
CO
IN
MP
AU
DIO
OU
MP
UTE
UTE
R1
R3
IN
IN
T
MO
CO
NIT
OR
OU
MP
PC
UTE
R2
IN
CO
NT
RO
L
AC
IN
E-7
Replacing the Lamp

After your lamp has been operating for 2000 hours (up to 3000 hours in Eco mode) or longer, the LAMP indicator in the
cabinet will blink red and the message [The lamp has reached the end of its usable life. Please replace the lamp.]
will appear. Even though the lamp may still be working, replace it at 2000 (up to 3000 hours in Eco mode) hours to
maintain optimal projector performance. After replacing the lamp, be sure to clear the lamp hour meter. ( Users
Manual: page 101)
CAUTION
DO NOT TOUCH THE LAMP immediately after it has been used. It will be extremely hot. Turn the projector off,
wait 30 seconds, turn off the main power switch and then disconnect the power cable. Allow at least one hour
for the lamp to cool before handling.
DO NOT REMOVE ANY SCREWS except two lamp case screws. You could receive an electric shock.
Do not break the glass on the lamp housing.

Keep finger prints off the glass surface on the lamp housing. Leaving finger prints on the glass surface might
cause an unwanted shadow and poor picture quality.
The projector will turn off and go into standby mode after 2100 (up to 3100 hours in Eco mode) hours of service.
If this happens, be sure to replace the lamp. If you continue to use the lamp after 2000 hours (up to 3000 hours
in Eco mode) of use, the lamp bulb may shatter, and pieces of glass may be scattered in the lamp case. Do not
touch them as the pieces of glass may cause injury. If this happens, contact your NEC dealer for lamp replacement.
To replace the lamp:

Optional lamp and tools needed for replacement:
Replacement lamp VT75LP
Phillips screwdriver or equivalent
1. Place the projector on a soft cloth and turn it over to access the lamp cover on the bottom.
2. Use a Philips screwdriver to push and release the tab.
Push up and remove the lamp cover.
1
2
1
E-8
3. Loosen the two screws securing the lamp housing until the phillips screwdriver goes into a freewheeling
condition. The two screws are not removable.
Remove the lamp housing by holding it.
Interlock
NOTE: There is an interlock on this case to prevent the risk of electrical shock. Do not attempt to circumvent this interlock.
4. Insert a new lamp housing until the lamp housing is plugged into the socket.
CAUTION
Do not use a lamp other than the NEC replacement lamp VT75LP.
Order this from your NEC dealer.
Secure it in place with the two screws.

Be sure to tighten the screws.
5. Reattach the lamp cover.

Slip the lamp cover back until it snaps into place.
6. Connect the supplied power cable, turn on the Main Power switch and turn on the projector.
7. Finally, select the menu [Reset] [Clear Lamp Hours] to reset the lamp usage hours.
NOTE: When the lamp exceeds 2100 hours (up to 3100 hours in Eco mode) of service, the projector cannot turn on and the menu
is not displayed.
If this happens, press the HELP button on the remote control for 10 seconds to reset the lamp clock back to zero.
When the lamp time clock is reset to zero, the LAMP indicator goes out.
E-9
Troubleshooting
This section helps you resolve problems you may encounter while setting up or using the projector.
(The numbers in the table refer to pages in the Users Manual)
Indicator Messages
Power Indicator
Indicator Condition
Projector Condition
Off
Blinking light
Green
The main power is off

0.5 sec On,
Note
The projector is getting ready to turn on. Wait for a moment.
0.5 sec Off
Orange
2.5 sec On,
Off Timer is activated.
0.5 sec Off

0.5 sec On,
The projector is cooling down.
Wait for a moment.
The projector is turned on.
0.5 sec Off

Steady light
Green
Orange
Status Indicator
Indicator Condition
Off
Blinking light
Red
Projector Condition
Normal
1 cycle (0.5 sec On, Lamp cover error
( page 105)
2.5 sec Off)

2 cycle (0.5 sec On, Temperature error
0.5 sec Of)
3 cycle (0.5 sec On, Power error
0.5 sec Off)
4 cycle (0.5 sec On, Fan error
0.5 sec Off)
6 cycle (0.5 sec On, Lamp error
0.5 sec Off)
Re-firing the lamp
Green
1 cycle(0.5 sec On, Network conflict
Orange
Note
Replace the lamp cover correctly.
2.5 sec Off)
The projector is overheated. Move

the projector to a cooler location.
Power unit will not work correctly.
Fans will not work correctly.
Lamp fails to light. Wait a full
minute and then turn on again.
The projector is re-firing.
Both the built-in LAN and the wireless
LAN cannot be connected to the same
network at the same time.
To use both built-in LAN and wireless
LAN at the same time, connect them to
Steady light
Control Panel Lock is on
Orange
different networks. ( page 87)

You have pressed cabinet button
when Control Panel Lock is on.
Green
( page 79)
Lamp Indicator
Indicator Condition
Off
Blinking light
Red
Steady light
Red
Projector Condition
Note
Normal
Lamp has reached its end of life. Lamp Replace the lamp.
replacement message will be displayed.
( page 104)
Lamp has been used beyond its limit. The Replace the lamp.
projector will not turn on until the lamp is ( page 104)
replaced.
Green
Lamp is in Eco mode
E-10
Common Problems & Solutions (See also "Power/Status/Lamp Indicator" on page E-10.)
(The numbers in the table refer to pages in the Users Manual)
Problem
Check These Items
Does not turn on
Check that the power cable is plugged in and that the power button on the projector cabinet or the remote
control is on. ( page 23, 24)
Ensure that the lamp cover is installed correctly. ( page 105)
Check to see if the projector has overheated. If there is insufficient ventilation around the projector or if the
room where you are presenting is particularly warm, move the projector to a cooler location.
Check to see if the lamp usage exceeds 2100 hours (up to 3100 hours : Eco mode). If so, replace the lamp.
After replacing the lamp, reset the lamp hours used. ( page 101)
The lamp may fail to light. Wait a full minute and then turn on the power again.
Will turn off
Ensure that the Power Management or Off Timer is off. ( page 94, 96)
No picture
to select your source. ( page 26)
Ensure your cables are connected properly.
Use menus to adjust the brightness and contrast. ( page 71)
Check to see if the image is muted. ( page 34)
Reset the settings or adjustments to factory preset levels using the Reset in the Menu. ( page 101)
Enter your registered keyword if the Security function is enabled. ( page 42)
In most cases the output signal from the notebook PC is not turned on unless connectedto the projector before being powered up.
* If the screen goes blank while using your remote control, it may be the result of the computer's screensaver or power management software.
See also the next page.
Color tone or hue is

unusual
Check if an appropriate color is selected in [Wall Color]. If not, select an appropriate option. ( page 78)
Adjust [Hue] in [Adjust]. ( page 71)
Image isnt square to

the screen
Use the 3DReform function to correct the trapezoid distortion. ( page 29)
Picture is blurred
Adjust the focus. ( page 28)

Ensure that the distance between the projector and screen is within the adjustment range of the lens. ( page
11)
Condensation may form on the lens if the projector is cold, brought into a warm place and is then turned on.
Should this happen, let the projector stand until there is no condensation on the lens.
Image is scrolling
vertically, horizontally
or both
to select your source (Video, S-Video, Computer, Component, Viewer or LAN). ( page 26)
Adjust the computer image manually with the [Clock]/[Phase] in [Adjust] [Image Options]. ( page 72)
Remote control does

not work
Install new batteries. ( page 9)

Make sure there are no obstacles between you and the projector.
Stand within 22 feet (7 m) of the projector. ( page 9)
Indicator is lit or
blinking
See the POWER/STATUS/LAMP Indicator. ( page 107)
Vertical stripes in RGB

mode
Press the AUTO ADJUST button on the projector cabinet or the AUTO ADJ. button on the remote control. (
page 31)
Adjust the computer image manually with the [Clock]/[Phase] in [Adjust] [Image Options].( page 72)
USB mouse does not

work
Make sure that your USB mouse is properly connected to the projector.
The projector may not support some brands of a USB mouse.
For more information contact your dealer.
E-11
If there is no picture, or the picture is not displayed correctly.
Power on process for the projector and the PC.

In most cases the output signal from the notebook PC is not turned on unless connected to the projector before
being powered up.
NOTE: You can check the horizontal frequency of the current signal in the projectors menu under Information. If it reads
0kHz, this means there is no signal being output from the computer. See page 98 (Users Manual) or go to next step.
Enabling the computers external display.

When using a PC compatible laptop, a combination of function keys will enable/disable the external display.
Usually, the combination of the Fn key along with one of the 12 function keys gets the external display to come
on or off. For example, NEC laptops use Fn + F3, while Dell laptops use Fn + F8 key combinations to toggle
through external display selections.
Non-standard signal output from the computer

If the output signal from a notebook PC is not an industry standard, the projected image may not be displayed
correctly. Should this happen, deactivate the notebook PCs LCD screen when the projector display is in use.
Each notebook PC has a different way of deactivate/reactivate the local LCD screens as described in the
previous step. Refer to your computers documentation for detailed information.
Image displayed is incorrect when using a Macintosh

When using a Macintosh with the projector, set the DIPswitch of the Mac adapter (not supplied with the projector) according to your resolution. After setting, restart your Macintosh for the changes to take affect.
For setting display modes other than those supported by your Macintosh and the projector, changing the DIP
switch on a Mac adapter may bounce an image slightly or may display nothing. Should this happen, set the DIP
switch to the 13 fixed mode and then restart your Macintosh. After that, restore the DIP switches to a
displayable mode and then restart the Macintosh again.
NOTE: A Video Adapter cable manufactured by Apple Computer is needed for a PowerBook which does not have a mini D-Sub
15-pin connector.
Mirroring on a PowerBook
* When using the projector with a Macintosh PowerBook, output may not be set to 1024 x 768 unless mirroring is off on your PowerBook. Refer to owners manual supplied with your Macintosh computer for mirroring.
Folders or icons are hidden on the Macintosh screen

Folders or icons may not be seen on the screen. Should this happen, select [View] ->[Arrange] from the Apple
menu and arrange icons.
E-12
Deutsch
Wissenswertes ber die Verwendung der im Lieferumfang

enthaltenen Benutzerdokumente
Im Lieferumfang des Projektor sind vier Benutzerdokumente enthalten.
Wichtige Informationen
Lesen Sie bitte zuerst die wichtigen Informationen. Diese enthaltenen Hinweise ber die Projektorsicherheit, ber
Vorsichtsmanahmen, ber den Austausch der Lampe und ber die Fehlersuche.
Schnellsetup-Anleitung
Die Schnellsetup-Anleitung liefert das Anfangssetup und die Benutzerinformationen ber den Quellenanschluss, ber
die Einschaltung der Stromversorgung, ber die Auswahl einer Quelle und ber andere grundlegende
Betriebsanleitungen.
NEC Software Utility Installationsanleitung [Wired and Wireless Network Setup Guide]
Die NEC Software Utility Installationsanleitung bietet Informationen zur Installation und auerdem darber, was Sie
mit den fnf Programm Utilities, die auf der CD-ROM der Anwender-Supportware 3 enthalten sind, machen knnen.
Bedienungshandbuch auf CD-ROM
Das vollstndige Bedienungshandbuch befindet sich in Form einer PDF-Datei (Portable Document Format) auf CDROM und liefert Ihnen detaillierte Produkt- und Verwendungsinformationen fr Ihren NEC-Projektor.
Das Handbuch ist in sieben Sprachen verfgbar (Englisch, Deutsch, Franzsisch, Italienisch, Spanisch, Schwedisch
und Japanisch).
Zur Ansicht und zum Ausdrucken der PDF-Dateien bentigen Sie Adobe Acrobat Reader oder Adobe Reader.
HINWEIS: Adobe Acrobat Reader oder Adobe Reader knnen von der Adobe-Website heruntergeladen werden.
Besuchen Sie dazu http://www.adobe.com und laden Sie sich die aktuelle Version fr Ihr Betriebssystem herunter.
Zur Ansicht des Bedienungshandbuchs (PDF)

[Windows]
1. Legen Sie die im Lieferumfang enthaltene CD-ROM in das CD-ROM-Laufwerk Ihres Computers ein.
2. Doppelklicken Sie auf das [Arbeitsplatz]-Symbol auf dem Windows-Desktop.
3. Doppelklicken Sie auf das [NECPJ-UM]-CD-ROM-Symbol.
4. Doppelklicken Sie auf [start_menu.pdf].
Adobe Acrobat Reader oder Adobe Reader wird gestartet und ermglicht Ihnen die Ansicht des Startmens.
5. Klicken Sie auf [Bedienungshandbuch].
Das Index-Men wird angezeigt.
6. Klicken Sie auf den Kapiteltitel, den Sie sich ansehen mchten.
[Macintosh]
1. Legen Sie die im Lieferumfang enthaltene CD-ROM in das CD-ROM-Laufwerk Ihres Macintoshs ein.
2. Doppelklicken Sie auf das [NECPJ-UM]-CD-ROM-Symbol auf Ihrem Macintosh-Desktop.
3. Doppelklicken Sie auf [start_menu.pdf].
Adobe Acrobat Reader oder Adobe Reader wird gestartet und ermglicht Ihnen die Ansicht des Startmens.
4. Klicken Sie auf [Bedienungshandbuch].
Das Index-Men wird angezeigt.
5. Klicken Sie auf den Kapiteltitel, den Sie sich ansehen mchten.
Zum Kopieren des Bedienungshandbuchs (PDF) auf Ihren Computer:

Die Bedienungshandbcher auf der im Liferumfang enthaltenen CD-ROM knnen auf die Festplatte Ihres Computers
kopiert werden.
Whlen Sie Ihre Sprachversion von [LT380_index_*.pdf] und [LT380_manual_*.pdf] aus dem [manual]-Ordner auf der
im Lieferumfang enthaltenen CD-ROM aus und kopieren Sie sie auf die Festplatte Ihres Computers.

Fr Einzelheiten lesen Sie bitte das Benutzerhandbuch (PDF-Format), das sich auf der im Lieferumfang enthaltenen CD-ROM befindet.
G-1
Sicherheitshinweise
Vorsichtsmanahmen
Lesen Sie sich dieses Handbuch bitte sorgfltig durch, bevor Sie den NEC LT380/LT280 Projektor benutzen, und
bewahren Sie das Bedienungshandbuch in greifbarer Nhe als sptere Referenz auf. Die Seriennummer Ihres Projektors
befindet sich auf der Unterseite des Gertes. Tragen Sie diese hier ein:
VORSICHT
Zum Ausschalten der Hauptspannung mssen Sie unbedingt den Netzstecker von der Netzsteckdose
abziehen.
Die Netzsteckdose sollte so nahe wie mglich am Gert installiert werden und jederzeit leicht zugnglich
sein.
VORSICHT
UM EINEN ELEKTRISCHEN SCHLAG ZU VERMEIDEN, SOLLTEN SIE DAS GEHUSE NICHT FFNEN. IM INNEREN BEFINDEN SICH HOCHSPANNUNGSFHRENDE BAUTEILE.
BERLASSEN SIE SMTLICHE SERVICEARBEITEN QUALIFIZIERTEM SERVICEPERSONAL.
Dieses Symbol warnt den Benutzer vor unisolierter Spannung im Inneren des Gertes, die einen elektrischen Schlag verursachen kann. Daher ist der Kontakt mit smtlichen inneren Gertebauteilen gefhrlich.
Dieses Symbol macht den Benutzer darauf aufmerksam, dass dem Gert wichtige den Betrieb und die
Wartung betreffende Informationen beigefgt sind.
Diese Informationen sollten zur Vermeidung von Strungen unbedingt sorgfltig gelesen und beachtet
werden.
;;
;
;
;
;;;;
ACHTUNG: ZUR VERMEIDUNG VON FEUER- UND ELEKTROSCHLAGGEFAHR DARF DIESES GERT WEDER REGEN NOCH FEUCHTIGKEIT AUSGESETZT WERDEN.
VERWENDEN SIE DEN STECKER DIESES GERTES NICHT MIT EINEM VERLNGERUNGSKABEL ODER
EINER STECKDOSE, IN DIE NICHT ALLE STIFTE VOLLSTNDIG EINGESTECKT WERDEN KNNEN.
Geruschemissionsverordnung: GSGV (nur fr Deutschland):

Der Schalldruckpegel betrgt entsprechend ISO 3744 oder ISO 7779 weniger als 70 dB (A).
Dieser Aufkleber befindet sich auf der Seite der Fernbedienung.
Diese Markierung befindet sich auf der Oberseite der Fernbedienung.
VORSICHT
Wenn Sie andere Bedienungselemente, Einstellungen oder Verfahren als die hier angegebenen verwenden
oder ausfhren, kann es zu einer gefhrlichen Strahlenbelastung kommen.
VORSICHT
Blicken Sie nicht in den eingeschalteten Laserpointer, und richten Sie den Laserstrahl nicht auf Personen.
Dies knnte schwere Verletzungen zur Folge haben.
VORSICHT
Vermeiden Sie die Anzeige von Standbildern ber einen lngeren Zeitraum hinweg.
Andernfalls knnten diese Bilder vorbergehend auf der Oberflche des LCD-Feldes sichtbar bleiben.
Setzen Sie in einem solchen Fall den Projektorbetrieb fort. Der statische Hintergrund von vorherigen
Bildern verschwindet.
G-2
Entsorgung Ihres benutzten Gertes

Die EU-weite Gesetzgebung, wie sie in jedem einzelnen Mitgliedstaat gilt, bestimmt, dass benutzte elektrische und elektronische Gerte mit dieser Markierung (links) getrennt vom normalen Haushaltsabfall entsorgt werden mssen.
Dies schliet Projektoren und deren elektrisches Zubehr oder ihre Lampen mit ein. Folgen Sie beim Entsorgen eines solchen Gertes bitte den Anweisungen Ihrer rtliche Behrde und/oder konsultieren Sie den
Hndler, bei dem Sie das Gert erworben haben.
Nach der Sammlung benutzter Gerte werden diese erneut verwendet und entsprechend den Umweltbestimmungen recycelt. Das trgt dazu bei, die Abfallmenge zu reduzieren sowie die negativen Auswirkungen beispielsweise des in der Lampe enthaltenen Quecksilbers auf die Gesundheit und die Umwelt mglichst gering zu halten.
Die Markierung auf elektrischen und elektronischen Gerten gilt nur fr die gegenwrtigen Mitgliedstaaten
der Europischen Union.
Wichtige Sicherheitshinweise
Diese Sicherheitshinweise sollen eine lange Lebensdauer Ihres Projektors sicherstellen und vor Feuer und elektrischen
Schlgen schtzen. Lesen Sie diese Hinweise sorgfltig durch und beachten Sie alle Warnungen.
Installation
Den Projektor unter folgenden Bedingungen nicht aufstellen:
- auf einem instabilen Handwagen, Gestell oder Tisch.
- in der Nhe von Wasser, in Badezimmern oder feuchten Rumen.
- in direkter Sonneneinstrahlung, neben Heizungen oder Wrme ausstrahlenden Gerten.
- in einer staubigen, rauchigen oder dampfhaltigen Umgebung.
- auf einem Blatt Papier oder auf Kleidung, Wolldecken oder Teppichen.
Wenn der Projektor an der Decke installiert werden soll:
- Versuchen Sie nicht, den Projektor selbst zu installieren.
- Der Projektor muss von qualifiziertem Servicepersonal installiert werden, um einen ordnungsgemen
Betrieb sicherzustellen und die Verletzungsgefahr zu reduzieren.
- Die Decke muss fr das Gewicht des Projektors eine ausreichende Festigkeit aufweisen und die Installation
muss entsprechend den rtlichen Bauvorschriften ausgefhrt werden.
- Weitere Informationen erhalten Sie von Ihrem Fachhndler.
Stellen Sie den Projektor in einer Horizontal-Position auf

Der Neigungswinkel des Projektors sollte nicht mehr als 10 Grad betragen, und der Projektor darf nur auf dem Tisch
aufgestellt oder an der Decke installiert werden, da anderenfalls die Lebensdauer der Lampe drastisch verkrzt wird.
10
G-3
Vorsichtsmanahmen in Bezug auf Feuer und Elektroschlge

Um einen Hitzestau im Projektor zu vermeiden, sollten Sie darauf achten, dass eine ausreichende Ventilation gewhrleistet ist und
die Lftungsschlitze nicht blockiert sind. Halten Sie einen Mindestabstand von 10 cm zwischen Wnden und Projektor ein.
Versuchen Sie nicht, den Lftungsauslass auf der linken, vorderen Seite (von der Vorderseite aus gesehen) zu berhren, da dieser
bei eingeschaltetem Projektor und kurz nach dem Ausschalten sehr hei sein kann.
Achten Sie darauf, dass keine Fremdkrper wie Broklammern oder Papierschnipsel in den Projektor eindringen knnen.
Versuchen Sie niemals selbst, in den Projektor gefallene Gegenstnde zu entfernen. Keinesfalls Metallobjekte wie Drhte oder
Schrauben in den Projektor einfhren. Schalten Sie den Projektor sofort aus, wenn ein Gegenstand hineingerutscht ist, und
lassen Sie den Gegenstand vom Kundendienst entfernen.
Stellen Sie keinerlei Gegenstnde auf dem Projektor.
Berhren Sie whrend eines Gewitters nicht den Netzstecker. Dies knnte einen elektrischen Schlag oder Feuer verursachen.
Der Projektor ist fr den Betrieb mit einer Netzspannung von 100 - 240 V AC 50 / 60 Hz ausgelegt.
Vergewissern Sie sich vor der Inbetriebnahme des Gertes, dass die Netzspannung diesen Vorgaben entspricht.
Blicken Sie bei eingeschaltetem Projektor keinesfalls direkt in die Linse. Dies knnte schwere Augenschden zur Folge haben.
Halten Sie Gegenstnde wie Lupen vom Lichtstrahl des Projektors fern. Der von der Linse projizierte Lichtstrahl ist uerst
intensiv. Daher knnen smtliche Gegenstnde, die in der Lage sind den Lichtstrahl umzuleiten, Gefahren wie Feuer oder Augenschden verursachen.
Decken Sie niemals bei eingeschaltetem Gert die Linse mit der beiliegenden Kappe o. . ab. Dies kann aufgrund der von der
Lichtquelle abgestrahlten Wrme zum Schmelzen der Kappe und zu Verbrennungen der Hnde fhren.
Stellen Sie keinerlei Gegenstnde, die leicht durch Hitze beeinflusst werden, vor die Projektorlinse oder vor eine ProjektorAuslassffnung.
Eine Nichtbeachtung dessen kann zu einem Schmelzen des Gegenstandes oder zu einer Verbrennung Ihrer Hand durch die Hitze
fhren, die von der Lichtausgabe und von der Auslassffnung abstrahlt.
Gehen Sie mit dem Netzkabel vorsichtig um. Ein beschdigtes oder ausgefranstes Netzkabel kann einen elektrischen Schlag
oder Feuer verursachen.
- Verwenden Sie keine anderen Netzkabel als das mitgelieferte.
- Biegen Sie das Netzkabel nicht bermig, und zerren Sie nicht an dem Kabel.
- Verlegen Sie das Netzkabel nicht unterhalb des Projektors oder eines schweren Gegenstandes.
- Decken Sie das Netzkabel nicht mit anderen weichen Materialien wie z. B. Wolldecken ab.
- Erhitzen Sie das Netzkabel nicht
- Fassen Sie den Netzstecker nicht mit nassen Hnden an.
Schalten Sie den Projektor aus, ziehen Sie das Netzkabel ab und lassen Sie den Gegenstand unter den folgenden Bedingungen
von einem qualifizierten NEC Servicetechniker entfernen:
- Wenn das Netzkabel oder der Netzstecker beschdigt oder ausgefranst ist.
- Falls Flssigkeit in den Projektor gelangt ist, oder wenn er Regen oder Wasser ausgesetzt war.
- Falls der Projektor nicht normal arbeitet, obwohl Sie die in diesem Bedienungshandbuch beschriebenen Anleitungen befolgen.
- Wenn der Projektor fallengelassen oder das Gehuse beschdigt wurde.
- Wenn der Projektor eine eindeutige Leistungsvernderung aufweist, die einer Wartung bedarf.
- Wenn der Projektor fr lngere Zeit nicht verwendet wird.
Trennen Sie das Netzkabel und alle anderen Kabel ab, bevor der Projektor transportiert wird.
Schalten Sie den Projektor aus und trennen Sie das Netzkabel ab, bevor das Gehuse gereinigt oder die Lampe ausgetauscht
wird.
Wenn ein LAN-Kabel verwendet wird:
Schlieen Sie es aus Sicherheitsgrnden nicht an den Anschluss der Peripheriegerte-Verbindung an, das sie eine zu hohe Spannung
fhren knnte.
VORSICHT
Verwenden Sie den Kippfu ausschlielich fr den angegebenen Zweck. Eine falsche Verwendung wie z.B. das Benutzen des
Kippfues als Griff oder Aufhnger (von der Wand oder Zimmerdecke) kann zu einer Beschdigung des Projektors fhren.
Versenden Sie die Softtasche nicht durch einen Paketdienst und verschiffen Sie sie nicht. Der Projektor im Inneren der Softtasche
knnte dadurch beschdigt werden.
Whlen Sie als Lftermodus [Hoch], wenn Sie den Projektor mehrere Tage in Folge verwenden mchten.(Whlen Sie im Men
[Einrichten - Optionen] [Geblsemodus] [Hoch].)
Unter den nachfolgend aufgefhrten Umstnden, darf das Netzkabel nicht von der Netzsteckdose abgezogen werden.
Andernfalls knnte der Projektor beschdigt werden.
- Whrend die Projektorlampe leuchtet.
- Whrend die Lfter laufen. (Die Lfter laufen nach dem Ausschalten des Projektors noch 30 Sekunden lang nach.)
- Whrend die PC CARD-Zugriffsanzeige leuchtet. Andernfalls kann Ihre PC-Speicherkarte beschdigt werden.
G-4
Vorsichtsmanahmen zur Fernbedienung
Behandeln Sie die Fernbedienung mit Sorgfalt.
Wischen Sie die Fernbedienung sofort trocken, wenn sie einmal nass geworden sein sollte.
Vermeiden Sie bermige Hitze und Feuchtigkeit.
Erhitzen Sie die Batterien nicht, nehmen Sie sie nicht auseinander und werfen Sie sie nicht ins Feuer.
Nehmen Sie die Batterien heraus, wenn Sie beabsichtigen, die Fernbedienung ber einen lngeren Zeitraum
hinweg nicht zu benutzen.
Stellen Sie sicher, dass die Batteriepole (+/) richtig ausgerichtet sind.
Verwenden Sie niemals verschiedene Batterietypen oder neue und alte Batterien zusammen.
Entsorgen Sie leere Batterien entsprechen den an Ihrem Wohnort geltenden Bestimmungen.
Lampenaustausch
Folgen Sie fr den Austausch der Lampe allen Anweisungen auf Seite G-8 bis G-9.
Die Lampe muss ausgetauscht werden, wenn die Meldung [Das Ende der Lampenlebensdauer ist erreicht.
Bitte tauschen Sie die Lampe aus.] angezeigt wird. Wenn die Lampe ber das Ende ihrer Lebensdauer hinaus
weiter verwendet wird, kann die Birne platzen und Glassplitter knnen im Lampengehuse verstreut werden.
Berhren Sie die Splitter nicht, da Sie sich dabei verletzen knnten.
Sollte einmal eine Lampe zerplatzt sein, beauftragen Sie bitte Ihren Fachhndler mit dem Lampenaustausch.
Eine Lampeneigenschaft:
Als Lichtquelle dient dem Projektor eine Hochdruck-Quecksilberlampe.
Zu den Eigenschaften der Lampe gehrt es, dass ihre Helligkeit mit zunehmendem Alter teilweise abnimmt. Auch
ein wiederholtes Ein- und Ausschalten der Lampe erhht die Wahrscheinlichkeit einer geringeren Helligkeit.
ACHTUNG:
Stellen Sie beim Entnehmen der Lampe aus einem an der Decke montierten Projektro sicher, dass sich keine
Personen unter dem Projektor aufhalten. Bei einer ausgebrannten Lampe knnten Glassplitter herausfallen.
G-5
Reinigung oder Austausch des Filters

Der Luftfilterschwamm hlt Staub und Schmutz im Innern des Projektors und sollte nach jeweils 100 Betriebsstunden
(bei staubigen Bedingungen fter) ausgetauscht werden. Wenn der Filter verschmutzt oder verstopft ist, kann sich Ihr
Projektor berhitzen.
VORSICHT
Schalten Sie den Projektor aus, schalten Sie den Hauptnetzschalter aus und trennen Sie den Projektor vom
Netz, bevor der Filter ausgetauscht wird.
Reinigen Sie nur die Filterauenseite mit einem Staubsauger.
Versuchen Sie nicht, den Projektor ohne Filter in Betrieb zu nehmen.
Reinigung des Luftfilters:

Saugen Sie den Filter durch die Filterabdeckung ab.
Whlen Sie zur Rckstellung der Filterbetriebsdauer [Reset] [Filterbetriebsstunden lschen] aus dem Men aus.
( Bedienunghandbuch: Seite 101 fr die Rckstellung der Filterbetriebsdauer)
Austausch des Filters (Schwamm):

1. Entfernen Sie die Filterabdeckung, indem Sie die Sperrklinke der Abdeckung nach unten drcken, bis
Sie fhlen, dass sie sich lst.
Sperrklinke
PO
JU
AD
TO
AU
SE
LE
CT
3D
RE
FO
RM
MP
LA US
AT R
ST WE
BY
PC
D
AN
/ST
ON
CE
UR
SO
ST
RD
CA
2. Lsen Sie den Filter (Schwamm) sanft ab und ersetzen Sie ihn mit einem neuen.
LAM
STA
TUS P
PO
WE
R
ON
/ST
AND
BY
SO
CO
MP
UTE
R IN
UR
CE
AUT
O ADJ
.
FOC
VID
EO
IN
US
SE
LE
CT
S-V
IDE
O IN
AUD
IO
IN
PC
CO
NTR
OL
G-6
3. Befestigen Sie die neue Filterabdeckung.
HINWEIS: Waschen Sie den Filter nicht mit Seife und Wasser ab. Seife und Wasser beschdigen die Filtermembran. Entfernen Sie
vor dem Austausch des Filters Staub und Schmutz vom Projektorgehuse. Halten Sie Staub und Schmutz whrend des
Austausches fern.
HINWEIS: Wenn Sie die Lampe austauschen, ist es ratsam, auch den Filter auszutauschen. Der Filter wird in der gleichen
Verpackung zusammen mit der Ersatzlampe geliefert.
Reinigung des Gehuses und der Linse

1. Schalten Sie den Projektor vor der Reinigung aus.
2. Reinigen Sie das Gehuse regelmig mit einem feuchten Tuch. Wenn es sehr verschmutzt ist, knnen
Sie auch ein mildes Reinigungsmittel verwenden. Verwenden Sie niemals starke Reinigungsmittel oder
Lsungsmittel wie Alkohol oder Verdnner.
PO
BY
PC
3D
RE
FO
RM
AU
TO
AD
JU
ST
SO
UR
CE
ON
/S
TA
ND
RD
CA
P
M
LA US
AT
ST WER
3. Verwenden Sie ein Geblse oder ein Linsenpapier, um die Linse zu reinigen, und achten Sie darauf, dass
Sie die Linse nicht zerkratzen oder beschdigen.
SE
LE
CT
SEL
ECT
3D
RE
FOR
M
AU
TO
AD
JUS
T
SO
UR
CE
ON
/S
PC
LAM CAR
D
P
STA
POW TUS
ER
TA
ND
BY
PC
S-V
IDE
US
B
CA
RD
CO
MP
ON
ENT
LAN
IN
O IN
VID
Cb/
EO
Pb
IN
Cr/P
r
L/M AUD
ONO IO
AU
DIO
CO
IN
CO
IN
MP
AU
DIO
OU
MP
UTE
UTE
R1
R3
IN
IN
T
MO
CO
NIT
OR
OU
MP
PC
UTE
R2
IN
CO
NT
RO
L
AC
IN
G-7
Austausch der Lampe

Nach ca. 2000 Betriebsstunden (bis zu 3000 Stunden im Eco-Modus) blinkt die Lampenanzeige am Gehuse rot und
die Meldung [Das Ende der Lampenlebensdauer ist erreicht. Bitte tauschen Sie die Lampe aus.] erscheint.
Selbst wenn die Lampe noch funktioniert, sollte sie nach 2000 Betriebsstunden (bis zu 3000 Stunden im Eco- Modus)
ausgetauscht werden, um die optimale Leistungsfhigkeit des Projektors sicherzustellen. Nach dem Austausch der
Lampe, unbedingt den Lampenbetriebsstundenzhler lschen. ( Bedienunghandbuch: Seite 101)
VORSICHT
BERHREN SIE DIE LAMPE NICHT unmittelbar nachdem sie in Betrieb war. Sie wird extrem hei sein. Schalten Sie den
Projektor aus, warten Sie 30 Sekunden, schalten Sie den Hauptnetzschalter aus und trennen Sie dann das Netzkabel ab.
Lassen Sie die Lampe mindestens eine Stunde lang abkhlen, bevor Sie sie anfassen.
ENTFERNEN SIE KEINE SCHRAUBEN auer den zwei Lampengehuse-Schrauben. Sie knnten einen elektrischen Schlag
erleiden.
Zerbrechen Sie das Glas auf dem Lampengehuse nicht.
Beseitigen Sie Fingerabdrcke auf der Glasflche des Lampengehuses. Fingerabdrcke auf der Glasflche knnen einen
unerwnschten Schatten und schlechte Bildqualitt verursachen.
Nach 2100 Betriebsstunden (bis zu 3100 Betriebsstunden im Eco Modus) schaltet sich der Projektor aus und setzt sich in den
Standby-Modus. In diesem Fall muss die Lampe unbedingt ausgetauscht werden. Wenn die Lampe ber 2000
Betriebsstunden (bis zu 3000 Stunden im Eco-Modus) benutzt wird, kann die Glhbirne zerplatzen und die einzelnen
Glasstcke werden im Lampengehuse verstreut. Fassen Sie die Splitter nicht an, da Sie sich daran verletzen knnten. Sollte
einmal eine Lampe zerplatzt sein, beauftragen Sie bitte Ihren NEC-Fachhndler mit dem Lampenaustausch.
Austausch der Lampe:

Die fr einen Austausch erforderliche optionale Lampe und Werkzeuge:
Ersatzlampe VT75LP
Kreuzschraubendreher o. .
1. Stellen Sie den Projektor auf ein weiches Tuch und drehen Sie ihn um, um die Lampenabdeckung auf der
Unterseite erreichen zu knnen.
2. Verwenden Sie einen Kreuzschraubendreher, um die Zunge zu schieben und zu lsen.

Schieben Sie die Lampenabdeckung ab.
1
2
1
G-8
3. Lsen Sie die beiden Befestigungsschrauben des Lampengehuses, bis der Kreuzschraubendreher frei
dreht. Die zwei Schrauben knnen nicht entfernt werden.
Umfassen Sie das Lampengehuse und entfernen Sie es.
Verriegelung
HINWEIS: Auf dem Lampengehuse befindet sich zur Vermeidung eines elektrischen Schlages eine Verriegelung. Versuchen
Sie nicht, diese Verriegelung zu umgehen.
4. Setzen Sie das neue Lampengehuse ein, bis es in der Fassung einrastet.
VORSICHT
Verwenden Sie ausschlielich die NEC-Austauschlampe VT75LP.
Bestellen Sie diese bei Ihrem NEC-Hndler.
Befestigen Sie das Lampengehuse mit den beiden Befestigungsschrauben.

Ziehen Sie die zwei Schrauben unbedingt an.
5. Setzen Sie die Lampenabdeckung wieder auf.

Schlieen Sie die Lampenabdeckung, bis sie einrastet.
6. Schlieen Sie das im Lieferumfang enthaltene Netzkabel an, schalten Sie den Hauptnetzschalter und den
Projektor ein.
7. Whlen Sie zuletzt das Men [Reset] [Lampenbetriebsstunden lschen], um die Lampenbetriebsstunden auf Null zu stellen.
HINWEIS: Wenn die Lampe 2100 Betriebsstunden (bis zu 3100 Stunden im Eco Modus) berschreitet, kann der Projektor nicht
eingeschaltet und das Men nicht angezeigt werden.
Drcken Sie in diesem Fall mindestens 10 Sekunden lang die die sich auf der Fernbedienung befindliche [HELP]-Taste, um den
Lampenbetriebsstunden-Zhler auf Null zurckzustellen.
Wenn der Lampenbetriebsstunden-Zhler auf Null zurckgesetzt ist, erlischt die LAMP-Anzeige.
G-9
Fehlersuche
Dieses Kapitel hilft Ihnen bei der Beseitigung von Strungen, die bei der Einrichtung oder whrend des Betriebes
Ihres Projektors auftreten knnen.
(Die in der Tabelle aufgefhrten Zahlenangaben beziehen sich auf die jeweiligen Seiten im Bedienunghandbuch.)
Anzeige-Meldungen
Netzanzeige (POWER) Power Indicator
Anzeige-Zustand
Projektor -Zustand
Anzeige blinkt
Grn
Hinweis
0,5 Sek. Ein,
Die Hauptstromversorgung ist ausgeschaltet.

Warten Sie einen Moment.
Der Projektor macht sich einschaltbereit.
0,5 Sek. Aus

2,5 Sek. Ein,
Ausschalt-Timer ist aktiviert.
Aus
0,5 Sek. Aus

Orange
0,5 Sek. Ein,

0,5 Sek. Aus
Anzeige leuchtet Grn
Der Projektor befindet sich in der Abkhlphase. Warten Sie einen Moment.
Der Projektor ist eingeschaltet.
Der Projektor befindet sich im Standby-
Orange
Modus.
Statusanzeige (STATUS)
Anzeige-Zustand
Aus
Anzeige blinkt
Rot
Grn
Orange
Anzeige leuchtet Orange
Grn
Projektor -Zustand
Hinweis
Tauschen Sie die Lampenabdeckung

richtig aus. ( Seite 105)
Der Projektor ist berhitzt. Bringen Sie den
Projektor an einen khleren Ort.
Das Netzgert funktioniert nicht
richtig.
Die Lfter funktionieren nicht richtig.
Lampe leuchtet nicht. Warten Sie eine
volle Minute und dann wieder
einschalten.
Der Projektor aktiviert sich neu.
Das integrierte LAN und das Wireless-LAN knnen nicht gleichzeitig an das selbe Netzwerk angeschlossen werden.
Um das integrierte LAN und das Wireless-LAN
gleichzeitig nutzen zu knnen, verbinden Sie diese mit verschiedenen Netzwerken ( Seite 87).
Die Bedienfeld-Sperre ist eingeschaltet. Sie haben bei eingeschalteter
Bedienfeld-Sperre eine Gehusetaste
gedrckt. ( Seite 79)
Der Projektor befindet sich im Standby-
Modus.
Normal
1 Zyklus (0,5 Sek. Lampenabdeckungsfehler
Ein, 2,5 Sek. Aus)
2 Zyklen (0,5 Sek. Temperaturfehler
Ein, 0,5 Sek. Aus)
3 Zyklen (0,5 Sek. Spannungsfehler
Ein, 0,5 Sek. Aus)
4 Zyklen (0,5 Sek. Lfterfehler
Ein, 0,5 Sek. Aus)
6 Zyklen (0,5 Sek. Lampenfehler
Ein, 0,5 Sek. Aus)
Neuaktivierung der Lampe
1 Zyklus (0,5 Sek. Netzwerk-Konflikt
Ein, 2,5 Sek. Aus)
Lampenanzeige (LAMP)
Anzeige-Zustand
Aus
Anzeige blinkt
Rot
Projektor -Zustand
Hinweis
Normal
Die Lampe hat das Ende ihrer Lebensdauer
Tauschen Sie die Lampe aus.
erreicht. Die Lampenaustausch-Meldung
( Seite 104)
wird angezeigt.
Anzeige leuchtet Rot
Die zulssige Lampen-Betriebsstundenzahl

wurde berschritten. Der Projektor schaltet
Tauschen Sie die Lampe aus.

( Seite 104)
sich erst nach dem Austausch der Lampe

Grn
wieder ein.
Der Lampenmodus ist auf Eco eingestellt.
G-10
Herkmmliche Strungen & Lsungen (Siehe auch Netz / Status / Lampen-Anzeige auf Seite G-10.)
(Die in der Tabelle aufgefhrten Zahlenangaben beziehen sich auf die jeweiligen Seiten im Bedienunghandbuch.)
Strung
berprfen Sie diese Punkte
Der Projektor schaltet

sich nicht ein
Stellen Sie sicher, dass das Netzkabel eingesteckt und die Netztaste am Projektorgehuse oder auf der Fernbedienung gedrckt ist. ( Seite 23, 24)
Stellen Sie sicher, dass das Lampengehuse richtig installiert ist. ( Seite 105)
berprfen Sie, ob der Projektor berhitzt ist. Wenn die Belftung um den Projektor herum nicht ausreichend ist,
oder wenn der Raum, in dem die Prsentation ausgefhrt wird, besonders warm ist, stellen Sie den Projektor an
einem khleren Ort auf.
berprfen Sie, ob die Lampenbetriebszeit von 2100 Stunden berschritten worden ist (bis zu 3100 Stunden: EcoModus). Sollte dies der Fall sein, tauschen Sie die Lampe aus. Stellen Sie nach dem Lampenaustausch die Lampenbetriebsstunden auf Null. ( Seite 101)
Mglicherweise leuchtet die Lampe nicht. Warten Sie eine ganze Minute, bevor Sie den Projektor erneut einschalten.
Schaltet sich aus
Stellen Sie sicher, dass das Strom-Management oder Ausschalt-Timer ausgeschaltet ist. ( Seite 94, 96)
Kein Bild
Whlen Sie mit der SOURCE-Taste am Projektorgehuse oder mit der VIDEO-, S-VIDEO-, COMPUTER 1, COMPUTER 2, COMPUTER 3 (nur LT380), COMPONENT- oder VIEWER-Taste auf der Fernbedienung Ihre Quelle aus. (
Seite 26)
Stellen Sie sicher, dass Ihre Kabel richtig angeschlossen sind.
Stellen Sie mit Hilfe der Mens die Helligkeit und den Kontrast ein. ( Seite 71)
Prfen Sie, ob das Bild stummgeschaltet ist. ( Seite 34)
Nehmen Sie die Linsenkappe ab.
Stellen Sie die Einstellungen auf die Werkvoreinstellung zurck (Reset). Verwenden Sie dazu die Option Reset im
Men. ( Seite 101)
Geben Sie Ihr registriertes Schlsselwort ein, falls die Sicherheit-Funktion aktiviert ist. ( Seite 42)
Schlieen Sie den Projektor an den Notebook-PC an, whrend sich der Projektor im Standby-Modus befindet
und bevor Sie den Notebook-PC einschalten.
In den meisten Fllen wird das Ausgangssignal des Notebook-PCs nur eingeschaltet, wenn dieser vor dem
Einschalten an den Projektor angeschlossen wurde.
* Wenn das Bild whrend der Benutzung der Fernbedienung abschaltet, liegt das mglicherweise daran, dass der
Bildschirmschoner des Computers oder der Power Management-Software aktiviert ist.
Beziehen Sie sich auch auf die nchste Seite.
Die Farbe oder der Farbton wirkt ungewhnlich
Prfen Sie, ob in [Wandfarbe] eine geeignete Farbe ausgewhlt worden ist. Sollte dies der Fall sein, mssen Sie
eine geeignete Option auswhlen. ( Seite 78)
Stellen Sie [Farbton] in [Einstellen] ein. ( Seite 71)
Das Bild ist nicht rechtwinklig zum Bildschirm
Positionieren Sie den Projektor neu, um dessen Winkel zum Bildschirm zu verbessern. ( Seite 27)
Korrigieren Sie die Trapezverzerrungen mit Hilfe der 3D Reform-Funktion. ( Seite 29)
Das Bild ist verschwommen
Stellen Sie den Fokus ein. ( Seite 28)

Positionieren Sie den Projektor neu, um dessen Winkel zum Bildschirm zu verbessern. ( Seite 27)
Stellen Sie sicher, dass der Abstand zwischen Projektor und Bildschirm innerhalb des Einstellungsbereiches der
Linse liegt. ( Seite 11)
Kondensation kann sich auf der Linse bilden, wenn ein kalter Projektor in einen warmen Raum gebracht und
eingeschaltet wird. Sollte dies geschehen, lassen Sie den Projektor so lange stehen, bis keine Kondensation mehr
auf der Linse vorhanden ist.
Das Bild rollt vertikal,

horizontal oder beides
Whlen Sie mithilfe der SOURCE-Taste am Projektorgehuse oder den Tasten VIDEO, S-VIDEO, COMPUTER 1,
COMPUTER 2, COMPUTER 3 (nur LT380), COMPONENT, VIEWER oder LAN auf der Fernbedienung die Quelle.
(Video, S-Video, Computer, Komponenten, Viewer oder LAN). ( Seite 26)
Richten Sie das Computerbild manuell mit der Funktion [Takt]/[Phase] in den [Einstellen] [Bild-optionen] ein.
( Seite 72)
Die Fernbedienung
funktioniert nicht
Legen Sie neue Batterien ein. ( Seite 9)

Stellen Sie sicher, dass sich zwischen Ihnen und dem Projektor keine Hindernisse befinden.
Betreiben Sie die Fernbedienung innerhalb eines Bereiches von 22 Fu (7 m) zum Projektor. ( Seite 9)
Die
Statusanzeige
leuchtet oder blinkt
Beziehen Sie sich auf die oben aufgefhrten Statusanzeige-Meldungen. ( Seite 107)
Vertikale Streifen im
RGB-Modus
Drcken Sie die Taste AUTO ADJUST am Projektorgehuse oder AUTO ADJ. auf der Fernbedienung. ( Seite 31)
Richten Sie das Computerbild manuell mit der Funktion [Takt]/[Phase] in den [Einstellen] [Bild-optionen] ein.
( Seite 72)
Die USB-Maus funktioniert nicht.
Stellen Sie sicher, dass Ihre USB-Maus ordnungsgem am Projektor angeschlossen ist.
Der Projektor untersttzt unter Umstnden gewisse USB-Mausmodelle nicht.
Einzelheiten erfragen Sie bitte bei Ihrem Fachhndler.
G-11
Kein Bild, oder das Bild wird nicht richtig angezeigt.
Der Projektor und der PC fahren hoch.

Schlieen Sie den Projektor an den Notebook-PC an, whrend sich der Projektor im Standby-Modus befindet
und bevor Sie den Notebook-PC einschalten.
In den meisten Fllen wird das Ausgangssignal des Notebook-PCs nur eingeschaltet, wenn dieser vor dem
Einschalten an den Projektor angeschlossen wurde.
HINWEIS: Sie knnen die Horizontal-Frequenz des gegenwrtigen Signals im Projektor-Men unter Information berprfen.
Wenn die Frequenz 0kHz betrgt , bedeutet dies, dass vom Computer kein Signal ausgegeben wird. Siehe Seite 98
(Bedienunghandbuch) oder fahren Sie mit dem nchsten Schritt fort.
Aktivieren des externen Displays des Computers.

Die Tatsache, dass auf dem Bildschirm des Notebook-PCs ein Bild angezeigt wird, bedeutet nicht, dass
zwangslufig auch ein Signal zum Projektor ausgegeben wird. Bei der Verwendung eines PC-kompatiblen
Laptops wird das externe Display durch eine Kombination von Funktionstasten aktiviert / entaktiviert.
Normalerweise wird das externe Display mit der Tastenkombination der Fn-Taste und einer der 12
Funktionstasten ein- oder ausgeschaltet. NEC-Laptops verwenden z.B. die Tastenkombination Fn + F3,
whrend Dell-Laptops die Tastenkombination Fn + F8 verwenden, um durch die Auswahlmglichkeiten des
externen Displays zu schalten.
Kein Standard-Signalausgang vom Computer

Wenn es sich bei dem Ausgangssignal von einem Notebook-PC nicht um eine Industrienorm handelt, wird das
projizierte Bild unter Umstnden nicht richtig angezeigt. Entaktivieren Sie in einem solchen Fall bei der
Verwendung des Projektor-Displays den LCD-Bildschirm des Notebook-PCs. Jeder Notebook-PC aktiviert /
entaktiviert die lokalen LCD-Bildschirme - wie im vorherigen Schritt beschrieben - auf unterschiedliche Weise.
Einzelheiten hierzu finden Sie in den Computer-Unterlagen.
Bei der Verwendung eines Macintoshs wird das Bild nicht richtig angezeigt
Stellen Sie den DIP-Schalter des Mac-Adapters (nicht im Lieferumfang des Projektors enthalten) bei der
Verwendung eines Macintoshs der Auflsung entsprechend ein. Starten Sie nach der Einstellung Ihren
Macintosh neu, um die nderungen zu aktivieren.
Wenn Sie die Position des DIP-Schalters am Mac-Adapter ndern, um andere als von Ihrem Macintosh und
vom Projektor untersttzte Anzeigemodi einzustellen, springt das Bild mglicherweise leicht oder es wird gar
kein Bild angezeigt. Stellen Sie den DIP-Schalter in einem solchen Fall auf den festeingestellten 13"-Modus und
starten Sie Ihren Macintosh neu. Setzen Sie die DIP-Schalter dann zurck auf einen anzeigefhigen Modus und
starten Sie Ihren Macintosh noch einmal neu.
HINWEIS: Fr den Anschluss eines PowerBooks, das nicht mit einem 15-pol. D-Sub-Anschluss ausgestattet ist, bentigen Sie
ein von Apple Computer hergestelltes Video-Adapter-Kabel.
Spiegeln auf einem PowerBook

* Bei der Verwendung dieses Projektors mit einem Macintosh PowerBook, lsst sich die Ausgabe
mglicherweise erst dann auf 1024 768 einstellen, wenn die Spiegel-Funktion auf Ihrem PowerBook
ausgeschaltet ist. Beziehen Sie sich bezglich der Spiegel-Funktion auf das Bedienungshandbuch fr Ihren
Macintosh-Computer.
Auf dem Macintosh-Bildschirm sind die Ordner und Symbole ausgeblendet.

Auf dem Bildschirm sind unter Umstnden weder Ordner noch Symbole sichtbar. Whlen Sie in einem solchen
Fall im Apple-Men [View] [Arrange] und ordnen Sie die Symbole an.
G-12
Franais
Voici comment utiliser les documents utilisateur fournis

Quatre documents utilisateur sont fournis avec le projecteur.
Informations importantes
Lire dabord la section sur les informations importantes. Elle donne des informations sur la scurit du
projecteur, les prcautions observer, le remplacement de la lampe et la localisation des pannes.
Guide dinstallation rapide
Le guide dinstallation rapide dcrit linstallation initiale et donne des informations dutilisation concernant la
connexion la source, la mise sous tension, la slection dune source et dautres instructions dutilisation de
base.
Guide dinstallation de logiciel utilitaire NEC [Wired and Wireless Network Setup Guide]
Le guide dinstallation de logiciel utilitaire NEC fournit les informations ncessaires linstallation et indique ce
que vous pouvez faire avec ces cinq programmes utilitaires contenus sur le CD-ROM User Supportware 3
fourni.
Mode demploi fourni avec le CD-ROM
Le mode demploi complet est fourni avec le CD-ROM en format PDF (Portable Document Format) et donne
des informations dtailles sur le produit et lutilisation pour votre projecteur NEC.
Le manuel est disponible en sept langues (anglais, allemand, franais, italien, espagnol, sudois et japonais).
Pour visualiser ou imprimer les fichiers PDF Adobe Acrobat Reader ou Adobe Reader.
REMARQUE: Adobe Acrobat Reader ou Adobe Reader peut tre tlcharg du site Internet de Adobe.
Visiter le site http://www.adobe.com et tlcharger la version actuelle correspondant votre systme dexploitation.
Pour visualiser le mode demploi (PDF)

[Windows]
1. Insrer le CD-ROM fourni dans le lecteur de CD-ROM de votre ordinateur.
2. Double-cliquer sur licne [Poste de travail] sur le bureau de Windows.
3. Double-cliquer sur licne [NECPJ-UM] CD-ROM.
4. Double-cliquer sur licne [start_menu.pdf].
Adobe Acrobat Reader ou Adobe Reader dmarre et vous permet de visualiser le menu Dmarrer.
5. Cliquer sur [Mode demploi].
Le menu Index saffiche.
6. Cliquer sur le titre du chapitre visualiser.
[Macintosh]
1. Insrer le CD-ROM fourni dans le lecteur de CD-ROM de votre Macintosh.
2. Double-cliquer sur licne [NECPJ-UM] CD-ROM sur le bureau de votre Macintosh.
3. Double-cliquer sur licne [start_menu.pdf].
Adobe Acrobat Reader ou Adobe Reader dmarre et vous permet de visualiser le menu Dmarrer.
4. Cliquer sur [Mode demploi].
Le menu Index saffiche.
5. Cliquer sur le titre du chapitre visualiser.
Pour copier le manuel dutilisateur (PDF) sur votre ordinateur:

Les mode demploi dans le CD-ROM fourni peuvent tre copis sur le disque dur de votre ordinateur.
Slectionner la version de votre langue dans [LT380_index_*.pdf] et [LT380_manual_*.pdf] du dossier [manual]
du CD-ROM fourni et les copier sur le disque dur de votre ordinateur.
Pour plus de dtails, consultez le

mode demploi (format PDF)
prsent sur le CD-ROM fourni.
F-1
Consignes de scurit
Prcautions
Veuillez lire ce manuel avec attention avant dutiliser votre projecteur NEC LT380/LT280 et gardez ce manuel porte
de main afin de pouvoir y recourir facilement. Le numro de srie se trouve en dessous du projecteur. Linscrire ici :
ATTENTION
Pour couper compltement lalimentation, retirez la prise du secteur.
La prise du secteur doit tre accessible et installe le plus prs possible de lappareil.
ATTENTION
POUR VITER TOUT CHOC LECTRIQUE, NOUVREZ PAS LE BOTIER.
A LINTRIEUR SE TROUVENT DES COMPOSANTS HAUTE TENSION.
POUR TOUTE RPARATION, ADRESSEZ-VOUS UN RPARATEUR AGRE.
Ce symbole avertit lutilisateur que le contact avec certaines parties non isoles lintrieur de lappareil
risque de causer une lectrocution. Il est donc dangereux de toucher quoi que ce soit lintrieur de
lappareil.
Ce symbole avertit lutilisateur que dimportantes informations sont fournies sur le fonctionnement ou lentretien de cet appareil.
Ces informations doivent tre lues attentivement pour viter tout problme.
AVERTISSEMENT : AFIN DE PREVENIR TOUT RISQUE DINCENDIE OU DE CHOC LECTRIQUE, NEXPOSEZ PAS CET APPAREIL LA PLUIE OU LHUMIDIT.
NE PAS UTILISER DE RALLONGE AVEC LA PRISE DE CETTE APPAREIL ET NE PAS NON PLUS LA BRANCHER DANS UNE PRISE MURALE SI TOUTES LES FICHES NE PEUVENT TRE INSRES COMPLTEMENT.
;;
;
;
;
;;;;
DOC Avis de conformation (pour le Canada uniquement)

Cet appareil numrique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Rglement sur le Matriel Brouilleur du
Canada.
Cette tiquette se trouve sur le ct de la tlcommande.
Cette indication se trouve sur le haut de la tlcommande.
ATTENTION
L'utilisation de commandes, de rglages ou la ralisation de procdures autres que celles spcifies ici
risquent de vous exposer des radiations dangereuses.
ATTENTION
Ne pas regarder dans le pointeur laser lorsquil est en marche et ne pas pointer le faisceau laser en
direction dune personne. Des blessures graves pourraient en rsulter.
ATTENTION
Eviter dafficher des images stationnaires pendant une priode prolonge, sinon ces images seront
momentanment prolonges la surface du panneau LCD.
Si cela se produit, continuer utiliser votre projecteur. Larrire-plan statique des images prcdentes
disparatra.
F-2
Mise au rebut du produit usag

La lgislation europenne, applique dans tous les Etats membres, exige que les produits lectriques et
lectroniques portant la marque ( gauche) doivent tre mis au rebut sparment des autres ordures
mnagres. Ceci inclus les projecteurs et leurs accessoires lectriques ou lampes. Lorsque vous mettez
au rebut ces produits, veuillez suivre les recommandations des autorits locales et/ou demandez conseil
au magasin qui vous a vendu le produit.
Une fois ces produits mis au rebut, ils sont recycls et de manire approprie. Cet effort nous aidera
rduire les dchets et leurs consquences ngatives, comme par exemple celles causes par le mercure
des lampes sur la sant humaine et sur lenvironnement, mme faibles doses.
La marque figurant sur les produits lectriques et lectroniques ne sapplique quaux Etats membres
actuels de lUnion Europenne.
Mesures de scurit importantes

Ces instructions de scurit garantissent la longvit de votre projecteur et prviennent les risques dincendie et de
dcharge lectrique. Lisez-les et respectez les conseils.
Installation
Ne placez pas le projecteur dans les endroits suivants :

- sur un chariot, un support ou une table instable.
- prs dun point deau, dun bain ou dans des pices humides.
- la lumire directe du soleil, prs de chauffages ou dappareils mettant de la chaleur.
- dans un environnement poussireux, enfum ou embu.
- sur une feuille de papier, une carpette ou un tapis.
Si vous voulez installer le projecteur au plafond :

- Ne pas essayer dinstaller le projecteur soi-mme.
- Le projecteur doit tre install par un technicien qualifi pour garantir une installation russie et rduire le
risque dventuelles blessures corporelles.
- De plus, le plafond doit tre suffisamment solide pour supporter le projecteur et linstallation doit tre
conforme aux rglementations locales de construction.
- Veuillez consulter votre revendeur pour de plus amples informations.
Placez le projecteur en position horizontale

Langle dinclinaison du projecteur ne devrait pas excder 10 degrs. Le projecteur ne devrait pas non plus tre install
ailleurs que sur un bureau ou au plafond, sinon la dure de vie de la lampe risque dtre grandement courte.
10
F-3
Prcautions contre lincendie et llectrocution

Veiller ce que la ventilation soit suffisante et ce que les bouches ne soient pas obstrues afin dviter toute accumulation de
chaleur lintrieur du projecteur. Laisser un espace dau moins 4 pouces (10 cm) entre le projecteur et le mur.
Ne touchez pas la sortie de ventilation qui se trouve sur la gauche (lorsquon regarde lappareil de face) car celleci peut tre trs
chaude lorsque le projecteur est allum et immdiatement aprs son extinction.
Eviter de faire tomber des corps trangers comme des trombones et des morceaux de papier dans le projecteur.
Ne pas essayer de rcuprer des objets tombs dans le projecteur. Ne pas insrer dobjet mtallique comme un fil ou un tournevis
dans le projecteur. Si quelque chose venait tomber dans le projecteur, le dbrancher immdiatement et demander un rparateur qualifi de retirer lobjet.
Ne placez pas dobjet sur le projecteur.
Ne pas toucher la prise dalimentation pendant un orage. Cela pourrait causer un choc lectrique ou un incendie.
Le projecteur a t conu pour fonctionner sur une alimentation lectrique de 100 - 240 V CA 50/60 Hz. Veiller ce que lalimentation lectrique remplisse bien ces conditions avant dutiliser le projecteur.
Ne pas regarder dans lobjectif lorsque le projecteur est en marche. Cela pourrait provoquer de graves dommages oculaires.
Tenir les objets tels quune loupe lcart du rayon de lumire du projecteur. La lumire projete par lobjectif est puissante, par
consquent tout objet pouvant rediriger la lumire provenant de lobjectif peut provoquer des dangers inattendus comme un
incendie ou blesser les yeux.
Ne pas couvrir lobjectif avec le cache-objectif fourni ni avec un autre objet lorsque le projecteur est en marche. Cela pourrait faire
fondre le cache et risquerait de vous brler les mains en raison de la chaleur produite par la lumire.
Ne placez pas dobjet pouvant tre affect par la chaleur en face de lobjectif du projecteur ou prs des orifices de ventilation.
A dfaut de respecter cette consigne, les objets en question pourraient fondre ou vous brler les mains en raison de la chaleur
produite par le faisceau de lobjectif et par les orifices de ventilation.
Manipulez le cble dalimentation avec prcaution. Un cble endommag ou gratign peut entraner une lectrocution ou un
incendie.
- Nutilisez aucun autre cble dalimentation que celui fourni.
- Ne pliez pas ou ncrasez pas le cble dalimentation de manire excessive.
- Ne placez pas le cble dalimentation sous le projecteur ou tout autre objet lourd.
- Ne couvrez pas le cble dalimentation avec dautres matriaux doux comme des tapis.
- Ne soumettez pas le cble dalimentation la chaleur.
- Ne manipulez pas la prise dalimentation avec des mains mouilles.
Si une des conditions suivantes se prsente, teignez le projecteur, dbranchez le cble dalimentation et faites retirer lobjet par
un technicien NEC qualifi :
- Le cble ou la prise dalimentation est endommag ou gratign.
- Du liquide a t rpandu lintrieur du projecteur, ou ce dernier a t expos la pluie ou leau.
- Le projecteur ne fonctionne pas normalement lorsque vous suivez les instructions dcrites dans ce mode demploi.
- Le projecteur est tomb ou le botier a t endommag.
- Les performances du projecteur ont dclin, indiquant un besoin de maintenance.
- Le projecteur nest pas utilis pendant une longue dure.
Dconnectez le cble dalimentation et tout autre cble avant de transporter le projecteur.
Eteignez le projecteur et dbranchez le cble dalimentation avant de nettoyer le botier ou de remplacer la lampe.
Lors de lutilisation dun cble LAN :
Pour votre scurit, ne raccordez pas au connecteur pour priphrique externe de cble pouvant avoir une tension excessive.
ATTENTION
Ne pas utiliser le pied inclinaison rglable pour effectuer des rglages autres que ceux initialement prvus. Une utilisation
non-prvue du pied d'inclinaison pour porter ou suspendre le projecteur (au mur ou au plafond) peut causer des dommages au
projecteur.
Ne pas envoyer le projecteur dans la sacoche souple par service d'expdition ou par un transporteur de fret. Le projecteur se
trouvant lintrieur de la sacoche souple pourrait tre endommag.
Slectionner [Haut] dans le Mode de ventilateur si le projecteur continue tre utilis pendant plusieurs jours daffile. (A partir
du menu, slectionner [Paramtrage - Options] [Mode Ventilateur] [Haut].)
Ne dbrancher le cble dalimentation de la prise murale dans aucune des circonstances suivantes.
Ceci pourrait endommager le projecteur :
- Pendant que la lampe du projecteur est allume.
-
Pendant que les ventilateurs de refroidissement tournent. (Les ventilateurs de refroidissement continuent tourner pendant
30 secondes aprs lextinction du projecteur).
Lorsque le voyant daccs la carte PC est allum. Vous risquez ainsi dendommager la carte mmoire PC.
F-4
Prcautions se rapportant la tlcommande
Manipuler la tlcommande avec prcaution.
Si la tlcommande est mouille, lessuyer immdiatement.
Eviter toute chaleur excessive et lhumidit.
Ne pas chauffer, dmonter ou jeter les piles au feu.
Si la tlcommande nest pas utilise pendant une longue priode, retirer les piles.
S'assurer de respecter la polarit (+/) des piles.
Ne pas utiliser des piles neuves et des piles usages en mme temps et ne pas utiliser des piles de diffrents
types ensemble.
Mettre les piles usages au rebut dpars la rglementation locales.
Remplacement de la lampe
Pour remplacer la lampe, suivre toutes les instructions de la page F-8 F-9.
Veiller remplacer la lampe lorsque le message [La lampe a atteint sa dure de vie maximum, prire de la
remplacer.] apparat. Si lon continue utiliser la lampe aprs quelle ait atteint la fin de service, lampoule de la
lampe risque de se briser en clats, et des dbris de verre risquent dtre disperss dans le coffret de la lampe.
Ne les touchez pas car ils peuvent vous blesser.
Si cela se produit, prendre contact avec votre revendeur pour le remplacement de la lampe.
Caractristique de la lampe
Le projecteur utilise une lampe au mercure haute-pression comme source lumineuse.
Les caractristiques de la lampe font que sa luminosit dcline graduellement avec lge.
Egalement, le fait dallumer et dteindre frquemment la lampe favorisera cette perte de luminosit.
ATTENTION:
Lors du retrait de la lampe dun projecteur mont au plafond, assurez-vous que personne ne se trouve sous le
projecteur. Des fragments de verre pourraient tomber si la lampe a grill.
F-5
Nettoyage et remplacement du filtre

L'ponge du filtre air empche la poussire et la salet de pntrer l'intrieur du projecteur. Il doit tre nettoy
toutes les 100 heures d'utilisation (plus souvent dans un environnement poussireux). Si le filtre est sale ou obstru,
le projecteur risque de surchauffer.
ATTENTION
Eteindre le projecteur, le mettre hors tension et le dbrancher avant de remplacer le filtre.
Ne nettoyer que la partie extrieure du capot du filtre l'aide d'un aspirateur.
Ne pas essayer de faire fonctionner le projecteur sans le capot du filtre.
Pour nettoyer le filtre air :

Aspirer la poussire du filtre travers le capot.
Pour rinitialiser la dure d'utilisation du filtre, slectionner [Reset] [Effacer heures filtre] dans le menu.
( Mode d'emploi: page 101 pour rinitialiser la dure d'utilisation du filtre)
Pour remplacer le filtre (ponge) :

1. ter le capot du filtre en enfonant le fermoir jusqu' ce que vous sentiez le capot se dtacher.
Fermoir
PO
JU
AD
TO
AU
SE
LE
CT
3D
RE
FO
RM
RD
CA
BY
PC
D
AN
/ST
ON
CE
UR
SO
ST
MP
LA US
AT R
ST WE
2. Extraire dlicatement le filtre (ponge) et le remplacer par un filtre neuf.
F-6
3. Remettre en place le capot du nouveau filtre.
REMARQUE : Ne pas laver le filtre l'eau et au savon. L'eau et le savon endommageraient la membrane du filtre. Avant de
remplacer le filtre, ter la poussire et la salet du projecteur. Eviter la poussire et la salet pendant le changement de filtre.
REMARQUE : Lorsque vous remplacez la lampe, il est plus prudent de remplacer galement le filtre. Le filtre est livr avec la
lampe de rechange.
Nettoyage du botier et de l'objectif

1. Eteindre le projecteur avant d'effectuer le nettoyage.
2. Nettoyer rgulirement le botier avec un chiffon humide. S'il est trs sale, utiliser un dtergent doux. Ne
jamais utiliser de dtergent puissant ou des solvants tels que l'alcool ou un solvant.
PO
BY
PC
3D
RE
FO
RM
AU
TO
AD
JU
ST
SO
UR
CE
ON
/S
TA
ND
RD
CA
P
M
LA US
AT
ST WER
3. Utiliser une soufflette ou un papier objectif pour nettoyer l'objectif, et faire attention ne pas le rayer
ou l'abmer.
SEL
SE
LE
CT
ECT
3D
RE
FOR
M
AU
TO
AD
JUS
T
SO
UR
CE
ON
/S
PC
LAM CAR
D
P
STA
POW TUS
ER
TA
ND
BY
PC
CA
RD
CO
S-V
IDE
US
B
MP
ON
ENT
LAN
IN
O IN
VID
Cb/
EO
Pb
IN
Cr/P
r
L/M AUD
ONO IO
AU
DIO
CO
IN
CO
IN
MP
AU
DIO
OU
MP
UTE
UTE
R1
R3
IN
IN
T
MO
CO
NIT
OR
OU
MP
PC
UTE
R2
IN
CO
NT
RO
L
AC
IN
F-7
Remplacement de la lampe
Lorsque la lampe a fonctionn pendant 2000 heures (jusqu' 3000 heures en mode Eco) ou plus, le voyant LAMP du
projecteur clignote rouge et le message [La lampe a atteint sa dure de vie maximum, prire de la remplacer.] apparat.
Mme si la lampe fonctionne toujours, remplacez-la aprs 2000 (jusqu' 3000 heures en mode Eco) pour conserver au
projecteur des performances optimales. Aprs avoir remplac la lampe, penser remettre le compteur d'heures zro. (
Mode d'emploi: page 101)
ATTENTION
NE TOUCHEZ PAS A LA LAMPE juste aprs quelle a t utilise. Elle est trs chaude. Arrter le projecteur, attendre
30 secondes, couper l'alimentation avec l'interrupteur principal et dbrancher ensuite le cble d'alimentation. Laisser la
lampe refroidir pendant au moins une heure avant de la manipuler.
NE PAS RETIRER LES VIS, l'exception des deux vis du coffret de la lampe. Une dcharge lectrique pourrait en
rsulter.
Ne pas briser le verre dans le botier de la lampe.

Ne pas laisser d'empreintes digitales sur la surface du verre dans le botier de la lampe. Des ombres et une qualit
d'image mdiocre peuvent rsulter d'empreintes digitales laisses sur le verre.
Le projecteur s'teint et reste en mode veille aprs 2100 (jusqu' 3100 heures en mode Eco) heures de fonctionnement. Dans ce cas, remplacer la lampe. Si vous continuez d'utiliser la lampe aprs 2000 heures (jusqu' 3000 heures
en mode Eco) d'utilisation, l'ampoule de la lampe risque d'clater et des bris de verre de se rpandre dans le botier
de la lampe. Ne les touchez pas car ils peuvent vous blesser. Si cela se produit, prendre contact avec votre revendeur
NEC pour le remplacement de la lampe.
Pour remplacer la lampe :

Lampe optionnelle et outils ncessaires au remplacement :
Lampe de rechange VT75LP
Tournevis Phillips ou quivalent
1. Placer le projecteur sur un chiffon doux et le retourner pour accder au capot de la lampe situ en-dessous.
2. Utiliser un tournevis Philips pour pousser et librer l'onglet.

Enfoncer et retirer le capot de la lampe.
1
2
1
F-8
3. Desserrer les deux vis fermant le coffret de la lampe jusqu' ce que le tournevis phillips tourne dans le vide.
Les deux vis ne peuvent pas tre retires.
Extraire le coffret de la lampe en le tenant.
Interverrouillage
REMARQUE : Il y a un contact de scurit sur le botier pour viter tout risque dlectrocution. Nessayez pas de contourner ce
contact de scurit.
4. Insrer un botier de lampe neuf dans la prise.
ATTENTION
Ne pas utiliser d'autre lampe que la lampe de rechange NEC VT75LP.
A commander auprs de votre revendeur NEC.
Fixez-le laide des deux vis.

Assurez-vous de bien visser les deux vis.
5. Refixez le couvercle de la lampe.

Remettre le capot de la lampe en le faisant glisser, jusqu' ce qu'il s'embote.
6. Brancher le cble d'alimentation fourni, mettre sous tension et allumer le projecteur.

7. Slectionner finalement le menu [Reset] [Effacer heures lampe] pour remettre zro le compteur
d'heures d'utilisation de la lampe.
REMARQUE : Si la lampe a servi pendant plus de 2100 heures (jusqu 3100 heures en mode Eco), le projecteur ne peut pas tre
allum et le menu nest pas affich.
Si cela se produit, appuyez sur la touche HELP de la tlcommande pendant 10 secondes pour rinitialiser lhorloge de la
lampe.
Lorsque l'horloge de dure de la lampe est rinitialise, le tmoin LAMP disparat.
F-9
Depistage des pannes

Cette section facilite la rsolution des problmes pouvant tre rencontrs pendant l'installation ou l'utilisation du
projecteur.
(Les chiffres figurant dans le tableau font rfrence aux pages du mode demploi.)
Messages des voyants

Voyant d'alimentation (POWER)
Condition du voyant
Arrt
Condition du projecteur
Remarque
L'alimentation principale est coupe.
0,5 s Marche,
0,5 s Arrt
Le projecteur est prt s'allumer.
Attendre un instant.
2,5 s Marche,
Minut. Dsactivation est activ.
Le projecteur est en cours de
Attendre un instant.
Voyant station- Vert
refroidissement.
Le projecteur est allum.
naire
Le projecteur est en Mode veille.
Voyant cligno- Vert

tant
0,5 s Arrt
Orange
0,5 s Marche,
0,5 s Arrt
Orange
Voyant d'tat (STATUS)

Condition du voyant
Arrt
Voyant clignotant Rouge
Voyant stationnaire
Orange
Vert
Remarque
Normal
Erreur du couvercle de la lampe
Remettre le couvercle de la lampe

correctement. ( page 105)
Le projecteur est en surchauffe. Dplacer le
Erreur de temprature
projecteur vers un endroit plus frais.
Lalimentation de puissance ne
Erreur dalimentation
fonctionnera pas correctement.
Les ventilateurs ne fonctionnement
Erreur du ventilateur
pas correctement.
La lampe ne s'allume pas. Attendre une bonne
Erreur de la lampe
minute et ensuite rallumer le projecteur.
Le projecteur est r-allum.
R-allumage de la lampe
1 cycle (0.5 sec Marche, Conflit rseau
La LAN intgre et la LAN sans fil ne
2.5 sec Arrt)
peuvent pas tre connectes en mme
temps au mme rseau.
Pour utiliser la LAN intgre et la LAN
sans fil en mme temps, connectez-les
des rseaux diffrents. ( page 87)
Le verrouillage du panneau de commande Vous avez appuy sur la touche du
botier lorsque le verrouillage du
est activ.
panneau de commande tait activ.
( page 79)
Le projecteur est en Mode veille.

1 cycle (0.5 sec Marche,
2.5 sec Arrt)
0.5 sec Arrt)
0.5 sec Arrt)
0.5 sec Arrt)
0.5 sec Arrt)
Vert
Orange
Voyant de la lampe (LAMP)

Condition du voyant
Arrt
Voyant clignotant Rouge
Normal
Remarque
La lampe a atteint la fin de sa dure d'uti- Remplacer la lampe.

lisation. Le message de remplacement de ( page 104)
la lampe s'affiche.
Voyant stationnaire
Rouge
La lampe a t utilise au-del de ses li- Remplacer la lampe.

mites. Le projecteur ne s'allumera pas tant ( page 104)
que la lampe n'a pas t change.
Vert
Le mode de la lampe est rgl sur le mode Eco.
F-10
Problmes courants & Solutions (Voir galement Alimentation/Etat/Voyant de lampe page F-10.)
(Les chiffres figurant dans le tableau font rfrence aux pages du mode demploi.)
Problme
Vrifier ces lments
Ne sallume pas
Vrifier que le cble dalimentation est branch et que la touche dalimentation du coffret du projecteur ou de
la tlcommande est sous tension. ( pages 23, 24)
Sassurer que le couvercle de la lampe est install correctement. ( page 105)
Vrifiez que le projecteur ne surchauffe pas. Si la ventilation est insuffisante autour du projecteur ou si la pice
est particulirement chaude, dplacez le projecteur dans un endroit plus frais.
Vrifiez que la dure totale dutilisation de la lampe ne dpasse pas 2100 heures (jusqu 3100 heures en
mode Eco). Si cette dure est dpasse, remplacez la lampe. Aprs le remplacement de la lampe, rinitialisez
le compteur dheures. ( page 101)
La lampe peut ne pas sallumer. Attendre une minute entire, puis rallumer le projecteur.
Se mettra hors tension
Vrifier que la fonction Gestion dalimentation ou Minut. Dsactivation est dsactive. ( page 94, 96)
Absence dimage
Utiliser la touche SOURCE sur le botier du projecteur ou la touche VIDEO, S-VIDEO, COMPUTER 1, COMPUTER
2, COMPUTER 3 (LT380 uniquement), COMPONENT ou VIEWER sur la tlcommande pour slectionner la
source. ( page 26)
Sassurer que les cbles sont connects correctement.
Utiliser les menus pour ajuster la luminosit et le contraste. ( page 71)
Vrifier que limage nest pas mise en sommeil. ( page 34)
Retirer le cache-objectif.
Remettre les rglages ou ajustements aux niveaux prrgls dorigine en utilisant Retourner au rglage dorigine dans le menu. ( page 101)
Entrer le mot de passe enregistr si la fonction de scurit est active. ( page 42)
Assurez-vous de connecter le projecteur et l'ordinateur portable pendant que le projecteur est en mode de
veille et avant d'allumer l'ordinateur portable.
Dans la plupart des cas, le signal de sortie de l'ordinateur portable n'est pas activ si ce dernier n'est pas
connect au projecteur avant d'tre allum.
* Si lcran devient vierge lors de lutilisation de la tlcommande, cela peut venir du logiciel conomiseur
dcran ou de gestion dnergie de lordinateur.
Voir aussi la page suivante.
Tonalit de couleur ou la
nuance est inhabituelle
Vrifier si la couleur approprie a t slectionn dans [Couleur murale]. Si c'est le cas, slectionner l'option
approprie. ( page 78)
Rgler [Teinte] dans [Rglage]. ( page 71)
Limage nest pas angle droit par rapport

lcran
Repositionner le projecteur pour amliorer langle par rapport lcran. ( page 27)
Utiliser la fonction 3D Reform pour corriger la distorsion trapzodale. ( page 29)
Limage est floue
Limage dfile verticalement, horizontalement

ou dans les deux sens.
Utilisez la touche SOURCE sur le coffret du projecteur ou la touche VIDEO, S-VIDEO, COMPUTER 1, COMPUTER
2, COMPUTER 3 (LT380 uniquement), COMPONENT, VIEWER ou LAN de la tlcommande pour slectionner
votre source (vido, S-vido, ordinateur, Component, visionneuse ou LAN). ( page 26)
Ajustez limage de lordinateur manuellement avec [Horloge]/[Phase] dans [Rglage] [Options dimage].
( page 72)
La tlcommande ne
fonctionne pas
Installer des piles neuves. ( page 9)

Sassurer quil ny a pas dobstacles entre vous et le projecteur.
Se mettre 22 pieds (7 m) du projecteur. ( page 9)
Le voyant dtat est allum ou clignote
Voir les messages du voyant dtat ci-dessus. ( pages 107)
Bandes verticales en
mode RGB
Appuyez sur la touche AUTO ADJUST sur le coffret du projecteur ou sur la touche AUTO ADJ. de la tlcommande. ( page 31)
Ajustez limage de lordinateur manuellement avec [Horloge]/[Phase] dans [Rglage] [Options dimage]
( page 72)
La souris USB ne fonctionne pas
S'assurer que la souris USB est connecte correctement au projecteur.

Le projecteur risque de ne pas tre compatible avec certaines marques de souris USB.
Ajuster la mise au point. ( page 28)

Repositionner le projecteur pour amliorer langle par rapport lcran. ( page 27)
Sassurer que la distance entre le projecteur et lcran est dans lintervalle de rglage de lobjectif. ( page 11)
Une condensation risque de se former sur l'objectif si le projecteur est froid, dplac vers un endroit chaud et
allum ensuite. Si cela se produit, laisser le projecteur jusqu' ce qu'il n'y ait plus de condensation sur l'objectif.
Pour plus dinformations prendre contact avec votre revendeur.
F-11
S'il n'y a pas d'image ou si elle ne s'affiche pas correctement.
Procdure de mise en marche pour le projecteur et le PC.

Assurez-vous de connecter le projecteur et l'ordinateur portable pendant que le projecteur est en mode de veille
et avant d'allumer l'ordinateur portable.
Dans la plupart des cas, le signal de sortie de l'ordinateur portable n'est pas activ si ce dernier n'est pas
connect au projecteur avant d'tre allum.
REMARQUE : Il est possible de vrifier la frquence horizontale du signal actuel dans le menu du projecteur sous Information.
Si 0kHz est indiqu, cela signifie qu'aucun signal n'est mis par l'ordinateur. Voir page 98 (Mode demploi) ou passer
l'tape suivante.
Activation de l'affichage externe de l'ordinateur.

L'affichage d'une image sur l'cran de l'ordinateur portable ne signifie pas ncessairement que ce dernier met
un signal vers le projecteur. Les ordinateurs portables utilisent une combinaison de touches de fonction pour
activer ou dsactiver l'affichage externe. Normalement, la combinaison de la touche Fn avec une des 12
touches de fonction active ou dsactive l'affichage externe. Par exemple, les ordinateurs portables NEC utilisent
la combinaison de touche Fn + F3, alors que les Dell utilisent Fn + F8 pour commuter entre les slections
d'affichage externe.
Emission d'un signal non standard par l'ordinateur

Si le signal de sortie de l'ordinateur portable n'est pas aux normes du march, l'image projete risque de ne
pas s'afficher correctement. Quand cela se produit, dsactiver l'cran LCD de l'ordinateur portable lorsque le
projecteur est utilis pour l'affichage. Chaque ordinateur portable PC possde sa propre manire pour
dsactiver et ractiver les crans LCD locaux comme indiqu dans l'tape prcdente. Se rfrer la documentation de l'ordinateur pour plus de dtails.
L'image ne s'affiche pas correctement lorsqu'un ordinateur Macintosh est utilis

Quand un ordinateur Macintosh est utilis avec le projecteur, rgler le micro-commutateur DIP de son
adaptateur (non fourni avec le projecteur) en fonction de la rsolution de l'ordinateur. Ce rglage effectu,
redmarrer l'ordinateur Macintosh pour que les modifications prennent effet.
Pour rgler les modes d'affichage autres que ceux supports par l'ordinateur Macintosh et le projecteur, le
changement de position du micro-commutateur DIP sur un adaptateur de Mac risque de faire sautiller
lgrement l'image ou ne pas l'afficher du tout. Si cela se produit, rgler le micro-commutateur DIP sur le mode
13 fixe et redmarrer l'ordinateur Macintosh. Aprs cela, remettre le micro-commutateur DIP sur un mode
affichage qui fonctionne et redmarrer une nouvelle fois l'ordinateur Macintosh.
REMARQUE : Un cble adaptateur vido fabriqu par Apple Computer est ncessaire pour les PowerBook non quips de
connecteur Mini D-Sub 15 broches.
Affichage simultan sur cran de PowerBook

* Quand le projecteur est utilis avec un ordinateur portable Macintosh PowerBook, sa sortie risque de ne pas
pouvoir tre rgle sur 1024 x 768 moins que l'option mirroring soit dsactive sur celui-ci. Se rfrer au
manuel d'utilisation fourni avec le PowerBook Macintosh pour plus de dtails sur l'option d'affichage simultan
Mirroring.
Les dossiers ou icnes sont cachs sur l'cran du Macintosh

Les dossiers ou icnes risquent de ne pas tre visible l'cran. Si cela se produit, slectionner [View]
[Arrange] dans le menu Apple et arranger les icnes.
F-12
Italiano
Come utilizzare il materiale fornito per lutente

Quattro documenti per lutente sono inclusi con il proiettore.
Informazioni importanti
Leggere dapprima le informazioni importanti. Coprono le informazioni sulla sicurezza del proiettore,
precauzioni, sostituzione della lampada ed risoluzione dei problemi.
Giuda di messa a punto veloce
La guida di messa a punto veloce fornisce informazioni sulla messa a punto e sulla modalit dutilizzo che
riguardano la connessione della fonte, laccensione dellalimentazione, la selezione di una fonte ed altre
istruzioni operative di base.
Guida all'installazione dell'utilit software di NEC [Wired and Wireless Network Setup Guide]
La Guida all'installazione dell'utilit software di NEC fornisce informazioni sull'installazione e le operazioni

eseguibili con le cinque utilit di programma contenute nel CD-ROM User Supportware 3 in dotazione.
Manuale dellutente su CD-ROM
Il manuale completo dellutente fornito su CD-ROM in formato PDF (Portable Document Format) e fornisce
informazioni dettagliate sul prodotto e sul suo utilizzo per il vostro proiettore NEC.
Il manuale disponibile in sette lingue (inglese, tedesco, francese, italiano, spagnolo, svedese e giapponese).
Per vedere o stampare file in formato PDF occorre Adobe Acrobat Reader o Adobe Reader.
NOTA: Adobe Acrobat Reader o Adobe Reader possono essere scaricati dal sito internet dell Adobe.
Visitate il sito http://www.adobe.com e ottenete la versione corrente per il vostro sistema operativo.
Per visualizzare il manuale dellutente (PDF)

[Windows]
1. Inserire il CD-ROM fornito nel lettore CD-ROM del vostro computer.
2. Fare doppio clic sullicona [Risorse del computer] nella schermata di Windows.
3. Fare doppio clic sullicona [NECPJ-UM] del CD-ROM.
4. Fare doppio clic su [start_menu.pdf].
Adobe Acrobat Reader o Adobe Reader si avvieranno e vi permetteranno di vedere il men davvio.
5. Cliccare su [Manuale dellutente].
Sar visualizzato lindice del men.
6. Cliccare sul titolo del capitolo che desiderate vedere.
[Macintosh]
1. Inserire il CD-ROM fornito nel lettore CD-ROM del vostro Macintosh.
2. Fare doppio clic sullicona [NECPJ-UM] del CD-ROM nella vostra schermata Macintosh.
3. Fare doppio clic su [start_menu.pdf].
Adobe Acrobat Reader o Adobe Reader si avvieranno e vi permetteranno di visualizzare il men davvio.
4. Cliccare su [Manuale dellutente].
Sar visualizzato lindice del men.
5. Cliccare sul titolo del capitolo che volete vedere.
Per copiare il manuale dellutente nel vostro computer (PDF):

I manuali dellutente nel CD-ROM fornito possono essere copiati sul disco rigido del vostro computer.
Selezionate la vostra lingua e versione in [LT380_index_*.pdf] e [LT380_manual_*.pdf] dalla [manual] cartella
sul CD-ROM fornito e copiatele sul disco rigido del vostro computer.

Per ulteriori informazioni pi dettagliati fate
riferimento al manuale dellutente (fromato
PDF) sul CD-ROM in dotazione.
I-1
Precauzioni di sicurezza
Precauzioni
Leggete attentamente il presente manuale prima di utilizzare il nuovo proiettore NEC LT380/LT280 e tenerlo a portata
di mano per riferimenti futuri. Il numero di serie posto nella parte inferiore del proiettore. Annotatelo qui:
ATTENZIONE
Per spegnere lalimentazione, accertatevi di scollegare la spina dalla presa di alimentazione.
La presa di alimentazione deve essere installata il pi vicino possibile allapparecchiatura, in una posizione facilmente accessibile.
ATTENZIONE
PER EVITARE SCOSSE ELETTRICHE, NON APRITE LINVOLUCRO.
ALLINTERNO SI TROVANO DEI COMPONENTI AD ALTA TENSIONE.
PER OGNI RIPARAZIONE, RIVOLGERSI A PERSONALE QUALIFICATO.
Questo simbolo avverte lutente che la tensione non isolata allinterno dellunit pu essere sufficiente per
causare una scossa elettrica. Perci pericoloso entrare in contatto con le parti allinterno dellunit.
Questo simbolo avverte lutente di importanti informazioni che sono state fornite in relazione al funzionamento e alla manutenzione dellunit.
Queste informazioni devono essere lette attentamente per evitare eventuali problemi.
;;
;
;
;
;;;;
AVVERTENZE: PER EVITARE INCENDI O SCOSSE ELETTRICHE, NON ESPORRE LUNITA ALLA PIOGGIA O
ALLUMIDIT.
NON UTILIZZATE LUNITA CON UNA PROLUNGA OPPURE NON INSERIRLA IN UNA PRESA SE I DUE
CONNETTORI NON POSSONO ESSERE INSERITI A FONDO.
Questa etichetta si trova sul lato del telecomando.
Questo simbolo si trova nella parte superiore del telecomando.
ATTENZIONE
L'utilizzo di comandi, regolazioni o procedure diverse da quelle specificate nel seguente manuale possono
causare pericolose esposizioni a radiazioni.
ATTENZIONE
Non guardare il puntatore laser quando acceso e non puntare il fascio laser verso altre persone, poich
possono verificarsi infortuni gravi.
ATTENZIONE
Evitate di visualizzare immagini fisse per un periodo di tempo prolungato.
Ci pu comportare la sospensione temporanea delle immagini sulla superficie del pannello LCD.
Se ci avviene, continuate a utilizzare il proiettore: limmagine statica rimasta impressa sullo sfondo
scomparir.
I-2
Smaltimento del prodotto usato

La legislazione EU applicata in ogni Stato membro prevede che i prodotti elettrici ed elettronici recanti
questo simbolo (a sinistra) debbano essere smaltiti separatamente dai normali rifiuti domestici. Questo
include i proiettori e relativi accessori elettrici o lampade. Per lo smaltimento, seguire le indicazioni delle
autorit locali e/o rivolgersi al proprio rivenditore.
I prodotti utilizzati e raccolti vengono debitamente riciclati. Ci contribuisce a ridurre al minimo la quantit
di rifiuti nonch limpatto negativo che elementi quali il mercurio contenuto nella lampada possono avere
sulla salute umana e sullambiente. Il simbolo sui prodotti elettrici ed elettronici si riferisce soltanto agli
attuali Stati membri dellUnione europea.
Misure speciali importanti

Le istruzioni di sicurezza servono per garantire la lunga durata del proiettore e per evitare incendi e scosse elettriche.
Leggetele attentamente e prestate attenzione a tutte le avvertenze.
Installazione
Non posizionate il proiettore:

- su un carrello, un sostegno o un tavolo instabili.
- in prossimit di acqua, bagni o locali umidi.
- soggetto a luce solare diretta, in prossimit di riscaldatori o apparecchiature che sprigionino calore.
- in un ambiente polveroso, con fumo o vapore.
- su un foglio di carta, un panno o un tappeto.
Se si desidera installare il proiettore nel soffitto:

- Non installare il proiettore da soli.
- Il proiettore deve essere installato da tecnici qualificati per assicurare un funzionamento corretto e per ridurre
il rischio di lesioni personali.
- Inoltre, il soffitto deve essere sufficientemente forte da sostenere il proiettore e linstallazione deve essere
conforme alle norme locali.
- Consultate il vostro rivenditore per ulteriori informazioni.
Collocare il proiettore in posizione orizzontale

L'angolo di inclinazione non deve superare i 10 gradi e il proiettore deve essere installato solo sulla scrivania o al
soffitto, altrimenti la durata della lampada verr notevolmente ridotta.
10
I-3
Precauzioni per evitare incendi e scosse elettriche

Assicuratevi che la ventilazione sia sufficiente e che i fori di ventilazione non siano bloccati per prevenire laccumulo di
calore allinterno del proiettore. Lasciate uno spazio di almeno 10 cm tra il proiettore e la parete.
Non toccate la presa di ventilazione sulla parte anteriore sinistra (vista dal lato anteriore) poich pu surriscaldarsi notevolmente quando il proiettore viene accesso o immediatamente dopo lo spegnimento.
Evitate che oggetti estranei, quali graffette e pezzi di carta penetrino allinterno del proiettore.
Non recuperate oggetti penetrati allinterno del proiettore. Non inserite oggetti di metallo, ad esempio un filo o un cacciavite, allinterno del proiettore. Se qualche oggetto dovesse penetrare allinterno del proiettore, scollegate immediatamente il
proiettore e fate rimuovere loggetto da un tecnico del servizio di assistenza qualificato.
Stellen Sie keinerlei Gegenstnde auf dem Projektor.
Non toccate la spina di alimentazione durante i temporali, poich possono verificarsi scosse elettriche o incendi.
Il proiettore stato progettato per funzionare con unalimentazione di 100-240V CA a 50/60 Hz. Assicuratevi che lalimentazione disponibile sia conforme a questi requisiti prima di utilizzare il proiettore.
Non fissate lobiettivo quando il proiettore acceso. In caso contrario, gli occhi possono venire danneggiati gravemente.
Tenete tutti gli elementi, come ad esempio, lenti di ingrandimento, lontano dal percorso di luce del proiettore.
La luce proiettata dallobiettivo estesa, quindi qualsiasi tipo di oggetto anomalo che pu reindirizzare la luce proveniente
dallobiettivo, pu causare un risultato imprevisto, quale un incendio o lesioni agli occhi.
Non coprite lobiettivo con il copriobiettivo o con un altro oggetto simile quando il proiettore acceso. In caso contrario, il
copriobiettivo pu fondersi e potete scottarvi le mani a causa del calore emesso dalla fonte di luce.
Non posizionare alcun oggetto facilmente danneggiabile con il calore di fronte alla lente del proiettore o ai fori di ventilazione dello stesso.
In caso contrario, gli oggetti potrebbero fondersi o potreste riportare scottature alle mani a causa del calore emesso
dalluscita di luce e dalla ventilazione.
Maneggiate il cavo di alimentazione con cura. Un cavo di alimentazione danneggiato o consumato pu causare scosse
elettriche o incendi.
- Non utilizzate cavi di alimentazione diversi da quello in dotazione.
- Non piegate o tirate eccessivamente il cavo.
- Non posizionate il cavo di alimentazione sotto il proiettore o altri oggetti pesanti.
- Non coprite il cavo di alimentazione con altri materiali morbidi quali ad esempio tappeti.
- Non riscaldate il cavo di alimentazione
- Non maneggiate la spina con mani bagnate.
Spegnete il proiettore, scollegate il cavo di alimentazione e richiedete lassistenza del personale di servizio NEC per la
rimozione delloggetto nei seguenti casi:
- Quando il cavo di alimentazione o la spina sono danneggiati o consumati.
- Se del liquido stato rovesciato sul proiettore o se questultimo stato esposto a pioggia o acqua.
- Se il proiettore non funziona normalmente nonostante siano state seguite le istruzioni descritte nel presente manuale
dellutente.
- Se il proiettore caduto oppure lunit stata danneggiata.
- Se il proiettore mostra un cambio sensibile nelle prestazioni, indicando necessit di manutenzione.
- Se non si intende utilizzare il proiettore per un lungo periodo di tempo.
Scollegate il cavo di alimentazione e qualsiasi altro cavo prima di trasportare il proiettore.
Spegnete il proiettore e scollegate il cavo di alimentazione prima di eseguire la pulizia dellunit o la sostituzione della
lampada.
Quando utilizzate un cavo LAN:
Per ragioni di sicurezza non collegate il connettore al cablaggio periferico di un apparecchio che potrebbe avere un voltaggio eccessivo.
ATTENZIONE
Non usate il piedino di inclinazione per scopi diversi da quelli originali. Se il proiettore non viene usato nel modo
corretto, ad esempio usando il piede d'inclinazione per appendere il proiettore oppure il fissaggio del proiettore (alla
parete o al zofito) si possono recare danni al proiettore.
Non inviate il proiettore nella custodia morbida mediante corriere. Il proiettore allinterno della custodia morbida
potrebbe danneggiarsi.
Selezionate [Alto] nel modo ventola se il proiettore viene utilizzato per molti giorni consecutivi. (Dal menu selezionate
[Impostazione - Opzioni] [Modo ventilatore] [Alto]).
Non scollegate il cavo di alimentazione dalla presa a parete o in una delle seguenti circostanze.
Altrimenti, il proiettore si pu danneggiare:
- Quando la lampada del proiettore accesa.
- Quando girano i ventilatori di raffreddamento. (I ventilatori di raffreddamento continuano a girare per 30 secondi
dopo lo spegnimento del proiettore).
- Quando l'indicatore di accesso alla scheda PC lampeggia. In questo modo, la scheda di memoria PC pu
danneggiarsi.
I-4
Precauzioni relative al telecomando
Maneggiate il telecomando con cura.
Se il telecomando si dovesse bagnare, asciugatelo immediatamente.
Evitate eccessi di calore e umidit.
Non riscaldate, smontate o gettate le batterie sul fuoco.
Se avete intenzione di non utilizzare il telecomando per un lungo periodo di tempo, rimuovete le batterie.
Controllate che la polarit delle batterie (+/) sia allineata correttamente.
Non usate batterie nuove e usate insieme o tipi diversi di batterie.
Attenetevi alle norme locali su come disporre delle batterie esaurite.
Sostituzione della lampada
Per sostituire la lampada, seguite tutte le istruzioni fornite a pagina I-8 a I-9.
Assicuratevi di sostituire la lampada quando viene visualizzato il messaggio [La lampada arrivata a fine vita.
Per favore sostituire la lampada.] Se continuate ad usare la lampada dopo che ha raggiunto la fine della sua
durata utile, la lampadina pu scoppiare e i pezzi di vetro si possono spargere nel portalampada. Non toccare
questi pezzi di vetro, poich potrebbero verificarsi infortuni.
In tal caso, rivolgetevi al vostro rivenditore per la sostituzione della lampada.
Caratteristiche della lampada

La sorgente di luce del proiettore costituita da una lampada al mercurio ad alta pressione.
In base alle sue caratteristiche, la luminosit della lampada diminuisce gradualmente con il tempo.
Ripetute accensioni e spegnimenti della lampada aumenteranno altres la possibilit di una ridotta luminosit.
AVVERTENZA:
Alla rimozione della lampada da un proiettore montato sul soffitto, assicurarsi che nessuno si trovi al di sotto di
questo. Dei frammenti di vetro potrebbero cadere se la lampada bruciata.
I-5
Pulizia o sostituzione del filtro

La spugna del filtro dell'aria consente di evitare che polvere e sporcizia penetrino all'interno del proiettore e deve
essere pulita ogni 100 ore di utilizzo (pi spesso quando presente molta polvere). Se il filtro sporco o ostruito, il
proiettore pu surriscaldasi.
ATTENZIONE
Spegnete il proiettore e l'interruttore di corrente principale, quindi scollegate il proiettore prima di sostituire il
filtro.
Pulite solo la parte esterna del coprifiltro con un aspirapolvere.
Non tentate di utilizzare il proiettore senza il coprifiltro.
Per pulire il filtro dell'aria:
LA
CA
PC
CT
LE
SE
3D
RE
FO
RM
AU
TO
AD
JU
ST
SO
UR
CE
ON
/S
TA
ND
BY
RD
P
US
AT
ST WER
PO
Aspirate il filtro dal coprifiltro.
Per azzerare il tempo di utilizzo del filtro, selezionate [Azzera] [Azzera ore filtro] dal menu.
( Manuale dellutente: pagina 101 per informazioni su come azzerare il tempo di utilizzo del filtro)
Per sostituire il filtro (spugna):

1. Rimuovete il coprifiltro premendo verso il basso sul fermo del coperchio finch non si stacca.
Fermo
PO
JU
AD
TO
AU
SE
LE
CT
3D
RE
FO
RM
RD
CA
BY
PC
D
AN
/ST
ON
CE
UR
SO
ST
MP
LA US
AT R
ST WE
2. Estraete delicatamente il filtro (spugna) e sostituitelo con un nuovo.
I-6
3. Reinstallate il coprifiltro.
NOTA: non lavate il filtro con sapone o acqua, poich potrebbero danneggiarne la membrana. Prima di sostituire il filtro,
rimuovete eventuali residui di polvere e sporcizia dall'involucro del proiettore. Tenete polvere e sporcizia lontane durante la
sostituzione del filtro.
NOTA: quando sostituite la lampada, consigliabile sostituire anche il filtro. Il filtro in dotazione nella stessa confezione della
lampada di ricambio.
Pulizia dell'involucro e dell'obiettivo

1. Spegnete il proiettore prima di effettuare la pulizia.
2. Pulite regolarmente linvolucro con un panno umido. Se molto sporco, utilizzate un detergente delicato.
Non utilizzate detergenti forti o solventi quali alcol o acquaragia.
PO
BY
PC
3D
RE
FO
RM
AU
TO
AD
JU
ST
SO
UR
CE
ON
/S
TA
ND
RD
CA
P
M
LA US
AT
ST WER
3. Utilizzate un dispositivo di soffiaggio o carta speciale per pulire l'obiettivo e prestate attenzione a non
rigarlo.
SE
LE
CT
SEL
ECT
3D
RE
FOR
M
AU
TO
AD
JUS
T
SO
UR
CE
ON
/S
PC
LAM CAR
D
P
STA
POW TUS
ER
TA
ND
BY
PC
CA
RD
CO
S-V
IDE
US
B
MP
ON
ENT
LAN
IN
O IN
VID
Cb/
EO
Pb
IN
Cr/P
r
L/M AUD
ONO IO
AU
DIO
CO
IN
CO
IN
MP
AU
DIO
OU
MP
UTE
UTE
R1
R3
IN
IN
T
MO
CO
NIT
OR
OU
MP
PC
UTE
R2
IN
CO
NT
RO
L
AC
IN
I-7

Quando la lampada stata utilizzata per 2000 ore (fino a 3000 ore in modalit Eco) o pi tempo, l'indicatore LAMP
lampeggia in rosso ed appare il messaggio [La lampada arrivata a fine vita. Per favore sostituire la lampada.].
Anche se la lampada pu ancora funzionare, sostituitela dopo 2000 ore (fino a 3000 ore in modalit Eco) per mantenere
ottimali le prestazioni del proiettore. Dopo avere sostituito la lampada, azzerate il contatore ( Manuale dellutente:
pagina 101).
ATTENZIONE
NON TOCCATE LA LAMPADA subito dopo il suo utilizzo, poich estremamente calda. Spegnete il proiettore,
aspettate per 30 secondi, spegnete l'interruttore principale e poi scollegate il cavo d'alimentazione. Attendere
almeno unora affinch la lampada si raffreddi.
NON RIMUOVETE LE VITI ad eccezione della vite del coprilampada, poich possono verificarsi scosse
elettriche.
Non rompete il vetro del portalampada.
Non lasciate impronte sulla superficie di vetro del portalampada. Le impronte digitali sulla superficie di vetro
possono causare ombre indesiderate o compromettere la qualit dellimmagine.
Il proiettore si spegne ed entra in modalit standby dopo 2100 ore (fino a 3100 ore in modalit Eco) di utilizzo.
In tal caso, sostituite la lampada. Se continuate ad utilizzare la lampada dopo 2000 ore di servizio (fino a 3000
ore in modalit Eco), il bulbo della lampada pu rompersi e pezzi di vetro possono penetrare nel portalampada.
Non toccate questi pezzi di vetro, altrimenti vi potete fare male. In tal caso, rivolgetevi al vostro rivenditore NEC
per la sostituzione della lampada.

Lampada opzionale e strumenti necessari per la sostituzione:
Lampada di ricambio VT75LP
Cacciavite Phillips o equivalente
1. Posizionate il proiettore su un panno morbido e capovolgetelo per accedere al coprilampada sulla parte
inferiore.
2. Utilizzate un cacciavite Philips per premere e rilasciare la linguetta.

Tirate verso l'alto e rimuovete il coprilampada.
1
2
1
I-8
3. Allentate le due viti che fissano il portalampada finch il cacciavite Phillips non in grado di ruotare
liberamente. Non possibile rimuovere le due viti.
Afferrate il coprilampada per rimuoverlo.
Interbloccaggio
NOTA: vi una funzione di interbloccaggio in questa sezione per prevenire rischi di scosse elettriche. Non disabilitate questa
funzione.
4. Inserite lalloggiamento della nuova lampada finch non inserito nella presa.
ATTENZIONE
Non usate una lampada diversa da quella di ricambio della NEC VT75LP.
Ordinatela dal vostro rivenditore NEC.
Assicuratevi di serrare le due viti.

Non dimenticate di serrare le viti.
5. Reinstallate il coprilampada.
Fate scorrere il coprilampada finch non scatta in posizione.
6. Collegate il cavo di alimentazione in dotazione, accendete l'interruttore di alimentazione principale e

accendete il proiettore.
7. Infine, selezionare il menu [Azzera] [Azzera ore lampada] per azzerare le ore di utilizzo della
lampada.
NOTA: quando la lampada eccede le 2100 ore (fino a 3100 ore in modo Eco) di servizio, il proiettore non si accende e il menu non
viene visualizzato.
In tal caso, premete il tasto HELP sul telecomando, tenendolo premuto per 10 secondi per azzerare il contatore.
Quando lorologio durata lampada viene azzerato, lindicatore LAMP (lampada) si spegne.
I-9
Risoluzione dei problemi

Questa sezione vi aiuta a risolvere eventuali problemi che sorgono durante limpostazione o luso del proiettore.
(I numeri nella tabella si riferiscono alle pagine del manuale dellutente.)
Messaggi dellindicatore
Indicatore accensione [POWER]
Condizione dellindicatore
Spia
Verde
Nota
Il proiettore pronto per laccensione.
Attendere prego.
2,5 sec Acceso,
Auto spegnimento spento attivato.
0,5 sec Spento

0,5 sec Acceso,
Il proiettore in fase di raffreddamento.
Attendere prego.
Il proiettore acceso.
Il proiettore si trova nel Modo di attesa.
0,5 sec Acceso,
lampeggiante
Condizione del proiettore

E spenta la corrente principale.
Spento
0,5 sec Spento
Arancione
0,5 sec Spento

Spia illuminata
Verde
Arancione
Indicatore dello stato [STATUS]

Spento
Spia
lampeggiante
Rosso
Verde
Arancione
Spia illuminata
Nota
Reinstallate correttamente il
coprilampada. ( pagina 105)
Il proiettore surriscaldato. Spostate il proiettore in un luogo pi fresco.
Lunit di alimentazione non funziona correttamente.
I ventilatori non funzionano correttamente.
La lampada non si illumina. Aspettate un
minuto intero, poi riaccendete l'unit.
Il proiettore si riaccende.
La LAN incorporata e la LAN senza fili
non possono essere collegate contemporaneamente alla stessa rete.
Per usare la LAN incorporata e la LAN
senza fili contemporaneamente, collegarle a reti diverse. ( pagina 87)
Il blocco del pannello di controllo Avete premuto il comando
attivato.
dellarmadietto quando il blocco del
pannello di controllo attivato.
( pagina 79)
Il proiettore si trova nel Modo di attesa.
Normale
1 ciclo (0,5 sec Acceso, Errore del coprilampada
2,5 sec Spento)
2 ciclo (0,5 sec Acceso, Errore della temperatura
0,5 sec Spento)
3 ciclo (0,5 sec Acceso, Errore daccensione
0,5 sec Spento)
4 ciclo (0,5 sec Acceso, Errore del ventilatore
0,5 sec Spento)
6 ciclo (0,5 sec Acceso, Errore della lampada
0,5 sec Spento)
Riaccensione della lampada
1 ciclo (0,5 sec Acceso, Conflitto di rete
2,5 sec Spento)
Arancione
Verde
Indicatore della lampada [LAMP]

Spento
Spia
Rosso
Nota
vita di servizio. Appare sul display il ( pagina 104)
lampeggiante
Spia illuminata
Normale
La lampada ha raggiunto la fine della sua Sostituite la lampada.
Rosso
messaggio di sostituzione della lampada.

La lampada stata usata oltre i limiti. Il Sostituite la lampada.
proiettore non saccender fino alla ( pagina 104)
Verde
sostituzione della lampada.

La lampada impostata sulla modalit
Eco.
I-10
Problemi comuni e soluzioni (Fate riferimento anche alla sezione Indicatore alimentazione/stato/lampada a pagina I-10.)
(I numeri nella tabella si riferiscono alle pagine del manuale dellutente.)
Problema
Controllate queste voci
Non si accende
Controllate che il cavo dalimentazione sia collegato e che il tasto daccensione sul proiettore o sul telecomando sia premuto. ( pagine 23, 24)
Controllate che il coprilampada sia installato correttamente. ( pagine pagina 105)
Verificare che il proiettore non sia surriscaldato. Se la ventilazione intorno al proiettore non sufficiente
oppure la stanza in cui si esegue la presentazione particolarmente calda, spostare il proiettore in un luogo pi
fresco.
Verificare se l'utilizzo della lampada supera le 2.100 ore (fino a 3.100 ore: modalit Eco). In tal caso, sostituire
la lampada. Una volta sostituita la lampada, azzerare le ore di utilizzo. ( pagina 101)
La lampada non si illumina. Attendete qualche istante, quindi riaccendete lalimentazione.
Si spegner
Assicuratevi che la funzione Gestione risparmio energia o Auto spegnimento spento sia spenta. ( pagina 94, 96)
Nessunimmagine
Usate il tasto SOURCE sul proeittore o quello VIDEO, S-VIDEO, COMPUTER 1, COMPUTER 2, COMPUTER 3
(solo per LT380), COMPONENT, VIEWER o LAN sul telecomando per selezionare la fonte. ( pagina 26)
Controllate che i cavi siano collegati correttamente.
Usate i menu per regolare la luminosit e il contrasto. ( pagina 71)
Controllate se limmagine stata silenziata. ( pagina 34)
Togliete il coprilente.
Azzerate le impostazioni o le regolazioni ai livelli di fabbrica usando la funzione Reset del men. ( pagina
101)
Inserite la parola chiave registrata se avete abilitato la funzione Sicurezza. ( pagina 42)
Assicuratevi di collegare il proiettore ed il PC notebook mentre il proiettore si trova nella modalit d'attesa e
prima di accendere il PC notebook.
Nella maggior parte dei casi, il segnale d'uscita proveniente dal PC notebook non si accende se non collegato
al proiettore prima dell'accensione della corrente.
* Se lo schermo dovesse diventare bianco durante luso del telecomando, questo pu essere dovuto alla
funzione salvaschermo del computer o al software di risparmio energia.
Fate riferimento alla pagina che segue.
La tonalit dei colori

anomala
Controllate se stato selezionato il colore giusto in [Colore parete]. In tal caso, selezionate un'opzione appropriata. ( pagina 78)
Regolate [Tonalit] in [Regolazione]. ( pagina 71)
Limmagine non squadrata rispetto allo schermo
Cambiate la posizione del proiettore per migliorare il suo angolo rispetto allo schermo. ( pagina 27)
Usate la funzione 3D Reform per correggere la deformazione trapezoidale. ( pagina 29)
Limmagine sfuocata
Regolate il fuoco. ( pagina 28)

Cambiate la posizione del proiettore per migliorare il suo angolo rispetto allo schermo. ( pagina 27)
Assicuratevi che la distanza tra il proiettore e lo schermo sia allinterno del campo di regolazione dellobiettivo.
( pagine 11)
Si pu formare della condensa sull'obiettivo se il proiettore freddo viene portato in un luogo riscaldato e poi
acceso. In tal caso, lasciate che la condensa evapori dall'obiettivo nel proiettore senza usare quest'ultimo.
Limmagine scorre verticalmente, orizzontalmente o in entrambe le

direzioni
Usate il tasto SOURCE sul proiettore stesso oppure il tasto VIDEO, S-VIDEO, COMPUTER 1, COMPUTER 2,
COMPUTER 3 (solo per LT380), COMPONENT, VIEWER oppure LAN sul telecomando per selezionare la fonte
(Video, S-Video, Computer, Component, Viewer oppure LAN). ( pagina 26)
Regolate limmagine del computer manualmente con [Olorogio]/[Fase] nell [Regolazione] [Gestione immagine]. ( pagina 72)
Il telecomando non funziona
Installate delle batterie nuove. ( pagina 9)

Controllate che non ci siano degli ostacoli tra voi e il proiettore.
Restate entro una distanza di 22 piedi (7 m) dal proiettore. ( pagina 9)
Lindicatore di stato illuminato o lampeggia.
Fate riferimento ai messaggi della luce di stato qui sopra. ( pagina 107)
Strisce verticali nel

modo RGB
Premete il tasto AUTO ADJUST sul proiettore stesso oppure il tasto AUTO ADJ. sul telecomando. ( pagina
31)
Regolate limmagine del computer manualmente con [Olorogio]/[Fase] nell [Regolazione] [Gestione immagine]. ( pagina 72)
Non funziona il mouse

USB
Assicuratevi che il mouse USB sia collegato correttamente al proiettore.

Il proiettore pu non supportare alcune marche del mouse USB.
Rivolgetevi al vostro rivenditore per ulteriori informazioni.
I-11
Se non appare alcun'immagine o se l'immagine non visualizzata correttamente.
Processo alimentazione accesa per il proiettore e il PC.

Assicuratevi di collegare il proiettore ed il PC notebook mentre il proiettore si trova nella modalit d'attesa e
prima di accendere il PC notebook.
Nella maggior parte dei casi, il segnale d'uscita proveniente dal PC notebook non si accende se non collegato
al proiettore prima dell'accensione della corrente.
NOTA: Potete controllare la frequenza orizzontale del segnale corrente nel men del proiettore sotto Information. Se appare
0kHz, ci significa che nessun segnale viene emesso dal computer. Fate riferimento alla pagina 98 (Manuale dell utente) o
procedete al passo successivo.
Abilitazione del display esterno del computer.

La visualizzazione di un'immagine sullo schermo del PC notebook non significa necessariamente inviare un
segnale al proiettore. Quando usate un laptop compatibile con il PC, una combinazione di tasti operativi pu
abilitare/disabilitare il display esterno. Normalmente, la combinazione del tasto "Fn" insieme ad uno dei 12 tasti
operativi fa accendere o spegnere il display esterno. Per esempio, i laptop della NEC utilizzano la combinazione
Fn + F3, mentre quelli della Dell usano quella Fn + F8 per passare attraverso le selezione del display esterno.
Segnale d'uscita non standard emesso dal computer

Se il segnale d'uscita proveniente da un PC notebook non uno standard indistruale, l'immagine proiettata pu
non essere visualizzata correttamente. In tal caso, disattivate lo schermo LCD del PC notebook quando usate il
display del proiettore. Ciascun PC notebook ha un modo particolare per disattivare/riattivare gli schermi LCD
locali com' descritto al passo precedente. Fate riferimento alla documentazione del computer per ulteriori
informazioni.
L'immagine visualizzata errata quando usate il computer Macintosh

Quando usate un computer Macintosh con il proiettore, dovete impostare l'interruttore DIP dell'adattatore Mac
(non in dotazione con il proiettore), secondo la risoluzione. Dopo l'impostazione, riavviate il Macintosh per
rendere effettivi i cambiamenti.
Se cambiate l'interruttore DIP dell'adattatore Mac per impostare modi di visualizzazione diversi da quelli
supportati dal vostro computer Macintosh e dal proiettore, l'immagine pu rimbalzare leggermente oppure pu
non essere visualizzata proprio. In tal caso, collocate l'interruttore DIP al modo fisso 13" e poi riavviate il
Macintosh. Poi, reimpostate gli interruttori DIP al modo riproducibile e poi riavviate il Macintosh di nuovo.
NOTA: Se avete un PowerBook privo del connettore mini D-Sub 15-pin, bisogna usare un cavo adattatore video fabbricato
dalla Apple Computer.
Immagine riflessa nel PowerBook

* Quando usate il proiettore con un PowerBook della Macintosh, l'uscita pu non essere impostata su 1024
768 a meno che disattivate la funzione "immagine riflessa" nel PowerBook. Fate riferimento al manuale delle
istruzioni in dotazione con il computer Macintosh per ulteriori informazioni.
Le cartelle o le icone sono nascoste sullo schermo Macintosh

Le cartelle o le icone possono non apparire sullo schermo. In tal caso, selezionate [View] [Arrange] dal men
Apple e sistemate le icone.
I-12
Espaol
Utilizacin de los documentos de usuario suministrados

Estn incluidos con el proyector cuatro documentos de usuario.
Informacin importante
Lea primero la informacin importante. Esta cubre informacin referente a la seguridad del proyector, precauciones,
cambio de la lmpara y solucin de problemas.
Gua rpida de configuracin
La gua rpida de configuracin proporciona informacin sobre la configuracin inicial y el uso respecto a la conexin
de fuente, activacin de la alimentacin, seleccin de una fuente y otras instrucciones de funcionamiento bsicas.
Gua de instalacin del Software Utility de NEC [Wired and Wireless Network Setup Guide]
La gua de instalacin del Software Utility de NEC proporciona informacin sobre el procedimiento de instalacin y
sobre lo que puede hacer con relacin a estos cinco programas utilitarios contenidos en el CD-ROM de Supportware
de usuario 3.
Manual del usuario en CD-ROM
El manual del usuario completo se suministra en el CD-ROM en formato PDF (Portable Document Format) y
proporciona informacin detallada sobre el producto y su utilizacin para el proyector NEC.
El manual est disponible en siete idiomas (ingls, alemn, francs, italiano, espaol, sueco y japons).
Para ver o imprimir los archivos con formato PDF utilice el programa Adobe Acrobat Reader o Adobe Reader.
NOTA: Los programas Adobe Acrobat Reader o Adobe Reader se pueden descargar en la pgina web de Adobe.
Visite http://www.adobe.com y obtenga la versin actual para su SO (sistema operativo).
Para ver el manual del usuario (PDF)

[Windows]
1. Coloque el CD-ROM suministrado en la unidad de CD-ROM de su ordenador personal.
2. Haga doble clic en el icono [Mi PC] en el escritorio de Windows.
3. Haga doble clic en el icono del CD-ROM [NECPJ-UM].
4. Haga doble clic en [start_menu.pdf].
Adobe Acrobat Reader o Adobe Reader se iniciara y le permitirn visualizar el men de Incio.
5. Haga clic en [Manual del usuario].
El men del ndice se visualizar.
6. Haga clic en el ttulo del captulo que desea visualizar.
[Macintosh]
1. Coloque el CD-ROM suministrado en la unidad de CD-ROM de si ordenador Macintosh.
2. Haga doble clic en el icono del CD-ROM [NECPJ-UM] en el escritorio de Macintosh.
3. Haga doble clic en [start_menu.pdf].
Adobe Acrobat Reader o Adobe Reader se iniciar y le permitir visualizar el men de Inicio.
4. Haga clic en [Manual del usuario].
El men del ndice se visualizar.
5. Haga clic en el ttulo del captulo que desea visualizar.
Para copiar el manual del usuario (PDF) a su ordenador:

Es posible copiar en la unidad de disco duro de su ordenador los manuales de usuario que vienen en el CD-ROM
suministrado.
Seleccione el idioma de su versin para [LT380_index_*.pdf] y [LT380_manual_*.pdf] desde la carpeta [manual] en el
CD-ROM suministrado y copie dichos archivos en la unidad de disco duro de su ordenador.

Consulte el manual del usuario (formato
PDF) en el CD-ROM suministrado para
obtener informacin detallada.
S-1
Precauciones
Precaucin
Lea con cuidado este manual antes de utilizar el proyector NEC LT380/LT280 y tenga el manual a mano para poder
consultarlo ms adelante. El nmero de serie est situado en la parte inferior del proyector. Antelo aqu:
PRECAUCIN
Para desactivar la alimentacin asegrese de extraer el enchufe de la toma de red elctrica.
La toma de red debe estar lo ms cerca posible del equipo, y adems debe ser fcilmente accesible.
PRECAUCIN
PARA EVITAR DESCARGAS ELCTRICAS, NO ABRA LA CAJA.
EN EL INTERIOR HAY COMPONENTES CON ALTA TENSIN.
ACUDA A PERSONAL DE SERVICIO CUALIFICADO.
Este smbolo advierte al usuario de la presencia de tensin sin aislamiento dentro del equipo suficiente
como para causar descargas elctricas. Por lo tanto, es peligroso realizar cualquier tipo de contacto con
cualquier pieza del interior del equipo.
;;
;
;
;
;;;;
Este smbolo alerta al usuario de la presencia de informacin importante concerniente al funcionamiento y

mantenimiento del equipo.
Debe leerse atentamente la informacin para evitar problemas.
ADVERTENCIA: PARA EVITAR FUEGO O DESCARGAS ELCTRICAS, NO EXPONGA ESTE EQUIPO A LA

LLUVIA NI A LA HUMEDAD.
NO UTILICE EL ENCHUFE DE ESTE EQUIPO CON UN CABLE ALARGADOR O EN UNA TOMA DE PARED A
MENOS QUE LOS CONTACTOS SE PUEDAN INSERTAR COMPLETAMENTE.
Esta etiqueta se encuentra en el lado del mando a distancia.
Esta marca se encuentra en la parte superior del mando a distancia.
PRECAUCIN
El uso de controles, ajustes o la ejecucin de procedimientos distintos a los especificados en este
documento puede ocasionar una exposicin peligrosa a radiacin.
PRECAUCIN
No mire directamente el apuntador lser cuando este se encuentre encendido, ni tampoco lo apunte a
otra persona. Esto podra ocasionar lesiones severas.
PRECAUCIN
Evite visualizar imgenes estacionarias (congeladas) durante perodos de tiempo prolongados.
De lo contrario, puede ocurrir que tales imgenes permanezcan temporalmente en la superficie del panel
de la pantalla de cristal lquido (LCD). Si sucediera esto, contine usando el proyector. El fondo esttico
de las imgenes anteriores desaparecer.
S-2
Cmo deshacerse del producto utilizado

La legislacin de la UE puesta en prctica en cada estado miembro requiere que los productos elctricos
y electrnicos que lleven la marca (izquierda) deben de deshacerse separadamente de la basura normal.
Esto incluye proyectores y sus accesorios elctricos o lmparas. Cuando se deshaga de tales productos,
siga los consejos de su autoridad local o pregunte en la tienda en la que adquiri el producto.
Despus de recoger los productos utilizados, se vuelven a utilizar y a reciclar de forma adecuada. Este
esfuerzo nos ayuda a reducir los deshechos as como los impactos negativos, tales como el que el
mercurio de las lmparas lleva a cabo en la salud humana y en el medioambiente, a un nivel mnimo.
La marca en los productos elctricos y electrnicos se aplica slo a los actuales estados miembros de la
Unin Europea.
Importante para su seguridad

Estas instrucciones de seguridad son para garantizar una larga vida de su proyector y para evitar incendios y descargas
elctricas. Lalas detenidamente y respete todas las advertencias.
Instalacin
No coloque el proyector en las siguientes condiciones:

- en una mesa con ruedas, soporte o mesa inestables.
- cerca de agua, baos o habitaciones hmedas.
- bajo la luz directa del sol, cerca de calefacciones o dispositivos que radien calor.
- en un entorno polvoriento, con humo o con vapor.
- sobre una hoja de papel o pao, alfombrillas o alfombras.
Si desea instalar el proyector en el techo:

- No intente instalar el proyector usted mismo.
- El proyector debe de ser instalado por tcnicos cualificados para asegurar un funcionamiento adecuado y
reducir el riesgo de lesiones corporales.
- Adems, el techo debe de ser lo suficientemente fuerte como para soportar el proyector y la instalacin debe
de realizarse de acuerdo con las normas de edificios locales.
- Por favor consulte a su distribuidor para mayor informacin.
Ponga el proyector en posicin horizontal

El ngulo de inclinacin del proyector no debe exceder de 10 grados. Tampoco se debe instalar el proyector de
ninguna forma diferente a la instalacin de sobremesa o techo, ya que de lo contrario la vida til de la lmpara puede
reducirse considerablemente.
10
S-3
Precauciones ante fuegos y descargas elctricas

Asegrese de que existe una ventilacin suficiente que los ventiladores no presentan obstrucciones para evitar la acumulacin de
calor en el interior del proyector. Deje un mnimo de 4 pulgadas (10 cm) de espacio entre su proyector y las paredes que lo rodean.
No intente tocar la salida de ventilacin de la parte izquierda delantera (mirando el proyector de frente), pues puede calentarse
mientras el proyector est encendido e inmediatamente despus de que se apague.
Evite que objetos extraos, como clips y trozos de papel, caigan sobre el proyector.
No intente recuperar ningn objeto que pueda haber cado en el proyector. No inserte ningn objeto metlico, como un cable o un
destornillador, en el proyector. Si algn objeto cayese en el interior de su proyector, desconctelo inmediatamente y deje que un
miembro del personal de servicio tcnico retire el objeto de su proyector.
No coloque ningn objeto su proyector.
No toque el enchufe de alimentacin durante una tormenta. De lo contrario, podria recibir una descarga elctrica o podria producirse un incendio.
El proyector est diseado para funcionar con una fuente de alimentacin de 100-240V CA, 50/60 Hz.
Asegrese de que su fuente de alimentacin cumple estos requisitos antes de utilizar el proyector.
No mire directamente a la lente mientras el proyector est encendido. Podra producir lesiones graves en sus ojos.
Mantenga cualquier objeto similar a una lupa fuera de la trayectoria de la luz del proyector. La luz proyectada desde la lente es
extensiva, de modo que cualquier objeto anmalo que pueda redirigir la luz que sale de la lente puede provocar resultados
impredecibles, como fuego o lesiones en los ojos.
No cubra la lente con la tapa para lentes incluida o similar mientras el proyector est encendido. Si lo hace, puede hacer que se
funda la tapa y quemarse las manos debido al calor emitido desde la salida de luz.
No coloque ningn objeto susceptible al calor delante de la lente del proyector o del orificio de ventilacin.
Si lo hace el objeto podra derretirse o podra usted quemarse las manos debido al calor que se emite de la salida de luz y
ventilacin.
Manipule el cable de alimentacin con cuidado. Un cable de alimentacin daado o deshilachado puede causar descargas
elctricas o un incendio.
- No utilice ningn otro cable de alimentacin que el suministrado.
- No doble ni tire excesivamente del cable de alimentacin.
- No coloque el cable de alimentacin debajo del proyector o debajo de ningn objeto pesado.
- No cubra el cable de alimentacin con materiales blandos tales como alfombrillas.
- No caliente el cable de alimentacin
- No manipule el cable de alimentacin con las manos mojadas.
Desactive el proyector, desenchufe el cable de alimentacin y deje que el personal de servicio cualificado de NEC retire el objeto
bajo las siguientes condiciones:
- Cuando el cable de alimentacin o enchufe est daado o deshilachado.
- Si se ha derramado lquido dentro del proyector o si ha estado expuesto a la lluvia o al agua.
- Si el proyector no funciona de forma normal cuando siga las siguientes instrucciones descritas en el manual del usuario.
- Si el proyector se ha cado o si se ha daado la caja.
- Si el proyector muestra un cambio en el rendimiento que indiquen que necesita servicio.
- Si el proyector no se debe de utilizar durante un periodo prolongado de tiempo.
Desconecte el cable de alimentacin y dems cables antes de transportar el proyector
Desactive el proyector y desenchufe el cable de alimentacin antes de limpiar la caja o reemplazar la lmpara.
Cuando utilice un cable LAN:
Por seguridad, no realice la conexin del conector para cableado de dispositivos perifricos que pueda tener un voltaje excesivo.
PRECAUCIN
No utilice la pata de inclinacin con otro propsito que no sea el originalmente establecido. El uso incorrecto, como la utilizacin de la pata de inclinacin para transportar o colgar (en una pared o techo) el proyector pueden daar el proyector.
No enve el estuche blando por servicios de entrega de paquetes o envos de carga. Es posible que el proyector en el interior
del estuche blando se dae.
Seleccione el modo de ventilador [Alto] si utiliza el proyector de forma continuada durante ms de un da. (En el men,
seleccione [Configuracin - Opciones] [Modo de ventilador] [Alto]).
No desenchufe el cable de alimentacin de la toma de corriente mural bajo ninguna de las circunstancias siguientes.
De lo contrario, el proyector podr sufrir daos:
- Mientras la lmpara del proyector est encendida.
- Mientras los ventiladores de refrigeracin estn funcionando. (Los ventiladores de refrigeracin siguen funcionando
durante 30 segundos despus de que se apaga el proyector).
- Mientras el indicador de acceso PC CARD se encuentre iluminado. De lo contrario la tarjeta de memoria PC se puede
daar.
S-4
Precauciones con el mando a distancia
Manipule el mando a distancia con cuidado.
Si se moja el mando a distancia, lmpielo y squelo inmediatamente.
Evite el calor y humedad excesivos.
No caliente, desarme ni arroje las pilas al fuego.
Cuando no vaya a usar el mando a distancia por un perodo prolongado de tiempo, retire las pilas.
Asegrese de que la polaridad (+/) de las pilas sea correcta.
No utilice pilas nuevas y usadas al mismo tiempo y no mezcle pilas de distinto tipo.
Deseche las pilas utilizadas segn las regulaciones locales.
Sustitucin de la lmpara
Para sustituir la lmpara, siga todas las instrucciones que aparecen en la pgina S-8 a S-9.
Asegrese de reemplazar la lmpara cuando aparezca el mensaje [La lmpara ha alcanzado el fin de su
vida til. Por favor cmbiela.] Si contina utilizando la lmpara despus de que sta haya alcanzado el final
de su vida til, la bombilla de la lmpara podra estallar y las piezas de cristal podran esparcirse por la caja de
la lmpara. No toque los trozos de vidrio, pues podra cortarse.
Si esto sucediera, pngase en contacto con su distribuidor para el recambio de la lmpara.
Caractersticas de una lmpara

El proyector tiene una lmpara de mercurio de alta presin como fuente de luz.
La caracterstica de la lmpara es que el brillo va disminuyendo gradualmente con el paso del tiempo.
Tambin si se enciende y se apaga la lmpara con mucha frecuencia aumentar la posibilidad de que brille menos.
PRECAUCIN:
Al retirar la lmpara de un proyector instalado en el techo, asegrese de que no se encuentre nadie debajo.
Fragmentos de cristal podran caerse si se ha quemado la lmpara.
S-5
Limpieza o reemplazo del filtro

La esponja del filtro de aire mantiene el interior del proyector libre de polvo y suciedad y debe limpiarse cada 100
horas de uso (ms a menudo en condiciones de mucho polvo). Si el filtro est sucio u obstruido, puede que el
proyector se caliente en exceso.
PRECAUCIN
Apague el proyector, desactive el interruptor de alimentacin principal y desenchfelo antes de reemplazar el filtro.
Limpie solamente la parte exterior del la cubierta del filtro con un aspirador.
No intente hacer funcionar el proyector sin la cubierta del filtro.
Para limpiar el filtro de aire:
SE
LE
CT
Aspire el filtro a travs de la cubierta del filtro.
Para borrar el tiempo de uso del filtro, en el men seleccione [Reajuste] [Borrar horas de filtro].
( Manual del usuario: pgina 101 para obtener ms informacin sobre cmo borrar el tiempo de uso del filtro)
Para reemplazar el filtro (esponja):

1. Para quitar la cubierta del filtro, presione hacia abajo el seguro de la cubierta del filtro hasta que sienta
que suelta.
Seguro
PO
SE
LE
CT
3D
RE
FO
RM
AU
TO
AD
JU
ST
SO
UR
CE
ON
/ST
AN
RD
LA
CA
PC
BY
MP
US
AT R
ST WE
2. Con cuidado, vaya quitando el filtro (esponja) y sustityalo por otro nuevo.
S-6
3. Vuelva a instalar la cubierta del filtro nuevo.
NOTA: No lave la cubierta del filtro con jabn y agua. El jabn y el agua daaran la membrana del filtro. Antes de reemplazar el
filtro, elimine el polvo y la suciedad de la cubierta del proyector. No permita que entre polvo durante el reemplazo del filtro.
NOTA: Cuando sustituya la lmpara, es conveniente tambin sustituir el filtro. El filtro viene en el mismo paquete que la lmpara
de repuesto.
Limpieza de la cubierta y del objetivo

1. Apague el proyector antes de limpiarlo.
2. Limpie el gabinete peridicamente con un pao hmedo. Si est muy sucio, utilice un detergente suave.
No utilice nunca detergentes o disolventes fuertes tales como alcohol o diluyente.
RD
CA
P
M
LA US
AT
ST WER
PO
3D
RM
FO
RE
TO
AU
ST
JU
AD
CE
UR
SO
PC
ND
TA
/S
ON
BY
3. Utilice un soplador o papel de objetivos para limpiarlo, y tenga cuidado de no rayar o marcar el objetivo.
CT
LE
SE
SEL
ECT
3D
RE
FOR
M
AU
TO
AD
JUS
T
SO
UR
CE
ON
/S
PC
LAM CAR
D
P
STA
POW TUS
ER
TA
ND
BY
PC
S-V
IDE
US
B
CA
RD
CO
MP
ON
ENT
LAN
IN
O IN
VID
Cb/
EO
Pb
IN
Cr/P
r
L/M AUD
ONO IO
AU
DIO
CO
IN
CO
IN
MP
AU
DIO
OU
MP
UTE
UTE
R1
R3
IN
IN
T
MO
CO
NIT
OR
OU
MP
PC
UTE
R2
IN
CO
NT
RO
L
AC
IN
S-7
Reemplazo de la lmpara
Una vez que la lmpara cumpla 2000 horas (hasta 3000 horas en el modo Eco) o ms de uso, el indicador LAMP en
la cubierta parpadear en rojo y aparecer el mensaje [La lmpara ha alcanzado el fin de su vida til. Por favor
cmbiela.]. Aun cuando la lmpara siga funcionando, reemplcela despus de 2000 horas (hasta 3000 horas en el
modo Eco) de uso para mantener un rendimiento ptimo del proyector. Despus de reemplazar la lmpara, asegrese
de borrar el contador de hora de lmpara. ( Manual del usuario: pgina 101)
PRECAUCIN
NO TOQUE LA LMPARA inmediatamente despus de que haya estado en uso. La lmpara estar extremadamente caliente.
Apague el proyector, espere 30 segundos, desactive el interruptor de alimentacin principal y desconecte el cable de
alimentacin. Antes de manipular la lmpara espere por lo menos una hora hasta que se enfre.
NO QUITE NINGN TORNILLO excepto dos tornillos de la caja de la lmpara. De lo contrario, podra recibir una descarga elctrica.
No rompa el cristal del bastidor de la lmpara.

Asegrese de no dejar huellas digitales en la superficie de cristal del bastidor de la lmpara. La presencia de huellas digitales
en la superficie de cristal puede causar sombras no deseadas y mala calidad de imagen.
EL proyector se apagar y entrar en modo de espera despus de 2100 horas (hasta 3100 horas en el modo Eco) de
servicio. Si esto sucediera, asegrese de reemplazar la lmpara. Si contina utilizando la lmpara una vez que se han
cumplido 2000 horas (hasta 3000 horas en el modo Eco) de uso, la bombilla de la lmpara podr romperse y los trozos de
cristal podrn quedar dispersos en la caja de la lmpara. No toque los trozos de vidrio, pues podra cortarse. Si esto
sucediera, pngase en contacto con su distribuidor NEC para el recambio de la lmpara.
Para reemplazar la lmpara:

Lmpara opcional y herramientas necesarias para el reemplazo:
Lmpara de reemplazo VT75LP
Destornillador Phillips o equivalente
1. Coloque el proyector sobre un pao suave e invirtalo para acceder a la cubierta de la lmpara en la
parte inferior.
2. Utilice un destornillador Philips para empujar y liberar la lengeta.

Empuje hacia arriba la cubierta de la lmpara y retrela.
1
2
1
S-8
3. Afloje los dos tornillos que aseguran el bastidor de la lmpara hasta que el destornillador Phillips gire
libremente. Estos dos tornillos no son de quitar.
Extraiga el bastidor de la lmpara sujetndola.
Dispositivo de
interbloqueo
NOTA: Hay un interbloqueo en esta caja para prevenir el riesgo de sacudidas elctricas. No intente burlar este interbloqueo.
4. Introduzca un nuevo bastidor de lmpara hasta que el bastidor de lmpara est introducido en la toma.
PRECAUCIN
Utilice solamente la lmpara de repuesto NEC VT75LP.
Haga su pedido a su distribuidor NEC.
Fjelo en su sitio con los dos tornillos.

Asegrese de apretar los dos tornillos.
5. Vuelva a colocar la cubierta de la lmpara.

Deslice la cubierta de la lmpara hasta que encaje en posicin.
6. Conecte el cable de alimentacin suministrado, active el interruptor de alimentacin principal y

encienda el proyector.
7. Finalmente, seleccione el men [Reajuste] [Borrar horas de lmpara] para borrar las horas de uso
de la lmpara.
NOTA: Cuando la lmpara excede las 2100 horas (hasta 3100 horas en el modo Eco) de servicio, el proyector no se puede
encender y no se muestra el men.
Si esto sucediera, pulse el botn HELP en el mando a distancia durante 10 segundos para reajustar el reloj de la lmpara a cero.
Cuando el reloj de tiempo de uso de la lmpara se ajusta a cero, el indicador LAMP se apaga.
S-9
Deteccin de fallos
Esta seccin le ayuda a resolver eventuales problemas que puede tener al ajustar o utilizar el proyector.
(Los nmeros en la tabla se refieren a los nmeros de las pginas en el manual del usuario.)
Mensajes de los indicadores

Indicador de alimentacin [POWER]
Condicin del indicador
Luz intermitente Verde
Condicin del proyector
Nota
La alimentacin principal est desconectada.
Apagado
0,5 seg. Encendido,
0,5 seg. Apagado,
El proyector se est preparando para encen- Espere unos instantes.

derse.
El Tempor. Desactivado est desactivado.
El proyector se est enfriando.
Espere unos instantes.
Verde
El proyector est encendido.
Naranja
El proyector se encuentra en modo de
2,5 seg. Encendido,

0,5 seg. Apagado,
Naranja
Luz fija
0,5 seg. Encendido,

0,5 seg. Apagado,
espera.
Indicador de estado [STATUS]
Apagado
Luz intermitente Rojo
Verde
Naranja
Luz fija

Normal
1 ciclo (0,5 seg. Encendido, Error de la cubierta de la lmpara
2,5 seg. Apagado)
2 ciclos (0,5 seg. Encendido, Error de temperatura
0,5 seg. Apagado)
3 ciclos (0,5 seg. Encendido, Error de alimentacin
0,5 seg. Apagado)
4 ciclos (0,5 seg. Encendido, Error de ventilador
0,5 seg. Apagado)
6 ciclos (0,5 seg. Encendido, Error de la lmpara
0,5 seg. Apagado)
Reecendiendo la lmpara
1 ciclo (0,5 seg. Encendido, Conflicto de red
2,5 seg. Apagado)
Naranja
Verde
Nota
Asegrese de instalar correctamente la

cubierta de la lmpara. ( pgina 105)
El proyector se ha recalentado. Traslade el proyector a un lugar ms fresco.
La unidad de alimentacin no funciona
correctamente.
Los ventiladores no funcionan correctamente.
La lmpara no se enciende. Espere un minuto completo y luego vuelva a encenderla.
El proyector enciende la lmpara
La LAN incorporada y la LAN
inalmbrica no se pueden
conectar a la misma red al mismo
tiempo.
Para utilizar la LAN incorporada y
la inalmbrica al mismo tiempo,
conctelas a diferentes redes. (
pgina 87)
La funcin Bloqueo del panel de control Ha pulsado un botn del proyector
con la funcin Bloqueo del panel de
est activada.
control activada. ( pgina 79)
El proyector se encuentra en modo de
espera.
Indicador de lmpara [LAMP]

Apagado
Luz intermitente Rojo
Nota
Normal
La lmpara ha llegado al trmino de su Reemplace la lmpara.
vida til. Se visualiza el mensaje de ( pgina 104)
Luz fija
Rojo
reemplazo de la lmpara.
Se ha sobrepasado el lmite de uso de la Reemplace la lmpara.
lmpara. El proyector no se encender ( pgina 104)
Verde
hasta que la lmpara sea reemplazada.

La lmpara se encuentra en el modo Eco.
S-10
Problemas comunes y sus soluciones (Consulte tambin la seccin Indicador de alimentacin/estado/lmpara en la pgina S-10.)
(Los nmeros en la tabla se refieren a los nmeros de las pginas en el manual del usuario.)
Problema
El proyector no se enciende
Compruebe los siguientes puntos

Compruebe que el cable de alimentacin est conectado y que el botn de alimentacin del proyector o del
mando a distancia est activado. ( pgina 23, 24)
Asegrese de que la cubierta de la lmpara est instalada correctamente. ( pgina 105)
Compruebe para ver si el proyector se ha sobrecalentado. Si no hay suficiente ventilacin alrededor del proyector o si la habitacin donde se lleva a cabo la presentacin es particularmente calurosa, lleve el proyector
a un lugar ms fresco.
Compruebe para ver si el uso de la lmpara excede 2100 horas (hasta 3100 horas: Modo Eco). En tal caso,
reemplace la lmpara. Despus de reemplazar la lmpara, reajuste las horas de lmpara utilizadas. ( pgina
101)
La lmpara puede no encenderse. Espere un minuto completo y luego vuelva a conectar la alimentacin.
Se apagar
Asegrese de que la funcin Gestin de energa o Tempor. desactivado est desactivada. ( pgina 94, 96)
No hay imagen
Utilice el botn SOURCE de la cubierta del proyector o el botn VIDEO, S-VIDEO, COMPUTER 1, COMPUTER
2, COMPUTER 3 (slo en el LT380), COMPONENT, VIEWER o LAN del mando a distancia para seleccionar la
fuente. ( pgina 26)
Asegrese de que los cables estn conectados correctamente.
Use los mens para ajustar el brillo y el contraste. ( pgina 71)
Compruebe para ver si la imagen est silenciada. ( pgina 34)
Quite la tapa del objetivo.
Reinicie la configuracin o los ajustes a los niveles predeterminados en fbrica utilizando la opcin Reinicio en
el men. ( pgina 101)
Si la funcin Seguridad est habilitada, introduzca la palabra clave registrada. ( pgina 42)
Asegrese de conectar el proyector y el PC porttil mientras que el proyector se encuentre en el modo de
espera y antes de activar la alimentacin al PC porttil.
En la mayora de los casos la seal de salida del PC porttil no se activa a menos que est conectado al
proyector antes de ser activado.
* Si la pantalla queda en blanco mientras usa el mando a distancia, es probable que se deba a la accin del
protector de pantalla o a la funcin de ahorro de energa del ordenador.
Consulte tambin la pgina siguiente.
La tonalidad o el tinte de
los colores no es normal
Compruebe si se ha seleccionado un color apropiado en [Color de pared]. Si no es as, seleccione una opcin
apropiada. ( pgina 78)
Ajuste la opcin [Tinte] en [Ajuste]. ( pgina 71)
La imagen no aparece
rectangular en la pantalla
Mueva el proyector para mejorar el ngulo de ste respecto de la pantalla. ( pgina 27)
Use la funcin 3D Reform para corregir la distorsin trapezoidal. ( pgina 29)
La imagen se ve borrosa
Ajuste el enfoque. ( pgina 28)

Mueva el proyector para mejorar el ngulo de ste respecto de la pantalla. ( pgina 27)
Asegrese de que la distancia entre el proyector y la pantalla est dentro del margen de ajuste del objetivo. (
pgina 11)
Si se enciende el proyector luego de trasladarlo desde un lugar fro a uno caluroso, puede producirse condensacin en el objetivo. Si esto sucediera, deje el proyector reposar hasta que ya no haya condensacin en el
objetivo.
La imagen se desplaza
verticalmente, horizontalmente o en ambas direcciones
Utilice el botn SOURCE situado en la cubierta del proyector o los botones VIDEO, S-VIDEO, COMPUTER 1,
COMPUTER 2, COMPUTER 3 (slo en el LT380), COMPONENT, VIEWER o el botn LAN en el mando a distancia para seleccionar la seal de origen (Video, S-Video, Ordenador, Componente, Visor o LAN). ( pgina 26)
Ajuste manualmente la imagen proveniente del ordenador con la opcin [Reloj]/[Fase] en la [Ajuste] [Opciones de imagen]. ( pgina 72)
El mando a distancia no
funciona
Instale pilas nuevas. ( pgina 9)

Compruebe que no hay obstculos entre usted y el proyector.
Prese a una distancia de mximo 22 pies (7 m) del proyector. ( pgina 9)
El indicador de estado
est encendido o parpadea
Vea los mensajes del indicador de estado ms arriba. ( pgina 107)
Rayas verticales en el
modo RGB
Pulse el botn AUTO ADJUST en la cubierta del proyector o el botn AUTO ADJ. en el mando a distancia. (
pgina 31)
Ajuste manualmente la imagen proveniente del ordenador con la opcin [Reloj]/[Fase] en la [Ajuste] [Opciones de imagen]. ( pgina 72)
El ratn USB no funciona
Asegrese de que el ratn USB est conectado correctamente al proyector.

Puede haber ciertas marcas de ratn USB que no son compatibles con el proyector.
Para ms informacin, consulte a su distribuidor.
S-11
Si no hay imagen o si la imagen no se visualiza correctamente.
Proceso de conexin de la alimentacin para el proyector y el PC.

Asegrese de conectar el proyector y el PC porttil mientras que el proyector se encuentre en el modo de
espera y antes de activar la alimentacin al PC porttil.
En la mayora de los casos la seal de salida del PC porttil no se activa a menos que est conectado al
proyector antes de ser activado.
NOTA: Puede comprobar la frecuencia horizontal de la seal actual en el men del proyector, bajo Information. Si la lectura de
frecuencia es 0kHz, significar que el ordenador no est emitiendo ninguna seal. Consulte la pgina 98 (Manual del
usuario) o vaya al paso siguiente.
Habilitacin del modo de visualizacin externa en el ordenador.

La visualizacin de una imagen en la pantalla del PC porttil no significa necesariamente que el ordenador
est enviando una seal al proyector. Al utilizar un ordenador compatible con PC, el modo de visualizacin
externa puede habilitarse/inhabilitarse con una combinacin de teclas de funcin. Generalmente, la pulsacin
de la tecla "Fn" junto con una de las 12 teclas de funcin permite activar o desactivar el modo de visualizacin
externa. Por ejemplo, en los ordenadores porttiles NEC se utiliza la combinacin de teclas Fn + F3 (en los
ordenadores porttiles Dell se utiliza Fn + F8) para alternar entre las opciones de visualizacin externa.
Emisin de una seal no estndar desde el ordenador

Si la seal de salida de un PC porttil no cumple con las normas de la industria, la imagen proyectada no se
visualizar correctamente. Si esto sucediera, desactive la pantalla LCD del PC porttil cuando utilice el
proyector. La forma de desactivar/activar la pantalla LCD vara en cada PC porttil. Para obtener informacin
detallada, consulte la documentacin suministrada con su ordenador.
Se visualiza una imagen incorrecta al utilizar un ordenador Macintosh

Si utiliza un ordenador Macintosh con el proyector, ajuste el interruptor DIP del adaptador Mac (no suministrado
con el proyector) de acuerdo con la resolucin del ordenador. Despus de realizar el ajuste, reinicie el
ordenador Macintosh para que los cambios se hagan efectivos.
Si se selecciona un modo de visualizacin distinto de los admitidos por el ordenador Macintosh y el proyector y
se cambia la posicin del interruptor DIP del adaptador Mac, podr producirse una ligera inestabilidad en la
imagen o sta podr no visualizarse. Si esto sucediera, ajuste el interruptor DIP al modo fijo de 13 y reinicie el
ordenador Macintosh. Luego, ajuste los interruptores DIP a un modo que permita la visualizacin y vuelva a
reiniciar el ordenador Macintosh.
NOTA: En el caso de un ordenador PowerBook que no tiene un conector mini D-Sub de 15 contactos, se necesita un cable
adaptador de vdeo fabricado por Apple Computer.
Funcin "espejo" en un ordenador PowerBook

* Al utilizar el proyector con un ordenador PowerBook de Macintosh, es posible que la salida no se ajuste a
1024 x 768 a menos que la opcin espejo est desactivada en el ordenador PowerBook. Para ms detalles
sobre la funcin "espejo", consulte el manual de uso suministrado con su ordenador Macintosh.
Las carpetas o iconos estn ocultos en la pantalla del ordenador Macintosh

Las carpetas o iconos pueden no visualizarse en la pantalla. Si esto sucediera, seleccione [View] [Arrange]
en el men Apple y organice los iconos.
S-12
Svenska
S hr anvnder du de medfljande anvndardokumenten

Fyra anvndardokument medfljer projektorn.
Viktig information
Ls frst avsnittet Viktig information. Det omfattar information om projektorskerhet, frsiktighetstgrder,

lampbyte och felskning.
Snabbinstallationsguide
I snabbinstallationsguiden fr du veta hur du snabbt kommer igng med att installera apparaten, ansluta kllor,
sl p strmmen, vlja klla och andra grundlggande instruktioner.
NEC Software Utility Installation Guide [Wired and Wireless Network Setup Guide]
NEC Software Utility Installation Guide innehller information om hur du installerar och anvnder de fem
program som finns p den medfljande CD-ROM-skivan User Supportware 3.
Bruksanvisning p CD-ROM
Den fullstndiga bruksanvisningen finns i PDF-format (Portable Document Format) p den medfljande CDROM-skivan. I den hittar du detaljerad information om din NEC-projektor och hur du anvnder den.
Bruksanvisningen r tillgnglig p sju sprken (engelska, tyska, franska, italienska, spanska, svenska och
japansk).
Fr att lsa eller skriva ut PDF-filerna anvnder du Adobe Acrobat Reader eller Adobe Reader.
OBSERVERA: Du kan ladda ned Adobe Acrobat Reader eller Adobe Reader frn Adobes webbsajt.
Besk http://www.adobe.com fr att hmta aktuell version som passar ditt operativsystem.
S hr ppnar du bruksanvisningen (PDF)

[Windows]
1. Stt i den medfljande CD-ROM-skivan i CD-ROM-enheten p din dator.
2. Dubbelklicka p ikonen [Den hr datorn] p skrivbordet.
3. Dubbelklicka p CD-ROM-ikonen [NECPJ-UM].
4. Dubbelklicka p [start_menu.pdf].
Adobe Acrobat Reader eller Adobe Reader startas och Startmenyn visas.
5. Klicka p [Bruksanvisning].
Indexmenyn visas.
6. Klicka p det kapitel du vill se.
[Macintosh]
1. Stt i den medfljande CD-ROM-skivan i CD-ROM-enheten p din Macintosh-dator.
2. Dubbelklicka p CD-ROM-ikonen [NECPJ-UM] p skrivbordet.
3. Dubbelklicka p [start_menu.pdf].
Adobe Acrobat Reader eller Adobe Reader startas och Startmenyn visas.
4. Klicka p [Bruksanvisning].
Indexmenyn visas.
5. Klicka p det kapitel du vill se.
S hr kopierar du bruksanvisningen (PDF) till din dator:

Du kan kopiera bruksanvisningen p den medfljande CD-ROM-skivan till hrddisken p din dator.
Vlj sprkversion av [LT380_index_*.pdf] samt [LT380_manual_*.pdf] frn mappen [manual] i den medfljande
CD-ROM-skivan, och kopiera dessa till hrddisken p din dator.
Se bruksanvisningen (PDF-format)
p den medfljande CD-ROM-skivan
fr detaljerad information.
W-1
Skerhetsfreskrifter
Frsiktighetsmtt
Ls denna bruksanvisning noggrant innan du brjar anvnda din NEC-projektor LT380/LT280, och frvara den nra
till hands fr framtida bruk. Serienumret finns p undersidan av din projektor. Anteckna det hr:
FRSIKTIGT
Fr att helt bryta strmfrsrjningen till apparaten, skall stickproppen dras ur vgguttaget.
Vgguttaget ska finnas s nra apparaten som mjligt och mste vara ltttkomligt.
FRSIKTIGT
RISK FR ELEKTRISK STT. PPNA INTE KPAN.
DET FINNS HGSPNNINGSDELAR I APPARATEN.
VERLT ALL SERVICE T KVALIFICERAD SERVICEPERSONAL.
Denna symbol varnar fr oisolerad spnning inuti apparaten, som kan vara tillrckligt stark fr att ge en
elektrisk stt. Det r drfr farligt att rra delar inuti apparaten.
;;
;
;
;
;;;;
Denna symbol uppmrksammar anvndaren om viktig medfljande information om apparatens bruk och
underhll.
Ls informationen noggrant fr att undvika problem.
VARNING: FR ATT FRHINDRA BRAND ELLER ELEKTRISK STT, FR APPARATEN INTE UTSTTAS
FR REGN ELLER FUKT.
ANVND INTE STICKKONTAKTEN TILL DENNA ENHET TILLSAMMANS MED EN FRLNGNINGSKABEL
ELLER I ETT VGGUTTAG OM INTE BDA STIFTEN GR ATT STICKA I HELT OCH HLLET.
Denna etikett sitter p fjrrkontrollens ena sida.
Detta mrke sitter p fjrrkontrollens ovansida.
FRSIKTIGT
Anvndning av kontroller, instllningar eller procedurer p annat stt eller andra n de som anges i denna
handbok kan leda till exponering fr farlig strlning.
FRSIKTIGT
Titta inte in i laserpekaren medan den r p och rikta inte laserstrlen mot ngon person. Detta kan
orsaka allvarlig skada.
FRSIKTIGT
Undvik att visa stillbilder alltfr lnge.
Stillbilder kan brnnas in i LCD-panelen, fast endast tillflligt.
Fortstt anvnda projektorn om detta intrffar. Den statiska stillbilden i bakgrunden frsvinner s smningom.
W-2
Kassering av den frbrukade produkten

EU-lagstiftningen i respektive medlemsstat freskriver att frbrukad elektrisk och elektronisk utrustning
mrkt med symbolen till vnster mste kasseras separat och inte fr slngas tillsammans med vanligt
hushllsavfall. Detta inkluderar projektorer och deras elektriska tillbehr, inklusive lamporna. Vid kassering av denna typ av utrustning uppmanas du kontakta lokala myndigheter och/eller affren dr produkten
har kpts.
Utrustning som inlmnas p srskilda tervinningsstationer tas om hand och tervinns p korrekt stt.
Detta bidrar till att minska resursslseri och skonar bde milj och hlsa mot miljfarliga mnen, som
exempelvis kvicksilvret i projiceringslampan.
Mrkningen av elektrisk och elektronisk utrustning gller endast de stater som r medlemmar i Europeiska unionen idag.
Viktiga skerhetsinstruktioner
Skerhetsinstruktionerna r till fr att projektorn ska f en lng livslngd och fr att frhindra brand och elskador.
Ls dem noga och flj varningstexterna.
Installation
Placera inte projektorn p fljande platser:

- p instabila vagnar, stll eller bord.
- nra vatten, badkar eller i fuktiga rum.
- i direkt solljus, nra element eller vrmealstrande apparater.
- i miljer med mycket damm, rk eller nga.
- p pappersark, tyg, filtar eller mattor.
Vid takmontering:
- Frsk inte installera projektorn p egen hand.
- Fr att frskra sig om rtt funktion och minska risken fr personskador ska projektorn installeras av en
kvalificerad tekniker .
- Taket mste dessutom vara tillrckligt starkt fr att kunna hlla projektorn samtidigt som installationen
mste uppfylla lokala byggnadsbestmmelser.
- Kontakta din terfrsljare fr nrmare anvisningar.
Placera projektorn horisontalt

Projektorn fr inte lutas mer n 10 grader och fr inte installeras p ett annat stt n p ett bord eller hngande i taket,
eftersom dess livslngd i annat fall avsevrt frkortas.
10
W-3
Frsiktighetsmtt mot brand och elsttar

Se till att ventilationen r tillrcklig och att ventilationshlen inte r blockerade fr att frhindra att vrme genereras i
projektorn. Lmna minst 10 cm mellanrum mellan projektorn och omgivande vggar.
Vidrr inte ventilationsutloppet framtill till vnster (sett framifrn) eftersom detta kan vara mycket varmt nr projektorn r
igng och omedelbart efter att projektorn stngts av.
Frhindra att frmmande freml ssom gem och pappersbitar hamnar i projektorn.
Frsk inte att plocka ut freml som kommer in i projektorn. Stick inte in metallfreml ssom stltrd eller en skruvmejsel
i projektorn. Om ngot freml hamnar i projektorn, koppla omedelbart bort den frn elntet och lt en kvalificerad
servicetekniker ta ut fremlet.
Hll inga freml p projektorn.
Vidrr inte ntkontakten vid skvder. Detta kan orsaka elektriska sttar eller brand.
Projektorn r avsedd fr en strmfrsrjning p 100-240V AC 50/60 Hz. Kontrollera att den strmklla som anvnds
uppfyller dessa specifikationer innan du anvnder projektorn.
Titta inte in i linsen nr projektorn r p. Annars kan du f allvarliga gonskador.
Hll frstoringsglas och liknande borta frn projektorljuset. Det ljus som projiceras frn linsen r mycket starkt, varfr
freml som reflekterar ljuset kan orsaka ofrutsedda hndelser ssom brand eller gonskador.
Tck inte linsen med det medfljande linsskyddet eller liknande nr projektorn r p. Annars kan det smlta och eventuellt
orsaka brnnskador p hnderna p grund av vrmen som ljuset avger.
Ha inte freml som r vrmeknsliga framfr projektorns lins eller vid ventilationsutloppet.
Detta kan orsaka att fremlen smlter eller att du brnner hnder och fingrar som resultat av vrmen frn ljusstrlen eller
vrmeavledningen.
Hantera ntkabeln varsamt. En skadad eller sliten ntkabel kan orsaka elsttar eller brand.
- Anvnd aldrig andra kablar n den som medfljer.
- Bj inte och dra aldrig i hrt i ntkabeln.
- Placera aldrig ntkabeln under projektorn eller ngot annat tungt freml.
- Lgg aldrig mjuka material som t. ex. en filt ver kabeln.
- Vrm inte upp ntkabeln.
- Rr inte ntkabeln med vta hnder.
Om ngot av fljande intrffar ska du stnga av projektorn, dra ut ntkabeln och lta en kvalificerad NEC-tekniker ta hand
om apparaten:
- Om ntkabeln eller ntkontakten r skadad eller sliten.
- Om vatten spillts i projektorn eller om denna utsatts fr regn eller vatten.
- Om projektorn inte fungerar normalt trots att du fljer anvisningarna i denna bruksanvisning.
- Om projektorn fallit eller kpan skadats.
- Om projektorn uppvisar en klart frndrad prestanda som antyder att den behver service.
- Om projektorn inte ska anvndas en lngre tid.
Dra ut ntkabeln och eventuella andra kablar innan du br projektorn.
Stng av projektorn och dra ut ntkabeln innan du rengr kpan eller byter lampan.
Nr en LAN-kabel anvnds:
Anslut av skerhetsskl inte till kontakten fr koppling till kringutrustning som kan ha fr hg spnning.
FRSIKTIGT
Anvnd inte justerfoten fr ngot annat ndaml n den r avsedd. Om du br eller hnger projektorn i justerfoten
(i vggen eller taket) kan den skadas.
Snd aldrig projektorn i den mjuka vskan med paketpost eller lastfrakt. Annars kan projektorn skadas.
Vlj flktlget [Hg] om du kommer att anvnda projektorn flera dagar i fljd. (I menyn vljer du [Instllning Alternativ] [Flktlge] [Hg].)
Koppla inte loss ntkabeln frn vgguttaget under fljande omstndigheter.
Annars kan projektorn skadas:
- Nr projektorlampan r tnd.
- Nr kylflkten r igng. (Flkten fortstter att g i 30 sekunder efter att projektorn har stngts av).
- Nr PC CARD-tkomstindikatorn lyser. Om du gr det kan ditt PC-kort skadas.
W-4
Frsiktighetsmtt nr du anvnder fjrrkontrollen
Handskas frsiktigt med fjrrkontrollen.
Torka genast av fjrrkontrollen om den blir vt.
Undvik verdriven vrme eller fukt.
Du fr aldrig vrma upp, demontera eller kasta batterierna i ppen eld.
Ta ur batterierna om du inte rknar med att anvnda fjrrkontrollen under en lngre tid.
Var noga med att vnda + och - p batterierna rtt.
Blanda inte nya och gamla batterier, eller olika typer av batterier.
Frbrukade batterier skall kastas enligt lokala bestmmelser.
Byta lampa
Fr att byta lampan fljer du anvisningarna p sid F-8 till F-9.
Byt lampan nr meddelandet [Lampan har uppntt rekommenderad livslngd, vnligen erstt denna
med en ny.] visas.Om du fortstter att anvnda lampan efter att den har ntt slutet av sin frvntade livslngd
kan den explodera s att lamphuset blir fullt av glassplitter. Rr inte splittret.
Om detta intrffar ska du kontakta din terfrsljare fr lampbyte.
Lampkarakteristika
Projektorn anvnder en hgtrycks kvicksilverlampa som ljusklla.
Lampan knnetecknas av att ljusstyrkan gradvis avtar allteftersom lampan frldras. Upprepad tndning/slckning
av lampan kan ocks gra att ljusstyrkan minskar.
FRSIKTIGT:
Vid demontering av lampan i takmonterade projektorer ska du se till att det inte finns ngra personer under projektorn.
Om lampan har brustit finns det risk att glassplitter kan falla ned frn projektorn.
W-5
Rengra eller byta filtret

Skummgummit i luftfitlret hller damm och smuts borta frn projektorns insida och br rengras var 100:e drifttimme
(oftare i dammig milj). Om filtret r smutsigt eller igensatt kan din projektor verhettas.
FRSIKTIGT
Innan du byter filter ska du stnga av projektorn, sl ifrn huvudstrmbrytaren och dra ut ntkabeln ur
vgguttaget.
Rengr endast filterluckans utsida med en dammsugare.
Frsk aldrig att anvnda projektorn utan att filterluckan r p plats.
Gr s hr fr att rengra luftfiltret:
SE
LE
CT
Dammsug filtret genom filterluckan.
Fr att nollstlla filterbrukstiden vljer du i menyn [terstll] [Nollstll filtrets timmar].

( Bruksanvisning: sid 101 fr nollstllning av filterbrukstiden)
S hr byter du filtret (skummgummit):

1. Ta bort filtret genom att trycka ned luckans sprr tills du knner att den lossnar.
Sprr
PO
SE
LE
CT
3D
RE
FO
RM
AU
TO
AD
JU
ST
SO
UR
CE
ON
/ST
AN
RD
LA
CA
PC
BY
MP
US
AT R
ST WE
2. Dra frsiktigt av filtret (skumgummi) och byt ut det mot ett nytt.
W-6
3. Montera den nya filterluckan.
OBSERVERA: Tvtta inte filtret med tvl och vatten. Tvl och vatten skadar filtermembranet. Innan du byter filter ska du ta bort
damm och smuts frn projektorhljet. Se till att hlla damm och smuts borta vid filterbytet.
OBSERVERA: Nr du byter lampa r det ocks klokt att byta filtret. Filtret medfljer i byteslampans frpackning.
Rengra hljet och linsen

1. Stng av projektorn innan rengringen.
2. Rengr hljet regelbundet med en fuktig trasa. Om hljet r mycket smutsigt kan du anvnda ett milt
rengringsmedel. Anvnd aldrig starka rengringsmedel eller lsningsmedel ssom alkohol eller
thinner.
RD
P
M
LA US
AT
ST WER
PO
CA
3D
RM
FO
RE
TO
AU
ST
JU
AD
CE
UR
SO
PC
ND
TA
/S
ON
BY
3. Anvnd en blspensel eller linspapper fr att rengra linsen och se till att du inte repar eller frstr den.
CT
LE
SE
SEL
ECT
3D
RE
FOR
AU
TO
AD
JUS
T
SO
UR
CE
ON
/S
PC
LAM CAR
D
P
STA
POW TUS
ER
TA
ND
BY
PC
S-V
IDE
US
B
CA
RD
CO
MP
ON
ENT
LAN
IN
O IN
VID
Cb/
EO
Pb
IN
Cr/P
r
L/M AUD
ONO IO
AU
DIO
CO
IN
CO
IN
MP
AU
DIO
OU
MP
UTE
UTE
R1
R3
IN
IN
T
MO
CO
NIT
OR
OU
MP
PC
UTE
R2
IN
CO
NT
RO
L
AC
IN
W-7
Byta lampa
Efter att din lampa varit i drift 2000 timmar (upp till 3000 timmar i Eco-lge) eller mer kommer LAMP-indikatorn p
hljet att blinka rd och meddelandet [Lampan har uppntt rekommenderad livslngd, vnligen erstt denna
med en ny.] visas. ven om lampan forstter att lysa ska du byta den efter 2000 driftimmar (upp till 3000 timmar i Ecolge) fr att behlla projektorns optimala prestanda. Nr du bytt lampan ska du nollstlla lamptimmtaren. (
Bruksanvisning: sid 101)
FRSIKTIGT
VIDRR INTE LAMPAN direkt efter anvndning. Den r extremt het. Stng av strmmen till projektorn, vnta 30
sekunder, sl av huvudstrmbrytaren och dra sedan ut ntkabeln. Lt lampan svalna under tminstone en
timme innan du tar i den.
TA INTE BORT NGRA SKRUVAR med undantag fr de tv lamphusskruvarna. Annars kan du f en elektrisk
stt.
Ha inte snder lamphusets glas.

Hll fingeravtryck borta frn lamphusets glasyta. Om det finns fingeravtryck p glaset kan onskade skuggor
och dlig bildkvalitet frekomma.
Projektorn stngs av och frstts i vilolge efter 2100 (upp till 3100 timmar i Eco-lge) drifttimmar. Om detta
skulle hnda mste du omedelbart byta lampan. Om du fortstter att anvnda lampan efter 2000 drifttimmar
(upp till 3000 timmar i Eco-lge) kan lampan explodera och lamphuset fyllas med glassplitter. Rr i s fall inte
glasbitarna eftersom du d kan skada dig. Om detta intrffar ska du kontakta din NEC-terfrsljare fr
lampbyte.
S hr byter du lampa:
Byteslampa och verktyg:
Byteslampa VT75LP
Philips-skruvmejsel eller likvrdig
1. Placera projektorn p en mjuk tygbit och vnd den fr att komma t lampkpan i botten.
2. Anvnd en Philips-skruvmejsel fr att trycka p och frigra sprren.

Tryck uppt och ta bort lampkpan.
1
2
1
W-8
3. Lossa de tv skruvarna som fster lamphuset tills phillips-skruvmejseln gr ltt. De tv skruvarna kan
inte tas loss frn lamphuset.
Ta bort lamphuset genom att fatta det och dra uppt.
Skerhetssprr
OBSERVERA: Det finns en skerhetssprr som frhindrar elektriska sttar. Frsk inte att stta sprren ur funktion.
4. Stt i ett nytt lamphus och se till att det sticks in helt i kontakten.
FRSIKTIGT
Anvnd inga andra lampor n de frn NEC nr du byter lampan VT75LP.
Bestll dem hos din NEC-terfrsljare.
Fst huset med de tv skruvarna.

Dra t skruvarna ordentligt.
5. Stt tillbaka lampkpan.

Skjut tillbaka lampkpan tills den snpps fast.
6. Anslut den medfljande ntkabeln, sl p huvudstrmbrytaren och stt p projektorn.

7. Vlj slutligen menyn [terstll] [Nollstll lampans timmar] fr att nollstlla lamptimmarna.
OBSERVERA: Nr lamptiden verskrider 2100 timmar (upp till 3100 timmar i Eko-lge) kan projektorn inte sls p och menyn
visas inte.
Om detta skulle intrffa trycker du p HELP-tangenten p fjrrkontrollen i 10 sekunder fr att nollstlla lampuret.
LAMP-indikatorn slcks nr lamp-timmtaren nollstllts.
W-9
Felskning
Det hr avsnittet beskriver hur du tgrdar problem som kan uppkomma under installationen och anvndningen av projektorn.
(Siffrorna i tabellen hnvisar till sidor i bruksanvisningen.)
Indikatormeddelanden
Driftindikator [POWER]
Indikatorlge
Projektorlge
Av
Blinkar
Anmrkning
Huvudstrmmen r frnslagen.
Projektorn hller p att sttas igng.
Vnta en stund.
2,5 sek P,
0,5 sek Av
Stng av timern r aktiverad.
0,5 sek P,
Projektorn hller p att svalna.
Vnta en stund.
Grn
Projektorn r pslagen.
Orange
Projektorn r i standby-lge.
Grn
0,5 sek P,
0,5 sek Av
Orange
0,5 sek Av
Lyser konstant
Status Indicator [STATUS]

Indikatorlge
Projektorlge
Blinkar
Rd
1 cykel (0,5 sek P, Lamphusfel

2,5 sek Av)
Stt tillbaka lamphusets tckplatta

ordentligt. ( sid 105)
2 cykler (0,5 sek P, Temperaturfel
Projektorn r verhettad. Flytta
0,5 sek Av)

3 cykler (0,5 sek P, Strmfrsrjningsfel
0,5 sek Av)
projektorn till en svalare plats.
4 cykler (0,5 sek P, Flktfel

0,5 sek Av)
Flktarna fungerar inte ordentligt.
6 cykler (0,5 sek P, Lampfel
Lampan tnds inte. Vnta en hel
Tnder om lampan
1 cykel (0,5 sek P, Ntverksfel
Orange
Strmfrsrjningen fungerar inte

ordentligt.
minut och stt sedan p igen.
0,5 sek Av)

Grn
Anmrkning
Normal
Av
Projektorn tnder lampan.

Det inbyggda lokala ntverket och
det trdlsa ntverket kan inte ans-
2,5 sek Av)
lutas till samma ntverk samtidigt.

Fr att anvnda det inbyggda ntverket och det trdlsa ntverket
samtidigt mste de anslutas till olika
Lyser konstant
Kontrollpanelslset r p.
Orange
ntverk. ( sid 87)

Du har tryckt p en tangent p kpan nr kontrollpanelslset r p.
Projektorn r i standby-lge.
Grn
( sid 79)
Lamp Indicator [LAMP]

Indikatorlge
Av
Projektorlge
Normal
Anmrkning
Blinkar
Rd
Lampan har ntt slutet av sin livslngd. Byt lampan.
Lyser konstant
Rd
Meddelandet om att byta lampan visas. ( sid 104)

Lampan har anvnts lngre tid n Byt lampan.
rekommenderat. Projektorn stts inte p ( sid 104)
Grn
frrn lampan har bytts.

Lamplget stlls in p Eko-lge.
W-10
Vanliga problem & lsningar (Se ven Drift-/status-/lampindikator p sid W-10.)

(Siffrorna i tabellen hnvisar till sidor i bruksanvisningen.)
Problem
Check These Items
Gr inte att stta p
Kontrollera att ntsladden r ansluten och att strmbrytaren p projektorn eller fjrrkontrollen r p. ( sid
23, 24)
Kontrollera att lamphusets tckplatta har monterats rtt. ( sid 105)
Kontrollera om projektorn r verhettad. Om ventilationen kring projektorn r otillrcklig eller om rummet dr
du utfr presentationen r srskilt varmt ska du flytta projektorn till en svalare plats.
Kontrollera om lamptiden verskrider 2100 timmar (upp till 3100 timmar i Eko-lge). Om s r fallet ska du
byta lampan. Efter lampbytet nollstller du lamptiden. ( sid 101)
Lampan kanske inte tnds. Vnta en hel minut och sl p strmmen igen.
Kommer att stngas av
Se till att Strmbesparing-funktionen r avaktiverad. ( sid 94, 96)
Ingen bild
Anvnd SOURCE-tangenten p projektorkpan eller VIDEO-, S-VIDEO-, COMPUTER 1-, COMPUTER 2-,
COMPUTER 3 (endast LT380)-, COMPONENT-, VIEWER- eller LAN-tangenten p fjrrkontrollen fr att vlja
din klla. ( sid 26)
Se efter att kablarna r rtt anslutna.
Anvnd menyerna fr att justera ljusstyrkan och kontrasten. ( sid 71)
Kontrollera om bilden tillflligt har stngts av. ( sid 34)
Ta bort linsskyddet.
terstll instllnings- och justeringsvrdena till de fabriksinstllda niverna med hjlp av menyvalet terstll.
( sid 101)
Ange ditt registrerade nyckelord om Skerhet-funktionen r aktiverad. ( sid 42)
Var noga med att ansluta projektorn och den brbara datorn med projektorn i standby-lge och innan strmmen till datorn sls p.
I de flesta fall sls inte utsignalen frn den brbara datorn p om datorn inte r ansluten till projektorn innan
man stter p den.
* Om skrmen blir blank nr du anvnder fjrrkontrollen kan det bero p datorns skrmslckare eller energisparfunktioner.
Se ven nsta sida.
Frgtonen eller frgrenheten r ovanlig
Kontrollera att en lmplig frg valts i [Vggfrg]. Om s r fallet vljer du ett lmpligt alternativ. ( sid 78)
Justera [Frgrenhet] i [Justera]. ( sid 71)
Bilden r inte fyrkantig
Flytta projektorn fr att f en bttre vinkel mot duken. ( sid 27)

Anvnd funktionen 3D Reform fr att korrigera den trapetsformade frvrngningen. ( sid 29)
Bilden r oskarp
Bilden rullar vertikalt,

horisontellt eller bdadera
Anvnd SOURCE-tangenten p projektorkpan eller VIDEO-, S-VIDEO-, COMPUTER 1-, COMPUTER 2-,
COMPUTER 3 (endast LT380)-, COMPONENT-, VIEWER- eller LAN-tangenten p fjrrkontrollen fr att vlja
klla (Video, S-Video, Dator, Komponent, Bildvisare eller LAN). ( sid 26)
Justera datorbilden manuellt med alternativet [Klocka]/[Fas] i [Justera] [Bildalternativ]. ( sid 72)
Fjrrkontrollen fungerar
inte
Stt i nya batterier. ( sid 9)

Se till att den inte finns ngra hinder mellan dig och projektorn.
Se till att du befinner dig hgst 22 fot (7 m) frn projektorn. ( sid 9)
Statusindikatorn lyser
eller blinkar
Se tabellen ver statuslampmeddelanden ovan. ( sid 107)
Vertikala streck i RGBlget
Tryck p AUTO ADJUST-tangenten p projektorkpan eller AUTO ADJ.-tangenten p fjrrkontrollen. ( sid

31)
Justera datorbilden manuellt med alternativet [Klocka]/[Fas] i [Justera] [Bildalternativ]. ( sid 72)
USB-musen fungerar
inte
Kontrollera att din USB-mus anslutits till projektorn korrekt.

Det kan hnda att projektorn inte stder vissa mrken av USB-mus.
Justera fokus. ( sid 28)

Flytta projektorn fr att f en bttre vinkel mot duken. ( sid 27)
Kontrollera att avstndet mellan projektorn och duken ligger inom linsens justeringsomrde. ( sid 11)
Kondensation kan bildas p projektorns lins om projektorn r kall, tas till en varm plats och sedan stts p. Om
det intrffar ska du lta projektorn st tills kondensationen p linsen frsvinner.
Kontakta din terfrsljare fr nrmare information.
W-11
Ingen bild, eller bilden visas inte korrekt.
Tillslagning av projektorn och PC:n.

Var noga med att ansluta projektorn och den brbara datorn med projektorn i standby-lge och innan strmmen
till datorn sls p.
I de flesta fall sls inte utsignalen frn den brbara datorn p om datorn inte r ansluten till projektorn innan
man stter p den.
OBSERVERA: Du kan kontrollera den horisontella frekvensen fr den aktuella signalen i projektorns meny under Information.
Om det str 0kHz, betyder det att ingen signal snds ut frn datorn. Se sidan 98 (Bruksanvisning) eller g vidare till nsta
steg.
Aktivera datorns externa displayfunktion.

Nr du visar en bild p den brbara PC:ns skrm behver detta inte betyda att en signal snds ut till projektorn.
Om du anvnder en PC-kompatibel laptop, aktiverar/avaktiverar du den externa displayfunktionen genom att
trycka p en kombination av funktionstangenter. Vanligtvis slr du p eller av den externa displayfunktionen
genom att kombinera Fn-tangenten med en av de 12 funktionstangenterna. P t.ex. NEC-laptops anvnder du
Fn + F3, medan du p Dell-laptops anvnder Fn + F8 fr att vxla igenom alternativen fr extern display.
Utsndning av icke-standardsignaler frn datorn

Om utsignalen frn en brbar PC inte r av standardtyp kan det hnda att bilden inte visas korrekt. Om detta
skulle hnda ska du avaktivera den brbara PC:ns LCD-skrm medan projektorn r igng. Proceduren fr att
aktivera/avaktivera den lokala LCD-skrmen r olika fr alla typer av brbara PC, vilket beskrevs i det
fregende steget. Se den dokumentation som medfljer din dator fr nrmare anvisningar.
Bilden som visas r felaktig nr du anvnder en Macintosh-dator

Nr du anvnder en Macintosh-dator tillsammans med projektorn, stller du DIP-omkopplaren p Mac adaptern
(medfljer inte projektorn) i enlighet med den upplsning du anvnder. Efter att du gjort denna instllning startar
du om din Macintosh s att ndringarna aktiveras.
Nr du vill stlla in andra displaylgen n de som stds av din Macintosh och projektorn, kan det hnda att
bilden hoppar eller att ingen bild alls visas nr du ndrar DIP-omkopplarinstllningen p Mac adaptern. Om
detta skulle hnda stller du DIP-omkopplaren p 13 fixed mode och startar sedan om din Macintosh. Efter
detta stller du DIP-omkopplarna i ett visninglge som fungerar och startar sedan om Macintosh-datorn igen.
OBSERVERA: Du behver en videoadapterkabel som tillverkas av Apple Computer nr du anvnder en PowerBook som inte
har en 15-polig mini D-Sub-kontakt.
Mirroring med en PowerBook

* Nr du anvnder projektorn med en PowerBook frn Macintosh, kan det hnda att utsignalen inte r stlld p
1024 768 om inte mirroring-funktionen r avaktiverad p din PowerBook. Betrffande mirroring, se
anvndarhandboken till din Macintosh-dator.
Mappar eller ikoner r dolda p Macintosh-skrmen

Det kan hnda att mappar och ikoner inte kan ses p skrmen. Om detta skulle hnda vljer du [View] >[Arrange] i Apple-menyn och ordnar ikonerna.
W-12
Troubleshooting Check List

Before contacting your dealer or service personnel, check the following list to be sure repairs are needed also by
referring to the Troubleshooting section in your users manual. This checklist below will help us solve your problem
more efficiently.
Siehe Seiten 118 und 119 (Bedienungshandbuch)
Voir pages 118 et 119 (Mode demploi)
Fate riferimento alla pagine 118 e 119 (Manuale dellutente)
Consulte la pgina 118 y 119 (Manual del usuario)
Se sidan 118 och 119 (Bruksanvisning)
Frequency of occurrence always sometimes (How often?_____________________) other (__________________)

Power
No power (POWER indicator does not light green) See also Status Indicator (STATUS).
Main power switch is pressed to the ON position.
Lamp Hours Used (lamp operation hours) was cleared after
lamp replacement.
No power even though you press and hold the POWER button
for a minimum of 2 seconds.
Shut down during operation.

Power Management is turned off (only models with the Power
Management function).
Off Timer is turned off (only models with the Off Timer function ).
Video and Audio

No image is displayed from your PC or video equipment to the
projector.
Still no image even though you connect the projector to the PC
first, then start the PC.
Enabling your notebook PCs signal output to the projector.
A combination of function keys will enable/disable the external display. Usually, the combination of the Fn key along
with one of the 12 function keys turns the external display
on or off.
No image (blue background, logo, no display).
Still no image even though you press the AUTO ADJUST button.
Still no image even though you carry out [Reset] in the
projectors menu.
Signal cable's plug is fully inserted into the input connector
A message appears on the screen.
( _____________________________________________ )
The source connected to the projector is active and available.
Still no image even though you adjust the brightness and/or
the contrast.
projector.
Parts of the image are lost.

projectors menu.
Image is too dark.

Remains unchanged even though you adjust the brightness
and/or the contrast.
Image is distorted.
Image appears to be trapezoidal (unchanged even though you
carry out the [Keystone] or [3D Reform] adjustment).
No sound.
Audio cable is correctly connected to the audio input of the
projector.
Still unchanged even though you adjusted the volume level.
AUDIO OUT is connected to your audio equipment (only models with the AUDIO OUT connector).
Image is shifted in the vertical or horizontal direction.

Horizontal and vertical positions are correctly adjusted on a
computer signal.
projector.
Some pixels are lost.
Image is flickering.
projectors menu.
Image shows flickering or color drift on a computer signal.
Image appears blurry or out of focus.
Still unchanged even though you checked the signals resolution on PC and changed it to projectors native resolution.
Still unchanged even though you adjusted the focus.
Other
Remote control does not work.
No obstacles between the sensor of the projector and the remote control.
Projector is placed near a fluorescent light that can disturb the
infrared remote controls.
Batteries are new and are not reversed in installation.
If present on the remote control, projector selector switch is
not used.
Buttons on the projector cabinet do not work ( only models with

the Control Panel Lock function).
Control Panel Lock is not turned on or is disabled in the menu.
Still unchanged even though you press and hold the EXIT button for a minimum of 10 seconds.
In the space below please describe your problem in detail.
Information on application and environment where your projector is used

Installation environment
Projector
Model number:
Screen size:
Serial No.:
Screen type:
Wide angle High contrast
Date of purchase:
Lamp operating time (hours):
Lamp Mode:
inch
White matte Beads Polarization
Throw distance:
Normal Eco
Orientation:
Information on input signal:
feet/inch/m
Ceiling mount Desktop
Power outlet connection:
Horizontal synch frequency [
] kHz
Connected directly to wall outlet
Vertical synch frequency
] Hz
Synch polarity
H (+) ()
Connected to power cord extender or other (the number of connected equipment______________)
V (+) ()
Synch type
Separate Composite
Connected to a power cord reel or other (the number

of connected equipment______________)
Sync on Green
Computer
STATUS Indicator:
Steady light
Orange Green
Manufacturer:
Flashing light
Model number:
] cycles
Remote control model number:
Notebook PC / Desktop
Native resolution:
Refresh rate:
Video adapter:
Projector
Other:
PC
DVD player
Video equipment
Signal cable
VCR, DVD player, Video camera, Video game or other
NEC standard or other manufacturers cable?

Model number:
Distribution amplifier
Length:
inch/m
Manufacturer:
Model number:
Model number:
Switcher
Model number:
Adapter
Model number:
Ver. 1 10/05
LT380/LT280 Portable Projector Important Information
Printed on recycled paper

PRINTED WITH
SOY INK
Printed in Japan
7N8P6241
TM
NEC Projector
LT380/LT280
Wired and Wireless Network Setup Guide
1. What You Can Do with User
Supportware 3
2. Operating Environment
3. Connecting LAN Cable
4. Attaching LAN Card
5. Setting the LAN Setting of

Projector
6. Setting the LAN Setting of
Personal Computer ([Example]
Wireless LAN of Windows
XP:Ad Hoc connection)
7. Refer to Users Guide and

Help
SELECT
3D
REFOR
MAUTO
ADJUST
SOURC
E
TAN
ON/S
PC
LAMP CARD
STATUS
POWER
BY
USB
PC
CARD
COMPO
NENT
LAN
IN
S-VIDEO
IN
Cb/Pb
VIDEO
IN
AUDIO
Cr/Pr
COMPU
IN
L/MONO
AUDIO
TER
3 IN
COMPU
TER
1 IN
AUDIO
OUT
MONITO
COMPU
TER
R OUT
2 IN
PC
CONTR
OL
AC
IN
This manual describes the LAN settings to use the software programs included in
the supplied User Supportware 3 CD-ROM. For how to operate each software
program, refer to Users Guide (PDF) on User Supportware 3 CD-ROM.
Introduction
Thank you for purchasing the NEC projector LT380/LT280 (hereafter referred to as the projector).
The projector is equipped with the following features so that you can give effective presentations.
LAN port (RJ-45), USB port (type A), PC card slot (TYPE II) supplied as standard
Viewer that displays images from a flash memory card*1 and USB memory*1
Wireless LAN card supplied as an option*2
*1 The projector is not supplied with a flash memory card or USB memory.
*2 For a list of countries where NECs optional wireless LAN card (NWL-100 series) is available, refer
to the Service Page for NEC Projectors (http://www.nec-pj.com).
The projector is also supplied with User Supportware 3 CD-ROM in which five programs of
software are stored for effective use of these features. The software stored on this CD-ROM are
as follows.
Each program runs on Windows XP and Windows 2000.
Image Express Utility 2.0

Desktop Control Utility 1.0
Ulead Photo Explorer 8.0 SE Basic
Viewer PPT Converter 3.0
PC Control Utility 3.0
This document explains how to configure the LAN settings to use the above software programs.
For details of operations, refer to User Supportware 3 Users Guide on User Supportware 3
CD-ROM and help function of the software.
For the network settings on the personal computer, refer to the Users Manual for the personal
computer or the peripheral equipment for the network.
Use a wireless LAN card conforming to the Wi-Fi standard for your personal computer.
NOTES
(1) The contents of this guide may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission.
(2) The contents of this guide are subject to change without notice.
(3) Great care has been taken in the preparation of this guide; however, should you notice any
questionable points, errors or omissions, please contact us.
(4) Notwithstanding article (3), NEC will not be responsible for any claims on loss of profit or
other matters deemed to result from using the Projector.
(5) Guides with incorrect collating or missing pages will be replaced.
Cautions on Usage
Cautions on Usage
A wireless LAN card is not meant for use with facilities or equipment involving the safeguard
of human life, such as medical equipment, nuclear facilities or equipment, aeronautical or
space equipment, transportation facilities or equipment, etc., or with facilities or equipment
requiring high levels of reliability. Do not use the card in such cases.
Do not use a wireless LAN card near cardiac pacemakers.
Do not use a wireless LAN card near medical equipment. Doing so may cause electromagnetic
interference with the medical equipment, possible leading to death.
Do not disassemble or modify a wireless LAN card in any way. Doing so could lead to fire or
electric shock.
Do not use a wireless LAN card in wet or moist places, such as in bathrooms or near
humidifiers. Doing so could lead to fire, electric shock or malfunctions.
To prevent damage due to static electricity, eliminate any static electricity from your body before
touching a wireless LAN card.
Static electricity from the human body may damage a wireless LAN card. Before touching
the card, touch an aluminum window frame, a door knob, or some other metal object around
you to eliminate the static electricity.
The radio waves used by a wireless LAN card pass through the wood or glass used in normal
homes (but not through window panes with built-in metallic mesh).
The radio waves do not pass through iron reinforcing bars, metal or concrete, so a wireless LAN
card cannot be used for communicating through walls or floors made with these materials.
Contents
Contents
Introduction ................................................................................ Inside cover
Cautions on Usage ........................................................................................1
Contents .........................................................................................................2
1. What You Can Do with User Supportware 3 ........................................... 3
1-1. Image Express Utility 2.0 ...................................................................................... 3
1-2. Desktop Control Utility 1.0 .................................................................................... 5
1-3. Ulead Photo Explorer 8.0 SE Basic ...................................................................... 6
1-4. Viewer PPT Converter 3.0 .................................................................................... 7
1-5. PC Control Utility 3.0 ............................................................................................ 7
2. Operating Environment ............................................................................8

2-1. Supported Projector .............................................................................................. 8
2-2. Operating Environment ......................................................................................... 9
3. Connecting LAN Cable ...........................................................................10

4. Attaching Wireless LAN Card ................................................................ 11
5. Setting the LAN Setting of Projector ....................................................13
5-1. Displaying On-Screen Menu (LAN Mode) .......................................................... 13
5-2. Wireless LAN ...................................................................................................... 15
5-3. Wired LAN ........................................................................................................... 24
6. Setting the LAN Setting of Personal Computer

([Example] Wireless LAN of Windows XP: Ad Hoc connection) ........26
7. Refer to Users Guide and Help .........................................................31
7-1. Displaying Users Guide (PDF) .......................................................................... 31
7-2. Using Help ............................................................................................................ 33
1. What You Can Do with User Supportware 3

1-1. Image Express Utility 2.0
Image Express Utility 2.0 is a software tool used to send the screen of your personal computer
to the projector via a network, without the signal cables.
High-speed, high-quality image transmissions based on NECs original

compression algorithm
SELECT
3D
REFORM
AUTO
ADJUST
SOURCE
ON/STA
PC
LAMP CARD
STATUS
POWER
ND
BY
PC
USB
CARD
COMPONEN
LAN
T IN
S-VIDEO
IN
VIDEO
Cb/Pb
IN
AUDIO
Cr/Pr
IN
COMPUTER
L/MONOAUDIO
3 IN
COMPUTER
R
1 IN
AUDIO
OUT
COMPUTER
MONITOR
OUT
2 IN
PC
CONTROL
AC
IN
Simultaneous projection by multiple projectors

Images can be sent from a personal computer to not only one projector but also to two or
more projectors at the same time.
SELECT
3D
REFORM
AUTO
ADJUST
SOURCE
ON/STAN
PC
LAMP CARD
STATUS
POWER
D
BY
PC
USB
CARD
COMPONENT
LAN
IN
S-VIDEO
IN
VIDEO
Cb/Pb
IN
AUDIO
Cr/Pr
IN
COMPUTER
L/MONOAUDIO
3 IN
COMPUTER
R
1 IN
AUDIO
OUT
COMPUTER
MONITOR
OUT
2 IN
PC
CONTROL
AC
IN
SELECT
3D
REFORM
AUTO
ADJUST
SOURCE
ON/STAN
PC
LAMP CARD
STATUS
POWER
D
BY
PC
USB
CARD
COMPONENT
LAN
IN
S-VIDEO
IN
VIDEO
Cb/Pb
IN
AUDIO
Cr/Pr
IN
COMPUTER
L/MONOAUDIO
3 IN
COMPUTER
R
1 IN
AUDIO
OUT
COMPUTER
MONITOR
OUT
2 IN
PC
CONTROL
AC
IN
Easy Connection function for connecting wireless LAN

By using Easy Connection function*1, the complicated setting of wireless LAN can be
simplified.
*1 This function can be used when Windows XP is used as the OS and when you have a Computer
Administrator privilege. The communication mode is set to 802.11 Ad Hoc.
The Easy Connection function cannot be used with Windows 2000.
1
What You Can Do with User Supportware 3
NECs original compression algorithm allows high-quality images to be sent over the network
at high speed, from your personal computer to the projector.

Projected images can be transferred and saved to personal computers.
When Meeting Mode is used, projected images can be sent to the personal computers of
all the participants (attendants) of a Meeting. The received images can be saved to your
personal computer with a memo (text data) attached.
Attendant
SELECT
3D
REFORM
AUTO
ADJUST
SOURCE
ON/STAN
D
PC
LAMP CARD
STATUS
POWER
BY
USB
PC
CARD
COMPONENT
LAN
IN
S-VIDEO
IN
Cb/Pb
VIDEO
IN
AUDIO
Cr/Pr
COMPUTER
IN
L/MONO
AUDIO
3 IN
COMPUTER
R
1 IN
AUDIO
OUT
COMPUTER
MONITOR
OUT
2 IN
PC
CONTROL
AC
Attendant
IN
Presenter
Attendant
1-click switching of presenter

When switching to another presenter during the conference, the participants (attendants)
can simply click a button to switch over to the new presenter.
Central management of the projecting personal computer

Using the Training Mode allows you to use a single personal computer (Manager) to manage
which personal computer (Attendant) projects. Possible operation includes switching
projecting personal computers to project from, as well as temporarily terminating
communication with the projector.
Mr. D, please start
your presentation.
Manager
SELECT
3D
REFORM
AUTO
ADJUST
SOURCE
ON/STAND
PC
LAMP CARD
STATUS
POWER
BY
PC
USB
CARD
COMPONENT
LAN
IN
S-VIDEO
IN
VIDEO
Cb/Pb
IN
AUDIO
Cr/Pr
IN
COMPUTER
L/MONOAUDIO
3 IN
COMPUTER
R
1 IN
AUDIO
OUT
COMPUTER
MONITOR
OUT
2 IN
PC
CONTROL
AC
Attendant A
Attendant B
IN
Attendant D (presenter)
Attendant C
Note
The Training Mode is not installed via the Typical installation option when Image Express
Utility 2.0 is installed.
To use Training Mode, select Extension installation option on the install selection screen
that is displayed while Image Express Utility 2.0 installation is in progress, and select Training
Mode (Attendant) or Training Mode (Manager).
1-2. Desktop Control Utility 1.0

Desktop Control Utility 1.0 is software that operates the desktop screen of a personal computer
at a remote location from the projector by using a network.
A commercially available USB mouse is connected to the projector to operate the personal
computer.
Conference room
SELECT
3D
REFORM
AUTO
ADJUST
SOURCE
ON/STAN
PC
LAMP CARD
STATUS
POWER
D
BY
PC
USB
CARD
COMPONENT
LAN
IN
S-VIDEO
IN
VIDEO
Cb/Pb
IN
AUDIO
Cr/Pr
IN
COMPUTER
L/MONOAUDIO
3 IN
COMPUTER
R
1 IN
AUDIO
OUT
COMPUTER
MONITOR
OUT
2 IN
PC
CONTROL
AC
IN
Office
Important
You can use the Desktop Control Utility 1.0 to operate a personal computer located in a
separate room from the projector over a network. Therefore, care must be exercised to
prevent any third party from viewing the screen of your personal computer (important
documents), copying files, or turning off the power.
NEC assumes no liability for any loss or damages arising from information leak or system
failure while you are using Desktop Control Utility 1.0.
In the Windows operating system, click [Control Panel] [Performance and Maintenance]
[Power Options] [System Standby] [Never]. This will disconnect LAN connection
when the personal computer goes in the standby mode while the Desktop Control Utility
1.0 is being used.
The screen saver function is off while Desktop Control Utility 1.0 is running.
1
Suppose, for example, a PowerPoint file to be presented in a conference is saved to a

personal computer in your office. If this personal computer is connected to the projector in
the conference room with LAN when the conference is held, the desktop screen of the
personal computer in your office (Windows XP/2000) can be projected and the PowerPoint
file can be presented by operating the projector. In other words the personal computer does
not need to be brought into the conference room.
1-3. Ulead Photo Explorer 8.0 SE Basic

Ulead Photo Explorer 8.0 SE Basic (hereafter referred to as Ulead Photo Explorer 8.0) is a
multimedia image file management tool developed by Ulead Systems, Inc. This tool has functions
to capture images from a digital camera or scanner and to process or edit images, as well as
image file management functions. In addition, slideshows and screen savers can also be easily
created.
Ulead Photo Explorer 8.0 in the User Supportware 3 CD-ROM has functions that allow you
to use the projector more conveniently, in addition to the functions that come with the software,
for when an NEC projector is connected.
Additional functions are listed below.
For details of each function, refer to the help function of Ulead Photo Explorer 8.0.
Image transmission
Sends images to the projector.
PowerPoint file conversion

Converts a PowerPoint file into an image file.
Logo transfer
Registers an image file as the logo data of the projector.
Capture
Saves the screens of the personal computer as image files.
Slideshow start
Sends the image of a slideshow to the projector and executes the slideshow on the
projector.
Viewer output
Converts a slideshow into an index file that can be played back by the viewer function of
the projector and outputs the index file.
Connection destination selection

Select the projector to connect.
The personal computer and projector may be connected with wired LAN or wireless LAN.
1-4. Viewer PPT Converter 3.0

Viewer PPT Converter 3.0 is software that converts files created with PowerPoint 95/97/ 2000/
2002/2003 into an index file that can be displayed with the viewer function of the projector.
When converting, specify a flash memory card or USB memory as the destination to which
the index file is to be saved. Then you can easily make your presentation by simply inserting
the flash memory card or USB memory into the projector (viewer function of the projector).
1-5. PC Control Utility 3.0

PC Control Utility 3.0 is software that allows you to operate the projector from the personal
computer when the personal computer and the projector are connected with LAN (wired or
wireless) or a serial cable.
You can operate the projector as follows from your personal computer.
For details of each function, refer to the help function of PC Control Utility 3.0.
Power on/off
Input signal switching
Muting (temporarily disabling audio/video)
Freezing (locking the projected image)
Logo image transmission
1
If PowerPoint 2000/2002/2003 is installed in your personal computer, you can activate Viewer
PPT Converter 3.0 from PowerPoint (PPT Converter add-in is automatically registered to
PowerPoint).
2-1. Supported Projector
User Supportware 3 supports the following NEC projector (as of October 2005)
LT Series
Reference
LT380/LT280
PC Control Utility 3.0 can be used with projectors other than the above projectors. For
details, refer to the help function of PC Control Utility 3.0.
2-2. Operating Environment

The following is the operating environment for Image Express Utility 2.0. For the operating
environment of other software, please refer to the help function of each software.
Supported OS
Windows 2000 Professional

Windows XP Home Edition
Windows XP Professional
Windows XP Tablet PC Edition
Windows power-saving function is not supported.
The "Easy Connection" only supports the "Computer
Administrator" authority of Windows XP.
Supported hardware
IBM PC/AT compatible personal computers

CD-ROM drive required for installation
Sender personal computer
Pentium MMX processor or higher required
Pentium 800 MHz or higher recommended
Recipient personal computer
Pentium III 800 MHz or higher required
Pentium III 1.2 GHz or higher recommended
Windows XP
Memory
128 MB or more required (192 MB or more recommended)

More memory may be necessary if other applications run
at the same time.
Windows 2000
64 MB or more required (128 MB or more recommended)
More memory may be necessary if other applications run
at the same time.
Network environment
TCP/IP-compatible LAN or wireless LAN environment required
Resolution
1024 dots 768 lines recommended
Screen Colors
High Color (15 bits, 16 bits)

True Color (24 bits, 32 bits)
256 or fewer colors are not supported.
Reference
If the communication mode has been set to 802.11 Ad Hoc for wireless LAN of the
projector, IEEE802.11b specification (maximum transmission speed of 11 Mbps) is applied.
Operating Environment
CPU

Connect a LAN cable to the LAN port (RJ-45) of the projector when connecting the projector to
wired LAN.
After connecting LAN cable to the projector, set the required settings for the projector
( page 24).
Server
HUB, etc.
LAN cable
(commercially available)
LAN
USB
LAN
COMPUTER 3 IN
PC CARD
COMPONENT IN
S-VIDEO IN
Cb/Pb
VIDEO IN
AUDIO IN
COMPUTER 1 IN
COMPUTER 2 IN
AUDIO OUT
MONITOR OUT
PC CONTROL
Cr/Pr
AUDIO IN
L/MONO
AC IN
10
4. Attaching Wireless LAN Card

Insert the wireless LAN card into the PC card slot on the rear panel of the projector.
Important
The wireless LAN card must be inserted into the PC card slot in the correct direction. It
cannot be inserted in the reverse direction. If the card is inserted in the reverse direction
with excessive force applied, the pins in the projector and the PC card slot may break. Be
sure to insert the wireless LAN card with its label facing up.
Before touching the LAN card, touch a metallic object (such as a door knob or aluminum
window frame) to discharge the static electricity from your body.
Setting card in PC card slot

1 Press POWER ON/STAND BY button to set the projector to Stand-by mode,
press the O (off) side of the main power switch of the projector.
the slot horizontally.

3D
RE
FO
RM
AU
TO
AD
JU
ST
SO
UR
CE
D
N
TA
/S
N
O
PC
CA
LA
RD
ST MP
PO ATUS
WER
BY
PC
CA
RD
CO
MP
ON
EN
T IN
Y
S-VI
DE
O IN
US
B
LA
N
VIDE Cb/Pb
O IN
AU
DIO
IN
Cr/Pr
L/M AUDI
ON
O O IN
CO
MP
UT
ER
CO
MP
UT
ER
AU
DIO
OU
T
3 IN
1 IN
MO
NITO
R OU
T
CO
MP
UT
ER
PC
2 IN
CO
NT
RO
L
AC
IN
Note
Do not apply any excessive force while inserting the card.
11
Attaching Wireless LAN Card
2 With the label on the wireless LAN card facing up, slowly insert the card into
Removing card from PC card slot

1 Press POWER ON/STAND BY button to set the projector to Stand-by mode,
press the O (off) side of the main power switch of the projector.
2 Slowly press the PC card eject button.

The PC card eject button will slightly come forward.
3 Slowly press the PC card eject button once again.

The inserted card will slightly come forward.
3D
RE
FO
RM
AU
TO
AD
JU
ST
SO
UR
CE
D
N
TA
/S
N
O
PC
CA
LA
RD
ST MP
PO ATUS
WER
BY
PC
CA
RD
CO
MP
ON
EN
T IN
Y
S-VI
DE
O IN
US
LA
VIDE Cb/Pb
O IN
AU
DIO
IN
Cr/Pr
L/M AUDI
ON
O O IN
CO
MP
UT
ER
CO
MP
UT
ER
AU
DIO
OU
T
3 IN
1 IN
MO
NITO
R OU
T
CO
MP
UT
ER
PC
CO
NT
2 IN
RO
AC
IN
4 Slowly pull out the card.

Reference
PC Card Lock
The supplied PC card lock prevents the wireless LAN card from being ejected use. Some
PC cards cannot be used based on their size and shape.
Use the supplled screw to fix the PC card lock.
Wireless LAN card
PC card lock
PC
US
CA
RD
CO
MP
S-V
IDE
O IN
PC
CA
CO
ON
US
RD
MP
EN
T IN
ON
EN
T IN
S-V
IDE
O IN
b/P
VID
b
EO
IN
Cr/
Pr
L/M AU
ON DIO
O
IN
b/P
VID
b
EO
IN
Cr/
Pr
L/M AU
ON DIO
O
IN
R
12
5. Setting the LAN Setting of Projector

Reference
For how to turn on/off the power to the projector and how to operate the buttons and
remote control of the projector, refer to Users Manual included in the Users Manual
CD-ROM.
5-1. Displaying On-Screen Menu (LAN Mode)

Preparation:
Turn on the power to the projector and project images to the screen.
It is not necessary to select the signals.
1 Press the
button.
The on-screen menu will be displayed.
5
Setting the LAN Setting of Projector
Highlight
2 Use the
3 Press the
button to select the Setup submenu.

button.
The Basic tab will be highlighted.
13
4 Press the
button three times to highlight the Installation tab.
5 Press the SELECT button three times to highlight LAN Mode, and press
the
button.
The LAN Mode screen will be displayed.
To make setting of wireless LAN

Proceed to 5-2. Wireless LAN (
next page).
To make setting of wired LAN
Proceed to 5-3. Wired LAN (
page 24).
14
5-2. Wireless LAN

When inserting the wireless LAN card into the PC card slot of the projector, configure the LAN
settings in the PC Card page of LAN Mode selected from On-Screen Menu.
Flow of Setting
Step 1 Display "PC Card" page of "LAN Mode".
Step 2 Select "Profiles".
Step 3 Enable or disable "DHCP".

If "Disabled" (without check mark)
If "Enabled" (with check mark)
Step 4 Input "IP Address".
If "Easy Connection" is selected
Step 5 Input "Subnet Mask".
Step 6 Input "Gateway".
Step 7 Input "DNS Configuration".
Step 8 - 16 Setting of "Advanced".
8 Setting of "Network Type".
13 Setting of "WEP"
9 Select SSID in "Site Survey".
14 Select the number of bits of "WEP".
10 Input "SSID" (if necessary).
15 Select "Key Select".
11 Select "Mode" (if necessary).
16 Set "Key 1 to Key 4".
12 Select "Channel" (if necessary).
Step 17 Finalize "Advanced".
Step 18 Reconnect the network.
Step 19 Finalize the setting.
15
Setting Wireless LAN

1 Display the PC Card page of LAN Mode.
Configure the setting of wireless LAN in the "PC Card page of LAN Mode selected from On-Screen Menu.
<1> In the LAN Mode setting window, if the Built-in tab is highlighted, press the
button
to highlight PC Card.
The PC Card page will be displayed.
If LAN Mode is not displayed, refer to 5-1. Displaying On-Screen Menu (LAN Mode) (
page 13).
2 Select Profiles.
<1> Press the SELECT button once to highlight the Profiles field and press the
<2> Use the SELECT / button to highlight Profile 1, and press the
button.
button.
Profile 1 or Profile 2 can be stored in the memory of the projector as the setting for LAN.
Easy Connection is a mode in which the personal computer that runs Image Express Utility 2.0 in
the User Supportware 3 CD-ROM is easily connected to wireless LAN.
Note that Easy Connection does not support software other than Image Express Utility 2.0.
When Easy Connection is selected, the IP address and subnet mask do not have to be set. To
use Easy Connection, the OS of the personal computer must be Windows XP ([Computer
Administrator] privilege). It cannot be used with Windows 2000.
The communication mode is 802.11 Ad Hoc.
16
3 Set DHCP.
Check this check box if the network to which the projector is to be connected automatically assigns the
IP address via the DHCP server.
<1> Press the SELECT button once to highlight the DHCP check box and press the
button.
A check will be given if there is no mark found in the box.

To clear the check box, press the
button once again.
button. Proceed
If DHCP is checked, move the highlight to Advanced and press the
to step 9 ( page 19). Input DNS Configuration field as necessary.
If DHCP is not checked, input IP Address, Subnet Mask, Gateway, and DNS
Configuration as necessary. After each item has been set, move the highlight to Advanced
and press the
button. Proceed to step 9 ( page 19).
4 Input IP Address.
If DHCP is not checked, input the IP address assigned to the projector by the administrator of the
network to which the projector is connected.
<1> Press the SELECT button once to highlight the IP Address field and press the
button.
button.
<3> Repeat step <2> above to input the IP address.

Each button on the software keyboard has the following function.
SP .................. Inputs space.
BS .................. Deletes one character to the left of the character insertion position in the
IP Address field.
........... Moves the character insertion position in the IP Address field to the left
or the right.
[OK] .................. Finalizes the input character and closes the software keyboard.
[Cancel] ............ Cancels the input character and closes the software keyboard.
17
<2> Use the SELECT button to select a number to input, and press the
The characters will be input.
5 Input Subnet Mask.

If DHCP is not checked, input the subnet mask of the network to which the projector is connected.
The method of inputting is the same as that of the IP Address field.
6 Input Gateway.
If DHCP is not checked, input the default gateway of the network to which the projector is connected.
7 Input DNS Configuration.

Set the IP address of the DNS server of the network to which the projector is connected.
Example of setting 1
8 Select Advanced.
Set Network Type and WEP (encryption) specific to wireless LAN.
<1> Use the SELECT / button to highlight Advanced on the Profile page and press the
button.
The Advanced screen will be displayed.
18
9 Select SSID from Site Survey (if necessary).

A list of SSID that can be connected to wireless LAN in this place are displayed, and the SSID that are
to be connected are selected from this list. When SSID is selected from the list, the SSID field,
Mode field and Channel field will also be automatically set.
<1> Press the SELECT button once to highlight Site Survey and press the
Searching SSID will begin.
When searching SSID is complete, a list of SSID is displayed.
button.
Icon
............ Access point
............ Personal computer (Ad Hoc)
........... WEP setting

<2> Use the SELECT / button to highlight the SSID of the network to be connected.
Press the
button once to highlight [OK] and press the
button.
If the SSID to be connected is not on the list, press the EXIT button.
Note
10 Input or edit SSID (if necessary).

SSID selected in Site Survey are automatically input.
If the highlight is moved to the SSID field and the
displayed and characters can be input or edited.
The default setting of the projectors is NECPJ.
button is pressed, a software keyboard is
19
To connect SSID for which WEP is set, the same setting must be made on the projector
(
page 21).
11 Select Mode (if necessary).

The communication mode of the SSID selected in Site Survey are automatically selected.
The settings can be changed by moving the highlight to the Mode field and pressing the
button.
Infrastructure .............. This is selected if communication is performed with two or more devices
connected by wired or wireless LAN via an access point.
802.11 Ad Hoc ............ This is selected to perform peer-to-peer communication between the
projector and a personal computer by using only wireless LAN.
Example of connection when
Mode is Infrastructure
Example of connection when

Mode is 802.11 Ad Hoc
SELECT
SELECT
3D
3D
REFORM
REFORM
AUTO
AUTO
ADJUST
ADJUST
SOURCE
SOURCE
ON/STA
ON/STA
BY
BY
PC
LAMP CARD
STATUS
POWER
ND
PC
LAMP CARD
STATUS
POWER
ND
PC
PC
CARD
COMPONENT
CARD
COMPONENT
IN
IN
S-VIDEO
S-VIDEO
IN
VIDEO
IN
Cb/Pb
IN
AUDIO
Cr/Pr
IN
AUDIO
Cr/Pr
IN
COMPUTER
3 IN
COMPUTER
R
1 IN
AUDIO
Cb/Pb
L/MONOAUDIO
3 IN
COMPUTER
R
VIDEO
IN
COMPUTER
L/MONOAUDIO
1 IN
AUDIO
OUT
OUT
COMPUTER
MONITOR
OUT
COMPUTER
MONITOR
OUT
2 IN
PC
2 IN
PC
CONTROL
AC
CONTROL
AC
IN
IN
Access
point
Wired LAN
Example of setting 2
12 Select Channel (if necessary).

Select a channel for communication using wireless LAN.
If neighboring channel numbers are used in one area, the speed of wireless LAN communication
decelerates. To avoid such a situation, select discrete channel numbers.
The setting upon shipment is "Automatic".
20
13 Select WEP page (if necessary).

Proceed to step 17 if WEP is not set.
<1> Use the SELECT / button to select the Network Type tab, and press the
button to highlight the WEP tab.
The WEP page will be displayed.
14 Select WEP.
Select whether WEP (encryption) is performed or not.
To perform WEP (encryption), set an encryption key.
Disable ................... WEP (encryption) is not performed. There is a danger that the contents of
communication are monitored.
64 bit ...................... 64-bit data is used as an encryption key of WEP.
128 bit .................... 128-bit data is used as an encryption key of WEP.
152 bit .................... 152-bit data is used as an encryption key of WEP.
15 Select Key Select (only when WEP is selected).

If 64 bit, 128 bit, or 152 bit is selected from WEP, select which of the following encryption keys,
Key 1 to Key 4, is to be used.
21
Security is reinforced as the number of bits is increased.
16 Input Key 1 to Key 4.

If 64 bit, 128 bit, or 152 bit is selected from WEP, input an encryption key.
Set the same encryption key as the access point and personal computer to be connected by the
wireless LAN.
Four types of keys can be input for WEP.
Authentic Method
64 bit
Alphanumeric
Hexadecimal
Character (ASCII)
Number (HEX)
5 characters
10 characters
128 bit
13 characters
26 characters
152 bit
16 characters
32 characters
<1> Use the SELECT / button to select an item for which the encryption key is to be input and
press the
button.
<2> Use the SELECT button, move the highlight to a character, and press the
button.
<3> Repeat step <2> above to input the encryption key.
The character will be input.
Each button on the software keyboard has the following function.
................. Move the character insertion position in the encryption key field to the
left or the right.
MODE ................. Selects uppercase, lowercase, or special characters.
SP ....................... Inputs space.
BS ....................... Deletes one character to the left of the character insertion position in
the encryption key field.
[OK] ....................... Finalizes the input character and closes the software keyboard.
[Cancel] ................. Cancels the input character and closes the software keyboard.
HEX or ASCII .... Selects alphanumeric character input or hexadecimal number input.
When HEX is displayed, alphanumeric characters (ASCII) can
be input.
To input hexadecimal numbers, move the highlight to HEX and
button. ASCII will be displayed instead of
press the
HEX, and hexadecimal numbers can be input.
When hexadecimal numbers can be input, 0x is automatically
displayed at the beginning of the input field.
22
17 Finalize Advanced.
<1> Use the SELECT / button to highlight [OK] and press the
The PC card page will be displayed again.
button.
18 Reconnect the network.

<1> Use the SELECT / button to highlight Reconnect and press the
button.
19 Finalize the setting.

<1> Use the SELECT / button to highlight [OK] and press the
button.
The contents of the setting will be stored in the memory of the projector.
5
23
5-3. Wired LAN

When connecting a LAN cable to the LAN port of the projector, configure the LAN settings in the
Built-in page of LAN Mode selected from On-Screen Menu.
Flow of setting
Step 1 Display "Built-in" page of "LAN Mode".
Step 2 Select "Profiles".
Step 3 Enable or disable "DHCP".

If "Disabled" (without check mark)
If "Enabled" (with check mark)
Step 4 Input "IP Address".
Input "Subnet Mask".
Input "Gateway".
Step 5 Input "DNS Configuration".
Step 6 Reconnect the network.
Step 7 Finalize the setting.
24
Setting Wired LAN

1 Display the Built-in page of LAN Mode.
Configure the setting of wired LAN in the Built-in page of LAN Mode selected from On-Screen
Menu. If LAN Mode is not displayed, refer to 5-1. Displaying On-Screen Menu (LAN Mode)
(
page 13).
2 Select Profiles.
Profile 1 or Profile 2 can be stored in the memory of the projector as the setting of LAN.
<1> Press the SELECT button once to highlight the Profiles field and press the
button.
<2> Use the SELECT / button to highlight Profile 1 or Profile 2, and press the
button.
3 Set DHCP.
Follow the same procedure as in 5-2. Wireless LAN (
page 17).
4 Input IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Gateway.

page 17,18).
5 Input DNS Configuration.

page 18).
6 Reconnect the network.
7 Finalize the setting.

<1> Use the button to highlight [OK] and press the
button.
The setting will be stored in the memory of the projector.
25
<1> When all the above items have been input or set, use the SELECT / button to highlight
button.
Reconnect and press the

([Example] Wireless LAN of Windows XP: Ad Hoc connection)
This section explains the procedure for Ad Hoc connection of wireless LAN between the personal
computer and projector, by using the wireless network setting function with Windows XP Service
Pack 2 (SP2).
Preparation:
Install a commercially available wireless LAN card driver to your personal computer, and
complete setup of the wireless LAN card. For how to install the driver, refer to the Users
Manual of the wireless LAN card.
Check the display of the Windows XP taskbar. If a network connection utility dedicated to
a wireless LAN card is executed, terminate that utility.
Make the wireless LAN setting of the projector. For details, refer to 4. Attaching Wireless
LAN Card ( page 11) and 5. Setting the LAN Setting of Projector ( page 13).
Shown below is an example of the wireless LAN settings for the projector.
[Example of settings for projector]
Contents
Settings
IP Address
192.168.100.10
Subnet Mask
255.255.255.0
SSID
NECPJ
Mode
802.11 Ad hoc
WEP
64 bit
Key Select
Key 1
Key 1
NECVT
1 Click Windows [Start] [Control Panel].

The Control Panel window will be displayed.
2 Double-click the Network Connections.

If the Control Panel window displays categories (with a blue background), click [Network and
Internet Connections], and then click [Network Connections].
The Network Connections window will be displayed.
26
3 Right-click the [Wireless Network Connection] icon and click [Property].
Right-click
3-2
Click
A property window for wireless network connections will be displayed.
4 From the list of [This connection uses the following Items:], select (click)
[Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)] and click [Properties].
Setting the LAN Setting of Personal Computer
3-1
6
4-1
Select
4-2
Click
The property window for wireless network connections will be displayed again.
27
5 Click [Use the following IP address:], and input [IP address]and[Subnet mask].
If, for example, the [IP address] and [Subnet mask] of the projector are set as show in Example of
settings for projector on page 26, set the personal computer as shown below.
Example of setting the IP address and subnet mask.
Projector (
page 26)
Personal computer(Screen Below)
IP Address
192.168.100.10
192.168.100.20
Subnet Mask
255.255.255.0
255.255.255.0
5-1
Click
5-2
Input
6 Click [OK].
A property window for wireless network connections will be displayed.
7 Click the [Wireless Networks] tab.

8 Click [Use Windows to configure my wireless network settings], display the
check mark ( ) and click [OK].
7
Click
8-1
Click
8-2
28
Click
9 Right-click the [Wireless Network Connection] icon and click [View Available
Wireless Networks].
Right-click
9-2
Click
The Wireless Network Connection window is displayed.
10 From the list, select SSID of the projector to be connected and click [Connect].
10-1 Click
Setting the LAN Setting of Personal Computer
9-1
10-2 Click
The Wireless Network Connection window is displayed.
29
11 Input WEP key to set up an encryption key and click [Connect].

Input an encrypiton key of WEP. Enter NECVT in the Network key box, for example, if you have
the WEP setting on the projector side configured with 64bit and have NECVT input as Key 1.
The same encryption key should be input in the confirmation.
11-1
Input
11-2
Click
The window above does not appear unless WEP key is not configured on the projector to be connected.
Follow the steps below to change the encryption settings. For details, see the Windows Help file.
(1)Click [Change advanced settings] from the screen in step 10 above.
The Wireless Network Connection Properties window is displayed.
(2)Click the [Wireless Network] tab.
(3)Select SSID of the projector under [Preferred Networks] and click [Properties].
The Properties of the selected SSID is displayed. Configure the wireless network key under the
[Association] tab according to those for the projector.
This Completes the Ad Hoc connection of wireless LAN on the personal computer (Windows XP).
Use each software program in User Supportware 3 to transmit the PC screen to the projector.
30
7. Refer to Users Guide and Help

Each software program in User Supportware 3 contains each help file that explains the functions
and operation methods in detail.
Also, Users Guide (PDF) explains the basic operation procedure of each software program
carefully.
7-1. Displaying Users Guide (PDF)

Important
Refer to Users Guide and Help
User Supportware 3 CD-ROM does not contain Acrobat Reader or Adobe Reader. If no
PDF file can be opened from your personal computer, download Adobe Reader from the
Adobe Systems Incorporated home page, and install it.
1 Turn on your personal computer to start Windows.
2 Insert User Supportware 3 CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive.

7
3 Click [Viewing Users Guide].
[Users Guide] will be displayed.
For the following operations, browse Users Guide according to Acrobat Reader or Adobe Reader
operation method.
31

Reference
If the above menu is not displayed, follow these steps.

1. Click [Start] of Windows.
2. Click [Run...].
3. In the [Open:] field, enter the CD-ROM drive name *1 (e.g., Q:\) followed by
SETUP.EXE (e.g., Q:\SETUP.EXE).
*1
The CD-ROM drive name will vary depending on your personal computers configuration.
4. Click [OK].
32
7-2. Using Help

The functions and operation of each software are described on the Help screen. This section
introduces how to display and use the Help screen.
Note
The following instructions use operations under Windows XP as an example.
Before displaying Help, install each software onto your personal computer from the User
Supportware 3 CD-ROM. You cannot run the programs nor view Help directly from the
CD-ROM.
Refer to Users Guide and Help
Displaying Helps other than Ulead Photo Explorer 8.0

Click in the following order.
Start
All Programs
NEC Projector User Supportware
Desktop Control Utility 1.0 Help
Image Express Utility 2.0 Help
PC Control Utility 3.0 Help
Viewer PPT Converter 3.0 Help
Reference
You can also display the Help by starting each program and clicking the [Help] menu or
[Help] icon of that program.
33
Displaying Ulead Photo Explorer 8.0 Help

To display the Help of Ulead Photo Explorer 8.0, start the software and make your selection
from the [Help] menu.
1 Click [All Programs] in the start menu [Ulead Photo Explorer 8.0 SE Basic]
[Ulead Photo Explore 8.0 SE Basic], in that order.
The Ulead Photo Explorer 8.0 will start.
2 From the Ulead Photo Explorer 8.0 menu bar, select [Help] [Ulead Photo
Explorer Help] or [NEC Projector User Supportware Help].
Help Screen Layout
[Hide] button
Shows/hides the left pane.
[Back] button
Displays the previously displayed topic.
[Forward] button
Displays the previously displayed topic when
using the [Back] button to step back through
the topics.
[Print] button
Prints the displayed Help topic.
[Contents] tab
Displays the contents of Help. Select a topic
to display contents in the right pane.
[Index] tab
Displays a list of keywords for Help. Select a
keyword to display the associated topics.
[Search] tab
Searches through Help for the entered text.
34
Explanation displaying area

Displays content for the topic selected in the left pane.
MEMO
35
MEMO
36
IBM and PC/AT are registered trademarks of International Business Machines

Corporation.
Microsoft, Windows, PowerPoint, MS, MS-DOS, and DirectX are registered
trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. or other countries.
Ulead Systems and Photo Explorer are registered trademarks of Ulead Systems,
Inc.
Adobe, Adobe Acrobat Reader, and Adobe Reader are registered trademarks or
trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the U.S. or other countries.
Other manufacturer names and product names in this document are registered
trademarks or trademarks of the respective companies.
Printed in Japan
First edition October 2005
Reproduction, modification, and other uses are prohibited without the permission of NEC Viewtechnology, Ltd.
LT380/LT280 Wired and Wireless Network Setup Guide
NEC Projector
User Supportware 3
Printed on Recycled Paper

Ulead Photo Explorer 8.0 SE Basic
7N8P6251
TROUBLESHOOTING
1. Operation check
A certain degree of malfunction can be identified by making an operation check carried out in normally operating
conditions.
Prior to the removal of the top cover, the following checks should be carried out:.
Is the POWER indicator lit in orange in the standby state?
NO
The power cord is disconnected.

The vacation switch is turned OFF.
The fuse (F101) of the FILTER PWB has blown out.
The cable (between FILTER ~ POWER/CN2) is disconnected.
The cable (between POWER ~ MAIN PWB/POPW) is disconnected.
The power block is out of order. (No supply of VCCS + 4.2V or + 15.0V).
The fuses (F1001 ~ F1004) of the MAIN PWB have blown out.
Problems in the CPU peripheral circuits of the MAIN PWB.
YES
Is the STATUS indicator flashing in red in the standby state?
YES
[Flashing once every 3 seconds]

Dislodgment of the lamp cover
The LAMP SW PWB is inadequately mounted.
Cable (POCV) are unplugged.
[Flashing twice every 4 seconds]
Internal temperature error. The working condition range is exceeded.
Cable (POTH2) are unplugged.
[Flashing 4 times every 6 seconds]
Fan stoppage due to fan error or intrusion of foreign substance.
Cables (POF1 ~ POF4, PORM) are unplugged.
[Flashing 6 times every 8 seconds]
Failure in lamp lighting. The cable (POLC) is disconnected.
NO
Is the LAMP indicator lit in red in the standby state?
YES
Lamps life or the replacement extension time has been exceeded. The
system cannot be started in this state.
Replace the lamp.
NO
Is the LAMP indicator flashing in red in the standby or power-ON state?
YES
[Flashing once per second]

Lamps life has expired. During the replacement extension time (100H)
and the expiration of lamps life.
Replace the lamp.
NO
Is the POWER indicator lit in green in the power-ON state?
YES
The MAIN PWB and I/O PWB is out of order.

The cable is disconnected.
The LCD panel is out of order.
NO
Circuits are out of order around the cabinet switch, remote control, light receiving block of the remote
control, and the CPU.
Programs or data are destroyed.
Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.
4-1
TROUBLESHOOTING
2. Power block
The trouble in the power-related circuits can cause malfunction such as the failure in picture presentation,
lamp lighting, fan revolution, etc. When a trouble occurs, examine if this trouble is arising from the power block
and then check it.
Confirm that the voltages specified below are output to the POPW and POLC connectors of the MAIN PWB.
POPW
PIN No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Signal name
4.2V
4.2V
4.2V
GND
GND
GND
6.2V
GND
15.0V
15.0V
GND
GND
17.5V
GND
PFC
Stand-by mode
+4.2V
+4.2V
+4.2V
GND
GND
GND
+7.5V
GND
+16.4V
+16.4V
GND
GND
+18.9V
GND
0V
Power-ON mode
Related circuits
+4.2V
CPU, video processor system, LC driver system
+4.2V
+4.2V
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
Video processor system,USB,PC-CARD, AUDIO
+7.3V
GND
GND
+15.7V
Fan driver, CPU, video processor system
+15.7V
Fan driver, CPU, video processor system
GND
GND
GND
GND
+17.9V
LC driver system
GND
GND
+6.1V/0V
Power supply control
Signal name
RXD/FLAG
GND
+3.3V
SCI
TXD
Stand-by mode
0V
GND
+3.3V
+3.3V
0V
Power-ON mode
GND
+3.3V
1.7V
POLC
PIN No.
1
2
3
4
5
REMARK
UART communication
GND
Lamp lighting control

UART communication
4-2
TROUBLESHOOTING
If there is no voltage output at POPW/POLC, check the power block in the procedures specified below.
Is an AC input available at CN2 of the power supply (POWER PWB)?
NO
SW1 (vacation switch) is OFF, F101 (fuse) blows out, or the AC input
terminal or the CN2 connector has poor connections.
YES
Is F101 (fuse) broken in the power supply (FILTER PWB)?
YES
Replace the fuse.
NO
Is a DC output of about 365V available at CN101 (connected to the Ballast PWB) of the power supply
(POWER PWB)?
NO
The power supply (POWER PWB) is faulty or connections of the CN101

connector are inadequate.
YES
The Ballast PWB is faulty or any circuit other than the Ballast PWB is faulty (lamp broken).
4-3
TROUBLESHOOTING
3. Video input, Sync, and ADC block

3-1. No presentation of video images
1Are digital signals available at Pins 47/46/44/43/41/40/38/37/36/35/33/32/30/29/27/26 of IC2502?

Are digital signals available at Pins 47/46/44/43/41/40/38/37/35/32/30 of IC2505?
YES
Write in the data again.
NO
2 Is the input signal for S-VIDEO?

YES
Go to
NO
5.
3 Is a video signal available at Pin 5 AD (C2534) of IC2507?

YES
Check IC2507 or the peripheral circuits. Write in the data again.
NO
4 Is a video signal available at C2509?

NO
Investigate the peripheral circuits of the input terminals in the I/O block.
Check signals for outer video output equipment.
YES
Investigate IC2503 or the peripheral circuits.
5 Is there Signal Y at Pin 5 AD (C2534) or Signal C at Pin 9 AE (C2541) of IC2507?

YES
NO
6 Is there Signal Y at C2510 or Signal C at C1090?

NO
Investigate the peripheral circuits of the input terminals in the I/O block.
YES
Investigate IC2503 or the peripheral circuits.
4-4
TROUBLESHOOTING
3-2. No presentation of COMPUTER/Component (HDTV) images (for Video)
1 Are there digital signals available at FR2001 ~ FR2012?

YES
NO
2 Is the input signal a Component (HDTV) signal?

YES
Go to 6.
NO
3 Are there signals available at C2023/C2024 (Ch G), C2021 (Ch B), C2078 (Ch R)?
YES
NO
4 Are signals available at C2025/C2026 (Gch), C2072 (Bch), and C2022 (Rch)?
YES
NO
5 Is MONITOR OUT allowed to generate output?

NO
Investigate the input terminal / IC9003 or the peripheral circuits.

Checksignals for outer video output equipment.
YES
Investigate the series resistance between IC9003 (I/O) and IC2003 (MAIN).
Check connections around the POIB connector.
6 Is the signal available at Pin 26 of IC2003?

NO
Go to 5.
YES
4-5
TROUBLESHOOTING
3-3. Computer (Sync system)
1Is there a horizontal sync signal available at Pin 33/34 of IC2003?

YES
NO
2Is the input signal of Sync on Green or of Composite Sync?

To 3-2.-6 in the case of the SOG signal.
YES
In the case of the Composite Sync signal, check the horizontal sync block
only of 3and thereafter.
NO
3Is there the horizontal sync signal at Pin 8 (I/O), and also the vertical sync signal at Pin 6 of IC9002?
YES
Check IC2005 or the peripheral circuits. Investigate Q2018/ Q2020 or their

peripheral circuits.
NO
4Are there the horizontal sync signals at Pin 12 (Computer 2) and Pin 9 (Computer 1), and also the verti
cal sync signals at Pin 5 (Computer 2) and Pin 2 (Computer 1) of IC9002?
YES
Investigate IC9002 or its peripheral circuits.
NO
Examine the parts between input terminal and input terminal - IC9002.
4-6
TROUBLESHOOTING
3-4. No generation of RGB-OUT
1Are signals available at Pin 1 (Ch R), Pin 3 (Ch G), and Pin 5 (Ch B) of IC9003?
YES
Investigate the circuits between IC9003 and M9002. Check the matters
of 3-3.
and thereafter.
NO
2Are signals available at Pin 1 (Ch R), Pin 3 (Ch G), and Pin 5 (Ch B) of IC9004?
YES
NO
Investigate the IC9003 or their peripheral circuits.

4-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
3-5. No generation of sound
1When the speakers are connected, is the resistance value maintained around 11 of POSR and between
Pins 1 and 2 of POSP? (Only for this check, the power supply should be turned off.)
NO
Cotton-covered speaker wires are broken. Cable disconnection or poor

contact around connectors.
YES
2Are audio signals available at Pin 4 of IC9502?

YES
NO
3Is there an audio signal at the audio input terminal of IC9501?

VIDEO:
2/31pin
COMPUTER: 1/32pin
NO
Investigate each input terminal and its peripheral circuits.

Check outer audio output equipment.
YES
4-8
TROUBLESHOOTING
4. LCD Driver Block

Are the signal outputs specified below generated from IC6101 (Ch R), IC6102 (Ch G), and IC6103 (Ch B)?
Pin No.
15, 16, 17, 20, 21, 22
13
NO
Video signals (10Vp-p)Pin Nos.

Panel to electrode potential (LCCOM):DC
voltage (Approx. 6V)
Fault in IC6101, IC6102, and/or IC6103.

Fault in IC3001/IC6001 or their peripheral circuits.
Data destroyed.
YES
Are the signal inputs specified below applied to IC6501 and IC6502 ?
Pin No.
9, 10 (IC6501)
Driving direction changeover for Driver Y (DIRY)
27 (IC6501)
Driving direction changeover for Driver X (DIRX)
32, 33, 34, 35 (IC6501) Enable pulses (ENB1, ENB2, ENB3, ENB4)
26, 27, 28, 29, 32, 33, 34, 35 (IC6502)
Enable pulses (ENB1, ENB2, ENB3, ENB4)
29 (IC6501), 10 (IC6502) Start pulse for Shift Register X (DX)
5, 6, 7, 8 (IC6502)
Transfer clock for Shift Register X (CLX, CLX-)
5, 6 (IC6501)
Transfer clock for Shift Register X (CLX, CLX-)
26 (IC6501)
Pre-charge pulse (NRG)
7, 8 (IC6501)
Transfer clock for Shift Register Y (CLY, CLY-)
28 (IC6501)
Start pulse for Shift Register Y (DY)
NO
Data destruction
Fault in IC6501 and/or IC6502 or their peripheral circuits.
Fault in IC3001/IC6003 or their peripheral circuits.
YES
The LC panel is faulty or cables (POPR/ POPG/ POPB) are disconnected. Connector mounting conditions
(POPR/ POPG/ POPB) are inadequate.
4-9
TROUBLESHOOTING
Service Information (Error log)

Display system: The Error log screen can be displayed by keeping the MENU key pressed for more than 5
seconds.
The Error log display is presented for a maximum of five events in the past.
Detailed contents of the error log screen display

Reset All Data
Status
PJ Usage
Temp
Other
Lamp/Filter/Clear Count
Power On/Off Count
Lamp Voltaage
Factory reset
The contents of an error are displayed with an error symbol (Error symbols
in the table below).
The equipment usage time is displayed upon the occurrence of an error.
Temperature inside the set (suction/ exhaust air) at the time of an error.
Ballast error information
Number of reset actions (65635 max.) of the filter counter and lamp
Number of Power ON / Power OFF times (65535 max.)
Counted during the execution of Clear Lamp Hours for Reset
Ballast voltage
Error symbols
Error symbol
E1-1
E2-1
E2-2
E4-1
E6-1
Contents of errors
Lamp cover error
Bimetal temperature error
Thermistor temperature error
Fan error
Lamp unlight error
WARNING lamp indications

Blinking once in red
Blinking twice in red
Blinking twice in red
Blinking 4 times in red
Blinking 6 times in red
4-10
Cautions for adjustments

After the replacement of the part(s), the items of necessary adjustments are as specified in the table below.
Adjustments needed after the replacement of the part(s):
: Adjustments needed
: Need checking
Method of
adjustment
Disassembly/ replacement of parts

FIELD LENS
SASSY
Polarizing plate
RELAY
WV MAIN
LENS 2 MIRROR 1
FILM SASSY
R
G
B
SASSY
OPT BASE
SASSY
Description
page in
Service Manual
Optical axis adjustment (shadow control)
FL adjustment
Optical adjustments
Vertical direction
Horizontal direction
P5-31
P5-31
RL2 adjustment
Vertical direction
P5-31
Horizontal direction
P5-31
M1 adjustment
P5-32
Polarizing plate adjustment

Polarizing plate R
P5-36
Polarizing plate G
P5-36
P5-36
P5-36
Polarizing plate RB
WV film
Data copy
ADJ Data
P5-14
VT Data
P5-14
P5-14
P5-14
P5-14
Uniformity Data
Color Correction Data
Usage Time Data
Electrical adjustments
Sub-Brightness/Sub-Contrast adjustment
RGB
Automatic adjustment
Manual adjustment
P5-15~P5-16
P5-15~P5-16
Component
Manual adjustment
P5-15~P5-16
P5-15~P5-16
Video
Manual adjustment
Horizontal adjustment
P5-15~P5-16
P5-15~P5-16
P5-8
Flicker adjustment
Floor
P5-17~P5-18
Ceiling
P5-17~P5-18
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS
- Table of Contents 1. Outline software descriptions

2. Equipment and operating environment
3. Auto-Adjust Software Installation Procedures for Input Level (Sub-Brightness / Sub-Contrast)
4. Repair and adjustment procedures
4-1. Starting and ending methods for adjustments
4-2. Replacement of the MAIN PWB
4-3. Replacement of the LCD panel (Replacement of the OPT BASE ASSY)
4-4. Miscellaneous
5. Various functional descriptions

5-1. Main
5-2. Setup
5-3. Data
5-4. Input Level
5-5. Flicker
5-6. Usage Time
5-7. Test Pattern
5-8. Auto-adjust position change
6. Error messages
5-1
1. Outline software descriptions

This is the PC control software for servicing adjustments to be conducted during the replacement of the
MAIN PWB, OPT BASE SASSY or the (LCD panel) for the LCD projector, the LT80 Series.
This software makes it possible to perform the following adjustments:
Adjustment of Input Level (Sub-Brightness and Sub-Contrast) (Auto or Manual)
Adjustment of Flicker
Modification of usage time for the Usage Time (Lamp, Filter, Panel, and Projector)
READ/WRITE of various PJ DATA
[ADJ Data (Input Level (Sub-Brightness/Sub-Contrast), Flicker), V-T data, Uniformity Data, Color
Correction Data, various usage time DATA (Lamp, Filter, Panel, Projector), All DATA (All factory ADJ
data)]
* In order to accomplish the automatic adjustment of Input Level (Sub-Brightness/Sub-Contrast), it is
necessary to install an appropriate auto-adjust software.
(Refer to 3. Installation Procedures for Input Level (Sub-Brightness/Sub-Contrast) Auto-Adjust Software.)
5-2
2. Equipment to be used and environment

<Equipment to be used>
Software for servicing adjustments (Ser_LT80 Series_ver**.exe ) **: Version Notation
Caution 1: It is necessary to install an auto-adjust software for the Input Level (Sub-Brightness / Sub-Contrast).
Caution 2: Copy "NecPjCommCt.dll" and "NecPjCtllf.dll" located beneath "Dll" of the distributed CD-ROM,
and move them to the system directory of Drive C.
Personal computer (WindowsXP/2000/98/ME/95 in operation and either of the serial ports COM1-COM5 is
D-SUB 9-pin)
GB signal generator (Auto Adj.: Signals shall have the same resolution as that of the panel. They shall be
capable of generating a black window output in the all-white screen.)
* In addition to the method of using an RGB signal generator, adjustments are also possible with an
analog RGB output.
VIDEO signal generator [NTSC split color bar (in 7 colors) is enabled to be output.]
Component signal generator [15kHz Component video 60Hz split color bar (in 7 colors) is enabled to be
output.]
Serial cable (D-SUB 9-pinD-SUB 9pin)
<Method of connection>
Make a connection between the PC CONTROL terminal (D-SUB 9-pin) of the PJ and either of the serial
ports COM1 COM5 (D-SUB 9-pin) of the personal computer through a serial cable.
For the adjustment of RGB Input Level (Sub-Brightness / Sub-Contrast), connect an RGB signal generator
to be used as an adjusting signal source or an analog RGB output circuit of the personal computer to the
COMPUTER IN terminal of the PJ.
For the adjustment of Component input level (Sub-Brightness / Sub-Contrast), connect a Component signal generator that is to be used as an adjusting signal source to the COMPUTER IN terminal of the PJ.
For the adjustment of Video input level (Sub-Brightness / Sub-Contrast), connect a Video signal generator
to be used as an adjusting signal source to the Video IN terminal.
<Personal computer setting for adjusting pattern screen outputs>
PC resolution, frequency, and No. of colors
Make setting at VESA XGA (1024 x 768) 70Hz, High color (16 bits) or more.
An adjustment pattern screen indication method
The adjusting pattern output can be sent to the personal computer only if Test is used in the Input Level
Adjust screen.
All other adjusting patterns to be used are the built-in test patterns.
5-3
3. Auto-adjust software installation procedures for Input Level (Sub-Brightness and Sub-Contrast)
The installation procedures for the Auto Adjust software of Input Level (Sub-Brightness / Sub-Contrast) are
specified below.
1 Establish a folder of C: NEC_PJ_ADJSYSTEMInputAdjustment in the C drive.

2 The data files specified below are contained in the respective folders that are located beneath the service install input adj. data file of the distributed CD-ROM. Put these files in the folder established as per
1 above.
Inputadj Data File
InputAdjustment.exe
LT80_IA_V1.dat
StartSetting.ini
Window1.exe
LT80_Default.ini
Installation is over at this stage.
5-4
4. Repair and adjustments procedure

4-1. Starting and ending methods for adjustments
Method of adjustment starting
Method of adjustment ending
<Method of adjustment starting>
Make a copy of the service adj. software (Ser_LT80Series_ver**.exe) in any folder and assume a condition that
the PJ and the PC are connected through a serial cable, according to 2. Equipment to be used and the environment - <Connections>. In this state, start the service adj. software.
Click [SetUp] to open the SetUp screen and select the COM port that is connected to the PC. When finished,
return to the previous status by means of [Return].
Click [Adjust Start] to make model discrimination and initial data read.
* When correct model discrimination is finished, various adjusting buttons become available.
<Method of adjustment ending>
When the adjustments of 4-2 to 4-4 are finished, click [Adjust End].
* When adjustments of another set are further intended, operation should be started with [Adjust Start].
* If you try to adjust another set without making [Adjust End], there will be an error as a result of model discrimination.
4-2. Replacement of the MAIN PWB

All Data copying
Input Level (Sub-Brightness / Sub-Contrast) adjustment (* Only if it is required)
are carried out.
<All Data copying>
While the PJ power supply is in the STAND BY state, click [Data] of the servicing software to open the Data
screen.
According to (1) and (2) described below, take actions of All Data read / Write.
(1) All Data read
Before replacement, read the data of the MAIN PWB presently used and save the data in a file. (According
to the status of a fault, it may be impossible to save the data.)
Give a check mark to [All Data], click the [Read] button, designate the file name, and save the data.
(2) All Data write
After the replacement of the MAIN PWB, click the [Write] button and select the saved file to write the data.
* If there is discrepancy between the read data and the file, a confirmation message will be presented. If
there is no discrepancy, then indicate [OK] to write the data.
After the completion of data writing, turn off the PJs main power switch. After confirming that the Power
LED is unlit, turn on the main power switch again.
* All data mentioned here denote the various factory adjustment data [Input level, color correction, Color
Wheel, Fan], usage time ].
* When data writing is carried out, characters of [Data] in the main screen become bold.
5-5
<Adjustment of Input Level (Sub-Brightness / Sub-Contrast)>
* After the completion of <All Data Copy>, this adjustment is not required if there is no white highlight or
coloring with each input signal in gray scale.
* For automatic adjustment, it is necessary to install an appropriative software.
[To install the appropriative software, refer to 3. Auto-adjust software installation procedures for the Input
Level (Sub-Brightness / Sub-Contrast).]
Click [Input Level] of the servicing software and open the Input Level Adjust screen.
According to the descriptions of (1), (2), and (3) below, make adjustments of RGB / Video / Component (DVD/
HDTV).
(1) Adjustment of RGB Input Level (sub-brightness and sub-contrast)
Select [RGB] in the Adjust Signal Box.
Make adjustments by anyone of the following (a) and (b):
(a) Automatic adjustment (Auto Adjust)
Use an RGB signal generator to enter an input of Window (black in the center) as an adjusting signal
(VESA XGA 60Hz). Otherwise, enter an input of RGB output signal from the personal computer in the
input terminal of COMPUTER IN. When the RGB signal generator is used, give a check mark to [SG].
When the RGB output of the personal computer is used, give a check mark to [PC Out]. (When a PC
output is used, the window screen is automatically changed during the automatic adjustment.)
When the [Auto] button is clicked in the AUTO ADJ Box, adjustments are automatically started.
After the completion of automatic adjustment, use a gray scale and confirm that there is no high-light
chroma, or coloring.
(b) Manual adjustment (Manual Adjust)
As an adjusting signal, use an RGB signal generator to enter an input of gray scale in the input terminal
of COMPUTER IN. Otherwise, enter an input of RGB output signal from the personal computer in the
input terminal of COMPUTER IN. Then, display the gray scale by means of the [Scale] button in the Test
(PC Out) Box.
To avoid high-light chroma, or coloring in the gray scale, adjust the sub-contrast with the scroll bar.
After the completion of adjustments, click the [Set] button in the Data Box.
(2) Adjustment of Video Input Level (Sub-Brightness and Sub-Contrast)
Select [Video] in the Auto ADJ Box.
Make adjustments by any one of the following (a) and (b):
(a) Automatic adjustment
As an adjusting signal, enter a split color bar (7 colors) by the use of a Video signal generator.
When the [Auto] button is clicked in the Auto ADJ Box, adjustments are automatically started.
After the completion of automatic adjustments, generate a gray scale output by the use of a Video signal
generator and confirm that there is no high-light chroma.
Caution: If the adjusting signal pattern is improper, normal adjustments cannot be achieved.
If the RGB input signal is not connected to RGB input terminal, normal adjustments cannot be
achieved.
(b) Manual adjustment
As an adjusting signal, use a Video signal generator to enter an input of gray scale in the input terminal
of VIDEO IN.
Adjust Sub-Contrast G (Y) with a scroll bar so that the gray scale can be free from white highlight.
5-6
(3) Adjustment of Component (DVD) Input Level (Sub-Brightness and Sub-Contrast)
Select [Comp (DVD)] in the Adjust Signal Box.
s an adjusting signal, use a Component (DVD) signal generator to enter an input of 480i split color bar (7
colors) in the input terminal of CPMPUTER IN.
When the [Auto] button is clicked in the Auto Adjust Box, adjustments are started automatically.
After the completion of automatic adjustments, generate a gray scale output to confirm the freedom from
white highlight and coloring.
As an adjusting signal, use a Component (DVD) signal generator to enter an input of 480i gray scale and
split color bar in the input terminal of CPMPUTER IN. Adjust the hue with the split color bar to eliminate
white highlight and coloring. To eliminate any problem from the color thickness, adjust Sub-Contrast with
a scroll bar.
After the completion of adjustments, click the [Set] in the Data Box.
(4) Adjustment of Component (HDTV) Input Level (Sub-Brightness and Sub-Contrast)
Select [Comp (HDTV)] in the Adjust Signal Box.
As an adjusting signal, use a Component (DVD) signal generator to enter an input of 480i split color bar
(7 colors) in the input terminal of CPMPUTER IN.
When the [Auto] button is clicked in the Auto Adjust Box, adjustments are started automatically.
After the completion of automatic adjustments, generate a gray scale output to confirm the freedom from
white highlight and coloring.
As an adjusting signal, use a Component (DVD) signal generator to enter an input of 720p/1080i gray
scale and split color bar in the input terminal of CPMPUTER IN. Adjust the hue with the split color bar to
eliminate white highlight and coloring. To eliminate any problem from the color thickness, adjust SubContrast with a scroll bar.
After the completion of adjustments, click the [Set] in the Data Box.
* Since automatic adjustments are carried out according to the predetermined position in the screen, such
adjustments are impossible if the pattern, resolution, etc., are improper.
* When adjustments are over for RGB, Video, and Component (DVD)/(HDTV), respectively (in the case of
[SET]), the characters in the ADJ Signal Box are turned red.
* If it is necessary to recover the previous data after the completion of adjustments, click the [RESET]
button. Then the initial data are recovered and the characters are turned black again.
* After the completion of all adjustments for RGB, Video, and Component (DVD)/(HDTV), the characters of
[Input Level] are turned bold in the main screen.
5-7
<Horizontal adjustment>
This adjustment should be carried out only for the model that is provided with an auto keystone function.
Prior to this adjustment, the following items should be checked:
The horizontal accuracy for the adjusting set installation stand is kept within 0.25 degrees.
The ambient temperature around the adjusting set installation stand is kept stable within the range of 22 ~
28C.
The tilt foot of the PJ is set at the minimum.
1
2
(1) Adjustments
Let the PJ power supply stay in the Power ON state and maintain five minutes of ageing.
Move to the Service Mode.
<Method of moving to the Service Mode>
Use a remote control.
Press the keys in the order of [HELP] [ENTER] [HELP] [ENTER] [HELP] > [ENTER]
[MENU].
([MENU] should be kept pressed for more than 3 seconds in the state that the menu screen is displayed.)
When [Enter Passcode] is displayed, enter key inputs of [UP] [RIGHT] [LEFT] [RIGHT]
[RIGHT] [RIGHT] [UP] [UP] and press the [ENTER] key.
When [Service] is indicated on the MENU bar, movement to the Service Mode has been duly finished.
3 Select Service / Check Start and click the [Enter] key.

* A sandglass is displayed for confirmation that the Change Offset data are updated.
4 Select Service / Change Offset and click the [Enter] key.
* Confirm that the Offset data are updated and the Change Offset data are turned to 0.
5-8
4-3. Replacement of the LCD Panel (Replacement of the OPT BASE SASSY)
Opt Data Write
Adjustment of Flicker
are carried out.
<Opt Data Write>
While the PJ power supply is made to stay in the standby mode, click [Data] in the service adj.software to
open the [Data] screen.
Click the [Write] button and select the data file that is attached to the replaced Opt unit. Write the existing
data in this file.
* The check message is indicated. If there is no mistake, [OK] is displayed. Write data with [OK] indication.
* The Opt data mentioned here denote Flicker, VT, Color Correction, Uniformity, and Wall Correction.
* When data [Write] is accomplished, the characters of [Data] become bold in the MAIN screen.
* After Opt data writing, the set will assume the standby mode. Try to turn on the power supply and make
flicker adjustments.
<Adjustment of Flicker>
Click [Flicker] of the service adj. software and open the Flicker Adjust screen.
Following the steps of (1) and (2) below, make respective adjustments for Floor and Ceiling.
(1) Adjustment of Floor
Check [Floor].
Adjustment of Flicker-RED
Click the [TEST-R] button in the Test Pattern Box in order to display the internal horizontal line signal.
Make adjustments with the scroll bar until Flicker in the center comes to minimum.
Adjustment of Flicker-GREEN
Click the [TEST-G] button in the Test Pattern Box in order to display the internal horizontal line signal.
Adjustment of Flicker-BLUE
Click the [TEST-B] button in the Test Pattern Box in order to display the internal horizontal line signal.
Data Write
5-9
(2) Adjustment of Ceiling
Check [Ceiling].
Adjustment of Flicker-RED
Click the [TEST-R] button in the Test Pattern Box in order to display the internal horizontal line signal.
Adjustment of Flicker-GREEN
Click the [TEST-G] button in the Test Pattern Box in order to display the internal horizontal line signal.
Adjustment of Flicker-BLUE
Click the [TEST-B] button in the Test Pattern Box in order to display the internal horizontal line signal.
Data Write
* To cancel the Test Pattern, click the [Clear] button.
* When adjustments are finished for Floor and Ceiling (in the case of [SET]) respectively, the characters
of Floor and Ceiling become red.
* If the former data have to be recovered after the completion of adjustments, click the [RESET] button.
Then, the initial data are recovered and the characters are turned black.
* Upon the completion of all adjustments for Floor and Ceiling, the characters of [Flicker] become bold in
the MAIN screen.
5-10
4-4. Miscellaneous
Usage time setup (*)
Adjustment of Input Level (Sub-Brightness/Sub-Contrast (*)
Adjustment of Flicker (*)
* In the case of 4-2. ~ 4-3., it is unnecessary to make these adjustments.
If it is impossible to accomplish <All Data copy> for Main PWB replacement, for example, the Adjust
Values of Input Level (Sub-Brightness / Sub-Contrast), Flicker must have been the default values and
each usage time is 0 hours. Therefore, as required, adjustments of Input Level (Sub-Brightness / SubContrast), Flicker plus usage time setup should be carried out.
Refer to [4-2. MAIN PWB Replacement] for Input Level (Sub-Brightness / Sub-Contrast) adjustment.
Refer to [4-3. LCD Panel Replacement (Replacement of the OPT BASE SASSY)] for Flicker adjustment.
<Usage Time Setup>
* This setting may be carried out only if the present usage time of Lamp, Projector is different from actual usage
time.
Do not use this function if the correct usage time is unknown.
*
*
*
While the PJ power supply is in the STAND BY state, click [Usage Time] of the servicing software to open the
Usage Time Setting screen.
Select the type of changing usage time from [Change Usage Time].
Set up time with a scroll bar and click the [SET] button in the Data Box.
After data writing, turn off the PJs main power switch and confirm that the Power LED is unlit. Turn on the
main power switch again.
When the usage time is changed, the time after modification is displayed at the lower editor.
If it is necessary to recover the previous time after the modification, click the [RESET] button to recover the
initial data.
When the usage time is changed, the characters of [Usage Time] are turned bold in the main screen.
5-11
5. Various functional descriptions

5-1. Main
<Setup>
This function is used to select the Com Port of the personal computer and also the Baud Rate.
<Adjust Start>
This function is used to start up adjustments.
Initial data and Model / Serial No. of the PJ presently in communication are acquired.
When correct model discrimination is finished, various adjusting buttons become available.
<Adjust>
This function is used to adjust [Data], [Input level], [Flicker], [Fan], and [Usage Time Setting].
When the relevant button is clicked, the corresponding adjusting screen is displayed.
The characters of the finished adjustment item are turned bold.
<Adjust End>
This function is used when all adjustments have been finished.
Data acquired for [Adjust Start] are cleared so that adjustments of another set are enabled.
* These functions should be used with the PC and the PJ left connected.
* If you try to adjust another set without making [Adjust End], there will be an error as a result of model
discrimination.
<Test Pattern>
This function is used for the control of [Power], [Input Select], and [Test Pattern].
<Close>
This function is used to close the program.
After the execution of [Adjust Start], [Close] cannot be executed unless [Adjust End] is executed.
5-12
5-2. Setup
This function is used to select the Com Port of the personal computer and also the Baud Rate.
Communication will be disabled unless setup is made correctly.
The default setup value is 1 for [Port] and 38400 for [Baud Rate].
[Baud Rate] is 38400bps for the default setup value on the PJ side.
5-13
5-3. Data
This function is used for Read/Write of various factory adjusting data, usage time data.
* Operation for data Read/Write should be carried out in the state that the power supply is turned off (Standby).
<Data Read>
Select the Read (Save) data from the check box and click the [Read] button.
When the [Read] button is clicked, the Save Dialog will be opened. Designate the File name.
When the selected data are read out of the PJ, the data are then saved with the designated file name.
The saved file name is displayed beneath the [Read] button.
Actually, this function is used at the time of MAIN PWB replacement. At that time, all the data before replacement (Various factory adjusting data, Usage Time) are read out and written in the new MAIN PWB.
Select [All Data] in the state that the MAIN PWB before replacement is kept mounted, and then click the
[Read] button.
<Data Write>
When the [Write] button is clicked, the Open Dialog will be opened. Select the file name of the writing data.
If the selected file contains any data that are different from the read data, or if data writing is immediately
attempted without data reading, a confirmation message will be presented. If there is no problem, indicate
[OK] to write the data.
The written file name is displayed beneath the [Write] button.
Actually, this function is used at the time of MAIN PWB replacement. At that time, all the data before replacement (Various factory adjusting data, Usage Time) are written in the new MAIN PWB. Otherwise, when an
Opt unit is replaced, this function is used to write the attached Opt data (Various factory adjusting data
dependent on the OPT BASE ASSY).
When the MAIN PWB is replaced, click the [Write] button and select all the data before replacement. When
the OPT BASE ASSY is replaced, select the attached Opt data.
After the completion of All Data Write and Usage Time Data Write, unplug the AC cord of the PJ and confirm
that the Power LED is unit.
* All data mentioned here denote the various factory adjustment data [Input level, Color Correction, Color
Wheel, Auto Focus), Usage Time.
Caution 1: According to the state of a fault, Data Save may be disabled.
The Default Data are written in the MAIN PWB in advance.
5-14
5-4. Input Level
This function is used for the adjustment of Input Level.

<Test (PC Out)>
Window : The Window pattern is displayed on the PC screen.
Scale : The Scale pattern is displayed on the PC screen.
<DATA>
SET
: The data after adjustment are stored in the PJ.
RESET : The original setting is recovered.
<Adjust Signal>
This function is used for input changeover of the selected signal to acquire the data.
Select the signal being adjusted.
<Manual Adjust>
This function is used for the manual adjustment of Sub-Contrast.
The data come in the four types of RGB, Video, and Component (DVD/HDTV), available for each signal.
The data of the signal selected by the Adjust Signal function are acquired and displayed beside the scroll bar
in the screen, in the form of R(Cr), G(Y), and B(Cb), respectively.
The initially acquired data (at the time of Adjust Start) are stored as the initial value and indicated on the left
side of the arrow. The present value is indicated on the right side of the arrow.
However, if All Data writing or Input Level Data Writing is conducted with [Data], the written data are used as
the initial value.
Display [Scale] (gray scale) and make adjustments with a scroll bar so that there are no high light chroma,
and coloring.
When the [SET] button is clicked after the completion of adjustment, the adjusting data are stored in the PJ.
Adjustment range : 0 255 (15 : DVD)
5-15
<Auto Adjust>
This function is used for the automatic adjustment of Sub-Contrast.
Select the adjusting signal from RGB, Video, and Component (DVD/HDTV).
When the [Auto] button is clicked, automatic adjustment is conducted for the selected signal. (The installed
Auto-Adjust software is started and adjustments are carried out automatically.)
If a signal generator is used for the automatic adjustment of RGB, give a check mark to [SG]. If a PC signal
is used, give a check mark to [PC Out]. If automatic adjustment of Component (DVD/HDTV) and Video is
intended, the signals should be arranged for the split color bar (7 colors).
<Position Change>
This function is used when the level read-out position is modified with the [Auto] button at the time of
automatic adjustment.
For adjusting software starting, setting has already been made according to the specified pattern. As such,
no particular modification is needed usually.
If needed, this modification must be carried out carefully, according to 5-9 herein, Auto-Adjust position
change.
* In the case of automatic adjustment or when data are written with the [SET] button in the Data Box, the
characters of RGB / Video / Comp (DVD)/Comp (HDTV) selection are turned red as a marking to indicate
the completion of adjustment. When the data have been reset with the [RESET] button in the Data Box,
these characters are turned black again.
Note 1: The data adjusted with a scroll bar are temporary. Without any measures taken, the data are not
retained in the PJ. Execute [SET] and write the data in the Flash ROM.
Note 2: Automatic adjustment is carried out based on the fixed position that has been defined in the screen.
Therefore, adjustments cannot be conducted unless the predetermined requirements are met,
such as patterns, resolution, etc.
Note 3: Signals of personal computers cannot be used in any case other than the adjustment of RGB
signals. As such, provisions are made not to influence [PC Out] as a result of checking.
Note 4: The window signals (used for PC-Out adjustments) of the test patterns are somewhat different
from conventional ones because of position setting for the automatic adjustment.
Note 5: Auto-adjustment of video signals is impossible unless the RGB signal input is available at the RGB
input terminal.
Note 6: For the adjustment of Component (HDTV), and HDTV (108i) signal input should be entered in the
RGB input terminal in the case of manual adjustments, and a DVD (480i) signal input should be
entered for automatic adjustments.
5-16
5-5. Flicker
This function is used for Flicker adjustments.

<Floor/Ceiling>
Used for changeover between Floor and Ceiling and for the acquisition of the resultant data.
Select the method of projection to be adjusted.
<Test Pattern>
EST R : Used to display a test pattern that is used for the adjustment of flickering in red.
TEST G : Used to display a test pattern that is used for the adjustment of flickering in green.
TEST B : Used to display a test pattern that is used for the adjustment of flickering in blue.
* When a check mark is given to [Floor], a test pattern output for Floor is generated. When a check mark is
given to [Ceiling], a test pattern output for Ceiling is generated.
<Data>
SET
: Data after adjustments are stored in the PJ.
RESET : The setup conditions before adjustments are recovered.
<Flicker Adjustment>
The data acquired in the first place (at the time of Adjust Start) are stored as the initial values and displayed
on the left side of the arrow mark. The present values are played on the right side of the arrow mark.
However, if All Data Write, Opt Data Write, or Flicker Data Write is carried out for [Data], the written data are
regarded as the initial values.
Select the method of projection (Floor / Ceiling) to be adjusted, display the relevant test pattern, and make
R/G/B adjustments with the scroll bar so that minimal flickering is secured.
When the [SET] button is clicked after the completion of adjustments, the adjusting data are stored in the PJ.
Scope of adjustment: 0 127
5-17
* When data writing is accomplished with the [SET] button in the Data Box, the characters of Floor / Ceiling
selection are turned red as a sign for the end of adjustments. When the data are reset with the [RESET]
button in the Data Box, these characters are turned black again.
Note 1: The data adjusted with the scroll bar are tentative. They are not kept in the PJ unless any special
action is taken.
Execute [SET] and write the data in the Flash ROM.
5-18
5-6. Usage Time
This function is used for the modification of various usage time.

* Modification of the usage time should be carried out in the state that the power supply is turned off (Standby).
* Do not use this function if the actual usage time is unknown.
<Change usage time>
Select an item of modification.
The initially acquired data (at the time of Adjust Start) are stored as the initial value.
However, if All Data Write or Usage Time Data Write is carried out for [Data], the written data are regarded
as the initial values.
Set up the changing Usage Time with a scroll bar.
For Lamp Usage Time, set up both usage time and remaining time (%).
After the completion of setup, click the [SET] button to store the adjusting data in the PJ.
Unplug the AC cord and confirm that the Power LED is unlit.
Setup range:
Lamp
Projector
: 0 hr 3000 hrs
0% 100%
: 0 hr 100000 hrs
<Data>
SET
: The setup usage time is stored in the PJ.
RESET : The original setting before modification is recovered.
* After the completion of [SET] and [RESET], unplug the AC cord of the PJ and confirm that the Power LED
is unlit.
* For each item for which the usage time has been modified, this time figure is displayed in the column of
Usage Time indication.
5-19
Note 1: When Read / Write of All Data is carried out with [Data] at the time of MAIN PWB replacement,
correct usage time is also written in regard to the Lamp, Flicker, Panel and Projector. Therefore, no
modification is needed.
Note 2 : During the replacement of parts with new ones, 0 Clear (calibration to 0) should be carried out by
the normal method.
Note 3 : The setup data acquired with a scroll bar are temporary. Without any measures taken, these data
are not retained in the PJ. Execute [SET] in the Standby state and write the data in the EEPROM.
Since then, unplug the AC cord.
5-20
5-7. Test pattern
This function is used for PJ control.

<Power>
Used for PJ Power ON/OFF.
<Input Select>
Used for PJ input changeover.
<Test Pattern>
Various test patterns are output.
5-21
5-8. Auto-adjust position change
When automatic adjustment is intended with [Input Level] by means of the [Auto] button, the signal level is
read out in the fixed position that has been defined on the screen. Since this read-out position can differ
according to the adjusting mode and color, all patterns, resolution, and other factors are specified and set in
the relevant positions in advance. Therefore, no particular modification is required in general operation.
Automatic adjustment is impossible, however, where a similar pattern is allocated in a slightly different
position.
In such a case, setting can be carried out according to the descriptions below.
Adjustments become impossible if a wrong position is set up.
<Level Read>
This function is used to look for a position being modified.
Enter a position input in the [H], [V] editor.
The numeral to be entered is decimal. The guidelines are the number of dots for [H] and the number of lines
for [V] (half in case of interlace).
When the [Read] button is clicked, the signal level of the specified position is displayed for R/G/B, respectively.
This value is displayed within the range of 0 (black) - 255 (white).
Based on this figure, confirm where the specified position is located on the screen and look for the position
to be used for adjustment.
* When you look for the [Component (HDTV)] position, a DVD signal input should be entered so that [HDTV]
can be assumed for the Comp SEL.
5-22
<Position Change>
This function is used to set up the position to be used for automatic adjustment.
Each editor is displayed with the present set value in the input level get position.
At the time of adjusting software starting, the position is set up according to the specified pattern.
Enter the changing position input, confirmed by <Read>, in the editor.
Fix the setting with the [Save] button.
If it is necessary to recover the position of initial setting after the modification, click the [Default] button and
fix the condition with the [Save] button.
Finish the position setting screen with the [Return] button.
Each item setting:

RGB_SG White H/V
RGB_PCOUT White H/V
Component White H/V
Component Blue H/V
Component Red H/V
Video White H/V
: 100% white when a signal generator is used (White position of the Window
screen)
: 100% white when a PC output is used (White position of the Window screen)
: 100% white (White position below the center of the split color bar)
: 75% blue (Blue bar position of the split color bar)
: 75% red (Red bar position of the split color bar)
: 100% white (White position below the center of the split color bar)
5-23
6. Error Messages
TIME OUT (ACK)!
This is a communication error arising in conjunction with the PJ.
Check connections and confirm whether the PJ main power supply is turned ON.
TIME OUT (Data)!
This is a communication error arising in conjunction with the PJ.
Check connections and confirm whether the PJ is free from any abnormality. Try it again.
Comm Open Error
Failure in opening the serial port.
Check whether any other application is using the serial port.
TIME OUT (Comm Close Error)!, Comm Close Error
Failure in closing the serial port.
Check whether any other application is using the serial port.
File format error!, Address Error
The data format is different from that of the file specified at the time of data writing from the file.
Specify the correct file.
Data write error!! Please retry.
Failure in data writing. Try it again.
5-24
Adjustments of the optical system

Adjusting jig
Dummy load (Part no. : 9N999068)
Extension connector / Connector PWB for extension (An existing jig is used for the VT70 Series.)
<<List of jigs>
Item name
Application
Qty
Dummy load PWB
Dummy board for the MAIN SASSY
Extension connector (3P)
For LAMP FAN (100W)

For INTAKE FAN (100W)
For LCD panel
For Power supply

(POPW:400W) MAIN
For Power supply

(POLC:400W) BALLAST
For INTAKE FAN (P0F:400W)

For EXHAUST FAN (POF:400W)
For THERMISTOR1 and COVER SW

(POTH1:600W or 400W)
For DC FAN (BALLAST)
Photo taken from life
5-25
Item name
Application
Qty
Extension connector PWB (30P) For LCD panel
Extension connector PWB (15P) For Power supply (MAIN)
Extension connector PWB (5P)
For Power supply (BALLAST)
For INTAKE FAN
For COVER SW
<<List of Spacers>>
Item name
SPACER FL T0.1 (PB52)
SPACER RL2 T0.1 (PB52)
Application
Spacer for FL adjustment
Spacer for RL2 adjustment
Parts No.
24H51241
24H51251
24H51261
24H51271
24H51281
24H51291
24H51301
24H51311
24H51321
24H51331
5-26
1. Adjustment of the optical axis (Shadow adjustment)
1-1. Jigs and tools used
The jigs and tools specified below are needed for this adjustment.
<<Tools to be used>>
Phillips screwdriver for FL, RL2, M1 fixing: Tip size No. 1
<<Jigs to be used>>
Refer to the list of jigs shown below.
(List of the dummy load and extension connector/ extension connector PWB)
Item name
Application
Qty
Dummy load PWB
Dummy board for the MAIN SASSY
For LAMP FAN (100W)

For INTAKE FAN (100W)
For Power supply

(POPW:400W) MAIN
Extension connector PWB (15P) For Power supply (MAIN)
Extension connector PWB (30P) For LAMP FAN

For INTAKE FAN
<<List of Spacers>>
Item name
Application
Parts No.
24H51241
24H51251
24H51261
24H51271
24H51281
24H51291
24H51301
24H51311
24H51321
24H51331
5-27
1-2. Outlined description of adjusting work
1-2-1. Outlined description of adjusting work
Remove the top cover.
Remove the MAIN PWB and take out the shield plate (MAIN PWB) and the OPT cover.
Mount the jig (Dummy load PWB)
(Refer to P.5-49 in regard to the jig, and see the diagram below in regard to connections.)
Start up the set.
Make shadow adjustments. (Details are written in 1-3 and thereafter.)
Return the set to its original state.
1
2
3
4
5
6
<<Connections for the dummy load PWB, the extension connector, and the connector PWB for extension>>
Connection of the VT480/VT580 Series
PS UNIT
INTAKE FAN
LAMP FAN
BALLAST FAN
EXHAUST FAN
BALLAST UNIT
ON/OFF selector switch

for the projector screen
5-28
1-3. Shadow adjustment flow
Start of adjustment
Check the shadows of R, G, B at the top, bottom, right, and left.
OK for all R, G, B.
NG for both G and
B or for G only.
Make FL adjustments (G adjustment).
(1-6-1)
B only is NG.
2nd and thereafter
R is NG.
Make RL2 adjustments (R adjustment).

(1-6-2)
G is OK.
OK
Check the shadows of B at the top,
bottom, right, and left.
OK
NG
Make M1 adjustments. (1-6-3)
OK
NG
Check the shadows of R, G, B at the top, bottom, right, and left.
OK for all R, G, B.
End of adjustment
5-29
1-4. Handling of margin in shadow adjustment
During shadow adjustment, adjust the margin so that it is balanced vertically and horizontally. If adjustments are carried out from the LCD panel, this margin cannot be seen directly. Therefore, try to move the
shadow until its top, bottom, right, or left part appears. By doing so, examine how much shadow is existing
vertically and horizontally. Stop moving the shadow where its margin seems to be well balanced.
Shadow in vertical direction
Shadow in horizontal direction
1-5. Neutral setup position for each adjuster block

(1) FL
Vertical: The holder (FL) is held at the height of only one spacer (FL) T1.0.
Horizontal: Bosses of Cover A are located in the right and left holder (FL) holes, each in the center
position.
(2) RL2
Vertical: The holder (RL2) is held at the height of only one spacer (RL2) T1.0.
Horizontal: Bosses of Cover A are located in the right and left holder (RL2) holes, each in the center
position.
(3) M1
The outer edge plane of the separator base is joined with the edge plane of the holder (M1).
5-30
1-6. Operation of each adjusting part (Refer to 3. Adjusting/fixing parts.)
1-6-1. FL adjustment
1
2
<<Vertical direction>>
Loosen the FL fixing screws (in 1 positions) sufficiently.
Change the spacer (FL) thickness and adjust the shadow margin so that it is vertically equalized.
Arrange the spacer so that its total quantity can be reduced.
3
4
<<Horizontal direction>>
Hold the handle part of the holder (FL) by hand and move the holder to the right and left in order to
adjust the shadow margin so that it is horizontally equalized.
After adjustments, fix the FL fixing screw (1 position).
The tightening torque shall be 3.5 0.5 kgfcm.
Fixing screws
Spacer FL
Handle part of the holder (FL)
1-6-2. RL2 adjustment

<<Vertical direction>>
Loosen the RL2 fixing screws (in 2 positions) sufficiently.
Change the spacer (RL2) thickness and adjust the shadow margin until it is vertically equalized.
Arrange the spacer so that its total quantity can be reduced.
1
2
3
4
<<Horizontal direction>>
Hold the handle part of the holder (RL2) by hand and move the holder to the right and left in order to
adjust the shadow margin so that it is horizontally equalized.
After adjustments, fix the RL2 fixing screw (1 position).
The tightening torque shall be 3.5 0.5kgfcm.
Fixing screws
Handle part of the holder (RL2)

Spacer (RL2)
5-31
1
2
1-6-3. M1 adjustment
Loosen the M1 fixing screws (2 positions) sufficiently.
Grip the handle part of the holder (M1) by hand and move the holder to the right and left in order to
adjust the shadow position both vertically and horizontally so that it is equally positioned. Make adjustments, paying attention to the directions of M1 rotation and fall.
After adjustments, fix the M1 fixing screws (2 positions).
The tightening torque shall be 3.5 0.5 kgfcm.
Fixing screws
Handle part of the holder (M1)
1-7. Shadow adjustment for each color

1-7-1. Vertical shadow adjustment for G and B
Move the holder (FL) vertically and eliminate the vertical shadow. (Equally balanced in vertical directions)
(Make adjustments until the portions in magenta color are eliminated vertically and uniformly in the
projector screen.)
1-7-2. Horizontal shadow adjustment for G and B
Move the holder (FL) horizontally and eliminate the horizontal shadow. (Equally balanced in horizontal
directions)
(Make adjustments until the portions in magenta color are eliminated horizontally and uniformly in the
projector screen.)
1-7-3. Shadow adjustment for B only
It is possible to adjust the fall. Move the holder (M1) and eliminate the shadows in all directions. (Equalize the shadows both vertically and horizontally.)
(Make adjustments until the portions in amber color are eliminated vertically, horizontally, and uniformly
in the projector screen.)
1-7-4. Vertical shadow adjustment for R
Move the holder (RL2) vertically and eliminate the vertical shadow. (Equally balanced in vertical directions)
(Make adjustments until the portions in cyan color are eliminated vertically and uniformly in the projector
screen.)
1-7-5. Horizontal shadow adjustment for R
Move the holder (RL2) horizontally and eliminate the horizontal shadow. (Equally balanced in horizontal
directions)
(Make adjustments until the portions in cyan color are eliminated horizontally and uniformly in the projector screen.)
5-32
2. Adjustment of the polarization plate (Contrast adjustment)
2-1. Jigs and tools to be used
For this adjustment, provide for the tools specified below.
<<Tools to be used>>
Phillips screwdriver for deflection plate fixing: Tip size No. 1
<<Jigs to be used>>
Extension connector and connector PWB for extension
<<List of jigs>>
Refer to the list of jigs shown below.
(List of the extension connector/ extension connector PWB)
Item name
Application
Qty
For LCD panel
For power supply (POPW:400W)

MAIN
For power supply (POLC:400W)

BALLAST
For INTAKE FAN (POF:400W)

For EXHAUST FAN (POF:400W)
For THERMISTOR1 and COVER SW

(POTH1:600W and 400W)
For TDC FAN (BALLAST)
5-33
Item name
Application
Qty
Extension connector PWB (30P) For LCD panel
Extension connector PWB (15P) For power supply (MAIN)
For power supply (BALLAST)
For INTAKE FAN
For COVER SW
5-34
1
2
3
4
2-2. Outlined description of adjusting work

Remove the top cover.
Remove the MAIN PWB and take out the shield plate (MAIN PWB) and the OPT cover.
Remove the REM PWB ASSY and the thermostat.
Connect each DC fan/ LCD panel/ SW PWB/ and power supply to the removed MAIN board by the use
of the extension connector and the extension connector PWB. Connect the removed thermistor and the
thermostat also to the MAIN board.
Start up the set and display the internal pattern (all-black signal).
(Select Install and Setup on the menu screen and set the background at Black Background.)
Adjust the polarization plate. (Details described in 2-3)
After the completion of adjustments, return the set to its original state.
5
6
7
REM PWB ASSY
Thermostats
<<Connection of extension connector and PWB>>

3 positions of the extension connector
PWB (30P), extension connector, and
R/G/B.
Pay attention to the direction of the
LCD panel connections. If connections
are wrongly made, the screen becomes
all white and nothing is displayed.
Connector PWB for extension

(3P) and extension connector
(3P)

(15P)
REM PWB ASSY
Thermostats

(2P)

(3P)

(3P)
(5P)

(2P)
(4P)
5-35
2-3. Method of adjustment (Refer to 3. Adjusting/fixing parts.)
2-3-1. Method of adjustment (Gch)
Loosen the polarizing plate setscrew (Gch) (in one position) by means of a Phillips screwdriver.
Turn and move the polarizing plate (Gch) (holder on the side of larger handle). (Manual)
Display an all black screen and suspend the display where it becomes darkest.
Turn and move the WV (Gch) (holder on the side of smaller handle). (Manual)
Fix the polarizing plate setscrew (Gch) (in one position).
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
2-3-2. Method of adjustment (Rch or Bch)

Loosen the polarizing plate setscrew (Rch or Bch) (in one position) by means of a Phillips screwdriver.
Turn and move the polarizing plate (Rch or Bch). (Manual)
Fix the polarizing plate setscrew (Rch or Bch) (in one position).
3. Adjusting and fixing parts
Polarizing plate (Bch)
Polarizing plate setscrew (Bch)
Polarizing plate (Rch)

Polarizing plate setscrew (Rch)
M1 fixing screw
RL2 fixing screw
Holder (M1)
Holder (RL2)
Spacer block for RL2

vertical adjustments
WV film set
Polarizing plate
(Gch)
FL fixing screw
Polarizing plate setscrew (Gch)
Holder (FL)
Spacer block for FL vertical adjustments
5-36
SERVICEMAN MODE
LT380/280 Serviceman Mode (Menu)

1. Mode changeover
1-1. How to enter the Expert Mode
1-1-1. When an accessory remote control is used
In the state of Power ON, press the keys in the order of [HELP] [TOP] [LEFT] [HELP].
Press the [MENU] key to display the menu and confirm that [Expert Menu] is presently assured.
1-2. How to enter the Serviceman Mode
1-2-1. When an accessory remote control is used
In the state of Power ON, press the keys in the order of [HELP] [ENTER] [HELP] [ENTER]
[HELP] [ENTER] [MENU] for 3 seconds. Then, the [Password] menu is displayed.
Press the select keys in the order of [TOP] [RIGHT] [LEFT] [RIGHT] [RIGHT] [RIGHT]
[TOP] [TOP] [ENTER].
Press the [MENU] key to display the menu and confirm that [Service Menu] is presently assured.
1-2-2. When the RD-364E is used
Press the [TEST] key while the [CTL] key is pressed. Then, the [Password] menu is displayed.
Press the select keys in the order of [TOP] [RIGHT] [LEFT] [RIGHT] [RIGHT] [RIGHT]
[TOP] [TOP] [ENTER].
Press the [MENU] key to display the menu and confirm that [Service Menu] is presently assured.
2. Additional functions
2-1. Additional menus and functions for the Expert Mode
2-1-1. Menu screens and functional differences
Display of [Source] [Test Pattern]
* A simplified test pattern for installation in the User Mode. A conventional test pattern in the Expert
Mode.
Display of [Source] [Default List]
Adjustment of [Adjust] [Expert1] [R/Cr-Gain]
Adjustment of [Adjust] [Expert1] [G/Yr-Gain]
Adjustment of [Adjust] [Expert1] [B/Cb-Gain]
Adjustment of [Adjust] [Expert1] [R/Cr-Offset]
Adjustment of [Adjust] [Expert1] [G/Yr-Offset]
Adjustment of [Adjust] [Expert1] [B/Cb-Offset]
Setting of [Adjust] [Expert2] [Resolution]
Setting of [Adjust] [Expert2] [Sync Slicer]
Setting of [Adjust] [Expert2] [Slice Offset]
6-1
SERVICEMAN MODE
Setting of [Adjust] [Expert2] [DVI Equalizer]

Setting of [Adjust] [Expert2] [Synchronize]
etting of [Adjust] [Expert2] [Clamp Timing]
Setting of [Adjust] [Expert2] [Sync Protection]
Setting of [Adjust] [Expert2] [VD Delay]
Adjustment of [Adjust] [Expert3] [Y/C Delay]
Adjustment of [Adjust] [Expert3] [YTR Adjustment]
Adjustment of [Adjust] [Expert3] [CTR Adjustment]
Adjustment of [Adjust] [Expert3] [Edge]
Adjustment of [Adjust] [Expert3] [Noise Revolution]
Adjustment of [Adjust] [Expert3] [Signal Type]
Adjustment of [Adjust] [Expert3] [Video Filter]
Setting of [Setup] [Installation] [LAN Mode] [Expert] [HTTP]
Setting of [Setup] [Installation] [LAN Mode] [Expert] [SNMP]
Setting of [Setup] [Installation] [LAN Mode] [Expert] [TELNET]
Setting of [Setup] [Installation] [LAN Mode] [Expert] [PC Control]
Setting of [Setup] [Installation] [LAN Mode] [Expert] [Duplex (Built-in)]
Setting of [Setup] [Installation] [LAN Mode] [Expert] [Duplex (PC Card)]
Setting of [Setup] [Installation] [LAN Mode] [Expert] [IP Filtering]
Setting of [Setup] [Installation] [LAN Mode] [Expert] [IEU Image Blackout]
Setting of [Setup] [Installation] [LAN Mode] [Expert] [DCU No Password Mode]
Setting of [Setup] [Installation] [LAN Mode] [IEU Ports] [Image (UDP)]
Setting of [Setup] [Installation] [LAN Mode] [IEU Ports] [Image (TCP)]
Setting of [Setup] [Installation] [LAN Mode] [IEU Ports] [Mouse]
Setting of [Setup] [Installation] [LAN Mode] [IEU Ports] [Search]
Setting of [Setup] [Installation] [LAN Mode] [IEU Ports] [User Management]
Setting of [Setup] [Installation] [LAN Mode] [IEU Ports] [Desktop Control]
Setting of [Setup] [Expert] [Power Off Confirmation]
Setting of [Setup] [Expert] [Projector ID]
Setting of [Setup] [Expert] [Pointer]
Setting of [Setup] [Expert] [Ref.White Balance]
Display of [Information] [Version] [BIOS]
Display of [Information] [Version] [Sub]
Display of [Information] [Version] [Font]
2-1-2. Factory reset

When key-in operation of [Reset] [All Data (Including Entry List)] [OK] is carried out in the Expert
Mode, all the adjustment and setup values are restored to those in the factory shipment status,
including the contents registered in the signal list.
The data to be returned to the factory shipment status by a factory reset action are everything other
than [Language], [Background], [Background Logo], [Cabinet Button], [Password (Menu)], [Password (Logo)], [Security], [LAN Mode], [Projector Name], [Communication Speed], [Standby Mode],
[Remaining Lamp Time], [Lamp Hour Meter], and [Projector Usage].
6-2
SERVICEMAN MODE
2-2. Additional menus and functions for the Serviceman Mode
2-2-1. Menu screens and functional differences
Mode.
Mode.
Adjustment of [Adjust] [Expert1] [R/Cr-Gain]
Adjustment of [Adjust] [Expert1] [G/Yr-Gain]
Adjustment of [Adjust] [Expert1] [B/Cb-Gain]
Adjustment of [Adjust] [Expert1] [R/Cr-Offset]
Adjustment of [Adjust] [Expert1] [G/Yr-Offset]
Adjustment of [Adjust] [Expert1] [B/Cb-Offset]
Setting of [Adjust] [Expert2] [Resolution]
Setting of [Adjust] [Expert2] [Sync Slicer]
Setting of [Adjust] [Expert2] [Slice Offset]
Setting of [Adjust] [Expert2] [DVI Equalizer]
Setting of [Adjust] [Expert2] [Synchronize]
Adjustment of [Adjust] [Expert2] [Clamp Timing]
Setting of [Adjust] [Expert2] [Sync Protection]
Adjustment of [Adjust] [Expert2] [VD Delay]
Adjustment of [Adjust] [Expert3] [Y/C Delay]
Adjustment of [Adjust] [Expert3] [YTR Adjustment]
Adjustment of [Adjust] [Expert3] [CTR Adjustment]
Adjustment of [Adjust] [Expert3] [Edge]
Adjustment of [Adjust] [Expert3] [Noise Revolution]
Adjustment of [Adjust] [Expert3] [Signal Type]
Adjustment of [Adjust] [Expert3] [Color Matrix]
Adjustment of [Adjust] [Expert3] [Video Filter]
Setting of [Setup] [Installation] [LAN Mode] [Expert] [HTTP]
Setting of [Setup] [Installation] [LAN Mode] [Expert] [SNMP]
Setting of [Setup] [Installation] [LAN Mode] [Expert] [TELNET]
Setting of [Setup] [Installation] [LAN Mode] [Expert] [PC Control]
Setting of [Setup] [Installation] [LAN Mode] [Expert] [Duplex (Built-in)]
Setting of [Setup] [Installation] [LAN Mode] [Expert] [Duplex (PC Card)]
6-3
SERVICEMAN MODE
Setting of [Setup] [Installation] [LAN Mode] [Expert] [IP Filtering]

Setting of [Setup] [Installation] [LAN Mode] [Expert] [IEU Image Blackout]
Setting of [Setup] [Installation] [LAN Mode] [Expert] [DCU No Password Mode]
Setting of [Setup] [Installation] [LAN Mode] [IEU Ports] [Image (UDP)]
Setting of [Setup] [Installation] [LAN Mode] [IEU Ports] [Image (TCP)]
Setting of [Setup] [Installation] [LAN Mode] [IEU Ports] [Mouse]
Setting of [Setup] [Installation] [LAN Mode] [IEU Ports] [Search]
Setting of [Setup] [Installation] [LAN Mode] [IEU Ports] [User Management]
Setting of [Setup] [Installation] [LAN Mode] [IEU Ports] [Desktop Control]
Setting of [Setup] [Expert] [Power Off Confirmation]
Setting of [Setup] [Expert] [Projector ID]
Setting of [Setup] [Expert] [Pointer]
Setting of [Setup] [Expert] [Ref.White Balance]
Setting of [Setup] [Expert] [Keystone Configuration]
Display of [Information] [Version] [BIOS]
Display of [Information] [Version] [Sub]
Display of [Information] [Version] [Font]
2-1-2. Factory reset

When key-in operation of [Reset] [All Data (Including Entry List)] [OK] is carried out in the Serviceman Mode, the language is turned into English and the language select screen of [Menu Language Select] is displayed.
This display is maintained until any one language is selected or each time input signal changeover
is carried out.
The data to be returned to the factory status by a factory reset action are everything other than
[Background Logo], [Security], [Standby Mode], [Accelerometer Configuration], [Remaining Lamp
Time], [Lamp Hour Meter], and [Projector Usage].
3. How to withdraw from the mode

The original status is recovered when the [EXIT] key is pressed while no menu is displayed.
The original status is also recovered if the [POWER] key is pressed to assume the standby status and
starting is attempted again.
6-4
CLEANING
Cleaning of Lens and Mirror
1. Cleaning of the projector lens
* Cleaner liquid
Absolute alcohol should be used.
If water drops seem to remain as a result of unfavorable drying, replace the absolute alcohol with new one.
* Method of cleaning
Use a piece of cloth or cleaning paper available on the market and let it be soaked with the cleaner liquid.
Draw a circle from the center of the lens toward the outer periphery. Wipe off the contaminants and dust by
nipping them at the edge part of the lens.
In this case, make sure not to wipe the lens surface too strong.
Cleaning cloth
(92339585 or 24BS7251)
Lens
2. Cleaning of the mirror

Take away the contaminants by the use of absolute alcohol. Then wipe the area with dry cloth.
The mirror has been vapor-treated. Never grip it strongly. Do not touch it with empty hands.
(To keep the mirror surface free from fingerprints, etc.)
3. LCD panel/lens
Take away the contaminants by the use of absolute alcohol. Then wipe the area with dry cloth.
The influence of contaminants to the screen is extremely intensified when contaminants are attached to both
sides of the LCD panel, the LCD side of the relay lens 1, and the integrator (lamp side). Utmost care must be
taken to these surfaces.
7-1
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
1. I/O terminals
1.1 Video input terminals
COMPUTER1 input (Mini D-SUB 15-pin x 1)
COMPUTER2 input (Mini D-SUB 15-pin x 1)
Used in common as the SCART input terminal.
COMPUTER3 input (DVI-D x 1 only LT380)
COMPONENT input (RCA Phono terminal x 3)
Used in common as the VIDEO input terminal.
VIDEO input (RCA Phono terminal x 1)
S-VIDEO input (DIN4 x 1)
1.2 Video output terminal
MONITOR OUT output (Mini D-SUB 15-pin x 1)
1.3 Audio input terminal
Also used for COMPUTER1/COMPUTER2/COMPUTER3 (LT380 only) input terminal (Mini-jack x 1)
Also used for VIDEO1 / S-VIDEO1 / COMPONENT input terminal (RCA PHONO terminal x 1)
1.4 Audio output terminal
MONITOR OUT audio output (Mini jack x 1)
1.5 Control terminal
PC control (Mini D-SUB 9-pin x 1)
1.6 USB terminals
USB-A terminal
1.7 PC card terminal
PC card terminal (TYPE II)
1.8 Wired LAN terminal
RJ-45 terminal
8-1
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
2. Input signals
2.1 Signal level
RGB signal
Video signal:
Sync signal:
Component signal
Signal Y
Video signal:
Sync signal:
Signal Cb/Cr:
Signal Pb/Pr:
VIDEO signal
Video signal:
Sync signal:
S-VIDEO signal
Signal Y
Video signal:
Signal C:
AUDIO signal:
0.7Vp-p / 75
TTL level (Positive / Negative polarity) / 1k
0.7Vp-p / 75 (Positive polarity)

0.3Vp-p / 75 (Negative polarity)
0.7Vp-p / 75 (Ambipolar)
0.6Vp-p / 75 (Ternary)
0.3Vp-p / 75 (Negative polarity)

0.28Vp-p / 75 (Signal C burst level)
0.5Vrms / 47k
2.2 Analog RGB signal frequencies

Horizontal sync frequency: 15 ~ 100kHz
Vertical sync frequency: 48~ 120Hz
Max. resolution: UXGA@75Hz
2.3 Component signals
525i, 625i, 480p, 576p (DVD output signal)
720p, 1080i (HDTV signal)
2.4 Video input color system
NTSC3.58
NTSC4.43
PAL
PAL-M
PAL-N
PAL-60
SECAM
8-2
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
3. Circuit operation
3.1 MONITOR OUT circuit
The video signal input entered in the COMPUTER1 (M9002), the COMPUTER2 (M9001), and the COMPONENT (M9004) is switched at the EL4342IL (IC9003), and then processed at the 6dB video amplifier
of NJM2581 (IC9004). Output is generated from the MONITOR OUT circuit (M9003). The sync signals
are switched at the SN74CBT3125 (IC9002) and the output is generated after passing through the
buffer circuit (Q9005, Q9008, Q9014, Q9015).
3.2 Plug & Play
The vertical sync circuit of COMPUTER1 (M9002) and the serial terminals of Pins 12 and 15 are connected to the TC9WMB1FK (IC9001) for DDC2-applied Plug & Play. With this function, the projector can
be sensed from the PC.
3.3 Protector
If any one of the conditions specified below is sensed, the projector causes the status LED to blink and
the idling condition is recovered.
Sensing the removal of the lamp cover.
Sensing the fan (x 4) rotation stop.
Sensing the lamp and the non-lighting condition.
Fan revolution control and detection of abnormal temperatures by the temperature sensor.
Detection of abnormal temperatures by bi-metal.
3.4 Video signal processor block
After termination, the Composite Video, S-Video, and SCART signals are selected at the NJM2335
(IC2503) and then entered in the video decoder TC90288AXBG (IC2507). The output is sent to the
ASIC LALUZ2 (IC3001) for video signal processing in the 601 format (8-buit). The Composite signals
(480p, 576p, 525i, 625i) are entered in the video decoder TC90288AXBG (IC2507) via the LPF of the
RGB system.
The color system and the vertical frequency are sensed at the video decoder for IIC control. The built-in
10-bit and 8-bit A/D converters are available for analog input interface. The NTSC signal is processed
for ternary Y/C separation, the PAL signal for 3-line Y/C separation, and the SECAM signal for Y/C
separation, by BPF and TRAP in the video decoder.
8-3
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
3.5 Sync signal processor block (COMPUTER1, COMPUTER2, COMPONENT inputs)
The Horizontal Sync, Vertical Sync, and Composite Sync signals entered in COMPUTER1 and COMPUTER2 are selected at the Sync selector IC, SN74CBT3125 (IC9002) and fed to the A/D converter
ISL98001 (IC2003). All sync signal processing is carried out at the A/D converter ISL98001 (IC2003).
In the sync signal processor circuit, the following operation is carried out:
H/V Sync output
Sync separation for Composite Sync and G-Sync
Discrimination of the presence of H/V and polarity
Generation of clamp pulses and processing
The result of discrimination is put in the detection port of the ASSIST3 (IC4101) by I2C bus processing.
The H/V Sync signals are output to the ASSIST3 (IC4101) and the LALUZ2 (IC3001).
3.6 Input processor block (Input block, A/D converter, LALUZ2)
The video signal inputs entered in COMPUTER1 (9002), COMPUTER2 (9001), and COMPONENT
(M9004) are selected at the video selector IC, EL4342 (IC9003) and fed to the A/D converter IC, ISL98001
(IC2003) via the low-pass filter (LPF). The LPF block has a through circuit and two types of filters.
Signals are automatically switched there. By A/D conversion, the video signals are converted into the
digital signals of 8-bit (2-phase) ~ 3, and output to the LALUZ2 circuit (IC3001). In the case of the
Component signals, signals of 1080i, 720p, 480p, 576p, 525i, 625i, etc., are processed in the same
manner as for the RGB signals through the LPF. The 1080i and 720p signals are processed through the
A/D converter. The 480p, 576p, 525i, and 625i signals are processed at the video decoder IC,
TC90288AXBG (IC2507), and then entered in the LALUZ2 (IC3001).
For both types of signals, the conversion from the chroma signals to the RGB signals is carried out in the
LALUZ2 (IC3001).
The A/D converter is controlled via the I2C bus.
3.7 Audio processing
The audio signals of COMPUTER1, COMPUTER2, COMPUTER3 (LT380 only), COMPONENT, VIDEO,
and S-VIDEO are switched at the audio processor, NJW1142 (IC9501) for the adjustment of sound
volume, treble, and bass. The adjusted signals are sent to the audio amplifier TPA4861D (IC9502) and
the audio monitor OUT terminal (M9504).
The audio monitor OUT terminal (M9504) can change its output level with an audio volume control.
The audio processor NJW1142 (IC9501) makes controls through the I2C bus.
The audio amplifier TPA4861D (IC9502) generates audio signals from its built-in stereo speakers (8 x
1).
8-4
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
3.8 S3C2400 (CPU)
The S3C2400 (IC4003) is an ARM9 core CPU that offers a variety of projector functions and controls,
such as signal discrimination, data setup for each device, OSD control, protective processing, and so
on. The CPU peripheral blocks come in the 32Mbit SDRAM (IC4005), 16Mbit FLASH ROM (IC4006),
32Mbit FLASH ROM (IC4007), E2PROM (IC4004), etc. The CPU clock signal of 12MHz is fed from the
ICS414G (IC3004). This clock signal is internally multiplied and the CPU operates at 387MHz.
3.9 LALUZ2 (Video signal processor ASIC)
The LALUZ2 (IC3001) is an ASIC circuit for video signal processing. The video signals are once written
in the internal SDRAM (32Mbit) and used for various video signal processing, such as resolution conversion, horizontal and vertical keystone correction (3D-Reform), frame rate conversion, I/P conversion,
OSD output generation, and so on.
The RGB signals are taken from the A/D converter circuit ISL98001 (IC2003) in the 8-bit (2-phase) x 3
mode. The Component signals of 720p, 1080i, etc., are similarly taken from the A/D converter circuit
ISL98001 (IC2003) in the 8-bit x 3 mode. They are converted into the RGB signals in the LALUZ2 circuit.
After being entered in the video decoder TC90288AXBG (IC2507), the Composite Video, S-Video, and
Component signals of 480p, 576p, 525i, and 625i are output in the 601 format (8-bit) and then converted
into the RGB signals in the LALUZ2 circuit.
The LALUZ2 circuit uses three types of clock signals; 125MHz, 66MHz, and 65MHz. The 125MHz clock
signal is generated by the multiplication of the 12MHz clock signal in the ICS414G (IC3004). It is used
for the SDRAM in the LALUZ2 circuit. The 66MHz clock signal is generated through the frequency
division of the operating frequency 387MHz in the CPU, and used in the PCU I/F block. The 65MHz
clock signal is generated by the multiplication of the 12MHz clock signal in the ICS414G (IC3004). It is
further modulated by 2% and used in the video output block. The 12-bit x 3 video signal output from the
LALUZ2 circuit is immediately entered in the UNISEVEN (IC6001).
3.10 ASSIST3
The ASSIST3 (IC4101) is an ASIC circuit, including the CPU peripheral circuits. It offers a variety of
functions as specified below.
CPU I/F
Generation of chip select signals for each device
PC card control
Function of signal discrimination
Main unit key control
Remove control signal decoding
PIO, I2C, and UART functions
Fan revolution control (x 3)
8-5
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
3.11 UNISEVEN
The UNISEVEN (IC6001) is an ASIC circuit, offering a variety of functions such as correction functions,
generation of LC timing signals, and so on, to be specified below.
V-T correction, 12-bit
Color unevenness correction
Color correction
Wall color correction
Panel corrector circuit:
Horizontal cross-talk correction
Vertical line unevenness correction
Sequential back ghost correction
Block ghost correction
Generation of timing signals for LC panel driving
Feedback ghost correction circuit
Flicker correction circuit
High-bit processor circuit
12 10-bit output by dither processing
Peak level sensing function (Auto-contrast adjust function)
The video signal input entered from the LALUZ2 circuit (IC3001) in the 12-bit x 3 mode passes through
the various correction circuits of V-T correction, color unevenness correction, color correction, wall color
correction, etc., and is then sent to the 6-phase decoder circuit, CXA7005R (IC6101, 6102, 6103) in the
12-bit x 3 mode. The timing signals for LC panel driving are fed to the level shift circuit of ADSY8401
(IC6501, IC6502). In the V-T corrector block, the entered video signals are converted into the data so
that they match the characteristics of the LC panel, according to the lookup table. The color unevenness
corrector block has the brightness data for each split screen of 25 x 20. Computer processing is effected
for the video data so that the respective screens can be uniform. The color correction block has the
picture management function. For the wall color correction feature, chromaticity conversion processing
is carried out to assure the wall color correction function.
3.12 USB -A terminal (MOUSE)
The USB signal from the USB mouse, which is connected to the USB-A terminal, is output to the
CPU (IC4003).
When a mouse is connected, it functions as the PC mouse.
3.13 Video output processor block
The 12-bit x 3 video signals entered from the UNISEVEN (IC6001) are fed to the 6-phase decoder of
CXA7005R (IC6101, 6102, 6103) where they are converted into 6-phase analog signals (15.5Vp-p) for
each RGB color through D/A conversion and level conversion. The resultant signals are fed to the LC
panel. The remote control voltage for the LC panel is gained through 3W serial control at the CXA7005R
circuit so that an optimal voltage can be applied to each RGB panel.
The timing signals for LC panel driving are output to the level shift circuit of ADSY8401 (IC6501, 6502)
so that they are converted into a voltage (15.5Vp-p) needed to drive the shift register in the LC panel.
This voltage is applied to the LC panel.
8-6
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
3.14 PC card slot block
When the PC card slot (M4201) is used, two types of functions become available.
The first function is used to display the data in the flash memory card while the viewer is being selected
in signal selection mode.
The image data in bit map (*.BMP) or JPEG (*.JPG) mode or the character data in Text, HTML, or
Index mode can be displayed.
The second function is used for PC screen display or PJ operation at the PC by making a connection
with the PC by the use of a LAN card (wireless or wired) while the LAN is being selected in signal
selection mode.
In any case, the data are transmitted by the PCI card bus bridge R5C485 (IC4201) to the ASSIST3
(IC4101) via the PCI bus and converted into the CPU bus. Since then, the data are directly written in
the built-in SDRAM (32Mbit) of the LALUZ2 (IC3001) by the command from the CPU (IC4003).
3.15 LAN block
The LAN terminal is used, connected with the wired LAN cable. The connector is of the RJ-45 type,
which corresponds to the 10BASE-T / 100BASE-TX.
The wired LAN function of this unit makes it possible to perform direct display of the PC screen with the
PJ through the LAN or direct operation of this unit from the PC.
The signals received through the wired LAN cable are decoded by the Ethernet Controller RTL8100CL
(IC5002). The decoded data are sent to the ASSIST3 (IC4101) via the PCI bus. The ASSIST3 (IC4101)
mentioned here is a CPU bus that is connected to the CPU (IC4003), the LALUZ2 (IC3001), and
others. It plays a role of converting the received data into the CPU bus. For example, the received PC
screen data are tentatively written in the SDRAM that are then processed for decoding work at the CPU
(IC4003). Since then, the data are sent to the LALUZ2 (IC3001) and displayed in the PJ screen.
On the contrary, if the data are transmitted through the wired LAN cable, the command data of the CPU
are sent to the ASSIST3 (IC4101) via the PCI bus. In the ASSIST3 (IC4101), the command data are
converted and sent to the Ethernet Controller (IC5002) via the PCI bus. The data sent to the Ethernet
Controller (IC5002) are decoded and sent to the PC or others via the LAN terminal (M5002).
When the unit is directly connected in Peer-to-Peer mode with the PC or the like, a cross cable is used.
If a connection is made through a hub, etc., a straight cable is used.
3.16 DVI digital input block (LT380 only)
The DVI signal input entered in the DVI terminal (M2401) is sent to the TMDS receiver Sil1169 (IC2403)
and converted into the 2-layer-decoded digital signals of RGB 8-bit respectively. After the completion of
conversion, the signals are put in the A/D converter ISL98001 (IC2003) and wired-OR processing. The
resultant signal output is sent to the LALUZ2 (IC3001).
8-7
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
3.17 I2C control
The CPU (IC4003) and the ASSIST3 (IC4101) perform several kinds of IC controls through the I2C I/F.
The ICs performing controls described above are as specified below.
Circuit symbol
IC2403
IC9501
IC2003
IC2507
IC1017
IC4004
IC4009
Name
Sil1169 (DVI)
NJW1142 (Audio control)
ISL98001 (A/D conversion)
TC900288 (Video decoder)
M62334FP (Fan control D/A)
HN58X2432TI (E2PROM)
RCT-8564JE (LAN timer)
Master
ASSIST2 (3.3V)
ASSIST2 (3.3V)
ASSIST2 (3.3V)
ASSIST2 (3.3V)
CPU (3.3V)
CPU (3.3V)
CPU (3.3V)
Slave address (H)

78/79
82/83
9A/9B
2C/2D
98 (write only)
A0/A1
A2/A3
8-8
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
4. List of ICs used
The ICs used in this unit are listed in the table below.
Circuit symbol
IC1001
IC1002
IC1003
IC1004
IC1005
IC1006
IC1007
IC1008
IC1009
IC1010
IC1011
IC1012
IC1013
IC1014
IC1015
IC1016
IC1017
IC1018
IC1019
IC2002
IC2003
IC2004
IC2401
IC2402
IC2403
IC2502
IC2503
IC2505
IC2506
IC2507
IC2601
IC3001
IC3004
IC4001
IC4002
IC4003
IC4004
IC4005
IC4006
IC4007
IC4009
IC4010
IC4101
IC4201
IC4202
Type description
PQ070XH02ZPH
SC4519STRT
PQ015YZ01ZPH
PQ070XH02ZPH
PQ070XNA1ZPH
PQ1MX55M2SPQ
PQ015YZ01ZPH
PQ070XNA1ZPH
PQ015YZ01ZPH
NJM2387DL3 (TE1)
SI-3012LU-TL
NC7SZ14P5X_NF40
NJM2387DL3 (TE1)
NJM2387DL3 (TE1)
NJM2387DL3 (TE1)
NJM2387DL3 (TE1)
M62334FP
TSOP34838
LMV331IDCKR
PQ1MX55M2SPQ
ISL98001CQZ-140
PQ1MX55M2SPQ
BR24L02FV-W
PQ070XNA1ZPH
SII1169CTU
74LCX16244MTDX_NL
NJM2235V
74LCX16244MTDX_NL
PQ1MX55M2SPQ
TC90288BXBG
NJM2872AF25 (TE1)
NV0404
ICS414G-12LFT
BD4730G
NL27WZ14DFT2G
SS3C2440A40
HN58X2432TI
K4S561632E-UC75
S29AL016D70TFI020
S29GL032M90TFIR40
RTC-8564JE
NC7SZU04P5X_NF40
S1L53354 (ASSIST3)
R5C485-LQFP144
NC7SZ86P5X_NF40
Name
Voltage Regulator
Dc-Dc converter
Voltage Regulator
Voltage Regulator
Voltage Regulator
Voltage Regulator
Voltage Regulator
Voltage Regulator
Voltage Regulator
Voltage Regulator
Voltage Regulator
Inverter
Voltage Regulator
Voltage Regulator
Voltage Regulator
Voltage Regulator
4CH D/A
IR Receiver
Comparator
Voltage Regulator
A/D Converter
Voltage Regulator
Plug & Play E2PROM
Voltage Regulator
DVI
Line Driver
Video Switch
Line Driver
Voltage Regulator
VIDEO DEC
Voltage Regulator
LALUZ (ASIC)
EMI Reduced Clock Generator
Reset IC
2ch Inverter
CPU
32kbit E2PROM
32Mbit SDRAM
16Mbit Flash Rom
32Mbit Flash Rom
Timer
Inverter
ASSIST3
PC-CARD
OR gate
8-9
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Circuit symbol
IC4203
IC4204
IC4301
IC4302
IC4303
IC4304
IC4305
IC4306
IC5001
IC5002
IC5003
IC5004
IC5005
IC6001
IC6101
IC6102
IC6103
IC6501
IC6502
IC9001
IC9002
IC9003
IC9004
IC9005
IC9006
IC9501
IC9502
IC9503
IC9901
Type description
PQ070XNA1ZPH
ADM3202ARNZ-REEL
SN74LVC08APW
74LCX16245MTDX_NL
74LCX16245MTDX_NL
74LCX16245MTDX_NL
74LCX16245MTDX_NL
NC7SZ08P5X_NF40
AMC3526HDMFT
RTL8100CL-LF
M93C46-WMN6TP
NJM2872AF33 (TE1)
MAX2500EL
KS6M3U1864CBP (UNI7)
CXA7005R
CXA7005R
CXA7008R
ADSY8401JCPZ
ADSY8401JCPZ
TC9WMB1FK (TE85L, F)
SN74CBT3125PW-ELL2
EL4342ILZA
NJM2581M
TPS60403DBVR
PQ1MX55M2SPQ
NJW1142AV
TPA4861DR
PQ070XNA1ZPH
TSOP34838SB1
Name
Voltage Regulator
RS-232C Driver
4ch AND gate
Line Driver
Line Driver
Line Driver
Line Driver
AND gate
USB Power Switch
Ether Net Controller
1kbit E2PROM
Voltage Regulator
G Senser
UNISEVEN (ASIC)
D/A
D/A
D/A
Level Shift Driver
Level Shift Driver
Plug & Play E2PROM
BUS Switch
Video Switch
Video Amplifier
Voltage Regulator
Voltage Regulator
Audio Control
Audio AMP
Voltage Regulator
IR Receiver
8-10
METHOD OF DISASSEMBLY
1. Diagonal view of the main unit front
9-1
2. LAMP COVER ASSY / LAMP SASSY / HOLDER (FILTER) ASSY / LENS CAP
(1) Remove the LAMP COVER ASSY. Lossen the two LAMP SASSY screw
(2) Take out the HOLDER (FILTER) ASSY.
1 and take out the LAMP SASSY.
LENS COVER (LT380)

24F41091
LAMP COVER (LT380) ASSY

24FT9761
STRAP W
24J23901
HOLDER (FILTER, LT380) ASSY
24FT9601
LAMP
(OPTION)
1
9-2
3. TOP COVER ASSY / FRONT PANEL
(1) Remove the five screws
(2) Remove the two screws
1 and the ttake out the TOP COVER ASSY

2 and take out the FRONT PANEL.
LT380 Series
TOP COVER (LT380) ASSY
24DT9922
LT280 Series
24DT9932
1 SRW018
FRONT PANEL (LT380)
24F41071
1 SRW019
1 SRW019
9-3
4. MAIN SASSY / KEY PWB ASSY
(1) Remove the four screws

and the take out the KEY PWB ASSY.
(2) Remove the connectors that are connected to the MAIN SASSY.
(3) Remove five screws , two screws , and one each screw
and
5. Then, take out the MAIN SASSY.
1 SRW017
KEY PWB ASSY
81L09N01
4 SRW016
BRACKET (KEY-PWB)
24H54311
2 SRW014
3 SRW015
MAIN SASSY
LT380 Series
82L096A1
LT280 Seies
82L136A1
5 SRW030
GUIDE BRACKET (IR)

24H55411
9-4
5. SHIELD PLATE (LAMP) / EARTH BRACKET (LCD) / SHIELD PLATE (MAIN-PWB) /
COVER (XDP) / THERMOSTAT
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
1 and take out the SHIELD PLATE (LAMP).

2 and take out the EARTH BRACKET (LCD).
3 and take out the SHIELD PLATE (MAIN-PWB).
4 and take out the COVER (XDP).
5 and take out the THERMOSTAT.
Remove the four screws

Remove the two screws
Remove the two screws
Remove the one screw
Remove the one screw
SHIELD PLATE (MAIN-PWB)

24H54281
2 SRW029
3 SRW011
BRACKET (THERMOSTATS)
24H54971
1 SRW012
EARTH BRACKET (LCD)
24H55331
4 SRW112
5
SRW118
COVER (XDP)
24F42101
SHIELD PLATE (LAMP)

24H54301
THERMOSTAT
7N970037
9-5
6. BALLAST SASSY
1 and the two screws 2, and take out the BALLAST SASSY.
1 SRW007
BALLAST SASSY
2 SRW008
9-6
7. ENGINE SASSY
(1) Remove the five screws
1 and take out the ENGINE SASSY.

1 SRW006
ENGINE SASSY
9-7
8. DC FAN
1 and the two screws 2, and take out the DC FAN.
CUSHION
24J27751
1 SRW004
DC FAN 3110KL-04W-B39-C54
3N170092
CUSHION
24J24661
BRACKET (EXHAUST FAN)
24H55181
2 SRW027
9-8
9. REM PWB ASSY / POWER SUPPLY-DC / TH2 PWB ASSY
(1) Remove the one screw

and take out the REM PWB ASSY.
(2) Remove four screws
and take out the POWER SUPPLY-DC from the PWB HOLDER
positions.
and the one screw , and take out the TH2 PWB ASSY.
5 that is fixed in 3
2 SRW005
SHIELD CASE (POWER, T)

24H54291
REM PWB ASSY

82L09FC1
or 82L13FC1
1 SRW013
POWER SUPPLY-DC PB67

3N100801
3 SRW010
BARRIER
(POWER)
24J27121
4 SRW009
SHIELD CASE (POWER) B

24H49521
BRACKET (TH-PEB)
24H55241
TH2 PWB ASSY

82L09FD1
or 82L13FD1
5 PWB HOLDER
24C01001
9-9
10. DETECT SW SASSY / POWER SUPPLY-FILTER

and take out the DETECT SW SASSY.
(2) Take out the POWER SUPPLY-FILTER.
BARRIER (FILTER-PWB)
24J27211
1 SRW001
DETECT SW SASSY
82L09691
POWER SUPPLYFILTER PB63

3N100821
9-10
11. DC FAN / DUCT (LAMP FAN)
1 and take out the DUCT (LAMP FAN) / DC FAN.
1 SRW002
DUCT (LAMP FAN)

24F40071
DC FAN D06F-12SS701A (EX)

3N170073
9-11
12. DC FAN / DUCT (LCD FAN)
(1) Remove the four screws
1 DUCT (LCD FAN) / DC FAN.

1 SRW003
DUCT (LCD FAN)

24F42091
DC FAN D09F-12BS101A (CX)

3N170090
9-12
13. BOTTOM COVER ASSY
HANDLE / COVER (HANDLE) (Included in the BOTTOM COVER ASSY)
1 and take out the COVER (HANDLE) / HANDLE.
1 24N07421
COVER (HANDLE, R)
24F41571
COVER (HANDLE, L)
24F41121
HANDLE
24F41111
BOTTOM COVER ASSY

24DT9911
9-13
14. BOTTOM COVER ASSY
FOOT (F) / HOLDER (FOOT) / LEVER (FOOT) (Included in the BOTTOM COVER ASSY)
(1) Remove the PUSH NUT and take out the respective components by removing the screw
1.
PUSH NUT (3.0)

24N08031
SPRING (FOOT, F)
24H54781
HANDLE (FOOT, R)
24F41601
SPRING (FOOT, F)
24H54781
HANDLE (FOOT, L)
24F41591
LEVER (FOOT, R)
24F42031
1 24N08021
LEVER (FOOT, L)
24F41611
1 24N08021
FOOT (F)
24F41581
CUSHION (FOOT F)
24J27291
9-14
15. OPT BASE SASSY
1 and take out the OPT BASE SASSY.

SRW116
LT380 Series
OPT BASE LRL (PB64) SASSY
82L09121
or
OPT BASE RLR (PB64) SASSY
82L09131
LT280 Series
82L21312
or
82L13131
9-15
16.POLARIZER R SASSY / POLARIZER G SASSY / POLARIZER B SASSY / WV G SASSY
1 and take out the each POLARIZER SASSY / WV SASSY.
* Refer to P.11-16 in regard to each SASSY item.
WV G SASSY
PLATE (WV FIX)

24F41741
1 SRW113
POLARIZER G SASSY
SRW113
POLARIZER R SASSY
POLARIZER B SASSY
9-16
17. COVER B / FIELD LENS SASSY / RELAY LENS 2 SASSY
1 and take out the COVER B.

2 and take out the FIELD LENS SASSY.
3 and take out the RELAY LENS 2 SASSY.

LT380 Series
FIELD LENS (PB64)SASSY
82L09311
LT280 Series
FIELD LENS (PB52) SASSY
82J21311
2 SRW114
3 SRW115
1 SRW110
RELAY LENS 2 SASSY

82J33321
SPACER FL T0.1
SPACER RL 2T0.1
COVER B
24F40162
9-17
18.COVER A
(1) Remove the eight screws
1 and take out the COVER A.

1 SRW117
24N07421
COVER A
24F41701
* Stick the cushion to the
rear surface.
(Refer to P11-13)
9-18
METHOD OF DISRASSEMBLY
19. IT-PB SASSY (INTEGRATOR SASSY / PS-CONVERTER SASSY) / MIRROR 1
1 and take out the IT-PBS SASSY.

2 and take out the PS-CONVERTER SASSY.
3 and take out the HOLDER (M1)/MIRROR 1.
1 SRW109
2 SRW105
INTEGRATOR SASSY
82L09251
PS-CONVERTER SASSY
82L13221 (LT280)
82J21231 (LT380)
BARRIER (IT)
24H51111
3 SRW111
LEAF SPRING (M1)

24H51161
HOLDER (M1)
24F40321
MIRROR 1 (PB52)
12JS8531
9-19
20. DICHROIC MIRROR 1 , 2 / CONDENSER LENS-R, G, B / RELAY LENS1 / MIRROR 1, 2 /
FIELD LENS 2 RG / FIELD LENS 2 B

and take out the PLATE (DUCT).
(2) Remove the LEAF SPRING MIRROR and take out the DICHROIC MIRROR 1, 2/ MIRROR 1, 2.
(3) Take out the CONDENSER LENS-R, G, B / RELAY LENS 1 / FIELD LENS 2 RG / FIELD LENS 2 B.
Note) Remove the optical components and make sure not to hurt them when they are mounted.
FIELD LENS 2 RG (PB64-C)

12JS9761
(Applied to the LT380 Series)
DAICHROIC MIRROR 2 (PB64)

12JS8521
LEAF SPRING MIRROR (PB52)
24H51091
MIRROR 2 (PB52)
12JS8541
LEAF SPRING MIRROR (PB52)

24H51091
RELAY LENS 1 (PB52-C)

12JS8461
DAICHROIC
MIRROR 1 (PB64)
12JS9781
CONDENSER LENS R
(PB52-TC)
12JS8401
LEAF SPRING
MIRROR (PB52)
24H51091
CONDENSER LENS G
(PB52-TC)
12JS8411
MIRROR 2 (PB52)
12JS8541
CONDENSER LENS B
(PB52-TC)
12JS8421
FIELD LENS 2 B (PB64-C)

12JS9771
PLATE (DUCT)
24H51081
1 SRW101
9-20
DISASSEMBLY
Main body
LT380 Series
24DT9922
LT280 Series
24DT9932
MAIN ASSY
LT380 Series
82L096A1
LT280 Series
82L136A1
SRW017
KEY PWB ASSY

81L09N01
SRW011
SRW112
SRW003
BRACKET (KEY-PWB)
24H54311
SRW007
BALLAST SASSY
BRCKET (THERMOSTATS)
24H54971
DUCT (LCD FAN)

24F42091
SRW015
SRW016
EARTH BRACKET (LCD)

24H55331
SRW118
COVER (XDP)
24F42101
SRW0006
SRW014
THERMOSTAT
7N970037
SRW008
SRW002
SRW012
GUIDE BRACKET (IR)
24H55411
SHIELD PLATE (LAMP)

24H54301
SRW011
SHIELD PLATE
(MAIN-PWB)
24H54281
ENGINE SASSY
SRW010
DC FAN D09F-12BS101A (CX)
3N170090
DUCT (LAMP FAN)
24F40071
SRW001
24J27211
DC FAN D06F-12SS701A (EX)

3N170073
SRW009
SRW005
CUSHION
24J247751
SRW005
BRACKET (TH-PWB)
24H55241
DETECT SW SASSY
82L09691
TH2 PWB ASSY
82L13FD1
SRW018
SRW004
POWER SUPPLY-FILTER PB63

3N100821

24H54291
FRONT PANEL (LT380)

24F41071
SRW019
24N07421
SRW019
CUSHION
24J24661
SRW013
POWER SUPPLY-DCPB67
3N100801
REM PWB ASSY

82L13FC1
SRW027
PUSH NUT (3.0)

24N08031
COVER (HANDLE, R)
24F41571
BRACKET
(EXHAUST FAN)
24H55181
3N170092
SPRING
(FOOT, F)
24H54781
LEVER
(FOOT, R)
24F42031
SRW019
SRW019
STRAP W
24J23901
24N08021
BARRIER (POWER)
24J27121
LAMP COVER (LT380) ASSY

24FT9761
LEVER (FOOT, L)
24F41611
SHIELD CASE (POWER) B

24H49521
24N08021
HANDLE
24F41111
FOOT (F)
24F41581
COVER (HANDLE, L)
24F41121
PWB HOLDWE
24C01001
LAMP
(OPTION)
CUSHION (FOOT, F)
24J27291
HOLDER
(FILTER, LT380) ASSY
24FT9601
10-1
LENS COVER (LT380)

24F41091
DISASSEMBLY
Engine sassy
SRW113
RELAY LENS 2 SASSY

82J33321
LT380 Series
82L09311
LT280 Series
82J21311
* Refer to P.11-16 in regard to POLARIZER SASSY/

WV SASSY item.
SPACER RL2 T0.1

SRW113
SRW113
PLATE (WVFIX)
24F41741
SRW114
WV G SASSY
POLARIZER R SASSY
POLARIZER G SASSY

12JS8521
SRW110

12JS9781
LEAF SPRING
MIRROR (PB52)
24H51091
COVER B
24F40162
SRW109
SPACER FL T0.1
FIELD LENS 2RG (PB64-C)

12JS9761
SRW117
24N07421
LEAF SPRING
MIRROR (PB52)
24H51091
SRW113
LEAF SPRING
MIRROR (PB52)
24H51091
MIRROR 2 (PB52)
12JS8541
SRW105
CONDENSER LENS R
(PB52-TC)
12JS8401
CONDENSER LENS G
(PB52-TC)
12JS8411
RELAY LENS 1 (PB52-C)

12JS8461
LEAF SPRING
MIRROR (PB52)
24H51091
CONDENSER LENS B
(PB52-TC)
12JS8421
MIRROR 2 (PB52)
12JS8541
BARRIER (IT)
24H51111
PS-CONVERTER SASSY
82L13221 (LT280)
82J21231 (LT380)
SRW111
INTEGRATOR SASSY
82L09251
LEAF SPRING (M1)

24H51161
PLATE (DUCT)
24H51081
FIELD LENS 2 B (PB64-C)

12JS9771
HOLDER (M1)
24F40321
MIRROR 1 (PB52)
12JS8531
SRW101
10-2
COVER A
24F41701
* Stick the cushion to the

rear surface.
(Refer to P11-13)
SRW116
POLARIZER B SASSY
LT380 Series
82L09121
or
82L09131
LT280 Series
82L13121
or
82L13131
DISASSEMBLY
DC FAN D05F-12BM18B (EX)

3N170089
PWB HOLDER
24C01001
SRW025
POWER SUPPLY-BALLAST PB63
3N100851
SHIELD CASE
(BALLAST, R)
24H54321
SRW028
BARRIER (BALLAST)
24J27111
SRW024
SHIELD CASE (BALLAST, F)

24H54331
10-3
ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM
Assembly Diagram 1
Diagram symbol
PS SASSY
Circuit symbol
Part name
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

SHIELD CASE(POWER)B
PWB HOLDER
BARRIER(POWER)
CN 15P(PW)70W,1061-26
BOTTOM COVER(LT380)ASSY
9
10
CUSHION (30*20*T1)
Part code
Qty
3N100821
3N100801
24H49521
24C01001
24J27121
7NWEW010
24DT9911
1
1
1
3
1
1
1
Remarks
Check the type name.
SAFETY
Check for slantwise insertion and floating.

Attach the power unit (filter) of 1 to
the bottom.
24J27211
24J28711
1
2
3
It shall be inserted
assuredly.
4
5
SAFETY Check the type name

of the power supply.
2
Push it in until the claws are
opened and it cannot be pulled
out.
7
SAFETY Check the type name of

the power supply filter.
8
10
10
Cushion (30*20*T1)
* Adhesion after aligning
to the end planes
Cushion (30*20*T1)
* Stick it by 2/3 from the reverse side and
fold it back by 1/3 to the front side.
9
Core position: As illustrated.
* Approx. 5mm
from the edge
a
b
a: Insert it in between the end planes of the boss power filter PWB
on the bottom.
b: Insert it between the capacitor and the coil of the power filter PWB.
Set the barrier above the

upper bent part of the
power supply.
11-1
ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM
Assembly Diagram 2
Diagram symbol
DUCT (LAMP FAN) SASSY
Circuit symbol
Part name
Part code
Qty
1
2
DC FAN D06F-12SS7 01A (EX)

CUSHION (FAN ROLL)
3N170073
24J24831
1
1
3
4
DUCT (LAMP FAN)

CUSHION (FAN DUCT)
24F40071
24J24582
1
2
SCREW (CBI*3*10*3GF)
24N07421
SRW002
Adjust the fan hole to the embossed part of the bottom.
Remarks
Caution: Disconnection of the

fan wiring material
Stick the cushion, adjusted to the edge of

of the fan.
The cushion shall not be protruded from of the fan.
Caution: The fan wiring material shall not be pinched.
OK
NG
OK
NG
3
Caution: The fan wiring material shall not be pinched.
11-2
ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM
Assembly Diagram 3
Diagram symbol
Circuit symbol
1
2
DETECT SW SASSY
Part name
DETECT SW SASSY
Part code
Qty
82L09691
24N07421
1
1
Remarks
Confirm that the switch tube is present.
Torque : 8~10kgf
Bend the wiring material where no tube

is present. Make forming of the wiring
material beneath the protruded area of
the metal fitting.
Note that pulling the wire materials strongly
can be a cause of SW destruction.
Pass the SW wiring material beneath the metal fitting.

There shall be no "twist" or "sag" in the
wiring material of the power supply.
11-3
ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM
Assembly Diagram 4
Diagram symbol
1
2
3
4
PS SASSY
Circuit symbol
SRW005
Part name
PS SASSY
GASKET (W7*H7*L61)
Part code
Qty
24H54291
24J27561
24N07421
1
1
1
4
Remarks
Torque : 8~10kgf
SAFETY
Insert the wiring
material in CN2
assuredly.
Adjust 3 to the upper

edge of 2.
Adjust 3 to the side

edge of 2.
3
SAFETY Examine the mesh condition between the barrier and the shield.
Mesh between barrier and shield
Set front side: Let the upper barrier stay outside
the lower barrier.
Let the shield stay outside the barrier.
Let the lower shield stay outside.

Lamp side:
Let the upper barrier stay outside

the lower barrier.
Core position
of the power
cable
Pass the power

cable here.
NG
Lay the cable in this notch.
11-4
ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM
Assembly Diagram 5
Diagram symbol
1
2
3
4
5
6
DETECT (LCD FAN) SASSY
Circuit symbol
SRW003
Part name
DC FAN D09F-12BS1 01A(CX)
CUSHION (FAN ROLL)
DUCT LCDFAN (LT380)
CUSHION FAN DUCT (LT380)
CUSHION (20*5*T1)
Part code
Qty
3N170090
24J24831
24F42091
24J25751
24N07421
24J28771
1
1
1
3
4
1
Remarks
Torque : 8~10kgf
Caution: Disconnection of
the fan wiring
material
OK
SAFETY Remove the spacers.
(Prevention of fan rotation blocking)
Remove the spacer for rotor block

protection.
(Spacers should be abandoned.)
NG
Stick the cushion, adjusted to the edge of of the fan.

The cushion shall not be protruded from of the fan.
Remove the peel-off paper from the cushion fan

duct and join the fan positioning hole and the duct
(fan LCD) boss for combination (2 positions).
* Caution: Apply the positioning boss to the

fan hole.
Wire lead-out position

Pass the fan cable through the notch part of
the duct and put it on the bottom.
6
Cushion (20*5*T1)
* Stick it to the center, and
nothing shall be protruded
from the duct.
5
When putting the duct on the bottom, do it carefully

so that the fan cable is nod disengaged from the
notch part of the duct.
Duct (LCD) fan
* Caution: Never pinch the fan wire materials
between the bottom and the duct
(LCD fan).
11-5
ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM
Assembly Diagram 6
Diagram symbol
1
Circuit symbol
HOLDER (FILTER, LT380) SASSY

Part name
Part code
Qty
HOLDER(FILTER, LT380) ASSY
24FT9601
Remarks
11-6
ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM
Assembly Diagram 7
Diagram symbol
EXHAUST FAN ASSY
Circuit symbol
Part code
Qty
BRACKET(EXHAUST FAN)
PL-CPIMS*3*30*3KF
24H55181
3N170092
24V00401
1
1
2
4
5
CUSHION(EXHAUST FAN)T
CUSHION(10*65*4)
24J24661
24J27931
1
1
CUSHION(EXHAUST FAN) T
24J24661
1
2
3
SRW027
Part name
Remarks
Torque : 4~6kgf
Do not pass the wiring material through this hook.
Stick it by moving 5
to the side.
11-7
ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM
Assembly Diagram 8
Diagram symbol
1
2
Circuit symbol
SRW004
EXHAUST FAN SASSY

Part name
EXHAUST FAN SASSY
SCREW(CBI*3*10*3GF)
Part code
Qty
24N07421
1
2
Remarks
Torque : 8~10kgf
The metal fitting (exhaust fan) of the exhaust fan SASSY shall
come in contact with the gasket (power supply) of the shield
(power supply) T.
11-8
ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM
Assembly Diagram 9
Diagram symbol
1
2
3
4
SEPARATE BASE SASSY
Circuit symbol
SRW101
Part name
Part code
Qty
SEPARATE BASE(PB52)
LEAF SPRING(M1)
24F40193
24H51161
1
1
PLATE(DUCT)
CBIPS*2*6*3KF
24H51081
24N05321
1
2
Remarks
Torque : 3~4kgf
3
4
11-9
ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM
Assembly Diagram 10
Diagram symbol
SEPARATE BASE SASSY
Circuit symbol
Part name
Part code
Qty
Remarks
SEPARATE BASE SASSY
LAMP(PB64) SASSY
Option
Torque : 8~10kgf
SRW006
SCREW(CBI*3*10*3GF)
24N07421
Accessory screw attached to 2

2
Accessory screw attached to 2
11-10
ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM
Assembly Diagram 11
Diagram symbol Circuit symbol
INTEGRATOR SASSY/PS-CONVERTER SASSY

Part name
Part code
Qty
Remarks
BARRIER(IT)
24H51111
INTEGRATOR SASSY
82L09251
3
3
PS-CONVERTER SASSY
PS-CONVERTER SASSY
82J21231
82J33231
OR
1
LT380 Series
LT380 Series
3
3
PS-CONVERTER SASSY
PS-CONVERTER SASSY
82L13221
82L13231
1
OR
LT280 Series
LT280 Series
SRW105
CBIPS*2*6*3KF
24N05321
Torque : 3~4kgf
SRW109
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
24V00281
Torque : 2.5~3.5kgf
4
LT280 Series
LT380 Series
11-11
ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM
Assembly Diagram 12
Diagram symbol
1
2
3
4
5
6
6
8
9
10
11
12
13
OPTICAL
Circuit symbol
CLB-J
CLG-J
CLG-J
SRW111
LT280 Series
7
Thick
Part name
Part code
Qty
DAICHROIC MIRROR 1(PB64)

RELAY LENS 1(PB52-C)
MIRROR 2(PB52)
CONDENSER LENS B(PB52-TC)
CONDENSER LENS G(PB52-TC)
MIRROR 1(PB52)
HOLDER(M1)
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
FIELD LENS2B(PB64-C)
FIELD LENS2RG(PB64-C)
LEAF SPRING MIRROR(PB52)
12JS9781
12JS8521
12JS8461
12JS8541
12JS8421
12JS8411
112JS8401
12JS8531
24F40321
24V00281
12JS9771
12JS9761
24H51091
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
8
5
With mark
8
DP side
on the
mark
Remarks
Torque : 2.5~3.5kgf
LT380 Series
LT380 Series
10
10
13: 8 positions
4
XDP side
on the mark
LT380 Series
7
Thick
2
XDP side on the mark
5
With mark
1
8
DP side
on the
mark
13: 8 positions
4
XDP side
on the mark
11
XDP side
on the mark
3
2
XDP side
on the mark
1
12
LT380 Series only
11-12
LT380 Series only
ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM
Assembly Diagram 13
Diagram symbol
Circuit symbol
COVER SASSY
Part name
Part code
Qty
COVER A (LT380)
24F41701
2
2
CUSHION(COVER A)
CUSHION(COVER A)
24J24571
24J24571
7
4
Remarks
LT380 Series
LT280 Series
Embossed parts
The three positions of the condenser lens shall be firmly

stuck so that they do not overlie on the embossed parts.
LT380 Series
LT280 Series
1
2
The three positions of the field lens and the UV filter shall
be firmly stuck so that they settle in the surrounded area
assuredly.
11-13
ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM
Assembly Diagram 14
COVER A SASSY

1
Part name
Part code
COVER A SASSY
SRW117
Qty
Remarks
SCREW(CBI*3*10*3GF)
24N07421
Torque : 6~8kgf
Fasten it in the
first place
11-14
ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM
Assembly Diagram 15
RELAY LENS 2 SASSY/FIELD LENS (PB64) SASSY
Part code
Qty
SPACER RL2 T0.1(PB52)

24H51291
24H51301
24H51311
24H51322
24H51332
0.5
0.5
0.3
0.9
1.0
RELAY LENS 2 SASSY

PL-CPIMS*2.5*8*3KF
82J33321
24V00011
1
1
4
4
4
4
4
SPACER FL T0.1(PB52)
24H51241
24H51251
24H51261
24H51272
24H51282
0.5
0.5
0.3
0.9
1.0
5
5
FIELD LENS(PB64) SASSY

82L09311
82J21311
1
1
LT380 Series
LT280 Series
PL-CPIMS*2.5*8*3KF
COVER B
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
24V00011
24F40162
24V00281
1
1
2
Torque : 2.5~3.5kgf
1
1
1
1
1
2
3
SRW115
6
7
8
SRW114
SRW110
Part name
Remarks
Selected and used at the time of adjustment)
Torque 2.5~3.5kgf
Torque : 2.5~3.5kgf
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.5
1.0
66
55
1.0
0.5
0.3
0.2
0.1
44
11-15
ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM
Assembly Diagram 16
POLARIZER SASSY/WV G SASSY

1
2
POL-B
Part name
HOLDER(POL T0.5)
POLARIZER B(PB64-A)
Part code
24F40271
12JS9581
Qty
1
1
3
4
POL-G
HOLDER POL (LT380)

POLARIZER G(PB64-A)
24F41721
12JS9571
1
1
5
6
POL-R
HOLDER (POL T0.5)

POLARIZER R(PB64-A)
24F40271
12JS9561
1
1
10
7
7
WV G
WV G
HOLDER WV (LT380)
WVFILM-M (PB64)
WVFILM-H (PB64)
24F41731
12JT1141
12JT1151
1
1
1
Applied to the OPT BASE LRL SASSY

Applied to the OPT BASE RLR SASSY
8
9
SRW113
PLATE(WV FIX)
PL-CPIMS*2.5*8*3KF
24F41741
24V00011
1
3
Torque : 2.5~3.5kgf
For the WV G SASSY and the Deflection Plate G SASSY,

put their holder guides in the same groove of the separation
base.
Remarks
10
WV G SASSY (Use the item that is contained in the same
case for the OPT Base SASSY.)
WV G SASSY
Confirm the G mark position of WV.

Chiral LRL: Mark at top right (1 point in green)
WV G SASSY
Chiral RLR: Mark at top right (2 points in green
or 1 point in black)
WV G SASSY
POLARIZER * SASSY
POLARIZER R SASSY
POLARIZER G SASSY
5
Let the
mark face
top left.
6
POLARIZER:
Let the convex plane face the
opposite side of the holder.
* The guides on both sides of the WV G /

POLARIZER G holder shall be put in the
same groove of the separation base.
* From the plane of incidence, the deflection
plate G SASSY / WV G SASSY shall be
entered in this order.
POLARIZER B SASSY
1
Let the
mark face
top left.
4
Mark of the POLARIZER R
Mark of the POLARIZER G (Film size)
LT380
LT280 Series: 1 point in red
LT380
LT280 Series: 1 point in green
(Film size 20.5 x 17)
Let the
mark face
top left.
2
Mark of the POLARIZER B (Thickness)
(Film size)
LT380
LT280 Series: 1 point in blue (Thickness 0.5)
(Film size 20.5 x 17)
8 8
11-16
ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM
Assembly Diagram 17
BALLAST SASSY

1
2
3
4
5
6
SRW025
7
8
10
11
12
13
CNDC
CNLC
SRW024
Part name
Part code
Qty
SHIELD CASE(BALLAST,R)
PWB HOLDER
BARRIER(BALLAST)
24H54321
24C01001
24J27111
1
3
1
DC FAN D05F-12BM 18B(EX)

PL-CPIMS*3*30*3KF
3N170089
24V00401
3N100851
1
2
1
7NW3W057
7NW5W041
24V00281
24H54331
24V00281
92203961
1
1
1
1
1
1
CN 3P(DC) 225W,1015-22
CN5P(LC)260W,1061-28
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SHIELD CASE(BALLAST,F)
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
TAPE,SCOTCH SUPER10
SRW028
Remarks
Torque : 4~6kgf
Type name: PHG201G21CD
SAFETY
Torque : 2.5~3.5kgf
Torque : 2.5~3.5kgf
Approx. 30mm
Check the type

name of the
SAFETY power supply.
10
3: Put this part on the outside.
Push it in until the

claws are opened
and it cannot be
pulled out.
12
4
8
11
5
7
Mesh of the shield

Upper
plane
SAFETY
SAFETY
Lower
plane
Insert 7 assuredly in
CN1 of 6.
Direction of 7:
Insert the side in 6 where the distance is
shorter between terminal and tube.
(Because of variations in the tube length,
it may be difficult to identify the polarity
visually. In such a case, either side can be
inserted.)
55mm
155mm
Other than the
VT676 System,
without core
1 is positioned
outside here.
13
Hook the wire material on the barrier claw.
11 is positioned
outside here.
11-17
ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM
Assembly Diagram 18
BALLAST SASSY

1
Part name
Part code
BALLAST SASSY
Qty
Remarks
SRW007
SCREW(CBI*3*10*3GF)
24N07421
Torque : 8~10kgf
SRW008
PL-CPIMS*2.5*8*3KF
24V00011
Torque : 2.5~3.5kgff
Insert the wiring material in CN3 of the

PS assuredly.
SAFETY
Insert the wiring material

of 1 in CN3 assuredly.
CN3
Pass the
cable
here
Position of the wiring material

for the detector SW
Lamp
connector
11-18
ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM
Assembly Diagram 19
1
2
3
SRW118
THERMOSTAT
Part name
Part code
Qty
THERMOSTAT UP62G-120 L50

BRACKET(THERMOSTATS)
7N970037
24H54971
1
1
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
24V00281
Remarks
Torque : 2.5~3.5kgf
When combining the metal fittings (bimetal) and the

thermostat, adjust it to this pin and push it in from the
direction of the arrow. (* This work should be done
preventing the metal fitting pin from bending.)
* The display side of the thermostat shall be positioned
to face downwards.
3
Pay attention to the mounting

direction.
The display plane shall be seen.
11-19
ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM
Assembly Diagram 20
OPT BASE SASSY
Part name
Part code
Qty
Remarks
1
1
OPTBASE LRL(PB64) SASSY

OPTBASE RLR(PB64) SASSY
82L09121
82L09131
1
OR
LT380 Series
1
1

82L13121
82L13131
1
OR
LT280 Series
SCREW,PL-CPIMS*3*8*3GF
24V00111
COVER XDP (LT380)
24F42101
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
24V00281
SRW116
3
4
SRW112
Torque : 4~6kgf
Torque : 2.5~3.5kgf
* The OPT Base SASSY shall be mounted by

rightward rotation.
11-20
ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM
Assembly Diagram 21
REM-PWB

1
1
2
SRW013
Part name
Part code
Qty
REM PWB ASSY

REM PWB ASSY
82L09FC1
82L13FC1
1
OR
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
24V00281
3
4
Remarks
Torque : 2.5~3.5kgf
Lay the wire materials
Insert the wiring material POF2.
Caution for mounting: There shall be no short-circuiting of lead wires

of the REM-PWB parts to the power case.
4
POF2
3
Lay wire materials
of the fan in the
power case.
11-21
ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM
Assembly Diagram 22
TH2 PWB ASSY
Part name
Part code
Qty
BRACKET(TH-PWB)
24H55241
2
2
TH2 PWB ASSY

TH2 PWB ASSY
82L09FD1
82L13FD1
1
OR
Remarks
SRW009
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
24V00281
Torque : 2.5~3.5kgf
SRW010
SCREW(CBI*3*10*3GF)
24N07421
Torque : 8~10kgf
11-22
ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM
Assembly Diagram 23
1
2
SRW018
FRONT PANEL (LT380)

Part name
Part code
Qty
FRONT PANEL (LT380)
24F41071
24V007421
Remarks
Torque : 8~10kgf
11-23
ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM
Assembly Diagram 24
SHIELD PLATE/EARTH BRACKET

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
SRW011
SRW012
SRW011
SRW029
Part name
SHIELD PLATE (MAIN-PWB)
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SHIELD PLATE (LAMP)
CUSHION (25*5*T1)
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
EARTH BRACKET (LCD)
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
E10K250-28X28H
Part code
Qty
24H54281
24V00281
24H54301
24J28721
24V00281
24H55332
24V00281
24V00281
7N970027
1
2
1
3
4
1
1
1
1
Remarks
Torque : 2.5~3.5kgf
Torque : 2.5~3.5kgf
Torque : 2.5~3.5kgf
Torque : 2.5~3.5kgf
* Stick it by 1/2 each to the

front and the rear.
4
4
Adjust it to the
bending line.
End plane
adjustment
6
9
Adjust it to this line of the LCD earth

metal fitting.
11-24
ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM
Assembly Diagram 25
WIRRING

1
2
3
4
5
6
Part name
TAPE (35*28)
CUSHION (25*10*T3)
CUSHION (22*10*T8)
CORE E04RA120070060
TAPE, SCOTCH SUPER10
Part code
Qty
24J28781
24J28741
24J28731
6N160017
92203961
92203961
1
1
1
1
1
1
Remarks
Approx. 30mm
Approx. 30mm
* Tape (35*28)
Adjust and stick it to the corner of the step of the
duct LCD.
* Cushion (22*10*T8)
Adjust the center of the cushion to the boss of
the bottom, and stick it to top of the duct LCD.
* Cushion (25*18*T3)
Adjust it to the step of the duct LCD and stick it
to the corner.
The height should be adjusted to the top of the
duct LCD.
It shall not override the boss of the bottom.
4
Give one turn of the P0F1 cable to the ferrite core

(6N160017). (Pass it twice.)
205
Pass the POF1 cable between two positions of

the boss.
20~30mm
Lay the POF1 cable along inside of the boss of

the duct (fan LCD) and bend it twice. (20~30mm)
Fasten the POF1 cable with an adhesion tape.

Separate the POLC and P0F4 cables from P0F1
so that they do not come in contact with POF1.
Fasten the POLC and POF4 cables with adhesion
tapes to the ridge lines (corners) of the duct
(fan LCD).
11-25
ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM
Assembly Diagram 26
MAIN SASSY
Part name
Part code
Qty
Remarks
82L096A1
82L136A1
24V00281
1
1
4
LT380 Series
LT280 Series
Torque : 2.5~3.5kgf
1
1
2
SRW014
MAIN SASSY
MAIN SASSY
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
3
4
SRW030
GUIDE BRACKET (IR)

PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
24H55411
24V00281
1
1
Torque : 2.58~3.5kgf
SRW015
SCREW(CBI*3*10*3GF)
24N07421
Torque : 8~10kgf
3
2
11-26
ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM
Assembly Diagram 27
MAIN SASSY
Part name
Part code
Qty
1 ~12
Remarks
Insert the wiring materials and flexible
parts.
13
14
15
16
SRW016
CABLE, FFC 24P*45 P0.5 AU K

BRACKET (KEY-PWB)
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
7N500035
92203961
24H54311
24V00281
1
1
1
1
Approx. 30mm
Torque : 2.58~3.5kgf
14
POPW
(15p)
PORM
(6p)
REM-PWB
PS
14:
Fix the wiring materials of
the exhaust fan.
10 XDP flexible BPOPB

11 XDP flexible GPOPG
12 XDP flexible RPOPR
Put the protruded wire

materials in the notch
of the MAIN PWB.
TH2-PWB(2p)POTH2
16
15
8
POF3Exhaust fan (3p)
POBMThermostat (2p)
POCVDetector SW (2p)
BS (fan) (4p)POF4
BS(5p)POLC
Suction fan (3p)POF1
13
Let the flexible terminal contacts face upwards.
Wire material
treatment
Form the wire materials of POF4 and POLC so that they

are positioned apart from the POF1 side.
Put the sag of the wire materials beneath the MAIN PWB.
11-27
ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM
Assembly Diagram 28
KEY PWB ASSY

1
2
SRW017
Part name
Part code
Qty
KEY PWB ASSY
81L09N01
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
24V00281
Remarks
Torque : 2.5~3.5kgf
Pass the flexible part.
CUSHION(LED)
24J28141
Push in the wire materials to inside of the

front panel. (Pinching prohibited)
MAIN flexiblePOCT2
Put the protruded flexible

cable beneath the KEY PWB.
11-28
ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM
Assembly Diagram 29
TOP COVER ASSY
Part name
1
1
2
3
4
5
SRW019
Part code
Qty
TOP COVER(LT380)ASSY
CUSHION (40*10*T1)
24DT9922
24DT9932
24J28751
1
1
1
TAPE (50*10)
24J28761
CAUTION LABEL(SERVICE)
SCREW(CBI*3*10*3GF)
LAMP COVER(LT380) ASSY
LENS COVER (LT380)
24L46401
24N07421
24FT9761
24F41091
1
6
1
1
Remarks
LT380 Series
LT280 Series
(Top Cover ASSY is applicable to Issue (1) only.)
(Top Cover ASSY is applicable to Issue (1) only.)
Torque : 6~8kgf
Cushion (40*10*T1)
* To be stuck to the center of the space
Tape (50*10)
* End plane adjustment
(The fitting block with the
bottom shall not be protruded.)
Tape (50*10)
* End plane adjustment
(The fitting block with the
bottom shall not be protruded.)
Tape (50*10)
* To be stuck as illustrated
LT380 Series
1
2
LT280 Series
Adjust it to the circle

( ) of the top cover.
SAFETY
Never forget the adhesion of labels.
11-29
ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM
Assembly Diagram 30
LABEL

1
2
3
4
5
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
7
Part name
PC CARD(DUMMY)
STRAP W
CAUTION LABEL (HEAT)
LABEL(LENS4)
CAUTION LABEL(FILTER)
NAME PLATE (LT380)
NAME PLATE (LT380)
NAME PLATE (LT380+)
NAME PLATE (LT280)
NAME PLATE (LT280)
NAME PLATE (LT280+)
NAME PLATE (LT375+)
LABEL,SERIAL MANUFACTURE
CCC LABEL
SAFETY
Never fail to stick the rear nameplate and the caution label.
(Requirements for the Safety Standard)
SAFETY
Confirm that indications of the respective Safety Standard items

are printed on the rear nameplate. (Requirements for the Safety
Standard)
SAFETY
Part code
24FT9231
24J23901
24L59551
24L59221
24L58621
24L58572
24L58592
24L59251
24L58582
24L58602
24L59241
24L59961
24L55991
Qty
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Remarks
LT380 Series
LT380/LT380G/LT380J Made in Japan
LT380/LT380G/LT380J Made in China
LT380+
LT280/LT280G/LT280J Made in Japan
LT280/LT280G/LT280J Made in China
LT280+
LT375+
LT380/LT280/LT375+
Confirm the plant identification number on the rear nameplate.

TTS For North America: 720TTS
For domestic use :
(Requirements for the Safety
Standard)
Insert the spring knot

in the hole of the set.
Pass a string through the

hole, let the lens go through,
and pull the string.
Pass the string through

the slit and pull it as far
as a small hole.
2 ~ 5mm from the

lower ridge line
2 ~ 5mm from the

end plane of the
hole
CAUTION label (Lens 4)
From the upper

ridge line
2 ~ 5mm
CAUTION label
(High temperature)
2 ~ 5mm from the

end plane of the
hole
ccc
4~6mm
1~2mm
7
1~2mm
4~6mm
Rear
nameplate
Method of rear nameplate adhesion

(Side view)
Adhesion should be conducted for each
side by the method shown below.
1 Remove the peel-off paper of the rear nameplate
only from the center to either side. By doing so,
press this section from above by means of
SET
a rubber spatula.
Rubber
spatula
Peel-off
paper
2 Also for the opposite side, adhesion should

be carried out in the same manner.
Let the convex side face this side.

SET
11-30
PACKAGING
Packing Details
(The illustration below shows the preliminary work before packaging.)
Position of strap mounting hole:

Near the bottom right
After putting the set in the protection bag, put it in a soft case.
Protection bag (420*460)

(24M16171)
Main body
Soft case (LT380)

(24BS7561)
Fold back the protection bag upwards.
Reuse the polyethylene bag that has been

used to pack the soft case.
(Folding back shall be done on the bottom
side of the soft case.)
12-1
PACKAGING
Refer to Page 12-4 in regard to the order

of accessory accommodation.
Accommodation of Holder
(PC CARD)/PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
Holder (PC CARD)
(24F41391)
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
(24V00281)
Protection bag (Screw)

(24M18361)
Spacer (LT380)
(24MV0461)
Direction: The handle block
shall be positioned upwards.
Accessory box (LT380)
(24MV0481)
Front side
Left side
Carton box (LT380)

(24MV0491)
Refer to Page 12-3 in regard to the method of
closing the bottom plane.
12-2
PACKAGING
How to close the bottom plane of the corrugated cardboard box:

Close the flaps in the order of numbers.
2
4
Base side
Projector warranty sheet 7N8P0021

Put it in the warranty sheet container (polyethylene)
100*200 78047921 and fasten it to the inner flap by
means of an adhesive tape.
* For the J version only
Front side
Fasten it to top of the inserted flap.
12-3
PACKAGING
List of Applicable Parts
List of Accessories
(The order of accommodation shall conform to the table below.)
Item name
LT280/LT380
Materials code
7N900691
7N900721
7N080220
7N520054
RD424-E
Receiver unit T104
POW code U2 L4.5 7.0A LF H
Cable RGB 1.8M VER4 TE
6N800005
Battery LR6 (JE) CPT
24F41391
Holder (PC CARD)
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
24V00281
2005PJ CD-ROM
7N950781
LT80 User's manual CD-ROM (U/G/J)
7N950771
Label (Security) UFJ
24L49991
Label (Security) GIS
24L50152
Label (INSTA CARE) (VT75LP)
24L55231
LT80 Important info (U/G)
8N8P6241
LT80 Warranty sheet (U)
7N8P6261
LT80 Network guide (U/G)
7N8P6251
LT80 Quick guide (U/G)
7N8P6231
Registration card (USA)
7N8P1351
LT280G/LT380G
Item name
Materials code
RD424-E
7N900691
Receiver unit T104
7N900721
POW code E2 L4.5 2.5A LF K
7N080007
7N520054
6N800005
Holder (PC CARD)
24F41391
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
24V00281
2005PJ CD-ROM
7N950781
7N950771
24L49991
Label (Security) GIS
24L50152
LT80 Important info (U/G)
8N8P6241
Warranty (EUROPE)
7N8P1612
LT80 Network guide (U/G)
7N8P6251
LT80 Quick guide (U/G)
7N8P6231
LT280J/LT380J
Item name
Materials code
7N900691
RD424-E
7N900721
Receiver unit T104
7N080115
POW code J2 L4.5 7.0A LF K
7N520054
Holder (PC CARD)
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PC card (LAN) TMW1059-N1
2005PJ CD-ROM
LT80 Network guide (J)
LT80 Quick guide (J)
LT80 Complementary Manual (J)
VLC registration
6N800005
24F41391
24V00281
7N970029
7N950781
7N950771
24L49991
7N8P6291
7N8P6271
7N8P6281
7N8P0963
Q'ty
Remarks
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Q'ty
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Q'ty
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
To be contained in the same

protection bag (screws).
Remarks

Remarks

The following items shall be printed on the barcode serial label (16761791).
LTxxxx
Model name
Commodity No.
Serial NO.
12-4
PACKAGING
Stick the bar code serial label to the corrugated cardboard box in the specified position.
NEC
Bar code serial label
(To be stuck to top of the frame)
* The printed Label shall be concealed.
(Left side)
Adhesion of the label (carton)

Stick the label (carton) to the position specified in the illustration below (2 pcs.)
It shall be adjusted to [ ] printed on the corrugated cardboard and then stuck.
Rear side
Front side
Left side
Right side
Label (carton)
Refer to the table shown below in regard to the label (carton) used for each model.
Carton label
Model name
Carton label
LT380
LT380G
24L58651
24L58661
LT380 TTS
LT380G TTS
24L58681
24L58691
LT380J
LT280
LT280G
LT280J
24L58671
24L58771
24L58721
24L58731
LT380J TTS
LT280 TTS
LT280G TTS
LT280J TTS
24L58701
24L58741
24L58751
24L58761
Model name
12-5
REPLACEMENT PART LIST

Notes:
1. Parts orders must contain model name, parts number and description.
2. When you place an order for spare parts, please refer to the respective service manual and mention the right parts number on your P.O.
Sheets.
3. The components identitied by a mark or with the symbol Nos. shaded are critical for safety. Replace only with parts number specified.
The letters NSP in the table indicate non-service parts.
4. Please note that the part, which is attached with an asterisk (*) at the head of its part number, is not in stock.
Since this part is rarely used, it is not registered in some cases.
If the part is needed, it will be registered and kept in stock.
1. LT380series (LT380, LT380G, LT380J, LT380+)
SYMBOL
PART NO
DESCRIPTION
REMARK
*** PWB ASSYS ***

82L096A1
82L096C1
82L096D1
81L09N01
MAIN SASSY
REM PWB ASSY
TH2 PWB ASSYASSY
KEY_PWB PWB ASSY
*** ELECTRICAL PARTS & MISCELLANEOUS PARTS ***

3N100801
3N100821
3N100851
3N170073
DC FAN D06F-12SS7 01A(EX)
3N170089
3N170090
3N170092
3N670231
LCD L3P08X-55G10R
3N670233
LCD L3P08X-55G10B
3N670241
LCD L3P08X-56G10R
3N670232
LCD L3P08X-55G10G
3N670242
LCD L3P08X-56G10G
3N670243
LCD L3P08X-56G10B
N.S.P
6N160017
CORE E04RA120070060
SPK
6N300016
SPEAKER 40X40 8H 1.5W L50
N.S.P
7N500035
CABLE,FFC 24P*45 P0.5 AU
N.S.P
7N970027
E10K250-28X28H
7N970037
N.S.P
7N970046
E10K025-14X14H
N.S.P
7NW20030
CN 2P(CV)130S,1061-26
CNDC
N.S.P
7NW3W057
CN 3P(DC) 225W,1015-22
CNLC
N.S.P
7NW5W041
CN5P(LC)260W,1061-28
7NWEW010
CN 15P(PW)70W,1061-26
82L09691
DETECT SW SASSY
*** APPEARANCE PARTS ***
CLR-J
12JS8401
CLG-C
12JS8411
CLB-J
12JS8421
12JS8461
12JS8521
12JS8531
12JS8541
POL-R
12JS9561
POL-G
12JS9571
POL-B
12JS9581
12JS9761
12JS9771
12JS9781
WV
12JT1141
WV
12JT1151
N.S.P
24C01001
24DT9911
24DT9922
N.S.P
24DT9941
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
24F39951
24F40071
24F40162
24F40193
24F40271
24F40281
For 82L09121
For 82L09121
For 82L09121
For 82L09131
For 82L09131
For 82L09131
CONDENSER LENS R(PB52-TC)

MIRROR 1(PB52)
MIRROR 2(PB52)
POLARIZER R(PB64-A)
POLARIZER G(PB64-A)
POLARIZER B(PB64-A)
FIELD LENS2RG(PB64-C)
FIELD LENS2B(PB64-C)
WVFILM-M(PB64)
Applied to the OPTBASE LRL SASSY
WVFILM-H(PB64)
Applied to the OPTBASE RLR SASSY
PWB HOLDER
LT380,LT380G and VT380J only
TOP COVER(LT380+)ASSY
LT380+ only
Although original Part number for + version is written here for just reference,
common part with other version will be supplied.
HOLDER(IT)
DUCT(LAMP FAN)
COVER B
SEPARATE BASE(PB52)
HOLDER(POL T0.5)
HOLDER(RL2)
13-1
LT380 series
N.S.P
24F40321
24F41071
24F41091
24F41111
N.S.P
24F41121
N.S.P
24F41161
N.S.P
24F41571
24F41581
N.S.P
24F41591
N.S.P
24F41601
N.S.P
24F41611
N.S.P
24F41701
N.S.P
24F41711
N.S.P
24F41721
N.S.P
24F41731
N.S.P
24F41741
N.S.P
24F42031
N.S.P
24F42051
N.S.P
24F42061
N.S.P
24F42071
N.S.P
24F42081
N.S.P
24F42091
N.S.P
24F42101
N.S.P
24FT9231
24FT9601
24FT9761
N.S.P
24H49521
N.S.P
24H51081
N.S.P
24H51091
N.S.P
24H51101
N.S.P
24H51111
N.S.P
24H51161
24H51241
24H51251
24H51261
24H51272
24H51282
24H51291
24H51301
24H51311
24H51322
N.S.P
24H54281
N.S.P
24H54291
N.S.P
24H54301
N.S.P
24H54311
N.S.P
24H54321
N.S.P
24H54331
N.S.P
24H54341
N.S.P
24H54671
N.S.P
24H54781
N.S.P
24H54951
N.S.P
24H54971
N.S.P
24H55181
N.S.P
24H55241
N.S.P
24H55321
N.S.P
24H55332
N.S.P
24H55351
N.S.P
24H55361
N.S.P
24H55371
N.S.P
24H55381
N.S.P
24H55411
N.S.P
24H56731
N.S.P
24HS4121
24J23901
N.S.P
24J24571
N.S.P
24J24582
24J24661
24J24831
N.S.P
24J27111
N.S.P
24J27121
N.S.P
24J27211
24J27291
24J27301
N.S.P
24J27311
N.S.P
24J27391
N.S.P
24J27551
N.S.P
24J27561
N.S.P
24J27571
HOLDER(M1)
FRONT PANEL(LT380)
LENS COVER(LT380)
HANDLE
COVER(HANDLE,L)
HOLDER(FILTER,LT380)
COVER(HANDLE,R)
FOOT(F)
HOLDER(FOOT,L)
HOLDER(FOOT,R)
LEVER(FOOT,L)
COVER A(LT380)
HOLDER FL(LT380)
HOLDER POL(LT380)
HOLDER WV(LT380)
PLATE(WV FIX)
LEVER(FOOT,R)
HOLDER ANL(T1.5 R)
HOLDER ANL(T1.5 L)
HOLDER ANL(T0.5 R)
HOLDER ANL(T0.5 L)
DUCT LCDFAN(LT380)
COVER XDP(LT380)
PC CARD(DUMMY)
HOLDER(FILTER,LT380) ASSY
LAMP COVER(LT380)ASSY
SHIELD CASE(POWER)B
PLATE(DUCT)
BRACKET(PBS)
BARRIER(IT)
LEAF SPRING(M1)
SHIELD PLATE(MAIN-PWB)
SHIELD CASE(POWER,T)
SHIELD PLATE(LAMP)
BRACKET(KEY-PWB)
BRACKET(I/O,LT380)
BRACKET(SW)
SPRING(FOOT F)
BRACKET LCD(LT380)
BRACKET(TH-PWB)
EARTH BRACKET(PS-TH)
EARTH BRACKET(LCD)
EARTH PLATE(IO)
EARTH BRACKET(FAN)
EARTH BRACKET(FAN-TH)
BRACKET(LAMP)
GUIDE BRACKET(IR)
BRACKET(SPEAKER)
SHIELD PLATE(LAMP)ASSY
STRAP W
CUSHION(COVER A)
CUSHION (FAN DUCT)
CUSHION (FAN ROLL)
BARRIER(BALLAST)
BARRIER(POWER)
BARRIER(FILTER-PWB)
CUSHION(FOOT F)
CUSHION(FOOT R)
CUSHION(LAMP FAN)
FILTER(SIDE)
BARRIER(PC CARD)
GASKET(W7*H7*L61)
CUSHION FAN DUCT(LT380)
Parts for adjustment of

optical system.
13-2
LT380 series
N.S.P
24J27931
N.S.P
24J27991
N.S.P
24J28141
N.S.P
24J28551
N.S.P
24J28701
N.S.P
24J28711
N.S.P
24J28721
N.S.P
24J28731
N.S.P
24J28741
N.S.P
24J28751
N.S.P
24J28771
N.S.P
24J28781
N.S.P
24J28861
N.S.P
24JS1641
N.S.P
24K26052
24L46401
24L55991
24L57641
24L58572
24L58592
24L58621
24L59221
24L59551
24L59251
24L59271
24L59281
24L59561
SRW101
N.S.P
24N05321
SRW105
N.S.P
24N05321
N.S.P
24N05831
SRW023
N.S.P
24N07421
SRW117
N.S.P
24N07421
SRW001
N.S.P
24N07421
SRW002
N.S.P
24N07421
SRW003
N.S.P
24N07421
SRW004
N.S.P
24N07421
SRW005
N.S.P
24N07421
SRW006
N.S.P
24N07421
SRW007
N.S.P
24N07421
SRW010
N.S.P
24N07421
SRW015
N.S.P
24N07421
SRW018
N.S.P
24N07421
SRW019
N.S.P
24N07421
SRW103
N.S.P
24N07961
SRW103
N.S.P
24N07961
N.S.P
24N08021
N.S.P
24N08031
SRW113
N.S.P
24V00011
SRW114
N.S.P
24V00011
SRW115
N.S.P
24V00011
SRW008
N.S.P
24V00011
SRW116
N.S.P
24V00111
SRW026
N.S.P
24V00191
SRW021
N.S.P
24V00281
SRW022
N.S.P
24V00281
SRW024
N.S.P
24V00281
SRW028
N.S.P
24V00281
SRW109
N.S.P
24V00281
SRW110
N.S.P
24V00281
SRW111
N.S.P
24V00281
SRW112
N.S.P
24V00281
SRW009
N.S.P
24V00281
SRW011
N.S.P
24V00281
SRW012
N.S.P
24V00281
SRW013
N.S.P
24V00281
SRW014
N.S.P
24V00281
SRW016
N.S.P
24V00281
SRW017
N.S.P
24V00281
SRW029
N.S.P
24V00281
SRW030
N.S.P
24V00281
SRW031
N.S.P
24V00281
SRW118
N.S.P
24V00281
SRW102
N.S.P
24V00371
SRW102
N.S.P
24V00371
SRW025
N.S.P
24V00401
SRW027
N.S.P
24V00401
82J21231
82J33231
CUSHION(10*65*4)
GASKET(W5*H5.5*L10)
CUSHION(LED)
BARRIER(SHIELD,DVI)
CUSHION(SPEAKER,B)
CUSHION(30*20*T1)
CUSHION(25*5*T1)
CUSHION(22*10*T8)
CUSHION(25*18*T3)
CUSHION(40*10*T1)
CUSHION(20*5*T1)
TAPE(35*28)
TAPE(50*12)
BARRIER(FILTER-PWB)ASSY
DECOR PLATE(I/O,LT380)
LABEL(WEEE)(HR)
NAME PLATE(LT380)
NAME PLATE(LT380)TS
LABEL(LENS4)
CAUTION LABEL(HEAT)
NAME PLATE(LT380+)TS
CAUTION LABEL(FILTER,+)
CAUTION LABEL(LENS4,+)
CAUTION LABEL(HEAT,+)
CBIPS*2*6*3KF
CBIPS*2*6*3KF
STUD(D-SUB)
SCREW(CBI*3*10*3GF)
SCREW(CBI*3*10*3GF)
SCREW(CBI*3*10*3GF)
SCREW(CBI*3*10*3GF)
SCREW(CBI*3*10*3GF)
SCREW(CBI*3*10*3GF)
SCREW(CBI*3*10*3GF)
SCREW(CBI*3*10*3GF)
SCREW(CBI*3*10*3GF)
SCREW(CBI*3*10*3GF)
SCREW(CBI*3*10*3GF)
SCREW(CBI*3*10*3GF)
SCREW(CBI*3*10*3GF)
SCR(D3.2-CIMS*2*2.2)
P-TITE(CB*3*25*15CF)
PUSH NUT(3.0)
PL-CPIMS*2.5*8*3KF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*8*3KF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*8*3KF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*8*3KF
CBIMS*2*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SL-CPIMS*2.5*12
SL-CPIMS*2.5*12
PL-CPIMS*3*30*3KF
PL-CPIMS*3*30*3KF
PS-CONVERTER SASSY
PS-CONVERTER SASSY
Label for the Chinese production

LT380+ only
13-3
LT380 series
82J33321
82L09121
82L09131
82L09251
82L09311
92203051
92203961
RELAY LENS 2 SASSY

INTEGRATOR SASSY
TAPE,SCOTCH NO.214
TAPE,SCOTCH SUPER10
*** PRINTED & PACKING MATERIALS ***

24MV0461
SPACER(LT380)
24L58652
LABEL(CARTON,LT380U)
24L58682
LABEL(CARTON,LT380U)C
7N080220
POWER CODE U2 L4.5 7.0A H
LWFC
7N8P6261
LT80 LW&FCC SHEET (USA)
REGIST
7N8P1351
REGISTRATIOM CARD(USA)
24L55232
LABEL(INSTA CARE)(VT75LP)
7N8P6541
GUARANTEE POLICY LCD(EU)
24L58661
LABEL(CARTON,LT380G)
24L58691
LABEL(CARTON,LT380G)C
7N080007
POWER CODE E2 L4.5 2.5A K
7N8P0025
PROJECTOR WARRANTY
7N8P6291
LT80 NETWORK GUIDE (J)
7N8P6271
LT80 QUICK GUIDE (J)
7N8P0963
VLC REGISTRATION
7N8P6281
LT80 HOSOKUSETSUMEISYO(J
24L58671
LABEL(CARTON,LT380J)
24L58701
LABEL(CARTON,LT380J)C
78047921
WARRANTY ENVELOPE(100*220
7N080115
POWER CORD J2 L4.5 7A K
7N970029
PC CARD(LAN)TMW1059-N1
7N90P212
WARRANTY CARD 2(CN)
7N8P6321
LT80+ NETWORK GUIDE (CH)
7N8P6311
LT80+ QUICK GUIDE (CH)
7N8P6301
LT80+ USER MANUAL(CH)
24MV0521
CARTON BOX(LT380+)TS
7N080505
POWER CODE C2 L4.5 2.5A K
7N90P213
QUESTIONNAIR(CH)
INFO
7N8P6241
LT80 IMPORTANT INFO(U/G)
NWGUI
7N8P6251
LT80 NETWORK GUIDE(U/G)
QUICK
7N8P6231
LT80 QUICK GUIDE (U/G)
24L50152
LABEL(SECURITY)GIS
UM
7N950771
LT80 U/M CD-ROM(U/G/J)
24MV0491
CARTON BOX(LT380)
7N8P6471
LT380 SUPPLEMENT P/C LOCK
24MV0481
ACCESSORY BOX(LT380)
24BS7562
CARRING CASE(LT380)
24M16171
PROTECTION BOX
BATT
6N800005
BATTERY LR6(JE)CPT
DSUB
7N520054
CABLE RGB 1.8M VER4 TE
24F41391
HOLDER(PC CARD)
24L49991
LABEL(SECURITY)UFJ
24807261
BAG,POLYETHYLENE(220*320)
7N950781
2005PJ CD-ROM
7N900721
RECEIVER UNIT T104
7N900691
REM-T HAND UNIT RD-424E
Product number
*** OPTION

LT380 oniy
LT380G oniy
LT380J oniy
LT380+ only
LT380 and LT380G only

Product name
***
01161088
01957616
01957617
01161013
01161042
01161051
01161050
VT75LP(replacement lamp)
VL-CA10MD
VL-CA02MD
VL-CA03V
CA03D
ADP-CV1
ADP-DT1
13-4
LT280 series
2. LT280 series (LT280, LT280G, LT280J, LT280+. LT375+)
SYMBOL
PART NO
DESCRIPTION
REMARK
*** PWB ASSYS ***

82L136A1
82L136C1
82L136D1
81L09N01
MAIN SASSY
REM PWB ASSY
TH2 PWB ASSYASSY
KEY_PWB PWB ASSY
*** ELECTRICAL PARTS & MISCELLANEOUS PARTS ***

3N100801
3N100821
3N100851
3N170073
DC FAN D06F-12SS7 01A(EX)
3N170089
3N170090
3N170092
3N670211
LCD L3P07X-55G10R
3N670212
LCD L3P07X-55G10G
3N670213
LCD L3P07X-55G10B
3N670221
LCD L3P07X-56G10R
3N670222
LCD L3P07X-56G10G
3N670223
LCD L3P07X-56G10B
N.S.P
6N160017
CORE E04RA120070060
SPK
6N300016
SPEAKER 40X40 8H 1.5W L50
N.S.P
7N500035
CABLE,FFC 24P*45 P0.5 AU
N.S.P
7N970027
E10K250-28X28H
7N970037
N.S.P
7N970046
E10K025-14X14H
N.S.P
7NW20030
CN 2P(CV)130S,1061-26
CNDC
N.S.P
7NW3W057
CN 3P(DC) 225W,1015-22
CNLC
N.S.P
7NW5W041
CN5P(LC)260W,1061-28
7NWEW010
CN 15P(PW)70W,1061-26
82L09691
DETECT SW SASSY
CLR-J
12JS8401
CLG-C
12JS8411
CLB-J
12JS8421
12JS8461
12JS8521
12JS8531
12JS8541
POL-R
12JS9561
POL-G
12JS9571
POL-B
12JS9581
12JS9781
WV
12JT1141
WV
12JT1151
N.S.P
24C01001
24DT9911
24DT9932
N.S.P
24DT9951
N.S.P
24DU0311
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
24F39951
24F40071
24F40162
24F40193
24F40271
24F40281
24F40321
24F41071
24F41091
24F41111
24F41121
24F41161
24F41571
24F41581
24F41591
24F41601
24F41611
24F41701
24F40292
24F41721
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
For 82L13121
For 82L13131
For 82L13121
For 82L13131
For 82L13121
For 82L13131
CONDENSER LENS R(PB52-TC)

MIRROR 1(PB52)
MIRROR 2(PB52)
POLARIZER R(PB64-A)
POLARIZER G(PB64-A)
POLARIZER B(PB64-A)
WVFILM-M(PB64)
Applied to the OPTBASE LRL SASSY
WVFILM-H(PB64)
Applied to the OPTBASE RLR SASSY
PWB HOLDER
LT280, LT280G and VT280J only
LT280+ only
LT375+ oniy
HOLDER(IT)
DUCT(LAMP FAN)
COVER B
SEPARATE BASE(PB52)
HOLDER(POL T0.5)
HOLDER(RL2)
HOLDER(M1)
FRONT PANEL(LT380)
LENS COVER(LT380)
HANDLE
COVER(HANDLE,L)
HOLDER(FILTER,LT380)
COVER(HANDLE,R)
FOOT(F)
HOLDER(FOOT,L)
HOLDER(FOOT,R)
LEVER(FOOT,L)
COVER A(LT380)
HOLDER(FL)
HOLDER POL(LT380)
13-5
LT280 series
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
24F41731
24F41741
24F42031
24F42051
24F42061
24F42071
24F42081
24F42091
24F42101
24FT9231
24FT9601
24FT9761
24H49521
24H51081
24H51091
24H55421
24H51111
24H51161
24H51241
24H51251
24H51261
24H51272
24H51282
24H51291
24H51301
24H51311
24H51322
24H54281
24H54291
24H54301
24H54311
24H54321
24H54331
24H54341
24H54671
24H54781
24H54961
24H54971
24H55181
24H55241
24H55321
24H55332
24H55351
24H55361
24H55371
24H55381
24H55411
24H56731
24HS4121
24J23901
24J24571
24J24582
24J24661
24J24831
24J27111
24J27121
24J27211
24J27291
24J27301
24J27311
24J27391
24J27551
24J27561
24J27571
24J27931
24J27991
24J28141
24J28551
24J28701
24J28711
24J28721
24J28731
24J28741
24J28751
24J28771
24J28781
24J28861
24JS1641
HOLDER WV(LT380)
PLATE(WV FIX)
LEVER(FOOT,R)
HOLDER ANL(T1.5 R)
HOLDER ANL(T1.5 L)
HOLDER ANL(T0.5 R)
HOLDER ANL(T0.5 L)
DUCT LCDFAN(LT380)
COVER XDP(LT380)
PC CARD(DUMMY)
HOLDER(FILTER,LT380) ASSY
LAMP COVER(LT380)ASSY
SHIELD CASE(POWER)B
PLATE(DUCT)
BRACKET PBS (PB63)
BARRIER(IT)
LEAF SPRING(M1)
SHIELD PLATE(MAIN-PWB)
SHIELD CASE(POWER,T)
SHIELD PLATE(LAMP)
BRACKET(KEY-PWB)
BRACKET(I/O,LT380)
BRACKET(SW)
SPRING(FOOT F)
BRACKET LCD(LT280)
BRACKET(TH-PWB)
EARTH BRACKET(PS-TH)
EARTH BRACKET(LCD)
EARTH PLATE(IO)
EARTH BRACKET(FAN)
EARTH BRACKET(FAN-TH)
BRACKET(LAMP)
GUIDE BRACKET(IR)
BRACKET(SPEAKER)
SHIELD PLATE(LAMP)ASSY
STRAP W
CUSHION(COVER A)
CUSHION (FAN DUCT)
CUSHION (FAN ROLL)
BARRIER(BALLAST)
BARRIER(POWER)
BARRIER(FILTER-PWB)
CUSHION(FOOT F)
CUSHION(FOOT R)
CUSHION(LAMP FAN)
FILTER(SIDE)
BARRIER(PC CARD)
GASKET(W7*H7*L61)
CUSHION FAN DUCT(LT380)
CUSHION(10*65*4)
GASKET(W5*H5.5*L10)
CUSHION(LED)
BARRIER(SHIELD,DVI)
CUSHION(SPEAKER,B)
CUSHION(30*20*T1)
CUSHION(25*5*T1)
CUSHION(22*10*T8)
CUSHION(25*18*T3)
CUSHION(40*10*T1)
CUSHION(20*5*T1)
TAPE(35*28)
TAPE(50*12)
BARRIER(FILTER-PWB)ASSY
Parts for adjustment of

optical system.
13-6
LT280 series
N.S.P
SRW101
SRW105
SRW023
SRW117
SRW001
SRW002
SRW003
SRW004
SRW005
SRW006
SRW007
SRW010
SRW015
SRW018
SRW019
SRW103
SRW103
SRW113
SRW114
SRW115
SRW008
SRW116
SRW026
SRW021
SRW022
SRW024
SRW028
SRW109
SRW110
SRW111
SRW112
SRW009
SRW011
SRW012
SRW013
SRW014
SRW016
SRW017
SRW029
SRW030
SRW031
SRW118
SRW102
SRW102
SRW025
SRW027
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
24K26062
24L46401
24L55991
24L57641
24L58582
24L58602
24L58621
24L59221
24L59551
24L59241
24L59961
24L59271
24L59281
24L59561
24N05321
24N05321
24N05831
24N07421
24N07421
24N07421
24N07421
24N07421
24N07421
24N07421
24N07421
24N07421
24N07421
24N07421
24N07421
24N07421
24N07961
24N07961
24N08021
24N08031
24V00011
24V00011
24V00011
24V00011
24V00111
24V00191
24V00281
24V00281
24V00281
24V00281
24V00281
24V00281
24V00281
24V00281
24V00281
24V00281
24V00281
24V00281
24V00281
24V00281
24V00281
24V00281
24V00281
24V00281
24V00281
24V00371
24V00371
24V00401
24V00401
82L13221
82L13231
82J33321
82L13121
82L13131
82L09251
82J21311
92203051
92203961
DECOR PLATE(I/O,LT280)
LABEL(WEEE)(HR)
NAME PLATE(LT280)
NAME PLATE(LT280)TS
LABEL(LENS4)
CAUTION LABEL(HEAT)
CAUTION LABEL(FILTER,+)
CAUTION LABEL(LENS4,+)
CAUTION LABEL(HEAT,+)
CBIPS*2*6*3KF
CBIPS*2*6*3KF
STUD(D-SUB)
SCREW(CBI*3*10*3GF)
SCREW(CBI*3*10*3GF)
SCREW(CBI*3*10*3GF)
SCREW(CBI*3*10*3GF)
SCREW(CBI*3*10*3GF)
SCREW(CBI*3*10*3GF)
SCREW(CBI*3*10*3GF)
SCREW(CBI*3*10*3GF)
SCREW(CBI*3*10*3GF)
SCREW(CBI*3*10*3GF)
SCREW(CBI*3*10*3GF)
SCREW(CBI*3*10*3GF)
SCREW(CBI*3*10*3GF)
P-TITE(CB*3*25*15CF)
PUSH NUT(3.0)
PL-CPIMS*2.5*8*3KF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*8*3KF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*8*3KF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*8*3KF
CBIMS*2*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SL-CPIMS*2.5*12
SL-CPIMS*2.5*12
PL-CPIMS*3*30*3KF
PL-CPIMS*3*30*3KF
PS-CONVERTER SASSY
PS-CONVERTER SASSY
RELAY LENS 2 SASSY
INTEGRATOR SASSY
TAPE,SCOTCH NO.214
TAPE,SCOTCH SUPER10

LT280+ only
LT375+ only
LT280+ and LT375+ only
OR
OR
13-7
LT280 series
*** PRINTED & PACKING MATERIALS ***
24MV0461
SPACER(LT380)
24L58712
LABEL(CARTON,LT280U)
24L58742
LABEL(CARTON,LT280U)C
7N080220
POWER CODE U2 L4.5 7.0A H
LWFC
7N8P6261
LT80 LW&FCC SHEET (USA)
REGIST
7N8P1351
REGISTRATIOM CARD(USA)
24L55232
LABEL(INSTA CARE)(VT75LP)
7N8P6541
GUARANTEE POLICY LCD(EU)
24L58721
LABEL(CARTON,LT280G)
24L58751
LABEL(CARTON,LT280G)C
7N080007
POWER CODE E2 L4.5 2.5A K
7N8P0025
PROJECTOR WARRANTY
7N8P6291
LT80 NETWORK GUIDE (J)
7N8P6271
LT80 QUICK GUIDE (J)
7N8P0963
VLC REGISTRATION
7N8P6281
LT80 HOSOKUSETSUMEISYO(J
24L58731
LABEL(CARTON,LT280J)
24L58761
LABEL(CARTON,LT280J)C
78047921
WARRANTY ENVELOPE(100*220
7N080115
POWER CORD J2 L4.5 7A K
7N970029
PC CARD(LAN)TMW1059-N1
7N90P212
WARRANTY CARD 2(CN)
7N8P6321
LT80+ NETWORK GUIDE (CH)
7N8P6311
LT80+ QUICK GUIDE (CH)
7N8P6301
LT80+ USER MANUAL(CH)
24MV0531
24MV1161
7N080505
POWER CODE C2 L4.5 2.5A K
7N90P213
QUESTIONNAIR(CH)
INFO
7N8P6241
LT80 IMPORTANT INFO(U/G)
NWGUI
7N8P6251
LT80 NETWORK GUIDE(U/G)
QUICK
7N8P6231
LT80 QUICK GUIDE (U/G)
24L50152
LABEL(SECURITY)GIS
UM
7N950771
LT80 U/M CD-ROM(U/G/J)
24MV0491
CARTON BOX(LT380)
7N8P6471
LT380 SUPPLEMENT P/C LOCK
24MV0481
ACCESSORY BOX(LT380)
24BS7562
CARRING CASE(LT380)
24M16171
PROTECTION BOX
BATT
6N800005
BATTERY LR6(JE)CPT
DSUB
7N520054
CABLE RGB 1.8M VER4 TE
24F41391
HOLDER(PC CARD)
24L49991
LABEL(SECURITY)UFJ
24807261
BAG,POLYETHYLENE(220*320)
7N950781
2005PJ CD-ROM
7N900721
RECEIVER UNIT T104
7N900691
REM-T HAND UNIT RD-424E
Product number
*** OPTION

LT280 only
LT280G oniy
LT280J only
LT280+ and LT375+ only

LT280+ only
LT375+ only
LT280 and LT280G only

Product name
***
01161088
01957616
01957617
01161013
01161042
01161051
01161050
VT75LP(replacement lamp)
VL-CA10MD
VL-CA02MD
VL-CA03V
CA03D
ADP-CV1
ADP-DT1
13-8
CONNECTION DIAGRAMS
LT380 Series Connection Diagram

(LT280/LT380)
KEY PWB
(PWC-4637)
POCT
1, 2 +3.3V
3 NC
6 KEYIN[0]
7 KEYIN[1]
9 KEYIN[3]
10 KEYOUT[0]
12 KEYOUT[2] 13 KEYOUT[3]
17 LEDOUT[0] 18 LEDOUT[1]
PANEL
FAN
BALLAST
UNIT
BALLAST
FAN
POF1
1 +6.0V
2 GND
3 +1.5V
POLC
1 L AMP_DET
2 GND
3 +3.3V
4 +1.6V
5 +3.3V
POF4
1 +6.3V
2 GND
3 FAN_DET
4 NC
4,5 GND
8 KEYIN[2]
11 KEYOUT[1]
14 ~ 16 GND
19 LEDOUT[2]
22 LEDOUT[5]
(PWC-4636A)
POTH2
1 +1.5V
2 GND
LCD PANEL
1 NC
4 CLYB
7 NC
10 ENB2
13 DIRX
16 +15.5V
19 VID1
22 VID4
25 NC
28 GND
MAIN_PWB
THERMISTOR2 PWB
(PWC-4636E)
POPR/POPG/POPB
2 DY
3 CLY
5 +15.5V
6 LCCOM
8 NRG
9 ENB1
11 ENB3
12 ENB4
14 CLX
15 CLXB
17 DX
18 GND
20 VID2
21 VID3
23 VID5
24 VID6
26 LCCOM
27 DIRY
29 DY
30 MON
SPEAKER
POSP
1 +
2
I/O PWB
(PWC-46236B)
PS-UNIT
POPW
1 ~ 3 +4.2V
4 ~ 6 GND
7 +7.2V(5.9 ~ 7.5V) 8 GND
9, 10 +15.7V
11, 12 GND
13 +17.7V
14 GND
15 +6.0V
POI
1 GND
2 GND
3 RXC
4 GND
5 TXD
6 BEEP
7 SCL_5V
8 GND
9 SDA_5V
10 +3.3V
11 PnP_WPCTL
12 GND
13 JACK_EN
14 RGB_SEL2
15 AUDIO_MUTE
16 GND
17 RGB_SEL1
18 +9.0V
19 S-C_IN
20 GND
21 S-Y_IN
22 S_DET
23 CV_IN
24 GND
25 SCART_IN
26 +7.2V(5.9 ~ 7.5V) 27 V_IN
28 +7.2V(5.9 ~ 7.5V) 29 H_IN
30 GND
31 R_IN
32 GND
33 G_IN
34 MONITOR_OUT 35 B_IN
36 GND
PORM
2 FAN_GND
5 +3.3V
1 +7.2V
4 REM_GND
POCV
1 +5.0V
2 +5.0V
POF3
1 +7.9V
2 GND
3 +1.6V
POBM
1 +3.0V
2 +3.0V
COVER-SW
LAMP FAN
EXHAUST FAN
14-1
REM PWB
3 1.6V
6 +3.3V
(PWC-4636C)
POF2
1 +7.2V
2 GND
3 +1.6V
LAMP FAN
BLOCK DIAGRAMS
I/O PWB
COMPUTER IN3
MONITO OUT
NJM2581M
MONITOR
OUTPUT
COMPUTER IN2
V SYNC
EL4342IL
RGB SEL
RGB / COMPONENT
Y,Cb,Cr
/CV
/Y,C
/SCART-RGB
SCART (Sync)
VIDEO IN
CV
NJM22
35V
3-1SW
Ys
42M
LAMP
HOUSE
6.2V
4.2V
200W LAMP
To Assist3
VID
25M
H SYNC
BALLAST
15.0V
CLK,
HD,VD
DE
Sil1169
HDCP
RX
P&P
S-VIDEO IN
PS UNIT
RGB 24Bit
COMPUTER IN1
COMPONENT IN
17.5V
P&P
RGB/ COMPONENT
H SYNC
V SYNC
SN74CBT3125
SYNC
SELECTOR
370V
Only LT380
CXA7005Rx3 VCOM
SIGNAL
DRIVER
LALUZ2
RGB/YUV
48bit
UNI7
SCALING
ASIC
ADSY8401
JCPZx2
ISL98001-140
A/D
CONVERTER
TC90288
BXBG
VIDEO
DECODER
I/P
TIMING
PULSE
LEVEL SHIFT
75 M
110M
CLK,
HD,VD
HS
VS
ICS414G
CLOCK
GEN
BUF
x2
M62334FP
+
REG
To Assist3
Sirocco
Sirocco
FAN CTL
Sirocco
BUF
16244x2
16245x2
12M
16244
LCD 0.7"
0.8"XGA
FAN
RGB 24Bit
COVER DET
CLK,
HD,VD
CPU BUS
FLASH
ROM
FLASH
ROM
32Mbit
16Mbit
MXA2500EL
S3C2440AL40
G-SENSOR
CPU
400MHz
BR24L32
EEPROM
THERMISTOR1
SDRAM
256Mbit
BEEP LPF
VIDEO AUDIO IN
COMPUTER AUDIO IN
THERMISTOR2
HS,VS
HD,VD
Assist3
REM PWB
I2S (Cpu)
NJW1142AV
AUDIO
CONTROL
REM(FRONT)
REM PWB
Key
PCI BUS
AUDIO OUT
ADM3202
DRIVER
RTL
8100C
PC CONTROL
TPA4861
AUDIO
AMP
1W Speaker
To Assist3
TxD/RxD
To Assist3
R5C
485
PC CARD
LAMP MODE
STATUS
POWER
IR SENSOR-R
USB HOST
REM(REAR)
IR SENSOR-R
RJ45
PC CARD SLOT
15-1
LT380/280 BLOCK DIAGRAM
"Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC."
01150268 (LT380)
01150269 (LT380G)
01150270 (LT380+)
01151083 (LT380J)
01150264 (LT280)
01150265 (LT280G)
01150266 (LT280+)
01151082 (LT280J)

Nec lt280 380 SM

Enviado por

Dados do documento

Título original

Direitos autorais

Formatos disponíveis

Compartilhar este documento

Compartilhar ou incorporar documento

Opções de compartilhamento

Você considera este documento útil?

Este conteúdo é inapropriado?

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

Nec lt280 380 SM

Enviado por

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

MODEL LT380/LT280

13. Replacement part list

14. Connection diagrams

15. Block diagrams

16. Schematic diagrams

(1) Copyright (C) 2006, NEC Viewtechnology, Ltd.

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE

AFIN DE REDUIRE LES RISQUES D' ELECTROCUTION, NE PAS

During servicing carefully observe the following.

2. BE CAREFUL OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

8. RUN A COMPLETE SAFETY CHECK AT THE

3. USE SPECIFIED PARTS

4. REMOUNT ALL PARTS AND RECONNECT ALL

NEC Viewtechnology, Ltd. 2005

IBM is a trademark or registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.

DOC Compliance Notice (for Canada only)

Acoustic Noise Information Ordinance-3. GSGV (for Germany only):

This label is on the side of the remote control.

This mark is on the top of the remote control.

WARNING TO CALIFORNIA RESIDENTS:

Place the projector in a horizontal position

Handle the remote control carefully.

If the remote control gets wet, wipe it dry immediately.

Avoid excessive heat and humidity.

Do not heat, take apart, or throw batteries into fire.

Dispose of used batteries according to your local regulations.

To replace the lamp, follow all instructions provided on page 104.

2. Installation and Connections .................................................................. 10

3. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation) ............................................. 24

4. Convenient Features .................................................................................... 34

5. Using the Viewer ............................................................................................ 56

6. Using On-Screen Menu ............................................................................... 62

7. Maintenance ................................................................................................... 102

8. Appendix ............................................................................................................ 107

Remote mouse receiver

VGA signal cable

For North America only

PC card lock (24F41391)

For Europe only

Introduction to the Projector

Congratulations on Your Purchase of the Projector

Features youll enjoy :

Quick start & quick cool down

USB memory or PC card interfaces provide for computer-free presentations.

High resolution display - up to UXGA compatible, XGA native resolution.

Extensive user adjustable picture and color management settings.

HDTV (1080i, 720p) and SDTV (480p/576p, 480i/576i) compatibility.

Integrated RJ-45 connector for wired networking capability.

Wireless networking capable.

Easy set up, use and operation.

Free downloadable Software Geometric Correction Tool 3.0.

About this user's manual

Part Names of the Projector

Built-in Security Slot (

Adjustable Tilt Foot Lever

Adjustable Tilt Foot

Carrying the Projector

Monaural Speaker (1W)

Threaded screw hole for

Main Power Switch

Adjustable Tilt Foot Lever

Adjustable Tilt Foot

Adjustable Tilt Foot Lever